201084175844580

High-speed flexible mounter
KE-2020
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Thank you very much for purchasing a product of our company.
In order to ensure safe use of the KE-2020, be sure to read this Manual
before using the machine.
CAUTION
After reading this Manual, keep it at a fixed location so that it will be
available at any time.
Rev. 05
E0120K201AA
Important
(1) This manual or software may not be copied or reproduced (duplicated), in whole or part,
without the express prior written consent of JUKI Corp.
(2) This manual is subject to change without notice.
(3) This manual is written as carefully as possible. However, if you have a question,
or find a mistake or missing information, contact our dealers or JUKI Corp.
(4) JUKI Corp. is not responsible for any defects or malfunction due to your abnormal
operation.
E0120K201AA
Revision Date
00 2000. 08
01 2000. 11
02 2001. 03
03 2001. 04
04 2001. 06
05 2001. 08
Specifications are subject to be changed without notice.

Warning For the safe operation of machinery!!
All personnel engaged in the operation of the chip placer and its accessories (here after
referred to as "machines") including the operators, service and maintenance personnel are
required to read through this safety warning to make familiar with its handling to prevent
accidents and injuries.
This "Warning: For the safe operation of machinery" instructions contain aspects that are
not included in the instruction sheet attached to the product.
The following symbols are used throughout this instructions and on the product for the better
understanding of various warning labels. Please make yourself familiar with the contents
and act accordingly.
1) Danger levels
Parts of machinery the negligence or mishandling of which

committed during the operation, maintenance or other services on
such parts will lead to severe accidents involving serious personal
Dangerous injuries or even death.

committed, or are left unattended, during the operation,
maintenance or other services on such parts may cause potential
danger to the personnel which may lead to injuries and/or even
Warning death.

committed, or are left unattended, during the operation,
maintenance or other services on such parts may cause the
Attention medium-to-light level of hazards to the personnel involved.
2) Warning, prohibition and directive marks

Warning, prohibition and directives are marked with the following symbols:
Warning marks
Your hands or clothes may get Beware of moving parts.
caught by the machines. Contacts with them may cause
injuries.
High voltage!! Beware of hot parts.

Beware of electric shocks. Contacts with them may cause a
burn.
Beware of movable parts. If any load is imposed or you

Contacts with them may cause lay your hand on the machine,
injuries. it may be damaged.
Directive symbols
It symbolizes a contact to a It indicates the direction of turn.
grounding wire.
I
Matters of Caution Regarding Safety
DANGER
To prevent accidents due to electric shock, turn off power supply if it is necessary to
open the electrical equipment box. For added precaution, open the lid of the box only
after a lapse of more than five minutes.
CAUTION
Basic Matters of Precaution

1. Be sure to read all documents included in this Manual and the attached booklet
before using this machine. Also, keep this Manual carefully so as to be able to
read it whenever necessary.
2. Contents of this Manual include items that are not included in specifications of the
machine purchased.
3. The machine should be operated only by the operator who has learned how to run
it.
4. Regarding the repair or maintenance (excluding daily inspection and other matters
specified in the Manual), ask our company or its agent to do it.
5. General maintenance, inspection, and repair (matters specified in this Manual) shall
be conducted only by specialized maintenance engineers who have finished the
maintenance course specified by our company.
With regard to repair (matters specified in this Manual), use genuine parts of our
company.
Safety Equipment, Alarm Label

1. In order to prevent accidents due to nonpresence of safety equipment, start to
operate this machine only after confirming that the equipment is suitably installed at
the specified position.
2. If the safety equipment is dismantled, be sure to attach it to its original position, and
confirm that it operates normally.
3. Make sure that the warning label stuck to the machine will be always clearly visible.
If it has been peeled off or stained, order new labels from our company and
exchange old labels with new ones.
4. If the safety equipment is damaged, remove it. Never operate the machine. If
you operate the machine without the safety equipment, it may lead to severe
accidents involving serious personal injuries or even death.
Application
1. Never use this machine for purposes other than its original application.
Our company will not be responsible in the case of its use for other application.
2. Do not remodel this machine. Our company will not be responsible for any
accident arising as a result of its remodeling.
Operational Training
1. To prevent accidents due to unaccustomed handling, operation of this machine
must be limited to operators who have participated in the operation training
specified by our company and have appropriate knowledge and operating skills.
II
CAUTION
To turn off power supply means to turn off

a power supply switch and then to draw out
a power plug from a receptacle or to
separate the power cable from the supply
side.
Hereinafter the same.
Situations in Which It Is Necessary to Turn Off Power Supply

1. In the case of an abnormality or an accident, or in the event of power failure,
immediately turn off power supply.
2. In order to prevent accidents due to unintended start-up of the machine, carry out
inspection, repair, or cleaning of the machine only after turning off power supply.
3. When drawing out the power supply plug, do it by holding the plug itself, not the
cord.
Matters of Caution at Each of Its Use Stages
Transport
1. When lifting the machine or moving it, take sufficient safety measures so that no
dropping accidents will occur.
Unpacking
1. Read all instructions shown on the transport-use container.
2. Never cut tapes with a cutter.
3. Retain delivery-use materials.
Installation
1. To prevent the occurrence of any accident due to unintended moving of the
machine in operation, make casters float using a height adjuster.
2. Install this machine at a flat position.
3. To prevent the occurrence of electric shock, power leakage, or fires, use attached
products regarding cables, and link them to the specified positions.
4. To prevent electric shock, power leakage, or fires, make sure that irrational force
will be applied to the cables while the machine is in operation.
5. Securely fix the power supply plug and the connector of an I/F cable. When
drawing out the power supply plug or the I/F cable, do it by holding the connector
unit.
Before Operation
1. To prevent accidents to human bodies, make sure before supplying power that
there is no damage, coming off of parts, or loosening of connectors and cables.
2. To prevent bodily accidents, never put in your hand into the driving unit.
III
CAUTION
Greasing
1. Regarding greasing, use Albania Grease.
2. To prevent the occurrence of an inflammation or rash, immediately wash the
related portions if grease adheres to your eyes or other parts of your body.
3. If grease is mistakenly swallowed, immediately consult a physician to prevent
diarrhea or vomiting.
Maintenance
1. To prevent accidents due to unaccustomedness, repair and adjustment shall be
conducted by maintenance engineers who are versed in the machine. In
replacing parts, use genuine parts of our company. We will not assume any
responsibility for an accident due to the use of non-genuine parts.
2. To prevent accidents or electric shock due to unaccustomedness, entrust
electrical repair or maintenance work (including wiring work) to persons versed in
electricity, or ask engineers of our company or its sales company to do it.
3. To prevent accidents due to unintended start-up of the machine, conduct repair or
adjustment only after removing air supply pipes and discharging residual air.
4. To prevent bodily accidents, confirm after such work as repair, adjustment, or
parts replacement that no screws or nuts are loosened.
Use Environment
1. Use the machine in the environment free from effects of noise sources (magnetic
waves), such as high-frequency welders, in order to prevent accidents due to
erroneous actions.
2. In order to prevent accidents due to erroneous actions, use the machine in the
environment where source voltage surpasses 200V (220V, 240V) 10%.
3. In order to prevent accidents due to erroneous actions, do not use the machine in
the environment where the supplied air pressure is 0.5 to 1.0MPa.
4. To ensure safety, use the machine under the following environment:
Ambient temperature during operation + 10C - +35C

Relative humidity during operation 50% or less (35C)
90% or less (20C)
5. To prevent accidents due to breakdown of electric/electronic parts, turn on power

supply sufficiently after the fear of dew condensation is eliminated, because such
condensation may occur when the machine is rapidly moved from a cold place to a
warm location.
6. To prevent accidents due to breakdown of electric/electronic parts, stop the use of
the machine during lightning, and draw out the power supply plug.
IV
Where to stick warning labels
[Front] Moving parts

warning label
"Take care not to be

caught in the machine"
warning label
Moving parts
warning label
High voltage
warning labels
[Rear]
High voltage
"Take care not to be warning labels
caught in the machine"
warning label
Moving parts
warning label
Moving parts
High voltage warning label
warning labels
V
Matters of Caution for Safe Use of
KE-2010M/KE-2010L/KE-2010E
1. To prevent accidents due to electric shock, do not open the

electrical equipment box while power supply is on.
2. To prevent electric shock, do not operate the machine, with the
DANGER grounding line unlinked.
1. To prevent damage to human bodies, do not operate the

machine, with the safety cover or equipment removed.
2. To prevent damage to human bodies, make sure that hair,
clothes, etc., will not be caught by the conveyor chain. Also,
keep off gloves.
CAUTION 3. To prevent damage to human bodies, turn off power supply
during maintenance (greasing, adjustment, and daily
inspection).
4. To prevent damage to human bodies, use an earth leakage
breaker for the power line.
1. Windows NT (including the Ethernet communication function) is
adopted as the Operating System of this machine.
If you install on this machine any software not designed for this
machine, we cannot guarantee that the machine functions
CAUTION properly. if you move, rename or copy a file stored in the
hard disk drive, we cannot guarantee that either.
Should the machine not properly due to any operation above,
replace your hard disk drive with new one and your data may
be lost.
1. A UPS is incorporated into this machine to protect a production
program and any other data at power failure.
To prevent a battery built into the UPS from degrading, do not
CAUTION leave this machine without turning it on for six months or longer.
Only when the main circuit breaker and main switch are set
to ON, this machine is assumed to be turned on.
VI
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL
1.1 Highlights and Specifications

This machine is an SMD chip shooter designed as one of the KE-2000 series products
which are successors of the KE-700 series chip placers, and features high-speed chip
placement.
A host line computer (HLC) controls a line consisting the KE-2000 series chip
placer/shooter, KE-700 series chip placer, JUKI dispenser and solder-paste printer as
well as a line consisting of KE-2000 series chip placers/shooters only. This feature
allows you to configure a line which realizes high productivity and is appropriate for
every applications.
For software, WindowsNT is adopted as the Operating System (OS) to increase the
operability of this machine.
1.1.1 Highlights
Equipped with the newly developed laser alignment sensors (MNLA) each of which
allows four nozzles to recognize components simultaneously. These four nozzles
simultaneously pick up and mount components whose size is up to 10 mm x 10
mm after centering them without touching: this allows high-speed mounting of
components, 11,000 cph (this is rough estimate calculated on the assumption that
four components are simultaneously picked up, then one component is
alternatively placed on the almost entire area of a 330 mm x 250 mm board).
Equipped with the new component recognition system composed of the various
lighting functions: reflective/penetrative lights switching function, three-dimension
movable light, illuminance control, waveform (color) switching function, and coaxial
light. This system improves the recognition capability of components such as a
QFP, BGA, CSP and irregular-shaped components such as a connector.
Provided with three camera options as well as the standard component recognition
camera (which shoots up to a 50 mm x 50 mm component): it allows you to
select a camera appropriate to each component.
An offset correction camera, a height measurement device (option), and a feeder
preparation function (option) can be installed to minimize the time required for the
machine halt for preparation, realizing high operating ratio.
An offset camera correction uses its pattern matching function to recognize a
fiducial mark at high speed. Together with high-speed board transfer, it provides
you with an overall high-speed placement capability.
Pick and placement reliability is remarkably improved through chip rise detection
performed during laser/align measurement.
The board support section (for backing up a board) is driven by a motor to prevent
any vibration from occurring when a clamped board is released, then prevent a
placed component from being shifted from the regulated position, shortening the
time required to clamp or release a board.
Using the offset correction camera and the height measurement device,
preparation is possible without opening the cover, provided as good safety
features.
Newly attached LED indicators (optional) (Feeder Position Indicator: FPI) on the
feeder setting section notify an operator that components run out, and generates
the warning on the number of the remaining components to increase the
operability for replacing components.
WindowsNT increases the operability of the machine greatly.
11
1.1.2 Centering system
Instead of using conventional mechanical centering system, this machine uses
touchless centering system where laser align sensor is used to read the position and
angle of components. This can be achieved by detecting the shade of the
components created by the laser rays applied horizontally to the components.
Laser align sensor
Figure 1.1.2.1
By moving Z-axis up and down, a component is picked with vacuum, and the laser is
applied to the component. A shade is made where the laser is obstructed by the
component. By turning the component along q-axis, the shade changes.
According to the change of the shade, offsets of the position and angle of the picked
component are calculated. These offsets are corrected when mounting.
The laser align sensor conforms to IEC825 Class 1 and CDRH Class 1 regulations.
The laser align sensor can be used safely as far as it is used by following the
instructions described in this manual.
Any operation of controls and adjustments which is not described in

CAUTION this manual can cause an excessive exposure of laser lays which
may be dangerous to human bodies.
12
;;;
(1) Flow of laser align centering
Part attracting
;;;

A
Pick the component by driving
Z-axis, and adjust the
component at laser align height.
Preload
(-) Rotation
(preload)
Rotate in (-) direction along
-axis. (Preload)
Rotate in (+) direction along

-axis, and start measurement
with laser align.
(+) Rotation
(Nozzle
dY
C
center)
While measuring the shade, find two
positions and where the shade
Laser align measurement
(Compo- is minimum.
nent Because the nozzle center is a known
center) factor, according to the difference
;
between the nozzle center and the
component center, offset in Y direction
(dX) and that in X direction (dY) can
also be known. By referring to the
encoder output of the motor at or
dX
D
, offset angle d can also be known.

(+) Rotation
Correction
Placement is performed by
correcting position offset (dX,
Correction
dY) and angle offset (d).
Placement
Figure 1.1.2.2
13
(2) Laser align measurement position for major component types
Square chip
Laser align
measurement
position
(Center between the top and
bottom surfaces of the
component)
MELF Laser align

measurement
position
(Center of the component)
Mold
SOT Laser align
measurement
0.25
position
(0.25 mm above the top of the component)
SOP/TSOP
Laser align
measurement
position
(Center between the bottom surface

of the component and the foot of the
leads)
SOJ Laser align

measurement
position
(Center between the bottom surface

of the component and the foot of the
leads)
Figure 1.1.2.3
14
OFP/BQFP Laser align
measurement
position
(Between the bottom surface of the

mold and the foot of the leads)
Laser align
PLCC measurement
position
(Between the bottom surface of the

mold and the foot of the leads)
Electrolytic
capacitor
Mold
0.45
Laser align
measurement
position
(0.45 mm from the bottom surface of
the mold)
Figure 1.1.2.4
15
(3) Laser height
Laser measurement height (in laser centering method)

The figure below indicates the measurement position when the laser centering
method is selected. The distance between the nozzle tip to the measurement
position which is radiated with a laser beam is called laser height. The laser height
is specified in the component data.
Nozzle
Nozzle Component
Laser height
Laser beam
Figure 1.1.2.5 Definition of Laser Height
Default Laser height

Default laser heights are set for some component types and heights. Table 1.1.2.5
shows the relation between component heights and default laser heights.
Table 1.1.2.5 Component Types and Default Laser Heights

Component type Measurement position Laser height (mm)
Component height t
Square chip Measurement -
position with laser 2
Component height t
MELF Measurement -
position with laser 2
Aluminum Component height

- (t )
electrolytic
= 0.45
capacitor Measurement
position with laser
Component height
GaAsFET -0.5
Measurement
position with laser
(To be continued)
16
Molding
Component height
-
SOT
Measurement = 0.25
position with laser
Molding
Component height
SOP
-0.7t
HSOP Measurement
position with laser
Molding
Component height
SOJ -0.65t
Measurement
position with laser
Molding Component height
QFP -0.7t
Measurement
position with laser
Molding
Component height
QFJ (PLCC) -0.65t
Measurement position
with laser
Molding
Component height
PQFP (BQFP) -0.45t
Measurement
position with laser
Molding
Component height
TSOP Measurement position -0.7t
with laser
Molding
Component height
TSOP 2 -0.7t
with laser
(To be continued)
17
Component height
BGA
Measurement -0.86t
FBGA
position with
laser
Component height
Same as that of the

Network resistor Measurement position
square chip
with laser
Molding
Component height
Trimmer - (t 0.7)
with laser
Unidirectional Component height

lead connector
2-way lead Measurement position -1.0
connector Z-lead with laser
connector
Component height
Measurement
J-lead socket 0
position with
laser
Component height
Measurement
Gull-wing socket 0
position with
laser
Component height
Socket with Measurement

0
bumper position with
laser
Molding
Component height
Other t
-0.5t -0.5t
components Measurement
position with laser
18
1.1.3 System configuration
KE-2020M /KE-2020L/KE-2020E Optional
Power unit Emergency stop button
CPU board Color liquid-crystal display (LCD)
Keyboard
I/O control CPU UPS
Track ball
Motor control unit
FDD
Cabinet Signal tower
HDD
X-Y positioning unit Signal tower with the buzzer
100 Base/10 Base Ethernet board T
Placing head Rear side operation unit *1

Laser recognition head (MNLA)
Area sensor
Offset correction camera (L)
Bad mark reader *1
Height Measurement System (HMS) *1 Laser/Vision recognition heads (FMLA)
Offset correction camera (R)

SOT Direction Check Function *1
Coplanarity Function *1
Function designed for a component whose height is 20 mm *1
PWB conveyor unit Placement station L Pin reference
Outline reference
Automatic tool changer (ATC) Automatic PWB transportation width adjustment device
Feeder bank driver *1

Batch feeder change function Spare feeder change truck
Feeder float detecting function Feeder table
Pneumatic piping system
Vision Centering System (VCS) Vision monitor
Verification function *1 Component recognition camera Standard camera
Feeder position indicator function *1 Optional camera 1 *1
Automatic tape cutter Optional camera 2 *1
IC collection belt Optional camera 3 *1
Bulk feeder
Tape feeder
Stick feeder Stack stick feeder
Tray holder
DTS
MTC
MTS
Non-stop operation function *1
Host Line Computer (HLC)
External Programming Unit (EPU)
Note: Options marked with an asterisk "*" are to be installed onto the main
unit at the factory.
19
Description of abbreviations
ATC : Automatic Tool Changer
OCC : Offset Correction Camera
EPU : External Programming Unit
HLC : Host Line Computer
HOD : Handheld Operating Device
MTC : Matrix Tray Changer
PWB : Printed Wiring Board
VCS : Visual Centering System
HMS : Height Measurement System
CVS : Component Verification System
FPI : Feeder Position Indicator
MNLA : Multi Nozzle laser Align
DTS : Double Tray Server
MTS : Matrix Tray Server
MTC : Matrix Tray Changer
BMR : Bad Mark Reader
FMLA : Focused Moduler Laser Align
1 10
1.1.4 Mechanical specifications
(1) Placement accuracy

The following table lists the placement accuracy data for different types of
components. A poorer accuracy results depending on the components that may
have an edge or plastic mold burrs at the area detected with the laser align function,
and that may have a moving part to be detected with respect to the pick port.
Table 1.1.4.1
Unit: mm
Component type KE-2020
MNLA heads FMLA heads
(Laser recognition correction) (VCS recognition correction)
Component size 20 or less Component size 50 or less
Square chip 0.08
MELF 0.1
SOT 0.15
Aluminum 0.3 0.15
electrolytic capacitor
SOP 0.15 in the right angle direction against BOC mark: 0.08 in the right angle
the lead (Burr on one side: 0.15 or less) direction against the lead
0.2 in the direction parallel to the lead 0.12 in the direction parallel to the lead
PLCC, SOJ 0.2 Component positioning mark: 0.08
BOC mark: 0.1
QFP, TSOP 0.12 Component positioning mark: 0.04
(Pitch: 0.8 or more) BOC mark: 0.06
QFP, TSOP 0.09 Component positioning mark: 0.04
(Pitch: 0.65 or BOC mark: 0.06
more)
QFP, TSOP 0.04,
(Pitch: 0.5 or more) Only a component positioning mark is
available.
Unidirectional lead 0.04 in the right angle direction against
(Pitch: 0.5 or more) the lead
0.12 in the direction parallel to the lead
Only a component positioning mark is
available.
Components whose Component positioning mark:
image is divided, 0.06 in the right angle direction
then recognized. against the lead
0.12 in the direction parallel to the
lead
BOC mark:
0.1 in the right angle direction against
the lead
0.12 in the direction parallel to the
lead
BGA 0.2 Component positioning mark: 0.08
BOC mark: 0.12
FBGA 0.06,
Only a component positioning mark is
available.
Other large-size 0.3
components
(2) Placement cycle time

The optimized placement cycle time is shown below. The cycle time required
when a component is placed on a board actually varies depending on the board
size or how many times a nozzle is replaced.
1 11
(1) When Five nozzles pick up and place components simultaneously and center
them with laser
Small chip component
11,000 components/hour 0.33 seconds/component)
[Definition]
The value above is a rough estimate calculated on the assumption that five
components are simultaneously picked up and one component are
simultaneously placed on the almost entire area of a 330 mm x 250 mm
board.
(2) Component recognition with the VCS

1,800 components/hour 2.0 seconds/component)
(3) Least input placement angle increment

Programmable placement angle setting unit: 0.05
(4) Automatic tool changer (ATC)

The ATC can accommodate up to 31 nozzles.
Small nozzle: 29
Large nozzle: 2
(5) Transport rail height

900 mm 20 mm
(6) Machine dimensions and weight

W: [KE-2020M] 1300 mm
[KE-2020L] 1300 mm
[KE-2020E] 1300 mm
[KE-2020M] 1400 mm (including PWB transfer unit)
[KE-2020L] 1400 mm (including PWB transfer unit)
[KE-2020E] 1730 mm (including PWB transfer unit)
D: [KE-2020M] 1599mm
[KE-2020L] 1705 mm
[KE-2020E] 1805mm
[KE-2020M] 1784 mm (including keyboard)
[KE-2020L] 1890 mm (including keyboard)
[KE-2020E] 1990 mm (including keyboard)
H: [KE-2020M] 1550 mm
(height of the main unit when the PWB transfer height is 900 mm)
[KE-2020L] 1834 mm
(height of the vision monitor when the PWB transfer height is 900 mm)
[KE-2020E] 2200 mm
(height of the signal tower when the PWB transfer height is 900 mm)
Mass: [KE-2020M] 1410 kg
[KE-2020L] 1510 kg
[KE-2020E] 1530 kg
1 12
(7) Air requirements
Air pressure : 0.49 0.05 Mpa
Air consumption : 200 L/min.(ANR)
Dry air : Atmospheric dew point -17C or lower
(8) Noise level

76dB
(9) Country of manufacturing

Manufactured in Japan
(10) Environmental conditions

Operating
Ambient temperature: +10 C to +35 C
Relative humidity: 50% or less (at 35 C)
90% or less (at 20 C)
Transport and storage
Temperature: -25 C to +70 C
Relative humidity: 20% to 95% (No condensation)
(11) Installation category: Installation category II (IEC664-1)
(12) Pollution degree: Pollution degree II (IEC664-1)
1 13
1.1.5 Electrical specifications
(1) Number of placement points

Up to 3,000 placement points can be defined per program.
For multi-matrix PWBs, up to 10,000 points can be defined, which is the number
of circuits multiplied by the number of placement points.
(2) Control Systems

Table 1.1.5.1
Item Control system Resolution
X-Y Closed loop by AC servo motor 0.005mm
Z Semi-closed loop by AC servo motor 0.00125mm
(MNLA head) Semi-closed loop by AC servo motor 0.02
(FMLA head) Semi-closed loop by AC servo motor 0.005
(3) Main CPU

Pemtium
(4) Display
Character display : 10.4" color (TTF liquid crystal display panel)
Graphics display : 9" monochrome
(5) Data and program input/output

A program which has been generated with an external programming device or
manually created from the keyboard can be input by means of a 3.5" floppy disk.
(2HD/1.44 MB type only)
When the machine is connected to a host line computer, the LAN interface
permits high-speed communications.
(6) Printer interface

Centronics interface
(7) Power requirements

Voltage : Three-phase, 200 V, 220 V, 240 V
(for Japan)
200 V, 220 V, 240 V, 380 V, 400 V, 415 V AC
(for the machines to be exported)
Allowable voltage range: 10 % (for the rated voltage)
Apparent power : 3 kVA
Frequency : 50/60 Hz
Size of the primary-side power cable : 6 mm2 or more
2
Size of the protective grounding lead wire : 6 mm or more
(8) UPS
This machine is equipped with the uninterruptible power supply (UPS) to prevent
data from being damaged or lost due to power failure.
Batteries are used as the back-up power supply of the UPS, so the UPS is
designed to stop the system before these batteries run down. Therefore, even
during power failure, the system can be terminated safely so that any data cannot
be damaged or lost even when a power failure occurs.
1 14
1.1.6 Applicable components and packages
(1) Applicable component sizes (For laser recognition)
Table 1-1-6-1
Item Specifications
Component height specifications 12mm 20 mm (option at the factory)
Head Laser recognition Laser recognition Laser recognition Laser recognition

(MNLA) (FMLA) (MNLA) (FMLA)
Component height Min. 0.2 mm 0.3 mm 0.2 mm 0.3 mm
Max. 12 mm 20 mm
Component size Min. 0.6 mm x 0.3 mm 1.0 mm x 0.5 mm 0.6 mm x 0.3 mm 1.0 mm x 0.5 mm
(Length x Width)
Max. 20 mm x 20 mm 33.5 mm x 33.5 mm 20 mm x 20 mm 33.5 mm x 33.5 mm
or or or or
26.5 mm x 11 mm Length of a diagonal 26.5 mm x 11 mm Length of a diagonal
line: 47 mm line: 47 mm
Lead pitch Min. 0.65 mm 0.65 mm 0.65 mm 0.65 mm
Ball pitch Min. 1.0 mm 1.0 mm 1.0 mm 1.0 mm
Note: Four nozzles can pick up components whose size is 10 mm x 10 mm or less

simultaneously.
Two nozzles (No. 1 and 3 or No. 2 and 4: one nozzle is skipped) can pick up
components whose size is larger than 10 mm x 10 mm simultaneously.
1 15
(2) Applicable component (For VCS recognition)
Table 1-1-6-2
Item Partial Divided image Lead pitch Ball pitch Ball
recognition recognition diameter
Standard Reflective Minimum: Maximum: Minimum: Minimum: Minimum:
VCS 3 mm x 3 mm 50 mm x 150 mm 0.38 mm 1.0 mm 0.4mm
(field of view: Maximum: (when divided into 1 x 3) Maximum: Maximum: Maximum:
54 mm) 50 mm x 50 mm Maximum: 2.54 mm 3.0 mm 1.0mm
74 mm x 74 mm
(when divided into 2 x 2)
Penetrative Minimum: Maximum:
9 mm x 9 mm 35 mm x 120 mm
Maximum: (when divided into 1 x 3)
50 mm x 35 mm
Optional Reflective Minimum: Maximum: Minimum: Minimum: Minimum:

VCS-1 3 mm x 3 mm 34 mm x 120 mm 0.3 mm 0.7 mm 0.28mm
37.5 mm) 34 mm x 34 mm Maximum: 2.54 mm 2.0 mm 0.63mm
68 mm x 68 mm
Penetrative Minimum:
9 mm x 9 mm
Maximum:
34 mm x 34 mm

VCS-2 3 mm x 3 mm 24 mm x 72 mm 0.3 mm 0.5 mm 0.2mm
27 mm) 24 mm x 24 mm Maximum: 2.54 mm 2.0 mm 0.63mm
48 mm x 48 mm
9 mm x 9 mm
Maximum:
24 mm x 24 mm

VCS-3 3 mm x 3 mm 15.5 mm x 46.5 mm 0.3 mm 0.35 mm 0.14mm
18 mm) 15.5 mm x 15.5 Maximum: 2.54 mm 2.0 mm 0.63mm
mm 31 mm x 31 mm
9 mm x 9 mm
Maximum:
15.5 mm x 15.5
mm
Note:
1. The minimum dimensions of a component to be recognized with the VCS are
applied only to a component whose mold dimensions are 7 mm x 7 mm or more.
2. The maximum dimensions of a component to be recognized with the standard
VCS should be within the recognizable range: 52 mm x 52 mm including a
component placement position error and a teaching error which is caused when
the machine picks up the component.
3. The center position of a component should be 1 mm or less (in the X and Y
direction) far from the camera center position and the component angle should
be 3 against the camera center position when the camera is recognizing the
component.
1 16
(3) Applicable component Table 1-1-6-3
Component MNLA FMLA Standard Optional Optional Optional Package
Shape
Name VCS VCS-1 VCS-2 VCS-3
Square chip 0603
resistor

1005, 1608, 2012, 3216, 3225
(5025, 6432)

Network resistor (Excluding SOP, SOJ, PLCC types)

MELF resistor 1.6 x 1.0mm, 2.0 x 1.25mm, 3.5 x
1.4mm, 5.9 x 2.2 mm

Laminated 0603
ceramic capacitor

1005, 1608, 2012, 3216, 3225, 4532,
5750 (5632)

Tantalum chip 3216, 3528, 6032, 7343 Tape
capacitor

Aluminum Height: more than 6 mm, but 10.5
electrolytic mm or less
capacitor Height:
Chip film capacitor

Variable trimmer capacitor, Chip potentiometer, trimmer

Chip ferrite beads

Chip inductor

SOT molded part 1608/2012, SOT-23,
SOT-89, SOT-143, SOT-223

SOP 8-, 14-, 16-, 18-, 20-, 24- and 28-pins
Length of a diagonal line: 31.5 mm or
less
32, 40-pin

SOJ 16, 18, 20, 24, 26, 28, 32-pin

40-pin

PLCC 18, 20, 22, 28 (Square),
28 (Rectangle), 32, 44-pins

52, 68, 84-pins

QFP, BQFP Pitch 0.65/0.8/1.0
Dimensions: 20 mm x 20 mm or less

Pitch: 0.65/0.8/1.0
Dimensions: more than 20 mm x 20 Tape
mm or 23.5 mm (length) x 11 mm Stick
(width), but 33.5 mm x 33.5 mm or Tray
less
Pitch: 0.4/0.5/0.6/0.8/1.0

Pitch: 0.3
Dimensions: more than 24 mm x 24
mm, but 33.5 mm x 33.5 mm or less
Pitch: 0.3
Dimensions: more than 16 mm x 16
mm, but 24 mm x 24 mm or less
Pitch: 0.3

BGA Dimensions: 20 mm x 20 mm or
less , 23.5 mm(L) x 11 mm(W) or less

Dimensions: 20 mm x 20 mm , more
than 23.5 mm(L) x 11 mm(W), but
33.5 mm x 33.5 mm or less
Dimensions: more than 33.5 mm x
33.5 mm, but 50 mm x 50 mm or less

1 17
MNLA FMLA Standard Optional Optional Optional Package
Component Name Shape
VCS VCS-1 VCS-2 VCS-3
Unidirectional lead Pitch: 0.65 or more
connector Dimensions: 20 mm x 20 mm or
Bidirectional lead less, or 23.5 mm (length) x 11 mm
connector (width) or less
Recognizable with laser
Pitch: 0.65 or more
Dimensions: 20 mm x 20 mm or
less, or 23.5 mm (length) x 11 mm
(width) or more but 33.5 mm x 33.5

mm or less
Pitch: 0.4 or more
less

Recognizable with the VCS
Pitch: 0.3
Dimensions: more than 24 mm x
24 mm, but 33.5 mm x 33.5 mm or
less
Pitch: 0.3
16 mm, but 24 mm x 24 mm or less

Pitch: 0.3
less

IC socket Pitch: 0.65 or more
less, or 23.5 mm (length) x 11 mm Tape
(width) or less Stick
Recognizable with laser Tray
Pitch: 0.65 or more
less, or 23.5 mm (length) x 11 mm
(width) or more but 33.5 mm x 33.5

mm or less
Pitch: 0.5 or more
less

Pitch: 0.3
24 mm, but 33.5 mm x 33.5 mm or
less
Pitch: 0.3

Pitch: 0.3
less

FBGA Dimensions: more than 24 mm x
24 mm, but 33.5 mm x 33.5 mm or
less

less

1 18
Note: For the shape of chip components to be mounted
(1) For the parts whose shape is cylindrical, there is no minimum shade when turned,
and chip recognition by laser align is therefore impossible.
(2) A poor pickup or placement accuracy could result if the top surface of the
component to be placed is curved, protruded, or dented. Avoid using such
components. (Some such components may, however, be handled by changing
the nozzle number.)
<Typical pickup failures>
Pickup nozzle
MO
Slotted groove
Embossed characters
<Typical poor placement accuracy>
Dented
Laser recognition
1 19
1.1.7 Printed circuit board specifications
1. Board size
Min. : X 50 mm x Y 30 mm
Note that the minimum size becomes 50 mm x 50 mm (X/Y) (optional)
when the machine is equipped with the automatic PWB width
adjustment function.
Max. : [KE-2020M] X 330 mm x Y 250 mm
[KE-2020L] X 410 mm x Y 360 mm
[KE-2020E] X 510 mm x Y 460 mm
X : Along the movement of the board
Y : From front to rear (and reversely) of the machine
2. Board thickness
Min. : 0.4 mm
Max. : 4 mm
3. Board warp limit

0.2 mm or less per 50 mm
1 mm or less both for upward and downward directions
(Conforms to JIS B 8641.)
4. Board limitations
(1) Marginal area
Movement of PWB
Marginal area
[KE-2020M] 30 - 250mm
[KE-2020L] 30 - 360mm
[KE-2020E] 30 - 460mm
Standard 4 +0.1 mm
0
2.5 - 4 +0.1
0
mm (Optional)
5 0.1mm
5 - 7mm for particular ordering (factory-set)
Marginal area
3
Conveying rail (fixed)
Standard 5 0.1mm (Note)
[KE-2020M] 50 - 330mm, [KE-2020L] 50 - 410mm, [KE-2020E] 50 -510mm
Note: Dimension at the factory
1 20
(2) Area in which backup pins cannot be proved KE-2020M
Medium size board
specifications Movement of PWB Area in which backup
pins cannot be provided
Stopper position
4mm
(20 mm when the PWB is transferred from right to left)

20mm
0mm ~ 92mm (Variable)

50mm
22mm
21mm
17.5mm Conveying rail (fixed) 17.5mm
Note: When the PWB is transferred from right to left, the marginal area of 50mm x
20mm is set on the left.
When the PWB is transferred from right to left, the marginal area of 36mm x
105mm is set on the right.
(3) Area in which backup pins cannot be proved KE-2020L
Large size board

specifications
Movement of PWB Area in which backup
Stopper position
4mm
20mm

0mm ~ 178mm (Variable)
50mm
105mm
37mm
21mm
Conveying rail (fixed) 17.5mm

17.5mm
36mm
105mm is set on the right.105mm is set on the right.
1 21
(4) Area in which backup pins cannot be proved KE-2020E
Extra large size
board specifications Movement of PWB Area in which backup
Stopper position
4mm

20mm
(Variable)
50mm
0mm ~220mm
105mm
37mm
21mm
17.5mm Conveying rail (fixed) 17.5mm
36mm
105mm is set on the right.
1 22
(5) Allowable height of a component to be placed and allowable height of the rear of
a board
Component Max. 12 mm (NC specification)

PWB Max. 20 mm (HC specification)
Marginal area
on the back of Max.
PWB 40m
3 3
Figure 1.1.7.1
Component height specification Component height (mm)

NC specification 12
HC specification 20
5. Board Recognition Marks

Create the board recognition marks under the following conditions. (See Figure
1.1.7.2.) We recommend the filled circle for the mark. The clearance area
around the mark shall be as shown in Figure 1.1.7.3. Within this area, there
shall not be any silk patterns, strip lines (including inner layer patterns), through
holes, resists, and other components.
A size: 1 to 3 mm 0.1 mm
B size: 0.2 0.03 mm
C size: 0.5 to 3.0 mm 0.1 mm
B
B B
C A
B
B
B C A
B
C A
C A
B
B
B
C A A
Figure 1.1.7.2
1 23
Notes: 1. When recognition, the mark shall be placed in the angle shown above.
However, if you specify "Use of each circuit mark" for a non-matrix PWB,
the mark can be recognized only when all marks of the reference circuit
are positioned in the angle described and the circuit is positioned at 90,
180, 270 or 360 degrees.
2. The fiducials of the same shape and same size is preferable within a
board.
3. When processing, copper foil or solder plating can be recognized.
4. Maximum number of marks which can be registered
Board mark: 1 set (2 marks or 3 marks)
IC mark: 50 sets (Pairs of 2 marks)
5. Items that can be registered
Mark number
Balance detection window
Normal/reverse rotation identification when detected
Mark shape
Outer dimensions
Effective value of projection
Matching
6. If there is no recognition mark on a board, register a user designated
template to allow the machine to recognize marks.
Clearance area
Recognition mark
0.5 mm or more mark
0.5 mm or more mark
0.5 mm or more mark
Figure 1.1.7.3
1 24
1.2 Basic Configuration and Parts Identification
1.2.1 Entire system views
Figure 1.2.1.1 Front View Figure 1.2.1.2 Right Side View
Vision monitor Keyboard Main switch

LCD display Track ball No-fuse breaker
HOD unit Signal tower Filter regulator
1 25

Figure 1.2.1.3
ATC unit PWB transfer unit

Head unit Feeder bank unit
X-Y unit VCS unit
1 26
1.2.2 PWB transfer unit: mechanism and parts identification
1. Pin reference
1) When a board is carried in and the IN sensor detects the board, the PWB
transport motor drives the drive shaft to start transporting the board
with the PWB transport belt. At the same time, the stopper is turned on.
2) When the board reaches the stopper , the STOP 3 sensor detects it, then
the BU plate moves up. The board is fixed with the centering pin and
BU pin which are attached on the BU plate .
3) After the board is fixed, the next board is carried in the same manner, and it
waits at the Wait sensor .
4) After production finishes, the fixed board is released, then the machine starts
ejecting it.
5) When the first board passes the C-OUT sensor , the stopper is turned on
again and the next board is fixed.
2. Edge reference <Optional>

The board transfer mechanism is the same as that of the pin reference above.
When the board is fixed, edges of the boards are held by the stopper pusher,
X (in the X direction) pusher Y, (in the Y direction) and BU pin .
The transfer operation that follows is also the same as that of the pin reference
above.
1 27

Figure 1.2.2.1
IN sensor Stopper
OUT sensor Pusher X (Edge reference option)
STOP sensor Centering pin
C-OUT sensor BU table
BU-UP sensor Motor control
BU-DOWN sensor BU pin
PWB transport motor Pusher Y (Edge reference option)
Drive shaft Wait sensor
1 28
1.2.3 Component feeder
Totally two component feeder banks are provided: one bank is located at the front
and rear of the PWB transport unit respectively. The component supply method
varies depending on the package style of components: tape, bulk, stick or tray.
Components fed by a tape (chip components) or those fed in a stick are mounted on
the feeder bank with using a tape feeder, bulk feeder, stick feeder or stacked stick
feeder, then carried in the main unit. A tray component is fed from a tray holder,
matrix tray changer, or matrix tray server. A tray holder, matrix tray changer or
matrix tray server.can be mounted on the rear of the machine.
When using an overall feeder exchange trolley (option), the feeder bank can be
removed from the main unit of this machine for preparation.
Rear
Feeder banks PWB ( ) PWB transport unit
Front
Vision monitor
Figure 1.2.3.1
1 29
1. Feeder bank parts identification (See Figure 1.2.3.2.)
The tape feeder loaded with taped components, stick feeder loaded with
components in sticks bulk feeder loaded with components in bulk are positioned
and secured by the fixing plate , and lock shaft .
The component feeding device is driven by the drive cylinders .
The position label is used to determine the position at which each feeder is
installed. You can see LED status of the FPI (optional) to decide where to set
each feeder.
The bank mark is the mark for correcting the position of the feeder set.
7 6 2 3 5
1
4
Feeder bank Drive cylinder

Fixing plate Position label
Fixing plate B Bank mark
Lock shaft
Figure 1.2.3.2
1 30
2. Overall feeder exchange trolley parts identification
(See Figure 1.2.3.3.) (Optional)
The Overall feeder exchange trolley is used to remove the feeder bank from the
main unit for easy preparation.
The feeder bank can manually be moved by holding the trolley handle r which
is attached to the floor trolley equipped with casters . Positioning to the
main unit of this machine is carried out with the bank locate pins t on the left and
right. The Overall feeder exchange trolley can be fixed with the trolley stopper
.
Feeder bank Bank locate pin

Casters Trolly stopper
Floor trolley Connector bracket
Trolly handle
Figure 1.2.3.3
1 31
3. Tape feeder parts identification
The tape feeder uses a tape whose width is 8 mm, 12 mm, 16 mm, 24 mm, or 32
mm to supply components.
FF05/08 Parts identification (1/2)
12 11 10 17 6 4
18 16
5
1
19 15 13 14
Figure 1.2.3.4 Right side view
X axis reference pin A Stopper Guide cover

X axis reference pin B Free link Unreeling plate
Sprocket wheel Tape holder Unreeling guide roller
Upper cover Cover tape fixing plate Reel support
Upper cover hook Lock release lever Tape groove
Shutter Lock holder
Knock lever Tape guide
4 16 9 12
5
18
3 7 8 13
Figure 1.2.3.5 Left side view
1 32
FF05/08 Parts identification (2/2)
11 10 16 17 5
12 4
13
15
Figure 1.2.3.6 Detailed illustration of the right side
X axis reference pin A Stopper Guide cover

X axis reference pin B Free link Unreeling plate
Sprocket wheel Tape holder Unreeling guide roller
Upper cover Cover tape fixing plate Reel support
Upper cover hook Lock release lever Tape groove
Shutter Lock holder
Knock lever Tape guide
17 6 4
16 5
12 10
11
Figure 1.2.3.7 Detailed illustration of the top side
1 33
1.2.4 Head-related unit: parts identification
The head unit consists of the laser align sensor used to detect placement and angle
offsets of the component, and the Z slide shaft which can be moved up and down, or
be turned.
The Z slide shaft and the Z slide bracket of the Z axis are driven with rotations of the
ball screw.
The -axis encoder located on the upper section of the -axis motor detects the angle
of a component.
The machine is equipped with two units of MNLA head and FMLA head as standard
parts.
L Head-related unit (MNLA head) R Head-related unit (FMLA head)
Figure 1.2.4.1 Head-related unit
Nozzle outer -axis encoder

Laser alignment sensor Ball screw
Z-axis motor Linear way
Z-axis encoder Head-up spring
Z slide shaft Head top bracket
-axis motor Z slide bracket
1 34
1.2.5 ATC unit (Automatic tool changer): parts identification
The slide plate w is opened and closed by the air cylinder to store or
attach/detach the nozzle . The ATC OPEN sensor and the ATC CLOSE
sensor detect whether the slide plate is opened or closed, and the speed
controller adjusts the speed for opening or closing the slide plate.
1
2
16 3
17 4
18 5
19 6
20 7
21 8
22 9
23 10
24 11
25 12

26
13
27 14
28 15
29
30
Figure 1.2.5
ATC bracket ATC OPEN sensor

Slide plate ATC CLOSE sensor
Nozzle outer support ATC numbers (1 to 30, A, B)
Air cylinder Nozzle
Speed controller
1 35
1.2.6 Nozzle
(1) Select the nozzle from No.501 through No.508, according to the shape and size
of the components to be mounted.
Table 1.2.6.1 Nozzles for laser recognition

NO. 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508
Appearance
Outer 1.0x 0.7x

0.7mm 1.0mm 1.5mm 3.5mm 5.0mm 8.5mm 9.5mm
Diameter 0.5mm 0.4mm
Inner 0.4mm
0.25 mm 0.4mm 0.6mm 1.0mm 1.7mm 3.2mm 5.0mm 8.0mm
Diameter x2
(2) Nozzle selection

The nozzle can be automatically recognized if you follow the explanation of "3.4.1
ATC Nozzle Selection". If you manually select the nozzle, select the nozzle with
extreme care to prevent poor pickup and placement of a compornent.
The nozzle numbers for major types of components to placed be are shown in
Table 1.2.6.2. However, to keep accuracy of pickup and placement, select the
appropriate nozzle No. by referring to the minimum size of the suction area of
each component.
See the item (3) for the minimum width (D) of the sucked area of each
component.
Table 1.2.6.2 Nozzles and their pickable minimum component width

Nozzle Minimum Major types of components Applicable
No. component components to be
width (D) placed
500 0.45 to 1.1 1005, 1608, SOT(Molded part: 1.6 x 0.8), 2012,
501 to 1.45 SOT(Molded part: 2.0 x 1.25)
502 0.45 to 0.75 0603
503 0.75 to 1.45 1005
1608SOT(Molded part: 1.6 x 0.8), 2012,
504 1.1 to 2.5 SOT(Molded part: 2.0 x 1.25) 3225, tantalum capacitor
505 2.5 to 4 2012, 3216, SOT(Molded part: 2.0 x 1.25), SOT23,
Aluminum electrolytic capacitor
506 4 to 7 (small), tantalum capacitor, trimmer
507 7 to 10 (medium), SOP (narrow type), SOJ, connector
(large), SOP (wide type), TSOP, QFP, PLCC, SOJ,
508 10 or more connector
QFP, PLCC
1 36
(3) Minimum component width (D) of each component.
Square chip QFP BGA

A
A
D
D=A
D
A
MELF
A Network resistor
A
D = A + 0.5mm
PLCC
Aluminum
D=A
electrolytic capacitor
D
A
D
Trimmer
A
A
SOT BQFP
A
D D=A
W
D
One-way lead connector

A
D
A
SOP
TSOP
Gull wing socket

A
D
A
J lead socket
D=A Socket with bumper
SOJ !1
TSOP2
D
A
D
A
D
A
1 37
1.2.7 OCC parts identification
(1) Offset correction camera

The machine is equipped with a coaxial light and polarizing filter as the standard
devices. The camera detects a BOC mark and corrects the detected mark
automatically.
OCC camera
OCC lens
Illumination LED board
Mirror box
Figure 1.2.7.1
Adjusting the polarizing filter

1) Place a white ceramic board on the calibration block, then move the camera over
this board.
2) Loosen the screw to turn the filter holder to the right and left. When the screen
becomes brightest, fix the screw.
1 38
1.2.8 VCS parts identification
The VCS recognizes a component with the following devices: reflective/penetrative

lights, three-dimension movable light and coaxial light, then places on a board a
component such as a QFP, BGA, CSP and connector.
Figure 12.8.1 VCS unit parts identification
LED board (for the penetrative light)

LED board (for the side light)
LED board (for the bottom light)
LED board (for the coaxial light)
VCS lens
VCS camera
Air cylinder
1 39
1.3 X, Y, and Z Axes Descriptions
The following four axes (X, Y, Z, and ) are numerically controlled in this machine.
(1) X- and Y-axis

The X-axis represents the left and right directions of the machine, while the
Y-axis represents the front and rear directions: a position is given as X = 000.00
mm and Y = 000.00 mm in increments of 0.01 mm. Two coordinate systems are
available: one given by the production program and another given by teaching
operation. Both coordinate systems are automatically changed, so you do not
have to switch the coordinate system by yourself.
(2) Z-axis
The Z-axis represents the height, given as Z = . mm, in 0.01-mm
increments. The upward direction is positive (+), with the top side of a board
clamped (any jig is not used) being 0.
(3) -axis
The q-axis represents the rotation angle of the head, given as "A = ." (in
0.05 increments.) The value is positive for counterclockwise rotation and
negative for clockwise rotation.
MNLA head unit FMLA head unit
Y axis
X axis +
Z
+
+
Y
OCC-L X
+
First nozzle axis Third nozzle axis IC nozzle axis OCC-R
Second nozzle axis Fourth nozzle axis
Figure 1.3.1
1 40
1.4 Interface With Extenal Devices
(1) is the 14-Pin READY OUT (IN) connector for use when the machine is
configured with other equipment in an on-line environment.
The pin layout (assignment) of the connector for a Ready OUT (IN) signal differs
as shown in Tables 1.4.1 and 1.4.2 depending on the board transfer direction
(from left to right, and from right to left, respectively).
(2) is a DSub 25-Pin connector for the printer (conforming to the Centronics
Interface standards).
See Table 1.4.3 for the pin assignment of this printer connector.
is an Ethernet connector (8-pin modular type connector).
See Table 1.4.6 for the pin assignment of this Ethernet connector.
Figure 1.4.1 Left side panel of the main unit Figure 1.4.2 Right side panel of the main
unit
is a connector for interface with a matrix tray changer (50-pin).
is a power connector for a matrix tray changer (7-pin).
1 41
is a 9-Pin connector for the trackball.
See Table 1.4.5 for the pin assignment of this trackball connector.
is a 50-Pin connector for the keyboard.

See Table 1.4.4 for the pin assignment of this keyboard connector.
is a 5-Pin connector for the Hand-held operating device (HOD).
Figure 1.4.3 Machine right side panel
Note: The shape of the track ball connector and that of the keyboard connector is
the same. If you accidentally make the wrong connections, the system will
not be started up.
1 42
Table 1.4.1 List of connectors on the left side panel
Signal name (left to right) Signal name (right to left) Connector used
1 READY OUT READY IN
2 READY OUT READY IN GND AMP
3 BOAD AVAILABLE IN BOAD AVAILABLE OUT 206043-1
4 BOAD AVAILABLE IN GND BOAD AVAILABLE OUT
5 N.C. N.C.
6 N.C. N.C.
(Connection of the
7 N.C. N.C.
cable end 206044-1)
8 N.C. N.C.
9 N.C. N.C.
10 N.C. N.C.
11 N.C. N.C.
12 N.C. N.C.
13 N.C. N.C.
14 N.C. N.C.
Table 1.4.2 List of connectors on the right side panel

Signal name (left to right) Signal name (right to left) Connector used
1 READY IN READY OUT
2 READY IN GND READY OUT

AMP
3 BOAD AVAILABLE OUT BOAD AVAILABLE IN
206043-1
4 BOAD AVAILABLE OUT BOAD AVAILABLE IN
GND
5 N.C. N.C.
6 N.C. N.C.
(Connection of the
7 N.C. N.C.
cable end 206044-1)
8 N.C. N.C.
9 N.C. N.C.
10 N.C. N.C.
11 N.C. N.C.
12 N.C. N.C.
13 N.C. N.C.
14 N.C. N.C.
1 43
Figure 1.4.4 shows the interface circuits for READY OUTs (IN) and BOARD
AVAILABLE signals.
They conform to the SMEMA standard.
+ 1 READY OUT
2 READY OUT
3 BOAD AVAILABLE IN
4 BOAD AVAILABLE IN
3.3K 1/4W
24 5
N.C.
14
GND24V
3.3K 1/4W
24
1 READY IN
2 READY IN
+ 3 BOAD AVAILABLE OUT
4 BOAD AVAILABLE OUT
5
N.C.
GND24V
14
Figure 1.4.4
1 44
Table 1.4.3 Printer connector pin assignments
Signal name Connector used
1 STROBE
2 D0
3 D1
4 D2 D-SUB
5 D3 25-Pin FEMALE
6 D4
7 D5
8 D6
9 D7
10 ACK
11 BUSY
12 PE
13 SLCT
14 AUTFD
15 ERROR
16 INIT
17 SLCT IN
18 GND
19 GND
20 GND
21 GND
22 GND
23 GND
24 GND
25 GND
Table 1.4.4 Keyboard connector pin assignments

1 DATA
2 N.C.
3 GND Japan crimping terminal
4 + 5V MD-S6000-13
5 CLOCK
6 N.C.
1 45
Table 1.4.5 Trackball connector pin assignments
1 DATA
2 N.C.
3 GND Japan crimping terminal
4 + 5V MD-S6000-13
5 CLOCK
6 N.C.
Table 1.4.6 Ethernet connector pin assignments

1 TD+
2 TD-
3 RD+
4 N.C. Connector used
5 N.C. Modular connector 8-pin
6 RD-
7 N.C.
8 N.C.
1 46
Table 1.4.7 Matrix tray changer interface connector pin assignments
Signal name Signal name Connector used

1 RD0 26 GND
2 RD1 27 WRITE0 (N)
3 RD2 28 GND
4 RD3 29 R/B0(N)
5 GND 30 GND
6 GND 31 R/B1(N)
7 RD4 32 POWON (N)
8 RD5 33 EMG (N)
9 RD6 34 MTC EMG
10 RD7 35 C OPEN (N)
11 GND 36 MTC OPEN
12 GND 37 + 5V Yamaichi Electronics
IDC type
13 WD0 38 + 5V
socket NCS050-000-
14 WD1 39 + 5V BS
15 WD2 40 + 5V
16 WD3 41
17 GND 42
18 GND 43
19 WD4 44
20 WD5 45
21 WD6 46
22 WD7 47
23 GND 48
24 GND 49
25 WRITE1 50
Table 1.4.8 Matrix tray changer power connector pin assignments

1 U
2 Square-type flange receptacle
3 AMP 21198-1
4 FG
Socket contact
5 V
AMP 66360-2
6 W
7
1 47
1.5 Installation Check
Check that the machine is level lying completely flat on the floor.
Check that the lock nuts are tightened securely on the four feet of the
CAUTION
machine.
Check that correct electrical power and air are supplied to the machine.
Main switch Breaker Adjuster

Pressure gauge Filter regulator
Note: To avoid the laser sensor detection error, install the machine where not subject
to direct sunlight.
Figure 1.5.1
Lock nut
(Four)
Figure 1.5.2
1 48
1.6 Checking circuit protector
If the machine does not operate properly after it has been turned ON, check the
condition of the circuit protector in the power unit found on the back side of the
machine. If push-button type the circuit protector front face protrudes to show the
red mark, push the face back in. When the lever of the lever-type circuit protector is
lowered, raise it.
To avoid risk of serious injury or death caused by electric shock hazard,

turn off the main power switch of the house current which is installed in
CAUTION
the building where the machine is used.
Note that it is not the main power switch of the machine.
Lever-type circuit protectors
Push-button type circuit protectors
Power unit
Figure 1.6.1
1 49
CHAPTER 2 DESCRIPTION OF THE OPERATOR
CONTROLS
2.1 Function of Keys and Switches

2.1.1 Keyboard
Num Caps Scroll

Lock Lock Lock
Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 Num Print Scroll Pause Delete

Lock Screen Lock
~ # ^ & ( ) _ +
! @ $ % * Insert
` 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - =
Q W E R T Y U I O P { } Page
Tab Up
[ ]
A S D F G H J K L : " Page
Caps Lock ; ' Enter Down
Z X C V B N M < > ?
Shift / Shift End
, .
:
Ctrl Alt Alt Ctrl
Figure 2.1.1 Keyboard
Table 2.1.1 List of keys and their functions
Key Function
F1 Use to obtain a help screen (for future expansion) on the display.
F2 Use to change data already entered.
Use to obtain a pop-up list on the display.
F3 Use to copy data.
F4 Use to delete data.
F5 Use to move data.
F6 Use to change the window in the forward direction.
F7 Use to search for particular data in the forward direction.
F8 Use to search for particular data in the backward direction.
F9 Use to select either the list or form display, the key toggling between the two.
F10 Unused
F11 (Fn + F1) Used to copy a cell.
F12 (Fn + F2) Used to pate a cell.
ESC Use to cancel an entry.
Alt Use to select the menu.
21
Key Function
INSERT Use to select either the insert or overtype mode, the key toggling between the two.
DELETE Use to erase the character at the cursor.
HOME Use to move the cursor to the beginning of the line.
END Use to move the cursor to the end of the line.
PAGE Use to access the following page on the display.
DOWN
PAGE Use to access the previous page on the display.
UP
Tab Use to move the window forward.
Use to move the cursor forward.
Tab + Shift Use to move the window backward.
Use to move the cursor backward.
Use to move the cursor in the direction of the arrow.
0-9, A-Z, -, +, Used to generate and edit data.

other symbols Note: The mark is entered by . (Japanese only)
ScrlL Use to move the cursor backward and, at the same time, erase the character at the cursor.
ENTER Use to validate the data entered.
Caps Lock Use to switch between uppercase and lowercase letters.

The LED lights up when this function is slelcted.
Num Lock Use to lock the numeric key functions.
The LED lights up when this function is slelcted.
22
2.1.2 HOD: Hand-held operating device operation panel
Figure 2.1.2 HOD: Handheld operating device operation panel
To avoid a risk of injury, do not place your hand in the machine, nor
CAUTION move your face or head close to the machine during operations of the
HOD.
Key name Function

HMS Obtains the pick-up height with the height sensor.
When selected, its LED lights.
HEAD Use this key to perform a teaching function with a head.
CAMERA Use this key to perform a teaching function with the OCC.
VACUUM Use this key to teach the vacuum pressure.
When selected, its LED lights..
23
Table 2.1.2 List of HOD keys and their functions
Key name Function
F1 Assigns the X-Y axes after a device is selected.
Selects another axis or specifies the number of points during teaching.
F2 Assigns the Z axis after a device is selected.
F3 Assigns the axis after a device is selected.
F4 Assigns an axis after a device is selected.
No Increments or decrements the number for selecting an axis.
Specifies the axis number displayed on the LCD.
DEVNAME Increments or decrements a device number to be selected.
Specifies the device number displayed on the LCD.
-X+Y <When XY is selected> Moves the X-Y axes to the direction indicated with the
arrow mark.
<When CAMERA is selected> Moves the cursor to the direction indicated
with the arrow mark.
<When XY is selected> Moves the X-Y axes to the direction indicated with the
arrow mark.
+Z+Y
<When the Z axis is selected> Moves the Z axis to the direction indicated
-X+Y <When XY is selected> Moves the X-Y axes to the direction indicated with the
arrow mark.
--X <When XY is selected> Moves the X-Y axes to the direction indicated with the
arrow mark.
<When CAMERA is selected> Moves the cursor to the direction indicated with
the arrow mark.
<When the axis is selected> Moves the theta axis to the desired angle.
FAST Moves the axis at high speed.
++X <When XY is selected> Moves the X-Y axes to the direction indicated with the
arrow mark.
<When CAMERA is selected> Moves the cursor to the direction indicated with
the arrow mark.
<When the axis is selected> Moves the theta axis to the desired angle.
-X-Y <When XY is selected> Moves the X-Y axes to the direction indicated with the
arrow mark.
-Z-Y <When XY is selected> Moves the X-Y axes to the direction indicated with the
arrow mark.
<When the Z axis is selected> Moves the Z axis to the direction indicated
+X-Y <When XY is selected> Moves the X-Y axes to the direction indicated with the
arrow mark.
24
Key name Function
WINDOW Switches the cursor displayed on the vision monitor from the cross-hair
cursor to the window cursor, and switches the teaching mode also, then
the LED lights.
Moves the cursor to the previous data.
PREVIOUS
PAUSE Temporarily halts the placement tracking operation.
CANCEL Cancels the data obtained through teaching.
Moves the cursor to the next data.
NEXT
ENTER Validates the data entered through teaching.
When connecting the HOD unit the machine, make sure that the
CAUTION machine has been turned OFF.
The magnet sheet is pasted on the rear of the HOD unit. Keep a floppy
CAUTION disk away from the HOD because the data stored on the disk may be
erased.
Note 1
2.1.3 Track ball
Right button
Left button
Figure 2.1.3
Note 1: Do not click the middle section of a trackball since any key may not be
accepted depending on your clicking timing.
* Cleaning a ball
Turn clockwise the section which clamps a ball to remove a ball.
25
2.1.4 No-fuse breaker
As shown in Figure 2.1.4, the no-fuse breaker is found on the lower right side of the
machine with viewed from its front. Normally raise the lever (to ON status).
This switch functions as a circuit breaker, so it cuts off the power automatically if the
overcurrent is supplied to the machine.
CAUTION Do not turn off the no-fuse breaker when the main switch is turned on.
No-fuse breaker
Figure 2.1.4 Front of the main unit
2.1.5 Main switch

As shown in Figure 2.1.5, the main switch is found on the upper front cover on the
front right side of the machine. This switch is turned off when set horizontally, and
on when vertically.
CAUTION Do not turn on the main switch when the no-fuse breaker is turned off.
Main switch
Figure 2.1.5 Front right side of the main unit
26
2.1.6 Other push button switches
<Front view>
Figure 2.1.6.1
1 ON LINE 3 SERVO FREE 5
ORIGIN SINGLE CYCLE

7
2 4 6
Figure 2.1.6.2
27
<Rear view>
Figure 2.1.6.3
SERVO FREE
3 5
7
SINGLE CYCLE
4 6
Figure 2.1.6.4 Figure 2.1.6.5
28
Table 2.1.6.1
No. Switch Function
1 ONLINE Use to allow the machine to connect to the HLC (enter the online status).
The switch lights up when the machine enters Online mode.
2 ORIGIN Use to zero all the axes.
3 Use to start an actual or false production run
START
4 Use to stop an actual or false production run. Press the switch once to put
the production run in a pause status. Press the switch the second time to
(PAUSE, STOP) stop the production run.
5 SERVO FREE Use to free the servo motor (X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, and q-axis).
The switch lights up when servo motor is set into the free state.
The motor is energized again when the switch is pressed the second time.
6 SINGLE CYCLE Use to stop the production run when one board has been produced.
Press the switch a second time to exit from this status.
7 Emergency Use to bring the machine to an immediate stop if the machine malfunctions
or there could be an imminent personal injury.
When the switch is pressed, it brings the motor and other drive mechanisms
to an immediate stop and turns ON the red lamp of the signal tower.
To reset the switch, turn it in the direction of the arrow.
Do not use this switch for the purposes other than emergency stops.
29
2.2 Rotary Beacon Tower (Signal Lights)
Signal lights
Red
Yellow
Green
Figure 2.2.1 Upper right side of the main body
The following table lists the functions (factory-settings) of the three colored lamps of
the rotary beacon tower q. At the machine setup, however, these can be changed as
you desire (See Section 8.2.2.13 "Signal lights").
Table 2.2.1
Color Condition Function
Green Lit Production in progress
Yellow Lit In Manual mode, program data is being created.
The machine pauses during production.
Flashing Components running out during production (Production can
continue.)
Red Lit Emergency stop or an error occurs.
The machine cannot continue producing a board due to no
component available.
All lamps Lit Waiting for the production START key to be pressed in
Production mode.
Production completed normally, in Idle or other mode
2 10
CHAPTER 3 OPERATION OVERVIEW
This chapter describes the operation overview of this machine: basic operation procedures
and the software configuration.
3.1 Operation Flow

In this section, two types of operation flows are described: when the machine is used
as a standalone machine and when several machines are used via the HLC.
3.1.1 When the machine is used as a standalone machine

3.1.1.1 Producing new type of PWBs
The operation flow for producing new type of PWBs is shown below:
START
Setting the PWB (1) Setting the PWB transport section

transport section Set the PWB transport section according to a PWB to be produced.
(See Chapter 7 "PRODUCTION PROCEDURES".)
Editing a production (2) Editing a production program

program Create a production program.
(See Chapter 4 " EDITING THE PROGRAM ".)
You have to teach marks: BOC mark and IC mark. (See Section 6.4
"Teaching a Mark".)
(3) Preparation for production

Preparation for production At Set a feeder and check the nozzle assignment.
(4) Checking a production program

Checking a production
Check to see if a production program is correct by tracking a component
program placement position, pick-up position and pick-up height and measuring
them.
(See Chapter 4 " EDITING THE PROGRAM ".)
Checking trial-run (5) Trial run

operation Perform the trial-run operation once or twice before starting continuous
production to check and adjust the results of components placement
operation
(6) Continuous production

Continuous production Produce the preset number of PWBs.
If the stocked components run out, supply components one by one.
Post process
END
31
3.1.1.2 Repetitive production
The operation flow for producing PWBs repetitively is show below.
START
Loading a production (1) Loading a production program

program Load a production program which was already edited in order to
produce PWBs.
(See Chapter 3.6 " File Operation ".)
Preparations for production (2) Preparations for production (Changeover)

(Changeover) At the machine station, adjust the width of the PWB transport path,
position and adjust the reference pin or stopper pin, adjust the backup
support pin, check the nozzle assignment, and install a feeder.
After installing a component pick-up device, check and adjust the
component pick-up position.
(3) Trial run

Checking trial-run operation Before starting continuous production, perform the trial-run operation
once or twice to check and adjust the results of components
placement.

Continuous production Produce the preset number of PWBs.
Post process
END
32
3.1.2 When using the HLC
The operation flow for producing PWBs with using the HLC is shown below.
START
Editing a production (1) Editing a production program

program Create and edit production program data required to produce PWBs.
When you are to create or edit a program, you do not have to decide which
component is to be placed on a board or which machine station is to be used.
Program all placement positions on a board at a time.
After creating a program, execute the Optimization utility to allow the HLC to divide
NO Production the created placement data automatically.
by several production Pick data on which optimal feeders assignment is specified is created at the same
programs time.
(Refer to "HLC Instruction Manual".)
YES
(2) Reserving production programs with the Production Planning utility and executing the
Reserving production Optimization utility
programs Reserve the program to be used for producing PWBs. When you are to use just
one program, you do not have to reserve it with the Production Planning utility.
When you are to use two or more programs, reserve them with the Production
Planning utility to optimize them at a time. Note that you can use the option for
lessening the number of times feeders are replaced via these programs also.
(3) Down-loading the reserved program(s) onto a station with the Production utility
Down-loading a production
Directly specify the file(s) reserved with the Production Planning utility or program
program onto each station data created with the Program Editing utility.
When you select the [Start] menu command, the data which was divided with the
Optimization utility is down-loaded onto each station.
The HLC enters the Line Monitoring mode until the preset number of PWBs are
produced.
Preparations for production (4) Production preparations (Changeover)
(changeover) With the machine station, adjust the width of the PWB transport path, position and
adjust the reference pin or stopper pin, adjust the backup support pin, check the
nozzle assignments, and install feeders.
After installing a component pick-up device, check and adjust the component
pick-up position.
(5) Teaching
Teaching Be sure to perform the teaching operation to use a BOC mark or IC mark.
Teaching operation is not necessary for the program which has been already used
for production.
(See Chapter 6 "TEACHING".)
Checking the trial-run (6) Trial run

operation Before starting continuous production, perform a trial-run operation once or twice
to check and/or adjust the result of component placement.

Continuous production Produce the preset number of PWBs. When the preset number of PWBs are
produced, the program data is automatically uploaded to the HLC.
(8) Post process
Post process Register the data of production programs which can be reused onto the database.
Check and collect the production management information. To evaluate this
information, execute the Result Summarizer utility.
START
33
3.2 Turning Power ON
3.2.1 Operation sequence from power-on
Power ON Turn on the power switch (breaker).
Menu on display
Zeroing
Press the ORIGIN key.
Select warm-up To execute the warm-up operation,

select [Warm-up] from [Maintenance]
which is selected from the main menu.
(See Chapter 11 "MAINTENANCE".)
READY
Never operate the machine with any power voltages other than
CAUTION those specified by the company.
34
3.3 Basic Operations
3.3.1 Screen organization

Here is a rundown of the basic components making up a screen.
Title bar
Menu bar
Command button
Window border
Status bar
Pull-down menu
Formula bar
Work area
Scroll arrow
Scroll box
35
Title bar:
Shows at its center the name of the job (i.e., the window name).
Pull-down menu:
A menu of command options that appear after you have selected the command
name on the menu bar. The command options that can be selected are shown
differently from those that cannot.
Menu bar:
Lists the names of pull-down menus to be selected. The contents of the menu
bar vary depending on the function you selected.
Window border:
Marks the boundary of the window.
Work area:
Area to which data is entered for creating a program data.
Status bar:
Shows the current conditions of the machine.
Formula bar:
Shows the contents of the cell which at the cursor is located and you can edit
formulas.
Scroll arrow:
Indicates that you can scroll the window in the direction of the arrow to access
more data that are not currently visible on the window.
Scroll box:
Indicates where you are in the contents of a window.
Command button
Displays a menu which is supposed to be frequently called, then allows you to
execute the selected function.
36
3.3.2 Selecting a menu
There are two possible ways to select a pull-down menu from among those contained
in the menu bar.
(1) Using the cursor keys

Press the Alt key to activate the menu bar.
The [File] menu is highlighted.
Press the cursor keys.

Press or to go among the menu items in the menu bar.
Press or to drop down a pull-down menu. Then, press or
to move among the commands displayed in the pull-down menu.
To activate the command you want to select, press the ENTER key.
During these operations, the message line shows the summary of the
highlighted command. Press the ESC key to close the menu.
(2) Using the short-cut keys

Press the Alt key to activate the menu bar.
The [File] menu is highlighted.
37
Press the key corresponding to the starting character of the desired menu
item.
When you press the starting character of the desired command, it

immediately executes the command.
3.3.3 Dialog
If additional information is necessary for the machine to execute a command, a dialog
box appears as soon as the command is selected.
A dialog box may contain the following elements:
(1) Push button

When a push button is selected, it immediately executes the command. Most
dialog boxes contain the OK and Cancel buttons.
(2) Check box

Used to let you choose options or toggle an option on or off. You can select as
many check boxes as you want. When the option is turned on, a check mark ()
appears in the check box.
To change on or off of the option, highlight the option with the cursor, and press
one of the space keys.
38
(3) Radio button
Unlike check boxes, radio buttons are mutually exclusive of one another and you
can select only one at a time.
The small circle z moves with the highlighted cursor. Go to the desired option
to exit from the box.
(4) List box

Gives a list of options to choose from, mainly used for selecting a file name.
The selected option is highlighted. If a list contains too many options to show at
a time, it can be scrolled.
39
3.3.4 Editing
This section describes the basic data editing method and keyboard operations (Page
Up/Page Down, Home/End, Scroll, Insert and Tab keys operation).
Dialog
No. Key Action

1 Back Space Deletes the character to the left of the cursors position, shifting the
character string following the cursor one character space each to the left.
2 Delete Deletes the character at the cursor, shifting the character string following
the cursor one character space each to the left.
3 Cursor keys (Left, Right) Moves through the characters entered in the edit box.
4 ENTER Quits the dialog box operation at the same time you press the OK button.
5 ESC Closes the dialog box.
6 Field selection keys Moves through different boxes.
Rewriting data entered in the edit field (one or more characters have been
entered)
No. Key Action

2 Cursor keys Moves the cursor in the formula bar.
3 ENTER Fetches the characters shown in the formula bar into the cell.
The input cell is not moved.
4 ESC Interrupts the data entry procedure.
Empties the data entered so far if pressed during data entry.
5 Field selection keys Fetches the data in the formula bar into the field and advances the field.
3 10
Editing the data entered in the edit field using the formula bar (after the EDIT
function key has been pressed)
No. Key Action

2 Cursor keys Moves the cursor in the formula bar in the direction of the cursor arrow.
The cursor stops moving ahead when it reaches the starting or ending
character string.
5 Field selection keys Validates your input in the formula bar, then advances the cell to the
direction the key indicates.
Entering the data into a cell of the spread sheet.
No. Key Action

2 Cursor keys Fetches the characters shown in the formula bar into the cell, and moves to
the next cell in the cursor direction.
When the current cell is the first or last cell on a line, it laps round to the
previous or next line. The current cell stays still when you are at the first
cell on the top line or at the last cell on the bottom line.
5 Field selection keys Function in the same manner as the cursor keys do.
(1) Basic editing method

Data entered from the operation panel is entered into the formula bar or edit box.
Data entered in the formula bar is validated at the cursor position by pressing the
ENTER key or moving the cursor. Data entered in the edit box is validated by
pressing any of the filed selection keys or ENTER key.
(2) Keyboard operations

Page up, Page down
When the information covers two or more screen pages, the Page Down key
accesses the following page and the Pageu Up key does the preceding
page.
There is a scroll bar appearing on the right side of the window when
information covers two or more screen pages. It indicates that there is more
information up or down the screen than the one currently shown on the
display. The scroll box inside the scroll bar tells you the approximate location
you are currently viewing in the entire body of information.
3 11
3 12
Home, End
When the information covers two or more screen pages, the Home key
moves the cursor to the beginning of the line and End key does to the end of
the line.
Scroll
If the key is pressed when you are on the top line of a screen page
and if there is more information vertically before it, the key scrolls the
information down one line.
If the key is pressed when you are on the bottom line of a screen
page and if there is more information vertically after it, the key scrolls the
information up one line.
If the key is pressed when you are at the beginning of the line and if
there is more information to the left, the key scrolls the information one
field to the left.
If the key is pressed when you are at the end of the line and if there
is more information to the right, the key scrolls the information one field to
the right.
Insert
The Insert key toggles data entry mode between the Insert mode and
Overtype mode.
Data entry mode Cursor shape

Insert Blinking
Overtype Blinking
3 13
3.4 Starting up or Terminating the System
Windows NT starts up after power-on, then the application manager included as the
software for the main unit is executed: the initialize window appears on the screen.
Figure 3.4.1 Start-up screen

When the system is initialized for a while, the <Returning to ORIGIN> screen appears.
If you do not perform the return-to-origin function, press the <CANCEL> key. When
the system completes the return-to-origin function successfully, the application
manager window appears on the screen.
Figure 3.4.2 <Home-Origin> dialog box
Figure 3.4.3 Zeroing waiting dialog box
3 14
Figure 3.4.4 Main window
To terminate the system, click the <Exit> command button. When you click the <Exit>
button, the confirmation dialog box appears on the screen. When you click the <OK>
button displayed on this dialog box, the shut down process starts, then the system
terminates. If you click the <Cancel> button on this dialog box, the main menu
reappears.
When you click the <Exit> button, the shut-down process confirmation
dialog box opens.
Figure 3.4.5 Shut-down process confirmation dialog box
If you turn off the machine without performing the shut-down process,
CAUTION you may not be able to restart the machine. Be sure to perform the
shut-down process to terminate the system.
When you start up the main unit, two consol screens (under DOS) are
CAUTION started up at the same time. These consol screens are necessary to
control the system. Never close them.
3 15
3.5 Menu Organization
3.5.1 Main Menu
File [F] Editor [E] Production [P] Setup [S] Maintenance [M] Options [O] Help [H]
Program Editor
Database Editor
Pwb Production Warming Up KE-2000 Help
Trial Run Idle mode About Programs
Dry Run Self-Calibration
Machine Management
New [N] Ctrl + N information
Open [O] Ctrl + O Mech-Parameter Setting
Save [S] Ctrl + S MS P t S tti
Save as [A]
File Management [Explorer]
Default Folder Machine Set up Change User Group
Printer Setup Manual Operation User Group Environmental Settings
Print Option Setting
Control Data Management Environment Setting
Exit [X]
Production Program List
Retry List
Production Management Data
Machine Management information
Machine Setup Data
Option Setting Data
Control Data File Storage

Data Manager
3 16
3.5.2 Program editing local menu
This section describes the commands to be used for editing a production program.
Command list
File [F] Edit [E] Data[C] Optimization [O] Display [V] Machine operation [M] Data Base[D] Help [H]
Cut [T] Ctrl + X PWB data [B] Component form Register [B]
Copy [C] Ctrl + C Placement data [P] Component list Call list [C]
Paste [P] Ctrl + V Component data [C] Feeder layout Re-Search [R]
Insert Line [U] Pick data [I] Tool bar
Jump [J] Ctrl + G Vision data [V] Vision Form
Search [S] Ctrl + F Vision List Command [C]
Data completion stalus [S]
Search the next item [N]F7 How to use help [H]
Station data [E]
Replacement [L]
Data coherence check [L] Version information [A]
Cel copy [O] Ctrl +E
Cel Paste [P] Ctrl +R
Change component Name [H]
Matrix copy [M]
Optimization [G] Transport [T] >> PWB load [L]
Divided placement Data [P] Measurement [M] >> PWB eject [E]
Nozzle layout [N] Inspection [I] >> Auto conveyor [A]
Component supply count [S] Confirmation [C] >>
Status Display [D] Management [A] >> Current component [C]
All component [A]
New [N] Ctrl + N

Open [O] Ctrl + O Vision recognition [I]
Save [S] Ctrl + S
Save as [A] Mark [M] >> BOC [B]
File Information [I] Feeder Bank [F]
Coordinate [C] >>
Print [P] >> Program data [P]
Environment setting [C] Nozzle Setup [N] Mark Database [M] Front [F]
Production information [M] Rear [R]
Exit [E]
Optimization [O] >> Option [O]
Supply quantity [S]
Place tracking [P]
Pick tracking [I]
Height tracking [H]
Tool bar
The figure below indicates the contents of the tool bar displayed when you edit a
production program.
3 17
3.5.3 Production local menu
File [F] View [E] Production conditions [P] window [W] Tool [T]
Open [O] Ctrl + O PWB production

Over write Save [S] Ctrl + S Trial
Save as [A] Dryrum
Print [P] Ctrl + P
Print prev [V]
Print set up [R]
Exit [X] Parts no. set up
Operation option
Unplaced list
Edit Data
Supplier information
Retry List
Check
Toolbar [T]
Status Bar [S] Verify Current check
Production status
Verify all check
Production Conditions
Laser check
Management Info
Production Info
3 18
3.5.4 Machine setup local menu
File [F] Setting Group [G] Disp [V] Help [H]
Registered nzl. no table [L] ATC nozzle setup [A] Tool bar [T]
Read Nzl. data [R] Vacuum value without position [U] Status bar [S]
Exiting [X] Reference pin position [R]
Shape clamp position [F]
MTC shuttle pick position [P]
MTS position offset [O]
Component scrap position [T]
IC conveyor belt position [I]
Head Wait Position [W]
Device enable[D]
Multi-station line [L]
PWB conveyor [C]
Signal light [S]
Bad mark sensor teaching [B]
3 19
3.6 File Operation
This section describes how to operate a production program file.
3.6.1 Create New

Operation 1: Select the [File] command on the menu bar, then [Create New]
command on the File menu.
Operation 2: Select the button on the tool bar.
This operation clears production program data.
3.6.2 Open
Operation 1: Select the [File] command on the menu bar, then [Open] command on
the File menu.
This operation selects a production program, then loads it to the system.
Figure 3.6.2 File load dialog box
3 20
3.6.3 Overwrite & Save
Operation 1: Select the [File] command on the menu bar, then [Overwrite & Save]
This operation saves a production program with the current name.
Note: Only if you change data on the Basic setting screen of PWB data, move to
another screen, then save the data.
Even though you perform the save operation for the changed data on the Basic
setting screen, the machine does not save it.
3.6.4 Save As
Operation: Select the [File] command on the menu bar, then [Save As] command
on the File menu.
This operation renames the current production program, then saves it.
Figure 3.6.4 <Save As> dialog box

As long as you follow the Windows file name conventions, you can assign a long file
name or Japanese file name to a program. However, to maintain the compatibility
with the KE-700 series of products, we recommend that you assign to a production
program an English file name whose length is eight characters or less.
Note: Only if you change data on the Basic setting screen of PWB data, move to
another screen, then save the data.
Even though you perform the save operation for the changed data on the Basic
setting screen, the machine does not save it.
3 21
3.6.5 File management
Start up Explorer to manage files.
Explorer allows you to delete or move a file other than a production

program. However, if you delete or move a file other than a production
CAUTION program, you may not be able to restart the machine. Never delete
nor move files other than those in the PRG folder.
If you change the extension of a production program, the machine

CAUTION cannot recognize the production program. Never change the
extension of any production program.
3 22
3.6.6 Default Folder
This command sets up the initial directory from/to which a production program is to be
read/written.
Figure 3.6.6 < Default Folder > dialog box
3.6.7 Setting a Printer and Printing
Setting a printer
Add or set a printer used to print data.
1. Select the [File] command on the menu bar, then click the [Printer Setup]
2. Click the Add Printer icon or an existing printer icon.
3. Follow the instructions displayed with the Printer wizard to set a printer.
Figure 3.6.7.1 Setting a printer

Print
This command prints the production management information, machine operation
information (by the [Component lifetime management information] command),
machine setup conditions and operation option settings.
When you select the [Print] command, the following sub menu appears on the
screen.
Figure 3.6.7.2 Print
3 23
3.6.7.1 Production program list
This command prints a list of production programs.
When you select the [File] command on the menu bar, the [Print] command on the
displayed menu, then the [Production program list] command, the dialog box
appears on the screen as shown in the figure below.
Figure 3.6.7.1.1 "Print the production program list" dialog box
When you click the <View> button, the dialog box for selecting a folder appears on
the screen. Select the desired folder, then click the <OK> button. The dialog box
disappears and the path of the selected folder appears in the "Path" entry box of the
"Print production program list" dialog box.
When you enter the path of the desired folder in the "Path" entry box, then click the
<Print> button, the machine starts printing the list.
When you enter the path of the desired folder in the "Path" entry box, then click the
<Save to file> button, the dialog box for saving a file appears on the screen.
Specify the path and the file name, then click the <Save> button. The selected file
is output as a text file.
When you click the <Cancel> button, the screen displayed before you select the
[Print] command reappears.
3.6.7.2 Retry List

File menu, and the [Retry List] command on the displayed menu, the PRINT
dialog box appears as shown in Figure 3.6.7.2.1.
3 24
Figure 3.6.7.2.1 PRINT dialog box
<Print> When you click this button, the system starts printing.
<Save to file> When you click this button, the File Save dialog box appears on
the screen. Specify the path and file name, then click the <Save>
button. The specified data is output as a text file.
<Cancel> When you click this button, the display returns to the screen
displayed before you selected the [Print] command.
3.6.7.3 Production Management Data

This command prints the production management information.
displayed menu, then the [Production Management Data] command, the dialog box
appears on the screen as shown in the figure below.
Figure 3.6.7.3.1 "Print production management data" dialog box
The item checked with a "V" mark is enabled (turned on).

- Select data to be output, then click the <Print> button. The system starts
printing the production management information.
- When you select the output type, or data to be output, and click the <Save to
file> button, the dialog box for saving a file appears on the screen. Specify
the path and file name, then click the <Save> button. The specified file is
output as a text file.
- When you click the <Cancel> button, the system returns to the condition
before you clicked the [Print] command.
3 25
3.6.7.4 Machine Management Information
This command prints the machine operation information.
displayed menu, then the [Machine Management Information] command, the dialog
box appears on the screen as shown in the figure below.
) - When you click the <Print> button, the system starts printing the machine
operation information.
- When you select the output type, or data to be output, and click the <Save to file>
button, the dialog box for saving a file appears on the screen. Specify the path
and file name, then click the <Save> button. The specified file is output as a text
file.
- When you click the <Cancel> button, the system returns to the condition before
you clicked the [Print] command.
3.6.7.5 Machine Setup Data

This command prints the machine setup information.
displayed menu, then the [Machine Setup Data] command, the dialog box appears
on the screen as shown in the figure below.
) - When you click the <Print> button, the system starts printing the machine setup
information.
- When you select the output type, or data to be output, and click the <Save to file>
button, the dialog box for saving a file appears on the screen. Specify the path
and file name, then click the <Save> button. The specified file is output as a text
file.
- When you click the <Cancel> button, the system returns to the condition before
you clicked the [Print] command.
3 26
3.6.7.6 Operational Setting Data
This command prints the operation options information.
When you select select the [File] command on the menu bar, select the [Print]
command on the displayed menu, then the [Operational Setting Data] command, the
dialog box appears on the screen as shown in the figure below.
When you click the <Print> button, the system starts printing the operation options
information.
When you select the output type, or data to be output, and click the <Save to file>
button, the dialog box for saving a file appears on the screen. Specify the path and
file name, then click the <Save> button. The specified file is output as a text file.
When you click the <Cancel> button, the system returns to the condition before you
clicked the [Print] command.
3 27
3.6.8 Saving a control data file
This command saves the basic control data, which is used to control the machine,
onto a floppy disk. The data to be saved here is very important to:
operate the EPU (External Program Editing Unit) according to the specifications of the
main unit, and
find out the conditions unique to the machine when a trouble occurs.
) Toinstructions
save a control data file, use the Wizard as shown below.
displayed on the screen.
Follow the
3.6.8.1 Selecting a task

Normally, you can select the task File backup only.
To save the control data, click the <Next> button.
When you click the <Cancel> button, the system cancels the control data save
operation.
Please select work.
Back Next Cancel
3.6.8.2 Selecting where to save the control data

Select the radio button Floppy disk.
Please select the place of the backup.
Back Next Cancel
3 28
3.6.8.3 Starting the save operation
When you click the <Action> button, the system starts saving the control data on a
floppy disk.
The backup is executed. Please push the action button when you can.
Back Finish Cancel
3.6.8.4 Finishing the save operation

When the system finishes saving a control file, the following dialog box appears on
the screen. Click the <Finish> button, then eject the floppy disk and store it at a safe
place.
The backup is executed. Please push the action button when you can.
Back Finish Cancel
3 29
3.6.9 Exit
This command executes the shut-down process to quit the system.
See Page 3-13 (3-4 " Starting up or Terminating the System").
Figure 3.6.9 Shut-down confirmation dialog box
If you turn off the machine without performing the shut-down process,
CAUTION you may not be able to restart the machine. Be sure to perform the
shut-down process to terminate the system.
3 30
3.7 Corrective Action for A Power Failure
When the power supply to a KE-2000 malfunctions, the power monitor function of the
UPS is activated.
If you do not operate the machine for the certain time of period, the machine saves
the production program, production management information, information required to
restart production, and device management information, and perform the shutdown
process.
3.7.1 Process to be performed when a power failure occurs
Step 1. Preparation for the automatic shutdown

When the machine detects a power failure, the following dialog box appears on the
screen.
OK: clears the error message

Figure 3.7.1.1 Dialog box displayed when the machine detects a power failure (1)
Figure 3.7.1.2 Dialog box displayed when the machine detects a power failure (2)
If you do not perform any operation when the screen shown in Figure 3.7.1.1
appears, the screen shown in Figure 3.7.1.2 (2) appears. The machine counts
down the remaining time. When the remaining time reaches 0, the machine
displays the automatic shutdown dialog box (see Figure 3.7.1.4).
When you select the <CANCEL> button

When you click the <CANCEL> button, the machine interrupts the current
operation such as PWB production.
In such a case, the current operation is interrupted for several minutes
(approximately 3 minutes as the factory setting), so manually save data and shut
down the system.
3 31
When you do not start the shutdown process even though the preset time passes,
the machine displays the following dialog box, and then starts the shutdown
process automatically.

In this case, note that the machine
does not display any message for asking
you whether to save data automatically.
After shut down, the machine operates in
the same manner as when you do not
click the <CANCEL> button.
Figure 3.7.1.3 Shut down start dialog box
Step 2. Saving a file

After saving the information required to continue the current operation as a temporary
file, quit the application forcibly.
Figure 3.7.1.4 File saving dialog box
(Log off/on The regulated screen appears.)
Figure 3.7.1.5 System message

This file saving operation does not overwrite any user data, but saves data as a
temporary file.
When you quit the application forcibly, the system is shut down without displaying any
inquiry message regardless the machine status.
3 32
Step 3. Shutdown process
Preparation for turning off the power supply

After you quit the application, the machine starts the shutdown process for
Windows NT. You can turn off the machine at this point, and the following
screen appears.
Figure 3.7.1.6 Shutdown screen
CAUTION Even though you click the <Restart> button on the screen above (Figure
3.7.1.6), the system may not start up normally. Never click the <Restart>
button.
Turning off the power supply from the UPS

You can turn off the main power supply (KE-2000 main unit) manually. However,
if the main power supply is not turned off at this point, the power supply from the
UPS is turned off automatically after approximately three minutes.
3.7.2 Recovering process after a power failure occurs (turning on the machine)
At start-up of the system, the machine checks the files saved at power failure, and
displays the confirmation dialog box if any file exists.
3.7.2.1 Confirmation message when the machine detects a file saved during power
failure
Figure 3.7.2.1 Emergency backup file confirmation dialog box
Yes: Recovers the data such as a production program and production

management information, and returns the system to the original status.
No: Does not recover the data used before a power failure occurs.
3 33
If the machine detects a file error during data recovery
OK: Deletes all of the files saved

during power failure, and returns
the data to its initial status.
Figure 3.7.2.1.1 Emergency backup file clearing message
Confirmation for processing of recovered files
Yes: deletes all of the backed up files.

No: quits the initialization process
without deleting the backed-up
files.
Figure 3.7.2.1.2 Recovered files clear confirmation message
Confirmation message if the backed-up files are not recovered
Yes: deletes all of the backed-up files.

No: quits the initialization process
without deleting the backed-up
files.
Figure 3.7.2.1.3 Backed-up files clear confirmation message
3 34
CHAPTER 4 DATA ENTRY PROCEDURE
4.1 Overview
You have to create a production program before producing PWBs. To create or edit
production program data, start up the Program Editing utility, then enter each data.
Click the Edit command button to start up the Program Editing utility.
When the Production Program Editing utility starts up, a screen appears as shown
below.
PWB ID
When the Program Editing utility starts up, UNTITLED appears on the right side of the
title bar as the program name, and the PWB ID column on the right side of the status
bar becomes blank.
When you display the tool bar from the menu bar, the operability improves.
To create or edit a production program, click the data title to be create/edited, or select
[Data (C)] on the menu bar to open the desired data.
41
When you display the tool bar, a screen appears as shown below.
On the record box
Record box position

The record box is displayed on the left side of the horizontal scroll bar in the same
manner as the database is.
Start PREV Record NEXT End Total number of

button button number button button records
Record box function on the list screen

Even on the list screen, the record box functions in the same manner as on the form
screen. On the list screen, the PREV and NEXT buttons move up/down the cursor,
the Start and End buttons jump to the start and end positions respectively, and entry
in the record number box jumps to the position specified with your entry.
Validation when you enter a number directly
When you enter the record number directly, your entry is not reflected on the screen
unless you press the Return key. If you press any other button (such as the Start,
End, PREV and NEXT buttons) before you press the Return key, your entry is not
validated, and the pressed button functions.
42
Keyboard operations
When you use a keyboard to enter a value, you do not have to move the input focus
to the record box.
Record box display
The record box is displayed on the PWB data (circuit layout), Placement data,
Component list, Component form (Package, Centering, Expansion, Inspection and
Adhesive), Pick data, Vision data, Adhesive list and Adhesive form screens.
Data types
Production program data which has to be created with the Program Editing utility is
shown in the table below.
Table 4.1.1.1 Data types making up production program data
Data type Description 2010 2020 2030

2040
PWB data Data on a PWB such as the PWB dimensions and coordinates

of a BOC mark
Placement data Data such as the coordinates of a component placement

position and the name of components to be placed on a board
Component data Data necessary to center a component such as the dimensions

of a component and package style
Pick data Data on the position to which a component is to be fed from a

tape feeder or tray.
Vision data Data used to recognize a component with the VCS.

4.1.1 Procedure for creating data
4.1.1.1 Creating a new production program

Create a new production program in the following order:
PWB data
Placement data
Component data
Pick data
Vision data
Each type of data is related with each other, so create all of these types of data in
this order. If you open data which is not created completely, the machine does not
accept your data entry.
If PWB data is not ready to be created, you cannot open any other type of
data.
If even one record of Placement data is not created yet, you cannot enter
Component data, Pick data, nor Vision data: until the component name is
entered as Placement data, the machine does not prepare data area for
Component data.
You cannot create Pick data until the associated Component data is created.
See Sections 4.5 "PWB Data", 4.6 "Placement Data", 4.7 "Component Data", 4.8
"Pick Data", 5.2 "Vision Data Input" and for details.
43
4.1.1.2 Modifying a created production program
You can open any type of data in any order if a program is created (which satisfies
the requirements above). Open the data to be changed or added, then edit it.
4.1.2 Using the component Database

The component database function is incorporated into the Program Editing utility.
This function stores Component data in a Component database file, then reads the
stored data into a production program when necessary.
Since Component data is bulky, it is tiresome to enter it with a keyboard or mouse. If
you store Component data in the Component database, data is searched from this
database when you enter the component placement coordinates or component name
as Placement data. If the entered component name is found in the Component
database, the associated data is loaded into the production program data.
There are two methods for registering data into the Component database:
editing and registering data pieces one by one, and
specifying a production program, then registering the appropriate data from it
at a time.
When you specify the production program which was used for production and register
it, the most updated data is always stored in the Component database.
See the section on 4.13. Database for how to use the Component database. To use
the Component database, there should be Component database specified with the
[Environment setting] command provided on the File menu and the Component
database function should be enabled.
44
4.1.3 Menus and their corresponding guidance messages
The guidance messages displayed on the Program Editing menu are shown below:
Menu Guidance
Create New Creates a new production program file.
Open Loads a production program file.
Overwrite & Save Saves the currently edited production program file by writing over the old one.
Save As Saves the currently edited production program file with a new file name.
File information Displays a file name and directory name and inputs a user ID.
Print Prints out a production program file, nozzle assignment, and production management information.
Environment setting Sets conditions of loading permanent information and conditions of recalling files simultaneously.
End of program editing Ends the production program editing.
Cut Cuts out a specified range of data and copies it onto the paste buffer.
Copy Copies a specified range data onto the paste buffer.
Paste Pastes the data in the paste buffer to a specified area.
Insert line Adds a blank line next to the specified line.
Double line Duplicates a line.
Jump Jumps to a specified line.
Search Searches a specified component ID or name.
Search next item Searches the next component ID or name.
Cell copy Copies data (of a cell) onto the paste buffer.
Cell paste Pastes the data in the paste buffer (one cell at a time) to a specified data.
Sort Sorts component data or adhesive data.
Change Component Name Changes a component name.
Extension and paste Expands coordinates to paste them in the matrix format.
Vision copy Copies Recognition requirements data.
PWB data Edits PWB data
Placement data Edits placement data.
Component data Edits component data.
Pick data Edits pick data.
Vision data Edits data required for vision centering.
Station data Edits data specific to each station.
Data completion status Displays the completion status of data.
Data coherence check Checks whether the production program file which is being edited matches the line.
Optimization Executes optimization or specifies an option of optimization.
Divided placement data Displays placement data for each station.
Nozzle layout Displays nozzles for each station.
No. of components to be Sets number of each type of components (reels) to be supplied.
supplied
Status display Displays the condition of optimization.
Component form Displays the Component Data Form screen.
Component list Displays the Component Data List screen.
Feeder layout Displays the pick data list for each station with graphic.
Toolbar Enables or disables display of the toolbar.
Register Registers data onto a database.
Call listing Loads data from a list of database.
Re-call all Loads data from a database and permanent information simultaneously.
Table of contents Displays the usage of the Program Editing utility.
How to use Help Displays the usage of Help.
Version Information Displays version information of Production Program Editing.
Auto. PWB width alignment Sets Auto. PWB width alignment control.
control
Single Measures a size of single component.
Continuous Measures sizes of multiple components continuously.
BOC Corrects coordinates with BOC.
Placement position Monitors placement positions with camera.
Pick position Monitors pick positions with camera.
Pick height Monitors pick height.
Mark database Changes or deletes name of registered mark data.
While editing a production program, the machine displays the input range for numeric
data at the input position.
45
4.2 File
Program name and file name

Be sure to assign a program name to production program data. When data is stored
on a disk, the machine appends an extension to this program name to complete a file
name. An extension is one of the regulated identifiers.
A program name is used to store a program on a storage device as a file.
Therefore, assign a program name which is allowed by MS-DOS as a file name.
Note that an extension is reserved depending on the usage of a program, then
automatically appended: you cannot change it.
UNTITLED
The program name UNTITLED is a reserved word which is automatically used as a
name after start up of the Program Editing utility. When you select the [Create
new] command on the menu bar, a program name is initialized to this name
automatically.
When you try to save the UNTITLED program, the Save As dialog box is invoked
onto the screen. Assign an appropriate name to the program.
When you invoke the Save As command, the same dialog box appears on the
screen also.
Other
After you change a program file name other than UNTITLED, data is immediately
saved when you invoke the Save command.
PWB ID
Write a comment on the PWB to be produced as the PWB ID to facilitate program
distinctions.
You can enter a PWB ID as PWB data.
The File (F) menu is configured as shown below:
46
4.2.1 Create New
This command initializes the current data, then assigns the program name
UNTITLED to the data. Before initializing the current data, the machine checks to
see if the program has been changed. If changed, the machine displays the dialog
box which indicates that data being created will be lost.
4.2.2 Open
This command reads a program stored on a disk into the machine. Before reading
it, the machine checks to see if the current program has been changed. If changed,
the machine displays the dialog box which indicates that data being created will be
lost.
When you select the [Open] command, the dialog box shown below appears on the
screen. Select a file to be read.
Selecting a file
Directly selecting a file name from the dialog box shown above
Enter a file name with a keyboard, then press the key.
Specifying a file name in the list box

Double-click the desired file name or move the cursor over it, then click the
<OK> button.
The scroll bar appears when all of file names cannot be shown on the screen.
47
Specifying a file type
Change the file type to be displayed on the File name window.
A production program is saved with the file type specified when you created it.
See the "List of file types" below to select a file type.
List of file types

File types displayed in the
Description of a program file
pull-down list box
all the files (*.*) All the files stored in the folder
2010 format file (e41) Files created with a KE-2010 machine main unit
HLC file (g4h) Files created with HLC Version 4.5 and a KE-2000 series machine
HLC file (h4h) Files created with HLC Version 5.0 or later and a KE-2000 series machine
HLC file (g3h) Files created with HLC Version 4.0 to 4.4x.
HLC file (g2h) Files created with HLC Version 3 or earlier
730, 750 format file (g3c) Files created with a KE-730/730plus/750 machine or EPU for a
KE-730/730plus/750 machine
740, 760 format file (g3g) Files created with a KE-740/760 machine or EPU for a KE-740/760 machine
775 format file (g3d) Files created with a KD-775 machine
710 format file (g2c) Files created with a KE-710 machine or EPU for a KE-710 machine.
720 format file (g2g) Files created with a KE-720 machine or EPU for a KE-720 machine.
770 format file (g2d) Files created with a KD-770 machine.
Opt. divided file #1 (h41) File divided for the No. 1 machine of the KE-2000 series MSL line
Opt. divided file #1 (g41) File divided for the No.1 machine of the HLC version 4.5 MSL line.
Opt. divided file #1 (g31) File divided for the No. 1 machine of the KE-700 or earlier series MSL line
48
Note: When reading a file, the machine checks to see if a position specified in Pick
data is overlapped with the IC collection belt position. If the machine
detects any overlap, it displays the warning message as shown below.
Note : When reading a file, the machine cannot read data associated with Vision
data or Adhesive data.
If data to be read includes such data, the machine cannot read any data.
Vision and adhesive data stored in Component data is changed.
4.2.3 Overwrite & Save

This command stores the current program on a disk as a file. If the program name is
UNTITLED, the Save As dialog box appears as shown below. When a file name
other than UNTITLED is assigned to a program name, the program is immediately
stored.
4.2.4 Save As
This command stores the current program on a disk with another name.
49
File name
Initially, the name of a file which is being edited is set. To change it, directly enter a
name here.
You can change a directory or drive in the same manner as when you execute the
[Open] command.
Save as type
To change the file format, change it in the this Save as type column.
Note that you can convert a file only if you select the [Save As] command. If you
create a file, then execute the Optimization utility without saving it, the Save dialog
box appears on the screen. However, you cannot convert a file in this case. If
you select to perform the backward conversion to save a file, the saved file is not
read into the machine. Therefore, even though you change its title, and convert it,
the current title does not change.
File type list

File format Description of a program file
2010 format file (e41)
Specify a file name to be assigned to the file you want to save.
710 format file (g2c) Files for a KE-710 machine or EPU for a KE-710 machine
720 format file (g2g) Files for a KE-720 machine or EPU for a KE-720 machine
730 format file (g3c) Files for a KE-730/730plus machine or EPU for a KE-730/730plus machine
750 format file (g3c) Files for a KE-750 machine or EPU for a KE-750 machine
2010 format (e41) Files for a KE-2010 machine or EPU for a KE-2010 machine
770 format file (g2d) Files for a KD-770 machine or EPU for a KD-770 machine
775 format file (g3d) Files for a KD-775 machine or EPU for a KD-775 machine
4 10
When you select the <OK> button on the Save As dialog box, the machine
displays the User ID entry screen as shown below.
This dialog box displays a file name and directory name, and allows you to enter the
user ID. When you want to keep the current user ID unchanged, click the <OK>
button after entering the user ID. The user ID is saved in a production program file.
If you do not need it, click the <Cancel> button. The file is saved without any user
ID.
4.2.5 File Information

When you select the [File Information] command, you can change the user ID,
and/or display the file name and directory.
The same dialog box as that shown above appears on the screen, which appears
also when you select the [Save As] command.
4.2.6 Print
This command prints a file to be edited, nozzle information divided with the
Optimization utility, or the production management information.
When you select the [Print] command, the screen changes as shown below:
When you select the menu item [Program Data], the machine prints the data created
with the Program Editing utility. When selecting the menu item [Production
Information], the machine prints the management information after production.
4 11
4.2.6.1 Program Data
When you select the menu item [Program Data], the dialog box appears as shown
below.
Mode
As the default value, Each station is selected.
Output data
Check the box located next to the data to be printed.
Data whose total number of records is 0 (displayed with the [Data completion
status] command) is dimmed to indicate that it cannot be selected.
Depending on the print format selected with the Mode item, boxes of data types
which can be selected are automatically checked.
4 12
Text Out, Print and Cancel buttons
Print: starts printing the selected data.
Cancel: closes the dialog box displayed on the screen.
Text Out: Outputs data as text.
When you click the <Text Out> button, the dialog box appears on the
screen as shown in the figure below.
Specify where to save the text and the name on this dialog box.
The default setting in the "Save in" box is the directory/folder under which
the production program file is stored.
Placement data
Select the input order of Placement data.
Component data
Select the Component data window type: Details or List.
Pick data
Select Pick data mode:
Input order
Position order
Feeder setup sheet Excluding comment
Feeder setup sheet Including comment
4 13
Station selection (Data which can be printed depending on the model name)
Data types which can be printed vary depending on the model of a machine.
For a 2010 or 2030

PWB data
Placement data
Component data
Pick data
For a 2020 or 2040
PWB data
Placement data
Component data
Pick data
Vision data
If the following dialog box appears on the screen after printing the selected data, it
indicates that the program data has been modified after you executed the
Optimization utility the last time. Note that the currently displayed data may be
different from the optimized data.
<OK> button: Continues printing data although its contents are different from
those of the optimized file.
<Cancel> button: Terminates printing, then returns to the dialog box previously
When you execute the Optimization utility again, the displayed program data
becomes the same as the newly optimized data, so the dialog box shown above
will not appear on the screen.
After you select a menu or select the <OK> button on the dialog box above, the
following dialog box appears on the screen.
4 14
4.2.6.2 Nozzles setup
The permanent nozzle setup, the nozzle setup performed by optimization, and the
number of nozzles are printed out.
Select Print (P), then Nozzle Setup (N) on the File menu as shown below.
When you select the [Nozzle Setup] command, the dialog box appears on the
<Print>: starts printing.

<Text Out>: displays the "Text Out" dialog box on the screen.
<CANCEL>: cancels printing.
When you click the <Print> or <Text Out> button, HLC prints data as shown below:
Nozzle setup condition

The nozzle numbers and the number of nozzles assigned newly when you
execute optimization are to be printed.
The result varies depending on the setting of Nozzle on the Arrangements
tab of the Optimization dialog box.
ATC permanent nozzle information

The permanent nozzle setup is to be printed.
Nozzle setup with optimization

Nozzles newly assigned with optimization are to be printed.
The result varies depending on the setting Nozzle on the Arrangements tab
of the Optimization dialog box.
4 15
4.2.6.3 Production Information
Select the [Print] command on the File menu, then click the [Production
Information] command.
When you select the [Production Information] command, the dialog box appears on
the screen as shown in the figure below.

4 16
4.2.6.4 Optimization
This command prints the current optimization option settings.
4.2.6.4.1 Option
Select the [Print] command on the File menu, the [Optimization] command, then
the [Option] command in this order. The machine prints all option items.
When you select the [Option] command, the dialog box appears on the screen
as shown in the figure below.

4 17
4.2.6.4.2 Supply quantity
Select the [Print] command on the File menu, the [Optimization] command, then
the [Supply quantity] command in this order.
When you select the [Supply quantity] command, the dialog box appears on the

4 18
4.2.7 Environment setting
This command sets the environment for editing a program.
When you select the [Environment setting] command on the File menu, the following
dialog box appears on the screen.
Environment
This menu item specifies whether to save the environment set when you quit the
Program Editing utility.
When you select Yes, the following items are reproduced at start up of the
Program Editing utility the next time:
1. Display/Not display of the tool bar
2. File name
3. Window size
When you select No, a screen for a new file (Basic setup screen) appears when
the Program Editing utility starts for the first time after start-up of the system (the
name of the file used the last time cannot be automatically read into the machine).
When you start up the Program Editing utility for the second time or later, the
production program data you edited last time appears on the screen. However, if
another production program is read into the system with the [File] command or
[Production] command provided on the menu bar, it appears on the screen.
4 19
When you open the Program Editing utility with Yes selected in the Prompt to
column, the basic setup screen opens when you select the [Create new] command
to create a new file. When you are to edit the saved new file, this file is
automatically read into the machine at start up of the Program Editing utility, then the
Dimension window opens.
The settings made on the Environment setting dialog box are automatically saved
regardless of the Prompt to setting.
Division
This menu items sets the display order of the divided Placement data.
Prompt to optimization on exit

When you select Yes: the system displays the message that asks you to
optimize data if you have not optimized it.
When you select No: the system performs the normal quit process.
Database file
This menu item specifies the file name of a database file to be used, and specifies
whether to use the specified database file when a production program is edited.
As a Component database file name, specify the full path name including a drive
name. The extension of the file name is fixed to .MDB. Even though you specify
another extension, it is replaced with .MDB.
To specify whether to use the specified Component database file to edit a production
program, check or uncheck the check box Used. When checked, it invokes the
specified Component database file when a program is created. As the default
setting, the check box is not checked. To use the Component database file to edit
a production program, check this check box. When you click the <Refer to> button,
the dialog box appears on the screen.
Default nozzle selection

When creating Component data on the No. 500 nozzle, the system prompts you to
select which No. nozzle is to be set, No. 500 or No. 502/503 as the default nozzle.
Notification of database entry completion (HLC Ver. 5.2)

Specify whether to have HLC notify you of completion of data registration on the
database or not.
No is selected by default.
4 20
4.2.8 Exit
This command exits from the Program Editing utility.
If a program is edited and not saved, the following dialog box appears on the
screen.
Yes: Saves a program. After saving, the machine exits from the Program
Editing utility.
No: Exits from the Program Editing utility without saving a program.
Cancel: Terminates the Exit process.
4 21
4.3 Editing
When you select the [Edit] command on the menu bar, the following commands menu
appears on the screen.
Selecting the range of data

To cut or copy data, select the data range to be copied or cut in advance.
When you drag the trackball, the lines to be selected are highlighted.
When you press the up or down arrow key while holding the SHIFT key of a keyboard,
the lines to be selected are highlighted.
Every time you press the Page UP key or Page Down key while holding down the
SHIFT key, a page (lines displayed on the screen) is selected one by one
sequentially.
4.3.1 Cut
This command deletes the line(s) which is (are) selected and highlighted. The
deleted data cannot be used with the [Paste] command.
After deletion, data preceded by the deleted data is moved up to the deleted line(s).
If you do not specify the data range to be cut, this command is disabled.
4.3.2 Copy
This command loads the data which is selected and highlighted into the memory
buffer. To paste it in another data, execute the [Paste] command.
4 22
4.3.3 Paste
This command inserts the data which was cut or copied into the memory buffer at or
before which the cursor is located.
After you select the [Cut] command, the following dialog box appears on the screen.
When you specify the X pitch and Y pitch, you can execute the incremental copy
function which copies data with adding or subtracting the specified values to/from
the X placement position and Y placement position.
After executing the [Paste] function for Placement data, all of the component IDs are
set to # and data is pasted.
If there is no data in the memory buffer, this command is disabled.
No. of copies: Specifies the number of times for copying data. The default
value is 1.
X pitch: Specifies the amount to increment or decrement the placement
position in the X direction. The default value is 0.00.
Y pitch: Specifies the amount to increment or decrement the placement
position in the Y direction. The default value is 0.00.
OK: Executes the Paste command.
Cancel: Cancels the Paste command.
Example of the paste result

When normally executed
Example)
Component IDs X Y Angle Component name
R1 5.00 10.00 45.00 1608-A
R2 10.00 10.00 0.00 1608-A
No. of copies 3 X Pitch: 0.50
Y Pitch: 1.00
# 5.50 11.00 45.00 1608-A
# 10.50 11.00 0.00 1608-A
# 6.00 12.00 45.00 1608-A
# 11.00 12.00 0.00 1608-A
# 6.50 13.00 45.00 1608-A
# 11.50 13.00 0.00 1608-A
The copied block is inserted above the specified line.

All of the Component IDs are set to #.
The input focus is located at the first inserted Component ID.
4 23
When an error occurs
In the following cases, an error occurs, and the machine displays the respective error
dialog box as shown below.
When the maximum number of data records exceeds the input limit
OK: Cancels the copy operation. No data is copied.
When the placement position exceeds the PWB or circuit layout
OK: Continues the copy operation. The range over mark is appended to an
error data record.
Cancel: Cancels the copy operation.
4 24
4.3.4 Insert line
This command inserts a blank line at the cursor position. After a blank line is
inserted, the cursor moves to the leftmost field of the inserted blank line.
4.3.5 Double line

This command copies the line at which the cursor is located, then inserts it between
the original line and the next line. After the line is copied, then inserted, the cursor
moves to the leftmost field of the copied line.
If you copy a line from Placement data, the component ID becomes #, and other
items are all copied.
Note that the original pickup coordinates are copied to the destination line if you
copy a line of an MTC/MTS component or DTS component. Even though you enter
a number of levels or lane, HLC will not calculate the pickup coordinates
automatically.
If you copy a line from Pick data, the component name and package style are
copied, and other items are initialized.
4.3.6 Jump
Specify the line number. If the machine finds the specified line number within the
screen, the cursor moves to the line. If the machine finds it outside of the displayed
screen, the screen scrolls so that the found line is located at the center of the screen.
When you select the [Jump] command, the following dialog box appears on the
screen. Specify the line number to jump to. If the specified line is beyond the
input data area, the machine jumps to the last line.
4.3.7 Search
This command searches a command ID or command name. Specify the search
criteria on the following dialog box, then click the OK button to start searching the
specified character string.
If the machine finds the character string within the displayed window according to the
specified criteria, the cursor moves to that position, while if the machine finds it outside the
displayed area, the screen scrolls so that the found line is shown at the center of the screen.
4 25
If the machine does not find any character string, the following dialog box appears
on the screen.
The entered character string is memorized until you specify a new character string.
When you execute the [Search next item] command, the character string specified in
the Search characters field is to be searched toward the direction checked in the
[Direction] item.
When you check the check box Search for incomplete the system retrieves data
not completely created. Note that if you check this box, you cannot select any of
the items: Comp. ID, Comp. Name, Adhe. Name and All in agreement.
4.3.8 Search next item

This command searches a character string which is specified with the [Search]
command. The search criteria used the last time are applied to this command from
lines other than the first line.
4.3.9 Cell copy

This command reads data of the cell at which the cursor is located into the memory
buffer. To paste it over the displayed data, execute the [Cell paste] command.
This [Cell copy] command can be selected only when you are editing Placement
data.
This command is effective for the cells X, Y, Angle and Component name
only.
4.3.10 Cell paste

This command overwrites the corresponding item on the line the cursor is located
with data stored in the memory buffer.
The memory buffer keeps the same data until you start editing another type of data
(executable continuously).
The [Cell paste] command can be selected only when you are editing Placement
data.
4 26
4.3.11 Sort
This command is selectable on the Component list screen or Adhesive data
screen.
Entering Sort mode

When you select the [Sort] command, the component names are displayed in
ascending order on the Component list (according to the JIS code, but upper
case letters are not distinguished from lower case letters).
The sorted result is maintained even on the Component form screen.
The machine puts a check mark next to the [Sort] command to indicate that
the data is sorted.
Canceling Sort mode
In the following cases, Sort mode is canceled, then the Component list is
displayed in the input order. The check mark disappears from the [Sort]
command displayed on the menu.
Select the [Sort] command although this command is already checked.
If you edit data so that the order of the Component list data is changed
(addition, deletion or change of a component name), Sort mode is
automatically canceled.
4 27
4.3.12 Change Component Name
This command allows you to change a component name.
When you change a component name only, the name is changed and the contents
remain the same. When you select the [Change Component Name] command,
the following dialog box appears on the screen.
The component name before changed is displayed in the Edit box Component
Name: from. The component name before changed is displayed and highlighted
in the Edit box Component Name: to.
Enter a new component name in the Edit box Component Name: to, then
click the <OK> button. The component name is changed to a new name you
specified. When you click the <CANCEL> button, the component name is not
changed, then the machine returns to the screen displayed before you select
the [Change Component Name] command.
If the same component name already exists, the following dialog box appears
on the screen.
Note: This command can be selected on the following screens:

Component list
Component form
Pick data All component names are replaced with the specified
name.
Vision data All component names are replaced with the specified
name.
Placement data All component names are replaced with the
specified name.
4 28
4.3.13 Matrix Copy
For Placement data, this command inserts the data read into the memory buffer
with the [Cut] or [Copy] command at or before the cursor position.
For Pick data, this command copies the line at which the cursor is located, then
inserts the copied line to the next line. After this command is executed, the cursor
moves to the leftmost input field of the newly copied line.
When you specify the items No. of copies X, No. of copies Y, X Pitch, and Y
Pitch, the machine copies the data in a matrix with adding or subtracting the
entered valued to/from the placement position in the X direction and that in the Y
direction respectively.
After the [Matrix Copy] command is executed, all of the component IDs are
changed to #.
For Pick data, this command can be executed for tray components (fed with a tray
holder or ATS only).
For Pick data, you cannot execute this command by selecting two or more data
records.
No. of copies X: specifies the number of times for copying in the X direction.
The default value is 1 for both Placement data and Pick data.
No. of copies Y: specifies the number of times for copying in the Y direction.
The default value is 1 for both Placement data and Pick data.
X Pitch: sets the amount to increment or decrement the placement or pick
position in the X direction.
The default value is 0.00 for both Placement data and Pick data.
Y Pitch: sets the amount to increment or decrement the placement or pick
position in the Y direction.
The default value is 0.00 for both Placement data and Pick data.
OK: executes the paste operation.
Cancel: cancels the paste operation.
4 29
Example of the [Matrix Copy] command result
When this command is successfully executed
(For Placement data)

Component IDs X Y Angle Component name (Screen image)
R1 5.00 10.00 45.00 1608-A
R2 10.00 10.00 0.00 1608-A
No. of copies X: 3 X Pitch: 0.5
O
No. of copies Y: 1 Y Pitch: 1
R 5.00 10.00 45.0 1608-A

R2 10.00 10.00 0.00 1608-A
# 5.50 10.00 45.00 1608-A
# 10.50 10.00 0.00 1608-A
# 6.00 10.00 45.00 1608-A
Y Pitch:
# 11.00 10.00 0.00 1608-A
# 6.50 10.00 45.00 1608-A O
# 11.50 10.00 0.00 1608-A
# 5.00 11.00 45.00 1608-A
# 10.00 11.00 0.00 1608-A X Pitch:
# 5.50 11.00 45.00 1608-A
# 10.50 11.00 0.00 1608-A
# 6.00 11.00 45.00 1608-A
# 11.00 11.00 0.00 1608-A
# 6.50 11.00 45.00 1608-A
# 11.50 11.00 0.00 1608-A

All of the component IDs become #.
The input focus moves to the first component ID of the inserted block.
(For Pick data)

Component Pack Tray feeder Angl Sply Pos Type lane X1 Y1 Z X2 Y2 X3 Y3
name
R1 Tray ATS 0 Rear 50 * 1 436.30 -47.70 5.00 436.30 -27.70 456.30 -47.70
(Screen image)
No. of copies X: 2 X Pitch: 100
No. of copies Y: 1 YPitch:: 50
R1 Tray ATS 0 Rear 50 * 1 436.30 -47.70 5.00 436.30 -27.70 456.30 -47.70
R1 Tray ATS 0 Rear 50 * 1 536.30 -47.70 5.00 536.30 -27.70 556.30 -47.70
R1 Tray ATS 0 Rear 50 * 1 636.30 -47.70 5.00 636.30 -27.70 656.30 -47.70
R1 Tray ATS 0 Rear 50 * 1 436.30 2.30 5.00 436.30 22.30 456.30 2.30
R1 Tray ATS 0 Rear 50 * 1 536.30 2.30 5.00 536.30 22.30 556.30 2.30
Y Pitch:
R1 Tray ATS 0 Rear 50 * 1 636.30 2.30 5.00 636.30 22.30 656.30 2.30
X Pitch:
Only when Tray is selected as the package and the Holder or DTS is selected as the Tray Feeder,
you can execute the [Matrix Copy] command.
You cannot copy two or more records.
The input focus moves to the beginning of the inserted block.
4 30
When an error occurs
In the following cases, an error occurs, then the corresponding error dialog box
When the number of data records exceeds the maximum number of records which
can be entered
OK: terminates the copy operation. No data is copied.
When the placement position is outside the PWB or circuit layout
OK: Continues copying data. An range over mark is appended to the

copied data.
Cancel: Cancels the copy operation.
When Pick data is not completed
When the pick position is beyond the specified pick coordinates
When the number of pick points exceeds the maximum pick points of a tray
component
4 31
4.3.14 Vision Copy
This command allows you to copy mark data, which is registered onto the mark
database, as a BOC mark or IC mark into your data.
(1) Copying as a BOC mark

Step 1: Move the cursor into the cell D = of the menu item BOC mk pos No.
1 (2 or 3, as desired) on the PWB data screen.
Step 2: Select the [Edit] menu command provided with the Program Editing
utility, then the [Vision Copy] command.
The position of the cell to which a BOC mark is copied

with the [Vision Copy] command
(2) Copying as an IC mark

Step 1: Move the cursor to the cell "Mark" which indicates the IC mark point
on the Placement data screen.
Step 2: Select the [Edit] menu command provided with the Program Editing
utility, then the [Vision Copy] command.
The position of the cell to which an IC mark is copied

with the [Vision Copy] command
4 32
(3) Vision copy dialog box
When you select the [Vision Copy] command, the dialog box appears as shown
in the figure below.
Select mark data to be copied from the Registration list, then click the <Copy>
button.
Vision copy dialog box
When you click the <Copy> button, an asterisk mark (*) appears in the mark
teaching column (Mark T). When you use a KE-2030, this mark appears in both
columns for the left and right stations.
If you specify the mark data already registered, the following overwriting
confirmation message appears on the screen.
Overwriting mark confirmation message
To overwrite mark data, click the <Yes> button.
4 33
4.4 Data
This command menu provides the commands which allows you to move to the Editing
screen for each type of data: PWB data, Placement data, Component data, and
Pick data, and those for displaying each type of data completion status, and those for
checking to see if each data record is completed correctly by comparing to the
configuration set on the Setup screen.
4.5 PWB data

4.6 Placement data
4.7 Component data
4.8 Pick data
The commands above display the corresponding type of data and switch the input
screen for each type of data.
See the Section on each type of data for details.
Other method for switching the data input screen

In addition to the method described above, you can switch between each type of data
input screens as described below.
Press the F6 key while holding the CTRL key or press the TAB key while holding
the CTRL key to move to the next data window. Press the F6 key while
holding the SHIFT and CTRL keys or press the TAB key while holding the CTRL
and TAB keys to move to the previous data window.
Click each data title button displayed on the bottom of the screen.
4 34
4.5 PWB Data
4.5.1 Basic setting
After the Program Editing utility starts up or when you select [Create new] on the File
menu, a program name becomes UNTITLED, and the PWB data basic setup screen
as shown in the figure below appears initially.
Use the "PWB ID" edit box to set the PWB ID, and use the corresponding radio button
to set the positioning method, PWB configuration, BOC type and bad mark type.
To set each item, move the cursor over the desired item with a track ball, then click
the button of the desired setting with the left button.
Description of each menu item

(1) PWB ID
Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be entered. However, note
that only numbers or only symbols cannot be entered. They shall be combined
with alphabetic characters. When reading the production program, the PWB ID
is displayed as well as the file name of the production program, so enter an ID
which is easy to understand.
(2) Reference method

1) Hole reference
The PWB has positioning holes, and the reference pins are inserted in the
holes to hold the PWB.
2) Shape reference
After the PWB touches the stopper, the edges of the PWB are fixed
mechanically to hold the PWB.
4 35
(3) PWB configuration
1) Single PWB
The PWB which has only one circuit pattern.
Component
Figure of the single pattern
2) Multiple PWB matrix

The PWB which has multiple circuit patterns aligned in depth and width and
with a same angle and space.
Component
Figure of the Matrix multiple patterns
3) Multiple PWB non-matrix

The PWB which has multiple circuit patterns but with a different angle and
space among them.
Component
Figure of the Non-matrix multiple patterns
Note that circuits are automatically assigned in the multiple PWB non-matrix
pattern if you change the PWB configuration from the multiple PWB matrix
pattern to the multiple PWB non-matrix pattern after setting the dimensions for
the multiple PWB matrix pattern. If you change the PWB configuration from the
multiple PWB matrix or multiple PWB non-matrix pattern to the single PWB
pattern, a PWB is configured as one circuit, and the confirmation message
4 36
(4) BOC type
To place a component more precisely, positioning marks may be made on a
board.
Select a BOC type according to the actual positioning mark setting.
1) Not used
Production is carried out without using the BOC mark. (The mark printed on
the PWB and to be used for offsetting the placement point.) See Sections
"1.1.7 Printed circuit board specifications" and 5 " Board Recognition Marks
".
2) PWB mark is used
A set of BOC marks are used for the placement point offset of the entire
PWB area. When the BOC mark is used for a single pattern PWB, select
this item. When a set of BOC marks is used for the entire area of a multi
pattern PWB, select also this item.
3) Circuit mark is used
For a multiple pattern PWB, when the BOC mark of each pattern is used for
the placement point offset of each circuit of the PWB, select this item.
Accuracy of placement is better compared with the placement using the BOC
mark but it takes longer to complete the recognition of all BOC marks.
For a non-matrix multiple pattern PWB, the circuit has to be assigned in 90,
180, 270, or 360 degrees against the reference circuit.
(5) Bad mark type

A bad mark may be made on a multiple pattern board so that no component can
be placed on a defective circuit. To use a bad mark, select the bad mark type
according to the difference of reflection ratio between a bad mark and a board.
1) Not used
Select this item when production is carried out without using bad marks.
(The bad marks are used for recognizing a certain circuit of a multiple pattern
PWB where components are not to be mounted. Normally, sealing or
painting is applied for the bad marks.) For a single pattern PWB, the bad
marks cannot be used, and select this item.
2) Mark is light
Select this item when a bad mark and the PWB are recognized with the bad
mark sensor, and the reflection ratio of the bad mark is higher than that of the
PWB.
3) Mark is dark
Select this item when a bad mark and the PWB are recognized with the bad
mark sensor, and the reflection ratio of the bad mark is lower than that of the
PWB. This item shall be selected particularly when black bad marks are
used on a ceramic board.
4 37
(6) Scale type
1) Gray scale (Multi-level) recognition
Obtain the level distribution of the brightness of the marks in depth and width.
Then, calculate shape of the marks and positions of the centers. Because
mark recognition is performed using the data obtained from multiple marks,
precise recognition is possible. Normally, select this item.
2) Binary scale (Bi-level) recognition
Obtain the edges of the marks, and calculate shape of the marks and
positions of the centers. Select this item only for the marks those where
multi-level recognition is impossible.
4 38
4.5.2 Dimension set up
When you click the <Dimensions> button on the Basic setting window, the system
switches a window to the "Dimensions" window. The settings of the items"Circuit"
and "BOC mk pos" vary depending on the "PWB configuration" setting on the Basic
setting window: Single PWB, Matrix circuit or Non-matrix circuit.
4.5.2.1 Single pattern

When you select Single PWB as the PWB configuration and click the <Dimension>
button, a screen shown below appears.
Button Description
Change Displays the Basic setup change screen.
Before entering each dimension on the "Dimensions" column, be sure to set the
origin of each dimension. Since Placement data is created based on this origin, we
recommend that you specify the origin used in CAD data if you are to create
Placement data from CAD data.
PWB dimensions 330
Enter the outer dimensions of a 10
PWB. BOC mark

10
X indicates the same direction as

the board transport direction, while
250
Y indicates the direction Reference pin

PWB reference
perpendicular to the board position (origin) PWB layout
(320, 0)
transport direction. end point
X = 330.00 Y = 250.00
(325, -5)
4 39
Ref. hole pos. (Reference hole position)
Enter the coordinates of the positioning hole viewed from the PWB reference
position.
Note that the PWB reference position is assumed to be the origin (0, 0).
Note that the reference hole position varies according to the board transport
direction or reference side: front or rear (see Figure 4.5.2.1). When you
select "Shape Reference" at the item "Positioning method" on the Basic setting
window, you do not have to enter any data here.
X = 320.00, Y = 0.00
(1) Front reference PWB

PWB transport
PWB transport direction: direction
Stopper pin
left to right Positioning hole pin

PWB reference PWB layout end point
position (origin)
(2) Front reference

PWB
PWB transport
PWB transport direction: Stopper pin
direction
right to left
Positioning hole pin
PWB layout end point PWB reference
position (origin)
(3) Rear reference PWB layout end point

PWB
PWB transport Positioning hole pin
PWB transport direction:
direction
left to right Stopper pin
PWB reference
position (origin)
(4) Rear reference PWB layout end point PWB

PWB transport direction: Positioning hole pin PWB transport
direction
right to left Stopper pin
PWB reference
position (origin)
Figure 4.5.2.1 Positioning hole position and PWB layout offset
PWB layout offset

Enter the coordinates of the PWB layout end point (that is, shape reference
position) viewed from the PWB reference position.
Note that the PWB layout end point varies depending on the transport direction
and transport reference side.
X = 325.00 Y = -5.00
4 40
BOC mk pos No. 1 to No. 3
Enter to (X, Y) the coordinates of a BOC mark viewed from the PWB reference
position, and to (D) the diameter of a mark. You can select two or three BOC
marks. When you use three BOC marks, you can use any of three BOC marks.
When using two BOC marks, select the two BOC marks which are placed
diagonally on the PWB. The position of the BOC mark can be taught.
Since a KE-2030 machine has two stations, right and left, an asterisk mark (*) in
the parentheses next to R or L is used to indicate the data completion status.
For a user-designated template, T appears in the parentheses after the
system teaches a mark (See Section 6.4 Teaching a Mark).
Bad mark position
For a single-plane PWB, the bad mark type cannot be selected because Do not
use is specified for the item Bad mark type.
PWB height
If the height of the side on which a component is to be placed when a board is
clamped with a jig or like is different from that obtained when a flat board is
clamped, enter the difference with assuming that the height of the clamped flat
board upper side is 0.
The "+" sign indicates the up direction, while the "" sign does the down direction.
Since you cannot set the height of a board for each circuit, the height of each
circuit should be the same if you are to create a jig.
Normally, set this item to "0.00".
PWB thick
Enter the thickness of a PWB.
The support plate moves up according to the thickness of a PWB entered here
to support the PWB.
Back Height
Enter the distance from the board transfer reference side to the bottom side of a
PWB including components (note that any component located on the bottom of
a PWB should not interfere with the support table).
The value you entered here is used as the support plate waiting position during
production.
The shorter the support plate moves, the shorter the board transport cycle time
becomes.
4 41
4.5.2.2 Matrix circuits patterns
When you select Matrix circuit as the PWB configuration and click the
<Dimension> button, a screen shown below appears.
Button Description
origin of each dimension. For a multiple pattern board, set the origin of a board
and that of a circuit separately (however, you may set the same point as the origin of
a board and that of a circuit). Since the origin specified in Placement data
becomes that of a circuit, we recommend that you specify the origin used in CAD
data as the origin of a circuit when you are to create Placement data from CAD data.
PWB dimensions
330
Enter the outer dimensions of a
PWB in the same manner as
when you select Single PWB as Circuit reference
position
the PWB configuration.
X indicates the same direction as
250
the board transport direction, Reference pin

PWB reference
while Y indicates the direction position (origin) PWB layout
perpendicular to the board (320, 0)
end point
transport direction.
X = 330.00 Y = 250.00 (325, -5)
4 42
165
10
BOC mark
10
Circuit reference position (0, 0)
125
Bad mark
Circuit layout end Circuit layout offset (-5, -5)

i t

position in the same manner as when you select Single PWB as the PWB
configuration with assuming that the PWB reference position is the origin (0, 0).
X = 320.00 Y = 0.00
PWB layout offset
Enter the coordinates of the PWB layout end point (that is, shape reference
position) viewed from the PWB reference position in the same manner as when
you select Single PWB as the PWB configuration.
Note that the PWB layout end point varies according to the board transport
direction and/or board transport reference side
X = 325.00 Y = - 5.00
Circuit dim. (dimension)
Enter the outer dimensions of a circuit.
X indicates the same direction as the board transport direction, while Y
indicates the direction perpendicular to the board transport direction.
X = 165.00 Y = 125.00
PWB reference position

Circuit
Circuit reference position dimension X
Component
Circuit
pitch Y
Circuit
First circuit dimension Y
position Y Circuit layout
offset Y
Circuit layout
offset X
Figure 4.5.2.2 Matrix circuits drawing
Ckt. (Circuit) layout offset

Enter the coordinates of the circuit layout end point (that is, front left corner of a
circuit) viewed from the circuit reference position.
The circuit layout end point is fixed at the lower left corner of the PWB.
X = - 5.00 Y = - 5.00
4 43
First ckt. pos (circuit position)
Enter the coordinates of the circuit reference position of the first circuit (circuits
at the left front of a PWB) viewed from the PWB reference position.
(See Figure 4.5.2.2.)
X = 0.00 Y = 0.00
Ckt. div. no (Circuit division number)
Enter the number of circuits: X is the number of circuits located in the same
direction as the board transport direction, and Y is the number of circuits located
in the direction perpendicular to the board transport direction.
X=2 Y=2
Circuit pitch
Enter the circuit pitch: distance between the origins of two consecutive circuits:
X is the distance between two circuits located in the same direction as the
board transport direction, and Y is the distance in the direction perpendicular to
the board transport direction. (See Figure 4.5.2.2.)
X = 165.00 Y = 125.00
BOC mk pos (mark position) No. 1 to No. 3
When you select "PWB mark used" as the BOC type on the Basic setup window,
enter the distance from the PWB reference position to the center point of the
BOC mark.
When you select "Ckt. mark is used" as the BOC type on the Basic setup
window, enter the distance from the circuit reference position to the center point
of the BOC mark.
You can select two or three BOC marks. When you use three BOC marks, you
can use any of three BOC marks.
An asterisk mark (*) in the parentheses is used to indicate the data completion
status.
For a user-designated template, "T" appears in the parentheses after the
system teaches the right station (see Section 6.4 "Teaching a Mark").
Bad mark position
Enter the bad mark position viewed from the circuit reference position.
A bad mark can be taught also. See Section 8.2.2.14 " Bad mark sensor
teaching ".
PWB height
4 44
PWB thickness
Enter the thickness of a PWB in the same manner as when you select Single
PWB as the PWB configuration.
to support the PWB.
Back Height
production.
becomes.
4.5.2.3 Non-matrix circuits patterns

When you select Non-matrix circuit as the PWB configuration and click the
<Dimension> button, a screen shown below appears.
Button Description
Ckt. lyt Open the Circuit layout setting window.
origin of each dimension. For a multiple pattern board, set the origin of a board
and that of a circuit separately (however, you may set the same point as the origin of
a board and that of a circuit). Since the origin specified in Placement data
becomes the origin of a circuit, we recommend that you specify the origin used in
CAD data as the origin of a circuit when you are to create Placement data from CAD
data.
4 45
PWB dimensions 330
Enter the outer dimensions of a
PWB in the same manner as when
you select Single PWB as the
PWB configuration.
250
X indicates the same direction as Reference pin
PWB reference
the board transport direction, while position (0, 0)
(320, 0)
PWB layout
Y indicates the direction end point
perpendicular to the board
transport direction. 5
(325, -5)
X = 330.00 Y = 250.00
position in the same manner as when you select Single PWB as the PWB
configuration. These coordinates should be entered with assuming that the
PWB reference position is the origin (0, 0).
X = 320.00 Y = 0.00
PWB layout offset
Enter the coordinates of the PWB layout end point viewed from the PWB
reference position in the same manner as when you select "Single PWB" as the
PWB configuration.
Note that the PWB layout end point varies according to the board transport
direction and/or board transport reference side
X = 325.00 Y = - 5.00
165
125
Circuit reference position (0, 0)
Circuit layout end point Circuit layout offset (-5, -5)
Circuit dim. (dimensions)

Enter the outer dimensions of a circuit.
X indicates the same direction as the board transport direction, while Y
indicates the direction perpendicular to the board transport direction. Enter the
dimensions obtained when the "Rot." (rotation) of the Circuit layout is 0 degrees.
X = 165.00 Y = 125.00
Ckt. (Circuit) layout offset
Enter the coordinates of the circuit layout end point viewed from the circuit
reference position.
The circuit layout end point is fixed at the lower left corner of the circuit.
X = - 5.00 Y = - 5.00
4 46
(155, 240)
180 (320, 240)
180
Circuit layout 0
(165, 0)
BOC mk pos (mark position) No. 1 to No. 3

When you select "PWB mark used" as the BOC type on the Basic setup window,
enter the distance from the PWB reference position to the center point of the
BOC mark.
When you select "Ckt. mark is used" as the BOC type on the Basic setup
window, enter the distance from the circuit reference position to the center point
of the BOC mark. Note that each BOC mark position should be entered which
is obtained when the "Rot." (rotation) of the "Circuit layout" is 0 degrees.
You can select two or three BOC marks. When you use three BOC marks, you
can use any of three BOC marks.
An asterisk mark (*) in the parentheses is used to indicate the data completion
status.
For a user-designated template, "T" appears in the parentheses after the
system teaches the right station (see Section 6.4 "Teaching a Mark").
Bad mark position
Enter the bad mark position viewed from the circuit reference position.
Enter the dimensions obtained when the "Rot." (rotation) of the Circuit layout is
0 degrees. A bad mark can be taught also.
See Section 8.2.2.14 " Bad mark sensor teaching ".
PWB height
PWB thickness
Enter the thickness of a PWB in the same manner as when you select Single
PWB as the PWB configuration.
to support the PWB.
4 47
Back Height
production.
becomes.
Circuit layout
When you click the <Ckt. lyt> button, the "Circuit layout" window, which allows
you to enter the circuit layout data, opens. Use the up, down, left and/or right
cursor keys or a track ball to move the cursor, then enter a numeric character.
Enter to the "X" and "Y" columns the distance from the origin of the board to
that of each circuit. Enter to the "Rot." column the angle of each circuit with
assuming that the circuit on which Placement data is created based is located
at 0 degrees and the anti-clockwise direction is positive. After entering data,
click the [Exit] command to return to the "Dimensions" window.
Note: When you select PWB mark used as the BOC type on the PWB data basic
setting screen, enter a multiple of 90 degrees to the Rot. cell.
Origin of a board
Origin of a circuit
No.4
No.2 Component
No.1
Y2 Y4
No.5
Y3
No.3
Y1 Y5
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
4 48
Menu displayed when you select the <Ckt. Lyt> button
Exit Command (C)

How to use Help (H)
Version information (A)
Insert a line (I)
Cut (T) Ctrl
Edit (E)
Insert a line (I) Inserts a blank line at the cursor position.
Cut (T) Cuts the line at which the input focus is located, then
data located after the cut line moves upward after
deletion.
Exit (X)
Exit (X) Terminates the circuit layout input operation, then
closes the Circuit layout window. Data at incomplete
lines will be deleted.
Help (H)
Command (C) Displays the command help index.
How to use Help (H) Displays how to use the Help functions.
Version information (A) Displays the version of the machine.
When you select Matrix circuit as the PWB configuration, the following dialog box
appears on the screen if the total number of circuits exceeds 100.
When you select Matrix circuit or Non-matrix circuit as the PWB configuration, the
following dialog box appears on the screen if the total number of component
placement positions (total number of circuits X total number of placement data
pieces) exceeds 10,000 even though Placement data has been entered and the
total number of circuits is less than 100.
4 49
4.6 Placement Data
4.6.1 Basic operation
Start-up screen
The Placement data input screen appears in the form of a list at its start up as
shown below.
The line at which the input focus is located is highlighted, while the cell at which
the input focus is located is not highlighted.
Characters you entered are echoed back in the formula bar, and when you
validate them, they are entered into the cell.
Left-right scroll
The placement data list screen does not show all data at one time. You have to
scroll the screen right to left or vice versa to enter data. When you move to the
right at the rightmost input field, the screen scrolls by one row, then the input
focus moves to the next field.
When you continue scrolling the screen to the right to reach the final column field,
the input focus cannot be moved even though you try to move to the right
direction. To move to the next line, scroll the screen downward.
4 50
When you move to the scroll limit of the right side, a screen appears as shown below.
The scroll bar appears on the screen when there is still

data to be displayed beyond the last line of the screen.
Up-down scroll
If the key or button is pressed when the input focus is located on the top line
within the data display area of a window, but not the first line, the screen scrolls
down one line.
If the key or button is pressed when the cursor is located on the bottom line
within the data display area of a window and when the component ID for the
following line has been entered, the screen scrolls up one line.
If the key or button is pressed when the cursor is located on the bottom line
within the data display area of a window and when the component ID for the
following line is not entered yet, the screen scrolls up one line and then the cursor
moves to the comp ID cell.
Scroll bar
When you click the scroll bar located at the top of the vertical scroll box, the
screen scrolls down one page.
The Page Up key functions in the same manner.
When you click the scroll bar located at the bottom of the vertical scroll box, the
screen scrolls up one page.
The Page Down key functions in the same manner.
When you click the scroll bar on the left of the horizontal scroll box, the screen
scrolls to the right by one page.
When you click the scroll bar on the right of the horizontal scroll box, the screen
scrolls to the left by one page.
4 51
Scroll box
When you drag the scroll box, the screen starts scrolling from the position
indicated with the scroll box by comparing the scroll bar to all data display area.
Moving to an unentered line

When you click the down arrow key at the bottom line, a new record is created
and the cursor is moved to the Comp ID cell.
(If you do not enter any data for a new record, for example, by pressing just a
cursor key, the new record is deleted when you move to another line.)
Moving to the top or bottom of the screen

When you press the Home key, the left half screen which cannot be scrolled to
the left further appears, then the input focus moves to the Comp ID cell.
When you press the End key, the right half screen which cannot be scrolled to
the right further appears, then the input focus moves to the Lyr cell.
Entry of mutually exclusive items

When you enter data or change it, press the F2 key or click the input field with
the right button of a mouse. The pop-up menu appears on the screen. Select
the desired value.
4 52
4.6.2 How to enter data
Placement data initial screen
Details
(Component) ID
Enter the component ID using the formula bar.
When this parameter is defined, the default values are shown and an asterisk (*)
appears where data entry is not necessary.
Default values
Pla. H Mark 1 Mark 2 Lyr

Mark Mark 1 X Mark 1 Y Mark 2 X Mark 2 Y Skip Test
(Placement head) TI TI (Layer)
Auto No * * * * * * No No 4
If you enter eight characters or more, only the first eight characters are allowed
and entered actually. If you omit the ID, the ID becomes #. IDs other than #
are checked if they are unique, and if the same ID already exists, it is rejected.
X, Y
Define the placement position with the X and Y formula bars.
Absolute position entry
A numeric entry is directly set. Either a + or - sign may precede the number.
Relative position entry
If ++ is appended before the number entered, that number is added to the
value of the field at the cursor.
If -- is appended before the number entered, that number is subtracted from
the value of the field at the cursor.
4 53
If += is appended before the number entered, that number is added to the
value of the field one line above the field at the cursor.
If -= is appended before the number entered, that number is subtracted from
the value of the field one line above the field at the cursor.
Note: Do not enter any space between + and +, and , + and =, or and
=.
Angle
Enter the placement angle using the formula bar.
The setting range is from 0 to 359.95 in increments of 0.05.
Component name
Enter the component name using the formula bar. Each time a component name
is entered, the component data space is allocated accordingly. If you enter a
wrong component name, the corresponding component data space is released
when you change the wrong name unless you enter any Component data.
When you enter a component name, the machine searches it through the
Component library. When the machine finds the same component name in the
Component library, it loads the corresponding component data into a production
program. Upper case characters and lower case characters are handled as the
same as each another, but are displayed separately. If a component name is
registered in the Component database in advance, the registered characters are
displayed instead of the characters you entered here.
The length of a component name is up to 20 characters.
The 21st and the following characters are ignored.
Pla. Head
Select the head to mount on the machine from the pop-up list box. If you do not
want to select a head, select Auto from the pop-up list box displayed as shown
below.
4 54
Mark
Select from the pop-up list box whether or not correction is made for placement
position using the local fiducial mark when the machine places a component on a
board.
When you enter the component ID, No (this means not used) appears as
default for the mark. To change the default setting, using the Edit key of clicking
the input field with the right button of a mouse, open the list box to select the
desired item.
When you select Yes (this means planned to be used), you have to enter
positions of two sets of local fiducial marks. If you enter the position of only one
set of fiducial marks, Placement data cannot be completed.
Mark position (Mark 1 X, Mark 1 Y, Mark 2 X and Mark 2 Y)

Using the formula bar, set the mark position.
The input value can be entered only when the Mark item set as Yes.
Mark recognition parameters (Mark-1TI, Mark-2TI)

These indicate obtained whether or not the recognition parameters of the mark is
already obtained.
Perform the teaching operation to obtain these parameters.
When teaching is complete, OK appears. If it is incomplete, there will be no
indication.
4 55
Skip
This item specifies whether or not to skip the displayed point of placement: Yes or
No
No (for Not skipped) is displayed as a default in the Skip field. To change
the setting of the Skip field, press the Edit key ( F2 key) or press the right
button of a mouse to open the list box and select Yes or No.
Test
This item specifies whether or not to carry out a test run. If you specify a
placement point within the range for trial run to set the conditions for a trial run,
only the Placement data whose Test field is set to Yes is used to perform a
trial run.
No (for Not to carry out a test run) is displayed as a default in the Test list
box field. To change the setting of the Test field, press the Edit key or click the
input focus with the right button of a mouse to call a list box and select Yes or
No.
Lyr (Layer)
To change the setting of the Lyr field, press the Edit key ( F2 key) or press the
right button of a mouse to open the list box, then select the desired layer. The
selectable layers are from the layer 1 to layer 7.
4 56
4.6.3 Range check
The range check to see if a component placement position is within a board (for a
single PWB) or within a circuit (for a multiple-circuit PWB) is performed with the
following timing. The range check error is processed as a warning or error.
When data is entered

When you enter the placement position X or Y, or when you change either of
them, the machine performs the range check. If an error is detected, the
following warning dialog box appears on the screen.
OK
When you click the <OK> button, the entered data is validated, then an
asterisk mark *, which indicates an over range error, is displayed on the left
of the placement data number. When you enter a value within the range, this
mark disappears.
Cancel
When you click the <Cancel> button, the entered data becomes invalid, then
the machine enters Data input mode.
When you are switching data type

When PWB data becomes inactive
When Placement data becomes inactive
4 57
Since Placement data over range error may occur, the machine performs the
range check. If an error is detected, the following warning dialog box appears
on the screen.
OK Continues the data type switching operation.

Cancel Terminates the data type switching operation.
When the machine switches the data type to Placement data

The over range mark is displayed at the over range placement data.
4 58
4.7 Component Data
4.7.1 Data entry procedure

The working screen for the component data is shown whether in the form or list
format .
Component form screen

The component form format displays data on a component on one screen.
Enter data on this component form screen.
4 59
Component list screen
The component list format displays the summary of data on several components
in a list. You cannot enter any data in this screen, but can see how much of
Component data is completed. When you move the highlight cursor, and press
the ENTER key or double-click the left button of the track ball, the form screen of
the selected component appears.
4 60
Input group
Group Setting items
Basic section Comment
Kind of component
Component packaging
Outer dimensions
Centering section Centering method
Tack control section Packaging style
Centering
Expansion
Inspection
Window display
When no data has been entered, the Packaging style page of the tack control
section appears on the top of the screen, and no entry item appears on the screen.
When you enter the Kind of component of the basic section, the corresponding input
items are displayed on the screen.
When you enter data to a setting item of the basic section, the check mark is
displayed on the right side of the task index of the tack control section item(s) for
which the corresponding default value is set and you do not have to enter any data.
Moving through items

Click the input field or tack index of the item you want to set with a mouse.
To move through items with a keyboard, press the Tab key to move the cursor.
To move from either of the windows to an index of the Tack control section, press the
SHIFT and Page Up keys at the same time. To move from an index of the Tack
control section to an item of the window, use the Tab key to move to the index of the
Tack control section you want to display, then press the Space bar.
Entry of mutually exclusive items

When you enter or change data for a mutually exclusive item, press the right button of
a mouse to open the pop-up menu, then click the desired entry.
When you use a keyboard, press the F2 key. The pop-up menu appears on the
screen. Move the cursor to the item you want to select, then enter data with keys.
Moving to previous or next component data page

When you click the Page Backward button or press the Page Up key, the previous
Component data screen page appears. If no page is provided before the current
one, the Page Backward button becomes unavailable. When you click the Page
Forward button or press the Page Down key, the next Component data screen page
appears. If no page is provided after the current one, the Page Forward button
becomes unavailable.
4 61
Comment
Enter a comment in the Edit field. You can enter up to 30 characters consisting of
alphabets, numbers and/or symbols as a comment from a keyboard.
Kind of component
When you press the right button of a track ball or press the F2 key, the pop-up
menu appears as shown below. Select the desired item.
Note: When you are to select the component type which is displayed in gray, the
following error message appears on the screen. Since this component type is
not available, select another one.
4 62
Component package
When press the right button of the trackball or F2 key, a pop-up menu for
component packages appears as shown below.
When your entry is validated, the package window associated with the package
type you entered opens on the screen.
Note: Although you can select Tray, it cannot be optimized.
1) Tack control section to be displayed when Tape is selected as the component

package
When you select the tape width, feed pitches you can specify for the selected
tape width appear on the screen.
4 63
2) Tack control section to be displayed when Stick is selected as the component
package
3) Tack control section to be displayed when "Tray" is selected as the component

package
4) Take control section to be displayed when Bulk is selected as the component

package
When you change the Component packaging setting, the Sply (Supply) menu
item of Pick data is set to Auto.
4 64
Outer dimensions (Width, Length)
Enter the component width and length, using the formula bar.
Input range: 0.01 mm to 150.00 mm
Outer dimensions (Height)
Enter the component height using the formula bar.
Input range: 0 to 25.00 mm
Other
Pick depth
Enter the distance from the side picked up with a nozzle to the top of the
projection of a component with using the formula bar.
Input range: 0 to 25.00 mm
The default value is 0. Entry to this item may be required for a
component whose surface is not flat such as a connector.
Normally the default value can be applied to this item.
4 65
4.7.2.1 Examples of component dimensions
See the following figures to create data.
The dimensions and shape of each type of component are shown below.
Square chip
(horizontal)
MELF
(horizontal)
4 66
(horizontal)
SOT
(horizontal)
4 67
SOP
(horizontal)
SOP (with a heat sink)
(horizontal)
SOJ
(horizontal)
4 68
QFP
(horizontal)
QFJ (PLCC)
(horizontal)
4 69
BQFP (PQFP)
(horizontal)
TSOP-1
(horizontal)
4 70
TSOP-2
(horizontal)
BGA
(horizontal)
4 71
Network resistor
(horizontal)
Trimmer
(horizontal)
4 72
J lead socket
(horizontal)
Gall wing socket
(horizontal)
Socket with bumper
(horizontal)
4 73
One-way lead connector
Two-way lead connector
Z style lead connector
4 74
4.7.3 Tack control section (Component package page)
1) When Tape is selected
Tape width
Select the appropriate tape width with the corresponding radio button.
Feed Pitch
Select the feed pitch from the combo box.
To control the feeder knock pin, the Feed Pitch and Tape Width settings
are required.
Feed pitches displayed, that is selectable, in the combo box vary
depending on the setting of the Tape Width item.
Supply angle
Specify the angle at which a component is set against the tape feeding
direction: select the desired angle with the corresponding radio button.
When you select Other as the component type, enter the angle in the edit
field (0 to 359 degrees). See Section 4.7.9 Definition of the component
feeding angle.
2) When Stick is selected
4 75
Type
Select the stick feeder type.
Changer Type
Select the stick changer type.
This item is available only when you select Changer at the menu item
Type above.
4 76
Belt Feeder Type
Select the belt feeder type.
This item is available only when you select Belt at the menu item Type
above.
Feed waiting time

Set the ratio of the component feeding time to the waiting time for the next
component to be picked up after the current component is picked up. A
unique value is provided to each component type. Specify this unique value
in percentage here.
Supply angle
Select the desired component supply angle with using the corresponding
radio button.
When you select Other as the component type, enter the appropriate angle
in the edit field (0 to 359 degrees).
4 77
3) When "Tray" is selected
Pilot position
Enter the distance from the tray outline to the center point of the first
component position (X, Y).
Pitch
Enter the component pitch (distance between two consecutive components)
(X- and Y-pitch)
No. of row/column
Enter the number of components which are located in the X direction and
that in the Y direction (Xn and Yn) respectively.
Pitch X
Yn
Tray holder, DTS, MTS, (TR5) MTC

Pitch
TR4, TR6 Y
Xn
Pitch X First First

component
Yn position Y
First component
Shuttle position X
Pitch Y
Xn
First
component First
component PWB Transport path
position X
Front of the machine
Figure 4.7.3.1 First component position, pitch and number of components
4 78
Tray first position
Enter the distance from the tray holder edge to the tray reference position (X,
Y) on the tray holder.
Pitch between
Enter the tray pitch (distance between two consecutive trays) in the holder
(Pitch X, Pitch Y).
division
Enter the number of horizontal divisions of a tray (Xn) and that of vertical
divisions (Yn).
Xn
Pitch Y
Yn
Y
Tray Thick
Enter the height "T" from the bottom of a tray to the top including a
component.
Case 1 Case 2
T T
Component Tray
Figure 4.7.3.2 Tray thickness
Feeder
Select a feeder with the corresponding radio button.
If you change the "Component packaging" of a component, whose two or
more Pick data records are entered, to a tray, DTS or MTC/MTS, the dialog
box shown below appears on the screen.
When you specify "MTC/MTS", select the feeding condition on the combo
box. The feeding condition specified here is to be referred when you
perform the Optimization utility to divide data or when you specify the stage
of Pick data.
Supply Cond (Feeding condition)

Auto Both the MTC and MTS can be used
MTC only Only MTC can be used.
MTS only Only MTS can be used.
4 79
Supply angle
Select the component supply angle with the corresponding radio button.
When you select "Other" as the "Kind of component", enter the appropriate
angle in the Edit field (0 to 359).
Definition of the "Supply angle"
The "Supply angle" indicates the component supply angle based on the assumption
that the component placement angle is 0 degrees. Since a tape component supply
direction is specified in Component data, you do not have to specify its supply angle
for Pick data. The anti-clockwise direction should be the + (positive) direction. This
angle cannot be affected with any component supply position: front side, rear side,
MTC or MTS.
Supply angle 0
QFP QFP(PLCC) SOP TSOP-1 TSOP-2 Connector

Figure 4.7.3.3 When the placement angle is 0
Example for setting the "Supply angle" MTC (TR4 TR6)

MTS (TR5)
QFP
0
Tray holder
QFP
0
Stick feeder
SOP QFP
270 0
SOP SOP SOP QFJ QFJ : Direction of the view

0 90 270 0 90 which is used for
determining the
"Supply angle"
Front of a stick feeder
Figure 4.7.3.4 Example of "Supply angle"

4 80
4) When Bulk is selected
Type
Select the bulk feeder type in the combo box.
Feed waiting time

Set the ratio of the component feeding time to the waiting time for the next
component to be picked up after the current component is picked up. A
unique value is provided to each component type. Specify this unique value
in percentage here.
Supply angle
Select the component supply angle with using the corresponding radio
button.
4 81
4.7.4 Tack control section (Centering page)
Select Laser because this item is specific only to Laser.
No other centering method cannot be selected.
Note: When you read data from another machine or database into this machine, the
menu items Vision and Mechanical are disabled, then Component data
becomes incomplete.
Two menu items Vision and Mechanical are disabled, so you cannot set any data
for these items.
Nozzle No.
Directly enter the nozzle number into the edit box or select one from the pop-up
menu which is shown below.
When you press the right button of a track ball or F2 key of a keyboard, the
following pop-up menu appears on the screen. Select the desired nozzle number.
4 82
Vacuum Lvl (level)
When producing PWBs, the machine uses the vacuum level obtained when no
component is picked (to be set on the Machine Setup menu) and the value set
with this Vacuum level menu item to decide whether a component can be picked
up with the vacuum level you set here.
Enter the vacuum value to be used for picking up a component with the nozzle
which is designated with the menu item Nozzle No.. Directly enter a value or
press the right button of a track ball or the F2 key of a keyboard to open the
pop-up menu, then select the desired value.
Component pick-up vacuum value
(Not available for a KE-2040)
) When you enter the vacuum value, the displayed value changes a little.
This is caused by AD conversion to improve the resolution, so this is not an
error.
Example: You enter - 82.437 kPa The screen indicates -82.436 kPa
The displayed component pick-up vacuum level is just a reference value.

Since the finishing applied to the surface of a component varies depending
on its manufacturer, measure a component with this machine before actually
using the vacuum level you set here.
Centering
Use the "Centering" combo box to select the centering condition.
If both centering methods are selected, this box allows you to specify which
centering method is used with the higher priority, laser or vision.
4 83
4.7.5 Tack control section (Add. info. page)
Since the default values are set at the items provided on the Additional information
page, normally you do not have to change them. Only if you want to change the
default setting, open the Additional Information window. Note that some items may
be reset to their default values if you change settings on the kind of component,
Centering or Component packaging page after you change the setting of items on the
Additional Information page.
Additional information
Retry
Enter in the edit field the number of retries to be performed when a component
pick-up error occurs. The yellow signal light flashes to warn you when an
overretry occurs in production.
Placing stroke
Enter in the edit field the placing stroke for pushing a component from the top of a
board.
Picking stroke
Enter in the edit field the picking stroke for pushing the tip of a nozzle to pick up a
component.
Picking offset
Enter in the edit field the picking offset for pushing the tip of a nozzle from the
component picking-up height to pick up embossed tape. The system uses this
value to automatically calculate a value of Z on the Pick data screen when
Tape is selected as the packaging style and embossed tape is selected as the
Tape Width.
L coordinates
If you change the Picking offset value of this menu even when the
of the component picking up position are already entered, the
system will not calculate the component pick-up position again. If you change
the setting of Sply to AUTO on the Pick data corresponding to the
Component data you changed, and specify the pick-up position again, the
system calculates the coordinates of the pick-up position again, and they are
entered to Z.
4 84
Component
Specify where to discard a component.
- Trash box: available for all types of components.

- Tray restore: available for components whose packing style is a tray.
- Trash conveyor: available for components which can be centered with the VCS.
- Protect: available for all types of components.
L If you set Mecha in the Shuttle cell of the MTC/MTS/DTS column on the
Expansion page when an MTC is used, do not set Tray restore here.
Trial
Use the radio whether or not the component is actually placed for trial.
Release check
This item is available only for a laser centering component, and functions to
check to see with laser if a component remains in the nozzle after the machine
places it on a board. With the corresponding radio button, specify whether to
check to see if a component is released.
Auto correct Pick
This item is for a laser centering tape component, and functions to correct a
pick-up position error based on the result of the laser recognition operation.
With the corresponding radio button, specify whether to correct a pick-up
position.
MTC Auto Teaching
When you set this item to Yes, the system automatically measures the center of
a component at each regulated point and the spot light indicates the center of a
component. During PWB production, the system automatically performs this
operation when production starts and when a tray is pulled for the first time after
the number of components is changed.
Component Skip
When you set this item to Yes, the specified type of components is skipped and
is not placed on a board. A placement data record specifying a skipped
component is not used for placing components on a board during production, but
is not added to the Unplaced list.
When component information is loaded from the database, data specifying a
skipped component is not loaded to the system.
4 85
MTS Mark Recog. (Recognition)
If you set the Pick reference position mark to Yes when an MTS is used, the
system recognizes a component pick-up reference position mark when a tray on
which the specified component is located is pulled out, and corrects the actual
coordinates for picking up or returning a component.
Component layer
When the same layer is specified as that in Placement data, set the priority
unique to each component.
Set the layers from 0 to 7 on the pop-up menu shown below.
Nozzle data
Only when you can enter the nozzle number for specifying a nozzle in the
Centering field (that is, the corresponding check box is checked), you can enter
this menu item.
The associated initial values of the nozzle data are set every time you enter the
nozzle number.
Grip Position
Enter the offset to the center of the pushed-up surface of the chuck that is
located on the gripper nozzle fixing side.
Horizontal Clearance
Enter the clearance between the pushed-up surface of the chuck that is
located on the gripper nozzle fixing side and a component. A value to be
entered should be positive. Note that the direction changes depending on
the nozzle type and nozzle direction.
Nozzle Direction at Picking
Specify the nozzle direction to be set when it picks up the component if a
component is supplied at 0 degrees.
Height Adjustment
Enter a value for correcting the component pick-up height (used together
with the push-up stroke).
4 86
4.7.6 Tack control section (Expansion page)
Since the default values are always set at the items on the Expansion page, normally
you do not have to change them. Only if you want to change the default setting,
open this Expansion window. Note that some items may be reset to their default
values if you change items on the Basic, Centering or Component packaging window
after you change the setting of items on the Expansion page.
(1) Laser centering
XY
Set in the combo box the accelerations of the X and Y axes to move the
component to the placement position after it is picked.
Pick Z down
You can select any of the same choices as those displayed in the "XY"
combo box.
This selection is useful to adjust the vertical stress imposed on a component
or adjust shock given to a board.
4 87
Pick Z up
Using this combo box, set the acceleration (for preventing the components
from dropping) of Z-axis up movement at the pick position.
combo box.
Specify "Med." or "Slow" if the surface area of a component is large, so its air
resistance is high, or if a component is heavy.
Place Z down
Using this combo box, set the acceleration (for adjusting the stress placed on
a component) of Z-axis down movement at the placement position.
combo box.
Specify "Med." or "Slow" if a very small component is fed with a tape feeder
and it can be placed unstably.
This selection is useful to adjust the vertical stress imposed on a component
also.
Place Z up
Using this combo box, set the acceleration (for placing components stably) of
Z-axis up movement at the placement position.
combo box.
Theta
Using the combo box, set the rotation speed.
test 1 (When measuring)
Set the acceleration of the theta axis to be applied when a component is
recognized with laser.
test 2 (When not measure)
Set the acceleration of the theta axis to be applied not when a component
is recognized with laser.
combo box.
Place Offset
Enter the placement offset for unsymmetric components.
Laser
Enter the offset from the surface of the component to the laser.
This item is enabled only when an LA/LAHD head or MNLA/FMLA head is
used.
4 88
Laser algorithm
Select the algorithm for laser recognition with the combo box
Laser algorithm 0: Rotates a component from the pick-up position by the
placement angle, then places it.
(for a component which cannot be recognized with laser, but
you want to place on a board.)
Laser algorithm 1: Finds a side whose shade width is the narrowest (first
smallest shade A), then rotates a component from this side to
the + 90 degrees position. Next, detect the narrowest side
(second smallest shade B) to correct a positioning error
and/or angle error, then places the component.
(for a chip component)
Laser algorithm 2: Finds a side whose shade width is the narrowest (first
smallest shade A), then rotates a component from this side in
the positive direction while aligning it with laser. Next, detect
the narrowest side (second smallest shade B) to correct a
positioning error and/or angle error, then places the
component.
(for a component which has a lead(s) such as an SOP)
Laser algorithm 3: Detects the shade of a component which is ready for
pick-up (first smallest shade A), then rotates the component
from the detected side to the + 90 degrees position. Next,
detect the narrowest width (second smallest shade B) to
correct a positioning error, then places the component.
(for a cylindrical-shaped component)
Pre-rotate
Set how much a laser recognition component which is picked up shall be rotated
(pre-rotate angle) before it is centered. Enter the pre-rotate angle in the edit
field When you enter the dimensions for the first time, the default value is set
here. When you change them, the default value is not set.
(2) MTC/MTS
MTC
Specify the speed of the MTC in the combo box.
This setting prevents a light-weight
component from popping on a tray.
Pickup
Specify the MTC pick-up pad type in the combo box.
This setting allows you to select the pick-up
pad of the pick-up unit depending on a
component to be picked. (See Table 4.7.6
Default values for a pick-up pad.)
4 89
Shuttle
Specify the MTC shuttle pad type in the combo box.
This setting allows you to select the pick-up
pad of the shuttle depending on a
component to be picked. (See Table 4.7.6
Default values for a pick-up pad.)
When you select "Mech.", the machine
cannot return a component onto the MTC.
Select a choice other than "Tray restore" at
the control item "Compo Reject to"
displayed on the "Add Info." page of the
Tack Control section.
MTS
Specify the MTS speed in the combo box.
Specify the speed for pulling out a tray here.
DTS
Specify the DTS speed in the combo box.
Specify the speed for pulling out a tray here.
The default values for a pick-up pad are shown in the table below.
Table 4.7.6 Default values for a pick-up pad
Display on the Default values

screen
Pickup When the shorter side of component dimensions
is less than 16 mm: Small
16 mm or more: Large
Shuttle When the component type is BGA: Mech.
When the component type is other than BGA,
and the shorter side of the component
dimensions is less than 16 mm: Small
16 mm or more: Large
Note: You may have to change the shuttle setting depending on the
lead length or component shape.
4 90
4.7.7 Tack control section (Inspection page)
Tombstone det.
Using the radio button, select whether to use the chip rise detecting option.
When you select Yes or If possible, enter values at the items Accept. W, L
and H also as the reference value. If you select If possible, the machine
detects a chip rise error when the chip rise detecting unit is installed on the
machine.
Coplanarity
(1) Coplanarity (700)
Select whether floating of leads of IC components is checked with its radio
button.
When "Yes" is selected, the "Thresh" value is required.
L This setting is available with a KE-700 series station only.
(2) Coplanarity (2000)

Specify whether to check if a lead of a component floats or not with using the
radio button.
When you check the radio button YES, the <Set> button is enabled.
Enter the coplanarity check data.
L This setting is available with a KE-700 series station only.
4 91
When you click the <Set> button, the following COPLA CHECK DATA dialog
box appears on the screen.
Check Select whether to perform the coplanarity check or not.

CoplaToleran Set the value used for judgment.
Term Size Width Set the width of the electrode.
Length Set the length of the electrode.
TermCoat Set the lead coating information.
tujou (Normal)
Kotaku-Ari (Glossy)
Kotaku-Nashi (Not glossy)
DarkThreshLvl Set the threshold value for the brightness of a lead.
Power Set the laser strength from 0 to 7.
MeasHeightOffset Set the offset for the measured height.
CoplaOffset Set the offset for the scanned position.
AGCLvl Set the AGC corrected value from 0 to 5.
ScnMode Set the measurement mode:
Auto
HyoujunSokutei-Mode (Normal measurement mode)
Koseido Sokutei-Mode (High-precision measurement mode)
Click the <OK> button to validate your settings, or <CANCEL> button to cancel
your settings.
4 92
Verify
Using the radio button, select whether to verify a component: resistor, capacitor
and polarity.
When you select Capacitor or Resistor, enter the upper and lower limits of the
reference value, unit, tolerable error items.
To specify the unit, click the input area with the right button of a mouse. The
following pop-up menu appears on the screen.
When you check the radio button Polarity, you can select the direction by
clicking its input area with the mouse right button.
If the Verify check cannot be performed because another data was changed even
though the item Check is set to Yes, the following dialog box appears on the
screen.
Dimension check
Using the radio button, select whether to check the dimensions of a component.
When you select If possible, the machine checks the dimensions of a
component.
When you select Yes, the machine checks the dimensions of a component.
4 93
SOT Angle
Check the radio button to decide whether to check the SOT direction.
You can check this radio button only if SOT is selected as the component type.
When you check the radio button Yes, the system checks the direction of an
SOT component if the divide destination station can check a component.
Note: For a component having leads, be careful to enter the standard size
(Std.size). As the component size, specify the length and width (including
the tip of a lead) normally. The standard size to be specified in the Std. Size
field of the Dimension check section is the horizontal and vertical dimensions
of a surface on which a laser beam impinges.
4 94
4.7.8 List window
On the List window, the summary of two or more Component data pieces is displayed
in the form of a list on the screen. To display this List window, select the menu item
[Component list] on the Display (V) menu while the Component form window is being
On the List window, you cannot enter any data, but can check how much data has
been created. When you move the Highlight cursor to the desired data and press
ENTER key or double-click it, you can move to the Form window of the selected
Component data.
When you select the [Component form] menu item on the Display (V) menu, you
can return to the Form window also.
Component Name
Compo Type
Pack The same values as those set on the Form window are displayed.
Feeder Type
Centering (Centering)
Place (Adhe) This field shows the number of components to be mounted. The
value in parentheses represents the number of components to
be coated among them.
Feeder This field indicates the number of feeders (stick and tray
feeders) which feed the components.
Layer This field shows the component layer.
Skip This field indicates if a component is to be skipped or not.
4 95
Tomb. This field shows whether a standing chip is detected.
Dim. (Dimensions) This field shows whether to execute the dimensions check.
Copla.(Coplanarity) This field shows whether to execute the coplanarity check.
Verify This field shows whether to execute the verify check. Yes is
displayed if the verify check is to be executed. No is
displayed if not.
Comp (Component) Represents the level of completion of Component or Pick data
Pick on the applicable component. OK indicates that Component
or Pick data is created completely, while NG indicates that
such data is not created completely.
Vision
Adhe (Adhesive) L An asterisk mark is displayed in the column for the
unavailable functions.
Pattern Name
4 96
4.7.9 Definition of component feeding angle
Table 4.7.9 shows the definition of "component supply angle-0 degrees" and other
component supply angles. Supply angles of 0 and 180 and supply angles of 90 and
270 of unpolarized components are assumed to be identical.
Table 4.7.9 Definitions of Component Supply Angles
Component type
0
90
180
270
Square chip
MELF
(Cylindrical component)
Aluminum electrolytic
capacitor
GaAsFET
SOT
SOP
HSOP
SOJ
QFP
QFJ(PLCC)
BQFP(PQFP)
4 97
Component type
0
90
180
270
TSOP-1
TSOP-2
BGA
FBGA
Network resistor
Trimmer
Unidirectional lead
connector
Bidirectional lead
connector
Z-lead connector
J-lead socket
Gull-wing socket
Socket with bumper
4 98
4.7.10 Replacing Component data
The [Replacement] command allows you to specify each menu item on the
Component data screen to replace the corresponding data of the selected
components at a time.
Select the [Replacement] command on the Edit menu when the Component data
list screen or Component data form screen (see Figure 4.7.10.1) appears on the
Program Editor menu. The Component data replacement wizard starts up.
Figure 4.7.10.1 Component data replacement command selection screen
(1) Setting conditions

When you select the [Replacement] command on the Edit menu, the screen
shown in Figure 4.7.10.2 appears.
Set the conditions for changing data of the components on the following
conditions setting screen.
Figure 4.7.10.2 Conditions setting screen
4 99
You can specify the following conditions:
1 Component type Up to four component types can be specified. If you specify two or
more component types here, the machine searches all of the
component types you specified, and replaces their data. If you specify
no component type here, the machine searches all types of
components, and replaces their data.
2 Component Size Specify the maximum and minimum length, width and height of a
component respectively. If you do not enter any value here, the
machine uses the allowable maximum and minimum values
automatically.
3 Nozzle No. Up to three numbers of nozzles that are to be used for picking up a
component can be specified here. If you specify two or more nozzle
numbers, the machine searches all components to be picked up with
the specified nozzles and replaces their data. If you do not specify any
nozzle number here, the machine searches components independently
from the nozzle to be used.
4 Package Specify the packaging style of a component. If you do not specify any
packaging style here, the machine searches all packaging styles of
components.
5 Centering Specify the component centering method here. If you do not specify
any centering method, the machine searches components
independently from the centering method, and replaces their data.
Enter the desired item(s), and click the <Next> button. The screen shown in Figure
4.7.10.3 appears.
(2) Setting the items to be changed

Enter a new value for each item on the screen that is provided to enter data to be
replaced.
You can enter some component data items (Add info., Expansion, and Inspection
(see Figure4.7.10.1) and a nozzle number.
If you do not enter any data for a data item, the machine will leave its original
data unchanged. Coplanarity changes the Copla (2000) setting on the
Component data screen invoked with the Program Editing utility.
Enter data, then click the <Next> button. The machine displays the screen
shown in Figures from 4.7.10.3 to 4.7.10.5.
Figure 4.7.10.3 Screen for entering data to be replaced (1)
4 100
Enter data to the desired item(s), and click the <Next> button. The screen shown in
Figure 4.7.10.6 appears.
4 101
(3) Selecting a component (on the list of searched components)
The components searched based on the conditions you enter on the screen
shown in Figure 4.7.10.2 are displayed on this screen.
Figure 4.7.10.6 Component selection screen
You can perform the following operations on this screen:

1 Selection of a Click the desired component displayed on the screen with a pointing
component device or move the cursor to the desired component and press the
Space key. You can select the component or deselect it.
2 Replacement of When you click the <replace> button, only the data settings of the
component data selected components are replaced with those you entered.
3 Replacement of data When you click the <All> button, the data settings of all components
of all the selected displayed on the list are replaced with those you entered.
components
4 Display of the inquiry Specify whether to display the message asking you to replace the
message for displayed setting item data of a component with checking the check box
replacement inquiry for replace.
When you check this check box, the following dialog box appears on the screen
every time the machine replaces one data item of a component.
Figure 4.7.10.7 Replacement inquiry dialog box
4 102
When you click the <Yes> button, the machine replaces the data of the selected
component data item as specified, and then displays this dialog box for the next item.
No: The machine does not replace the data of the selected component
data item, and then displays the dialog box for the next item.
All yes: The machine replaces the data of all data items of the selected
component with those you entered, and displays the list of the
searched components again.
Abort: The machine displays the list of the searched components again
without replacing any data of the current item and the remaining
items.
Yes or All yes: The machine quits the wizard after replacing the data of all data items
you specified.
4 103
4.8 Pick Data
Pick data specifies which feeder is used to set a component whose packing style is a
tape, stick, tray and so on into the machine : tape feeders, stick feeders, tray holders,
DTS, tray changers (MTC/MTS) or bulk feeders. It also defines the position of the
component feeders.
It also establishes the layout of these feeders, and the position at which components
are picked up.
You can assign a feeder and its position to each component one by one, but note that
you can use the Optimization utility to automatically assign components feeding
positions in program data.
Pick data allows you to specify two or more types of feeders to feed the same type of
components also.
4.8.1 Basic operations

Pick data is displayed in the form of a list as shown below. Scroll this list to the left,
right, up or down to enter data.
Scrolling to the right or left

Enter data by scrolling the screen to the right or left. When you move to the right
field at the rightmost field displayed on the screen, the screen is scrolled to the left by
one field and the input focus moves from the current cell to the right cell.
The items Component name, Pack., Tray Feeder, and Angl are always
displayed on the screen regardless of the scrolled position. When you continue
scrolling the screen to the right to reach the field of the last item, the input focus does
not move even though you try to move to the right further.
To move to the next line, move to a field located below.
4 104
When you reach the right limit of the screen to be scrolled, the screen looks like the
figure below.
Up-down scroll
If the key or Up button is pressed when the cursor is located on the top line within
the data display area of a window, but not the first line, the screen scrolls down one
line.
If the key or Down button is pressed when the cursor is located on the bottom line
within the data display area of a window, and data is already entered on the next line,
the screen scrolls up one line.
Scroll bar
When you click the scroll bar located at the top of the vertical scroll box, the screen
scrolls down one page.
When you click the scroll bar located at the bottom of the vertical scroll box, the
screen scrolls up one page.
When you click the scroll bar on the left of the horizontal scroll box, the screen scrolls
to the right by one page.
When you click the scroll bar on the right of the horizontal scroll box, the screen
scrolls to the left by one page.
Scroll box
When you drag the scroll box, the screen scrolls from the position indicated with the
scroll box by comparing the scroll bar to all data display area.
4 105
Moving to the beginning or end of the line
The HOME key accesses the left-hand half screen of the listing and moves the input
field to a cell.
The END key accesses the right-hand half screen of the listing and moves the input
field to the Use cell.
Mutually exclusive entry

Move the cursor over a filed at which you want to enter data, then press the right
button of a mouse or the F2 key of a keyboard. The pop-up menu appears on the
screen. Select the desired value from this pop-up menu.
Moving to the filed which does not require any data

An asterisk mark (*) is displayed in the item which does not require any data to be
entered. You can move the input focus into such a field, but cannot enter any value
in it. Whether data can be entered depends on the package you selected.
4 106
In the fields Component name, Pack., Tray Feeder and Angle, values you
entered on the PWB data screen and Component data screen appear.
The input focus is positioned in the Sply field of the first component.
) The fields in which an asterisk mark "" is displayed require no data entry, and you
cannot enter any data.
4.8.2.1 Entering tape component data/bulk component data

When you select Tape or Bulk as the component package, the following items do
not require data entry:
The "Packaging style" shows the setting of Component data.

You cannot change this setting, so if necessary, change the corresponding
Component data.
Tape/bulk feeder types and the number of occupied holes which are used for
mounting each tape/bulk feeder
Tape/bulk feeder type Number of occupied holes
8 mm 2
12 mm 3
16 mm 3
24 mm 4
32 mm 5
44 mm 8
56 mm 8
72 mm 10
Bulk feeder 2
4 107
Sply (Supply)
This parameter determines whether the tape feeders or bulk feeders are
mounted on the front or rear side of the machine. When you select Auto, the
Optimization utility automatically assigns the feeders to the machine, so you do
not have to enter any data to another items.
When the Optimization utility is executed, the parameters at which an
asterisk mark is displayed (excluding the "Type" and "Lane" parameters) are
automatically set.
When you select "Front" or "Rear", you can set the parameters at which an
asterisk mark is displayed (excluding the "Type" and "Lane" parameters).
AUTO The Optimization utility assigns the feeders to the machine.

Front The front side feeds components.
Rear The rear side feeds components.
Enter the "Sply" parameter with considering the number of the occupied
feeder mounting holes.
If you want to select two or more components data records, then change
them simultaneously, you can change them to Auto only.
Angl (Angle)
This parameter specifies the component pick-up angle.bar.
The angle set in Component data appears here as the default setting.
To change it, move the input focus to this "Angle" parameter.
When Pick data is created, the component feeding angle set in Component
data is set as the default setting.
When you call Component data from the permanent information to create it,
the direction specified as the permanent information is set to Pick data also
as the default setting.
When you call Component data from database to create it, the component
feeding angle set in Component data is set as the default setting when you
create Pick data.
Even though you enter the angle to Pick data, each angle set in Component
data, permanent information and database will not be changed.
When you are to change the angle of Component data only, the dialog box
shown below appears on the screen to ask you whether to change the angle
of Pick data also.
4 108
) When you select "Yes" on this dialog box, the pick-up angle is updated.
When you select "No", the angle set as Pick data is updated.
When you select the [Call list] command, the system asks you if Pick data is
to be updated.
Pos
Enter the mounting position of the component feeder with the formula bar.
The tape feeder, stick feeder and bulk feeder are equipped with a fixing pin on
their end. This pin fits into the feeder mounting hole so that the feeder can be
placed in position. For this parameter, define the feeder mounting hole
number.
If a new value is entered to the Sply or Pos item the value is changed, X1,
Y1, and Z are automatically recalculated and the results are shown on the
screen. Note that the results vary depending on the model of the feeder to be
mounted.
As soon as a number is entered, overlap is checked for the existing tape
feeders, bulk feeder, and stick feeders. If the same number already exists, the
entry is rejected with an error message shown on the screen.
X1, Y1, Z
These parameters set the coordinates of the component pick position. They
are automatically calculated and shown after Sply and Pos items have been
defined.
Once a value is entered to each coordinate, you can change (teach also) it.
CAUTION move your face or head close to the machine while the machine is
performing teaching operation.
If the bank is never recognized (since the machine zeroes, or the bank
moves down then up), it may be recognized automatically before the
machine moves to the pick position. Since the head moves across the
CAUTION feeder while the feeder bank is being recognized, do not place your
hand in the machine, nor move your face or head to the machine.
Especially, take care when the feeder bank is recognized not from the
menu but during teaching or tracking a pick position.
4 109
Used
This item specifies whether to use the feeder during production or not.
The default setting Yes (use) appears. To change the setting, press the F2
key to open a pop-up menu and select No.
Yes During production, the feeder is used.

No During production, the feeder is not used.
4.8.2.2 Stick feeder specifications

The stick feeder comes in 11 types, and stick changers and belt feeders are also
provided as a stick feeder.
The stick changer comes in 15 types while the belt feeder does in 7 types.
Different types have either one or two or more lanes.
Each stick feeder can have a single type of components on all lanes or different
types for different lanes.
The lane assignment example is shown below.
The parameters "Pack" and "Type" set in Component data appear here: you
cannot change any of them. To change either one, change the setting of
Component data.
Stick feeder types and the number of occupied holes

which are used for mounting each stick feeder
Stick Number Number of holes for

Application
feeder type of lanes mounting a stick feeder
Type 1 SOP 8, 14 and 16 narrow type 3 8
Type 2 SOP 14 and 16 wide type, SOP 29 narrow type, and 3 8
QFJ18
Type 3 SOP 20 wide type, SOP 24 and 28 narrow type, and 2 8
QFPJ20
Type 4 SOP 24 and 28 narrow type, SOP 32 and higher 2 8
narrow type, and QFJ28 and 32
Type 5 SOP 32 and higher wide type 2 8
Type 6 PLCC42 and 55 2 8
Type 7 PLCC68, 84 and 52 1 8
Type 8 Special type for export 8 8
Type 9 Special type for export 8 8
Type N SOP, SOJ, QFJ (PLCC) N1 to N4 1 8
Type W SOP, SOJ, QFJ (PLCC), W1 to W5 1 6
Changer Stack stick feeder types 1 to 6, 3L to 9L, and 2J to 4J 1 3
4 110
Sply (Supply)
See the description of "Sply" for a tape feeder.
Angl (Angle)
See the description of "Angle" for a tape feeder.
Pos (Position)
This parameter sets the feeder mounting hole number into which the stick
feeder positioning pin is inserted.
When a number is changed, the parameters to the right of Pos are
initialized, then become blank.
As soon as a number is entered, overlap is checked for the existing tape
feeders, tray holders and bulk feeders. If the same number already exists,
the entry is rejected with an error message shown on the screen.
Lane
This parameter is used to specify the lane.
The lanes are numbered 1, 2, 3... from the left, facing the machine, both on
the front and rear sides. See the figure below.
If a lane is already occupied, the entry is rejected with an error message
shown.
Note that this Lane parameter cannot be entered in Pick data when you
select a stick changer, and it becomes disabled, and an asterisk mark *
appears.
Lane 3 Lane 2 Lane 1 Lane 2 Lane 1 Lane 1
R- 1 39 41 63 79
Feeder mounting holes Transport path
F- 1 39 41 63 79
Lane 1 Lane 1 Lane 2 Lane 1
Example of lane numbers assignment
4 111
X1, Y1, Z
These parameters set the coordinates of the feeder component pickup position.
When the items Sply, Pos, Type, and Lane are set, these values are
automatically calculated and shown. Once a value is entered to each coordinate,
you can change it (by teaching also).
4 112
4.8.2.3 Tray
4.8.2.3.1 Tray holder
When you select a tray holder, the following screen is displayed.
The parameters "Pack", "Tray Feeder" and "Type" set as Component data
appear here: you cannot change any of them. To change either one,
change the setting of Component data.
Sply (Supply)
This parameter specifies whether a tray is automatically selected or set on the
rear.
The Optimization utility assigns trays to the machine
Trays are assigned to the rear side.
When you select "Automatic selection", the Optimization utility automatically

assigns trays to the machine, so you do not have to enter any data to other
items.
When the Optimization utility is executed, items at which an asterisk mark
"*" is displayed (excluding the parameter "Lane") are automatically set.
When you select "Rear", you can enter data to items at which an asterisk
mark is displayed (excluding the parameter "Lane").
Angl (Angle)
See the description of the parameter "Angl" for a tape/bulk feeder.
4 113
Pos (Position)
Enter the mounting hole number which is indicated with the mounting mark on
the tray holder.
Figure 4.8.2.3.1.1 shows how to mount a holder and tray assignment.
Rear
Tray holder type 1 Tray holder type 2
Trays
Tray holder mountable area

PWB transport path
Feeder mounting hole
Figure 4.8.2.3.1.1 How to mount a holder and tray assignment
Note: Pick-up sequence of components fed by a tray holder
MTS / tray holder MTS / tray holder
Tray
MTC Tray
Shuttle
Tray holder
There are two types of tray holders provided: Type 1 (full specifications) and Type
2 (half specifications). Each type of tray holder is shown in the figure below.
Stoppers Stoppers
Mounting marker Mounting marker

Type 2 Type 1
* To mount a tray holder on the machine, align the mounting marker with the
feeder mounting hole to insert the holder to the machine.
Occupied feeder mounting holes
Type 1 40
Type 2 21
4 114
X1, Y1, Z, X2, Y2, X3, Y3
These coordinates specify the component pick-up position on three corners of
a tray.
When you enter the "Sply" parameter, the component pick-up position is
automatically calculated, then displayed based on Component data.
Once a value is entered to each coordinate parameter, you can change each
coordinate separately (by teaching also).
PWB
(X3, Y3) (X1, Y1)
Feeding
direction
(X2, Y2)
Side
Figure 4.8.2.3.1.2 Pick-up coordinates on a tray holder
If you are to teach the coordinates

When the cursor is located at the cell X1 or Y1, you can enter the coordinates X1 and
Y1. When the cursor is located at the cell X2 or Y2, you can enter the coordinates X2 and
Y2. When the cursor is located at the cell X3 or Y3, you can enter the coordinates X3 and
Y3. When the cursor is located at the cell Z, you can enter the coordinate "Z".
Used
See the description of the parameter "Used" for a tape feeder.
4 115
4.8.2.3.2 Dual tray server (DTS)
When you select "DTS", the following screen is displayed.
The parameters "Pack" and "Tray Feeder" set as Component data appear
here: you cannot change any of them. To change either one, change the
setting of Component data.
Sply (Supply)
Specify whether a tray is automatically selected or set on the rear side.
The Optimization utility automatically assigns trays to the machine.

items.
When you select "Rear", you can enter data to items at which an asterisk
mark is displayed (excluding the parameter "Lane").
Angl (Angle)
Pos (Position)
Specify the feeder mounting hole number which is indicated with the DTS
mounting marker.
Number of occupied feeder mounting holes 48
4 116
Lane
In case of a DTS, specify the level on which tray components are stored.
The component pick-up position on the DTS is calculated, then displayed
based on the tray specifications of Component data.
First level
Second level
The top level of the DTS is handled as the "first level", and the
bottom level is as the "second level".
X1, Y1, Z, X2, Y2, X3, Y3

When the parameters "Sply" and "Lane" are set, the component pick-up
position is automatically calculated, then displayed based on the tray
specifications of Component data.
Once a value is entered to each coordinate, you can change the value
separately (by teaching also).
Used
See the description of the "Used" parameter for a tape/bulk feeder.
4 117
4.8.2.3.3 Matrix tray changer/Matrix tray server (MTC/MTS)
When you select an MTC/MTS, the following screen is displayed.
The parameters "Pack" and "Tray Feeder" set as Component data appear
here: you cannot change any of them. To change either one, change the
setting of Component data.
Sply (Supply)
Specify whether a tray is automatically selected or set on the rear side.
The Optimization utility automatically assigns trays to the machine.

items.
When you select "Rear", you can enter data to the items at which an
asterisk mark is displayed (excluding the parameter "Lane").
Angl (Angle)
4 118
Pos (Position)
For an MTC/MTS, specify the level on which a tray component is to be stored.
If you enter the number to which a tray is already assigned, an overlap error
is displayed on the screen and your entry is rejected.
For an MTS, the number of levels which are to be occupied changes
depending on the "tray thickness" set as Component data.
If a tray cannot be assigned to the desired level because the level(s) above
and/or below are occupied, an error is displayed and your entry is rejected.
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Levels 20 to 40
Figure 4.8.2.3.3.1 Number of levels of an MTC/MTS
Number of occupied trays

Tray thickness set Number of levels occupied
0.00 mm to 8.99 mm one level
9.00 mm to 23.00 mm two levels
X1, Y1, Z, X2, Y2, X3, Y3

Specify the component pick-up position at three corners of a tray.
When you set the parameter "Sply", the pick-up position is automatically
calculated, then displayed based on the specifications of Component data.
When a value is entered to each coordinate, you can change each coordinate
(by teaching also).
Used
See the description of this parameter for a tape/bulk feeder.
4 119
a. MTC (tray changer)
Pitch X First component position
Pitch Y
Tray contact position
(X2, Y2)
MTC
(TR4, TR6)
(X1, Y1) (X3, Y3)
Shuttle
PWB PWB transport path
Figure 4.8.2.3.3 How to calculate the pick-up position on an MTC
When you select an MTC as the parameter "Sply", an asterisk mark "*"
appears in parameters you do not have to enter. The component pick-up
position of an MTC, X1, Y1, Z, X2, Y2, X3 and Y3 are calculated based on the
specifications of a tray stored in Component data and according to the MTC
coordinate system.
The MTC component pick-up position on the main unit is determined
according to the settings of the Machine Setup menu.
4 120
b. MTS (tray server)
Pitch X First component position
Pitch Y
Loading/unloading MTS (TR5) drawer

(X2, Y2)

(X1, Y1) (X3, Y3)
PWB PWB transport path
Figure 4.8.2.3.3.3 How to calculate the pick-up position on an MTS
When you open the Pick data input screen, an asterisk mark "*" appears in
parameters you do not have to enter. The component pick-up position on an
MTC, X1, Y1, Z, X2, Y2, X3 and Y3 are calculated, then displayed based on
the specifications of a tray stored in Component data and according to the
main unit coordinate system.
4 121
4.9 Checking Data Completion Status
4.9.1 Data completion status
Invoke this command from the Data menu.
When you click the [Data completion status] command, the following dialog box
The dialog box shown above displays the number of input records as the menu item
No. of Records, the number of completed records as the menu item No. complete,
and whether each type data is completed or not as the menu item Complete.
Each display item is described below:
Complete
Displays whether each type of data is completed or not.
(*) data is completed.
( ) data is not completed.
If the value of the menu item No.of Records is equal to that of No. complete,
the data is handled as completed.
No. of Records
Displays the number of input records regardless of whether each record is
completed or not, that is, displays the total number of records including
incomplete records.
No. of complete
Displays the number of records entered completely, that is, displays the number
of records whose necessary items are all entered.
When you click the <OK> button, the machine returns to the data screen from
which you invoked this command.
4 122
4.9.2 Line coherence check
(1) When to invoke the check command
When invoking the Optimization utility Interrupts the next process when an error occurs.
Arbitrary invoking You can invoke the data coherence check by selecting the menu
command when you want to.
(2) Report of the check result
Notification Notification of the successful check

Notification of a warning
Notification of an error
Error list Number of errors
Error information: Error position (data type, data number, item
name), and cause of errors
Display and print of the error list To be performed with the standard tool provided with Windows
(3) Coherence check items: error conditions

The chip shooter name becomes effective as the model name in the error
conditions.
Data type Item Error conditions

PWB data Positioning method Although the item Positioning method is set to Shape
Reference, all line stations are not set for the shape reference.
BOC Type Although the item BOC Reference is set to be used, the OCC-L
of the KE-2010 or OCC-L or OCC-R of the
KE-2020/2030/2040 is not set to be used.
Mark pattern matching Although the mark data is set to use the mark pattern matching
function, the VCS is not set to JVS2 or JVS3.
Bad mark type The item Bad mark type is not set to be used.
4 123
(3-1) Coherence check items: error conditions

Placement Placement point(s) The machine calculates the placement range for each current
data centered component to check to see if the placement point is
within the range each axis can move. This range is defined
by performing OR with the axis movable range.
Placement station(s) The machine checks the coherence with using the profile of
the specified station.
Placement of vision The FMLA head is set to Not used.
components
Placement of vision The standard VCS or optional VCS (37.5 mm, 27 mm or 18
components (over 0.38 mm) mm) is not set in Placement data of vision components
(Lead components). whose size is 0.38 mm or larger.
Placement of vision The optional VCS (37.5 mm, 27 mm or 18 mm) is not set
components (0.3 <= Pitch < in Placement data of vision components whose size is 0.3
0.38 mm) (Lead mm or larger, but smaller than 0.38 mm.
components)
Placement of vision The optional VCS (27 mm or 18 mm) is not set in Placement
components (0.2 <= Pitch < data of vision components whose size is 0.2 mm or larger,
0.3 mm) (Lead components) but smaller than 0.3 mm.
Placement of vision The optional 18 mm VCS is not set in Placement data of
components ( 0.135 <= vision components whose size is 0.135 mm or larger, but
Pitch < 0.2 mm) (Lead smaller than 0.2 mm.
components)
Placement of general vision The standard VCS is not set in Placement data of general
components (15 < the vision components whose minimum pitch is wider than 15
smallest pitch <= 22 mm) mm, but 22 mm or narrower.
(Lead components)
Placement of general vision The standard VCS or optional 37.5 mm VCS is not set in
components (11 < the Placement data of general vision components whose
smallest pitch <= 15 mm) minimum pitch is wider than 11 mm, but 15 mm or narrower.
(Lead components)
Placement of general vision The standard VCS or optional 37.5 mm or 27 mm VCS is not
components (6.5 < the set in Placement data of general vision components whose
smallest pitch <= 11 mm) minimum pitch is wider than 6.5 mm, but 11 mm or narrower.
(Lead components)
Placement of general vision The standard VCS or optional 37.5 mm, 27 mm or 18 mm
components (0.5 < the VCS is not set in Placement data of general vision
smallest pitch <= 6.5 mm) components whose minimum pitch is 0.5 mm or wider, but
(Lead components) 6.5 mm or narrower.
Placement of general vision The optional 37.5 mm, 27 mm or 18 mm VCS is not set in
components (0.4 < the Placement data of general vision components whose
smallest pitch <= 0.5 mm) minimum pitch is 0.4 mm or wider, but narrower than 0.5 mm.
(Lead components)
Placement of general vision The optional 27 mm or 18 mm VCS is not set in Placement
components (0.3 < the data of general vision components whose minimum pitch is
smallest pitch <= 0.4 mm) 0.3 mm or wider, but narrower than 0.4 mm
(Lead components)
Placement of general vision The optional 18 mm VCS is not set in Placement data of
components (0.2 < the general vision components whose minimum pitch is 0.2 mm
smallest pitch <= 0.3 mm) or wider, but narrower than 0.3 mm
(Lead components)
Placement of vision The standard VCS is not set in Placement data on vision
components (2 < the components whose minimum pitch is wider than 2 mm, but 3
smallest pitch <= 3 mm) mm or narrower.
(Ball components)
4 124
Placement Placement of vision The optional 37.5-mm, 27-mm or 18-mm VCS is not set in
data components (0.7 <=the Placement data on vision components whose minimum pitch
smallest pitch < 1.0 mm) is 0.7 mm or wider, but narrower than 1.0 mm.
(Ball components)
components (15 < the vision components whose minimum pitch is wider than 15
smallest pitch <= 22 mm) mm, but 22 mm or narrower.
(Ball components)
components (11 < the Placement data of general vision components whose
smallest pitch <= 22 mm) minimum pitch is wider than 11 mm, but 15 mm or narrower.
(Ball components)
components (6.5 < the set in Placement data of general vision components whose
smallest pitch <= 15 mm) minimum pitch is wider than 6.5 mm, but 11 mm or narrower.
(Ball components)
Placement of general vision The standard VCS optional 37.5 mm, 27 mm or 18 mm VCS
components (1.0 < the is not set in Placement data of general vision components
smallest pitch <= 6.5 mm) whose minimum pitch is wider than 1.0 mm, but 6.5 mm or
(Ball components) narrower.
components (0.7 < the Placement data of general vision components whose
smallest pitch <= 1.0 mm) minimum pitch is 0.7 mm or wider, but narrower than 1.0 mm.
(Ball components)
components (0.5 < the data of general vision components whose minimum pitch is
smallest pitch <= 0.7 mm) 0.5 mm or wider, but narrower than 0.7 mm.
(Ball components)
components (0.35 < the general vision components whose minimum pitch is 0.35 mm
smallest pitch <= 0.5 mm) or wider, but narrower than 0.5 mm.
(Ball components)
The possible maximum The number of components exceeds the maximum number of
number of components to components which can be placed.
be placed
Placement of vision The standard VCS or standard VCS-L/VCS-R is unavailable
components (over 33.5 mm) in Placement data of vision components whose dimension
exceeds 33.5 mm.
Placement of Coplanarity A coplanarity unit is unavailable in Placement data of
option components coplanarity option components.
Placement of Verify option A verify unit is unavailable in Placement of verify option
components components.
Bulk feeder type Bulk is specified as the packaging style in Placement data,
(BF25RS, BF25CS, and BF25RS, BF25CS, BF28RS or BF28CS is selected as
BF28RS, BF28CS) the bulk feeder type.
Centering methods Any centering method is not set.
Packages An unavailable package style is set.
Component types An unavailable component type is set.
Component outline size, Unavailable dimensions or height are (is) set.
height
Inspection Unavailable inspection type is set.
Stick changer Any stick changer is not set.
Placement of general vision If the vision processor unit of the specified station is a model
components earlier than JVS3 even though the station is specified in the
placement data on a general-purpose vision component.
If there is no station equipped with the vision processor unit
set to JVS3 in the line even though "Automatic selection" is
selected as the placement data of a general-purpose vision
component.
4 125
Placement Placement of an SOT If an SOT direction-checking table cannot be used in the
data component whose direction is placement data of an SOT component whose direction is
checked checked.
Placement head The specified head is set to Not used in the station profile.
Placement head If Parallel Mode is selected at the menu item 2030 Mode
(for a KE-2030) Specification on the 2000 Option tab of the Optimization
menu, and the placement head of only one station is
available (Lx or Rx).
If Sequential and Mix Mode is selected at the menu item
2030 Mode Specification on the 2000 Option tab, Use
manual station/position assignments as the menu item Pick
Data of the Assignments tab of the Optimization menu,
and all component pick-up positions are specified, the
machine checks to see if the specified placement head is
consistent with the component pick-up position specified in
Pick data.
<Combination of a placement head/pick data causing an
error>
Consistency
Placement head Pick data
check
LxRx Only one side is specified.
(x includes the
Both stations are specified.
heads
automatically set.)
Lx Only the left side is specified.
(x includes the
Only the right side is specified.
heads
automatically set.) Both stations are specified.
Rx Only the left side is specified.
(x includes the Only the right side is specified.
heads
automatically set.) Both stations are specified.
Automatically set Only the left side is specified.
Only the right side is specified.
Both stations are specified.
Component Discarding The component discarding operation that cannot be handled

with a station specified in Placement data is set as described
below:
Compo Reject to is set to Trash conveyor, but no IC
recovery belt is installed on the machine.
Compo Reject to is set to Tray Restore, but any tray
feeder (see Note) for receiving a returned component is
not installed on the machine.
Compo Reject to is set to Tray Restore, Shuttle is set
to Mecha, and MTC is specified as a station.
Note: Tray feeders supporting the Tray Restore setting are
as follows:
MTC: TR6S, TR6D and TR4S
MTS: TR5S and TR6S
Tray holder: all of types
DTS
4 126
Placement Placement layer When the Sequential and Mix Mode is selected at the menu
data (for a KE-2030) item 2030 Mode Specification on the 2000 Option tab, and
Use manual station/position arrangements as the menu
item Pick Data of the Assignments tab of the
Optimization menu, and all component pick-up positions are
specified, an error occurs if the In and OUT stations are not
specified in this order as the layer assignment order of the IN
station and OUT station on Placement data respectively.
* When the component placement head is automatically set,
the machine obtains information on the specified station
from Pick data.
If both of the stations have the specified component
placement heads, those heads pass the layer check.
Maximum PL value on the IN side Minimum simultaneous
placement PL value Maximum simultaneous placement PL
value Minimum PL value on the OUT side
PL: placement layer number
4 127

Component Centering method Any centering method which allows placement is not set.
data
The standard VCS and optional VCS are not available for
vision centering.
Component package Although the Packaging style is set in Component data of
tray components, the item Packaging style cannot be set to
Tray.
Nozzle (for a KE-2030) If the Parallel Mode is selected at the menu item 2030
Mode Specification of the 2000 Option tab, Use
permanent nozzle setup from MSL Setup is selected at the
menu item Nozzle of the Assignments tab of the
Optimization menu, and a nozzle specified on the
Component data screen does not exist on both of the
stations.
If the Parallel Mode is selected at the menu item 2030
Mode Specification of the 2000 Option tab, Auto arrange
empty nozzle positions is selected at the menu item Nozzle
of the Assignments tab of the Optimization menu, a nozzle
specified on the Component data screen does not exist on
both of the stations, and there is no not-occupied ATC
position.
If the Sequential and Mix Mode is selected at the menu item
2030 Mode Specification of the 2000 Option tab, Use
Optimization menu, AUTO is selected at the menu item
SPLY (supply) of any component on the Pick data screen
that is associated with Component data, and a nozzle
specified on the Component data screen does not exist on
both of the stations.
2030 Mode Specification of the 2000 Option tab, Auto
arrange empty nozzle positions is selected at the menu item
Nozzle of the Assignments tab of the Optimization menu,
AUTO is selected at the menu item SPLY (supply) of any
component on the Pick data screen that is associated with
Component data, and a nozzle specified on the Component
data screen does not exist on both of the stations.
Component dimensions The dimensions set in Component data cannot be handled
with the machine.
<Error conditions>
Component
2010 2020 2030 2040
height
0 H 6 mm
6 H 12 mm
12 H 20 mm
20 H 25 mm
Note: means that the indicated component height is

applicable if the component height is set to "20 mm"
on the MSL Setup menu of a chip shooter/mounter.
4 128
Component Component dimensions
data Component
2010 2020 2030 2040
dimensions

L 0.45 mm
Note
0.45 L 26.5mm

26.5 L 50 mm
Note
50 L 150 mm
Note: means that the indicated dimensions are applicable

if an image of a component such as a connector is
divided, then recognized. The maximum dimensions
of a component is 150 mm (150 x 50). When you do
not use he FMLA head of a KE-2020, the maximum
dimensions are 29 mm.
If the machine does not use the KE-2020 MNLA
head, the minimum dimension is 0.45 mm or less.
The length of a
diagonal line of a 2010 2020 2030 2040
component to be
centered with laser
30.7 mm or less
30.7 mm to 47 mm
Note
Note: When you do not use the FMLA head of a KE-2020,

the maximum length of a diagonal line becomes 30.7
mm or less.
Chip rise detecting option There is not any station that can handle a chip rise detection
unit.
Head (when vision centering) All of the FMLA heads (R head for a KE-2020, L and R heads
for a KE-2040) are set to Not used on the Setup menu.
Head (when laser centering) All of the NMLA heads/FMLA heads are set to Not used on
the Setup menu, and those heads are set to Used on the
Component data editing screen.
Shuttle The Packaging style is set to Tray, Feeder is set to
(Expansion MTC/MTS/DTS) MTC/MTS, Compo Reject to is set to Tray Restore,
Shuttle is set to Mecha, and there is only an MTC(s) in the
line.
Prerotate angle The prerotate angle (A) is not set to a value within the
(When laser-centering) regulated range: 0 degree A 45 degrees.
Component data and If the Parallel Mode is selected at the menu item 2030
component pick-up position Mode Specification of the 2000 Option tab, and Use
data (for a KE-2030) manual station/position assignments is selected at the menu
item Pick Data of the Assignments tab of the
Optimization menu, the machine checks to see if the
component pick-up position specified on Pick data is
consistent with that of each corresponding component data
record.
<Error conditions of Pick data associated with Component
data> Component pick-up position Consistency
specified on Pick data check result
AUTO
Only one station
Only Both stations one station, AUTO
Both stations
4 129
Component Component layer If the Sequential and Mix Mode is selected at the menu item
data (for a KE-2030) 2030 Mode Specification of the 2000 Option tab, Use
manual station/position assignments is selected at the menu
item Pick Data on the Assignments tab, the component
pick-up position is specified at all of Pick data records, the
same layer number is assigned to the OUT station on
Placement data (see Placement layer (for a KE-2030) of
Placement data) and the layers are not assigned in the order:
IN station and OUT station on Component data.
Maximum CL value on the IN side Minimum simultaneous
placement CL value Maximum simultaneous placement
CL value Minimum CL value on the OUT side
CL: Component layer number
Use pick data/Not to use pick If a station is specified to all of linked Pick data records, the
data pickup position is specified at all of Pick data records of the
same station, and Not to use pick data is selected at all
records.
4 130

Pick data Pick-up of vision components The FMLA head (R head for a KE-2020, L and R heads for
KE-2040) is set to Not used in Pick data of vision
components.
(Lead components) whose size is 0.4 mm or larger.
Placement of vision The optional VCS (37.5 mm, 27 mm or 18 mm) is not set in
components (0.3 <= Pitch < 0.4 Placement data of vision components whose pitch is 0.3 mm
mm) (Lead components) or wider, but narrower than 0.4 mm.
components (0.2 <= Pitch < 0.3 data of vision components whose pitch is 0.2 mm or wider,
mm) (Lead components) but narrower than 0.3 mm.
components (0.135 <= Pitch < vision components whose pitch is 0.135 mm or wider, but
0.2 mm) (Lead components) narrower than 0.2 mm.
components (15 < the smallest vision components whose minimum pitch is wider than 15
pitch <= 22 mm) (Lead mm, but 22 mm or narrower.
components)
components (11 < the smallest Placement data of general vision components whose
pitch <= 15 mm) (Lead minimum pitch is wider than 11 mm, but 15 mm or narrower.
components)
components (6.5 < the smallest set in Placement data of general vision components whose
pitch <= 11 mm) (Lead minimum pitch is wider than 6.5 mm, but 11 mm or narrower.
components)
components (0.5 <= the VCS is not set in Placement data of general vision
smallest pitch <= 6.5 mm) components whose minimum pitch is 0.5 mm or wider, but
components (0.4 <= the Placement data of general vision components whose
smallest pitch < 0.5 mm) (Lead minimum pitch is 0.4 mm or wider, but narrower than 0.5 mm.
components)
components (0.3 <= the data of general vision components whose minimum pitch is
smallest pitch < 0.4 mm) (Lead 0.3 mm or wider, but narrower than 0.4 mm.
components)
components (0.2 <= the general vision components whose minimum pitch is 0.2 mm
smallest pitch < 0.3 mm) (Lead or wider, but narrower than 0.3 mm.
components)
Placement of vision The standard VCS is not set in Placement data of vision
components (15 < the smallest components whose minimum pitch is wider than 15 mm, but
pitch <= 22 mm) (Ball 22 mm or narrower.
components)
Placement of vision The standard VCS or optional 37.5 mm VCS is not set in
components (11 < the smallest Placement data of vision components whose minimum pitch
pitch <= 15 mm) (Ball is wider than 11 mm, but 15 mm or narrower.
components)
Placement of vision The standard VCS or optional 37.5 mm or 27 mm VCS is not
components (6.5 < the smallest set in Placement data of vision components whose minimum
pitch <= 11 mm) (Ball pitch is wider than 6.5 mm, but 11 mm or narrower.
components)
4 131
Placement of vision The standard VCS or optional 37.5 mm, 27 mm or 18 mm
components (1.0 <= the VCS is not set in Placement data of vision components
smallest pitch <= 6.5 mm) (Ball whose minimum pitch is wider than 1.0 mm, but 6.5 mm or
components) narrower.
Placement of vision The optional 37.5 mm, 27 mm or 18 mm VCS is not set in
components (0.8 <= the Placement data of vision components whose minimum pitch
smallest pitch < 1.0 mm) (Ball is 0.8 mm or wider, but narrower than 1.0 mm.
components)
Placement of vision The optional 27 mm or 18 mm VCS is not set in Placement
components (0.5 <= the data of vision components whose minimum pitch is 0.5 mm or
smallest pitch < 0.8 mm) (Ball wider, but narrower than 0.8 mm.
components)
components (0.35 <= the vision components whose minimum pitch is 0.35 mm or
components)
Placement of chip rise The chip rise detecting unit is not available in Placement data
detecting option components of the chip rise detecting option components.
Check of the maximum number The number of components exceeds the maximum number of
of components per one station components which can be picked up.
Pick-up of vision components The standard VCS is not available in Pick data of vision
(over 33.5 mm) components whose dimension exceeds 33.5 mm.
Pick-up of vision components The standard VCS or optional 37.5 mm VCS is not available
whose dimension is longer in Pick data of vision components whose dimension is longer
than 24 mm, but 33.5 mm or than 24 mm, but 33.5 mm or shorter.
shorter.
Pick-up of vision components The standard VCS or optional VCS (37.5 mm, 27.5 mm or 27
whose dimension is longer mm) is not available in Pick data of vision components whose
than 16 mm, but 24 mm or dimension is 23 mm or shorter.
shorter.
Pick-up of vision components The standard VCS or optional VCS (37.5 mm, 27.5 mm, 27
whose dimension is 16 mm or mm or 18 mm) is not available in Pick data of vision
shorter components whose dimension is 14 mm or shorter.
Pick-up of Coplanarity option The coplanarity unit is not available in Pick data of coplanarity
components option components.
Pick-up of Verify option The verify unit is not available in Pick data of verify option
components components.
Overlap of IC collection belt The feeder specified in Pick data is positioned over the IC
collection belt.
Stick type The stick changer cannot be handled.
The number of stick changers exceeds the number of stick
changers installable.
Component height 20 mm The component height is not set to 20 mm in Pick data of
components whose height exceeds the standard component
height set for each station.
Pick position The machine calculates the pick position of each component
based on the current line configuration, then checks to see if
the component pick-up point is within the head axis movable
area.
Pick-up of general vision If the specified vision processor unit is a model earlier than
components JVS3 in the placement data on a general-purpose vision
component.
If there is no station equipped with the vision processor unit
set to JVS3 in the line even though "Automatic selection" is
selected as the placement data of a general-purpose vision
component.
Bulk feeder type (BF25RS, The specified station cannot handle a bulk feeder (BF25RS,
BF25CS, BF28RS, BF28CS) BF25CS, BF28RS, or BF28CS).
There is no available bulk feeder (BF25RS, BF25CS,
BF28RS, BF28CS) when Auto is selected in Pick data on a
component, which is to use a bulk feeder.
4 132
Placement of an SOT If an SOT direction-checking table cannot be used in the
component whose direction is placement data of an SOT component whose direction is
checked checked.
(2000 series only)
Component Discarding An IC recovery belt is not installed although the setting

item Compo Reject to of a component is set to Trash
conveyor and Auto is selected as a station in Pick data.
An IC recovery belt is not installed although the setting
item Compo Reject to of a component to be picked up is
set to Trash conveyor.
The tray feeder (see Note) that is associated with the
component discarding destination is not installed although
the setting item Compo Reject to of a component to be
picked up is set to Tray restore, and Auto is selected as
a station in Pick data.
The tray feeder (see Note) associated with the component
discarding destination is not installed although the setting
item Compo Reject to of a component to be picked up is
set to Tray restore.
A station is set to an MTC when the setting item Compo
Reject to of a component is set to Tray restore and the
setting item Shuttle is set to Mecha.
Note: Tray feeders associated with the setting Tray restore
are as follows:
MTC: TR6S, TR6D and TR4S
MTS: TR5S and TR5D
Tray holder: all types of tray holders
DTS
Overlapped with a DTS The area occupied by a feeder specified to pick up a
component in Pick data is overlapped with that by a DTS.
Nozzle (for a KE-2030) If the Sequential and Mix Mode is selected at the menu item
2030 Mode Specification of the 2000 Option tab, Use
Optimization menu, the menu item SPLY (supply) is all
entered to the pick data on the same component on the Pick
data screen that is associated with Component data, and a
nozzle specified on the Component data screen does not
exist on both of the stations.
Note that if a nozzle is located at either of both stations when
Pick data is set to both stations, the system will not handle
this situation as an error.
2030 Mode Specification of the 2000 Option tab, Auto
arrange empty nozzle positions is selected at the menu item
Nozzle of the Assignments tab of the Optimization menu,
the menu item SPLY (supply) is all entered to the pick data
on the same component on the Pick data screen that is
associated with Component data, and a nozzle specified on
the Component data screen does not exist on both of the
stations.
Note that if a nozzle is located at either of both stations when
Pick data is set to both stations, the system will not handle
this situation as an error.
4 133

Vision data Line The line cannot handle Vision data.
(Lead components) whose size is 0.4 mm or larger.
Placement of vision The optional VCS (37.5 mm, 27 mm or 18 mm) is not set in
components (0.3 <= Pitch < 0.4 Placement data of vision components whose pitch is 0.3 mm
mm) (Lead components) or wider, but narrower than 0.4 mm.
components (0.2 <= Pitch < 0.3 data of vision components whose pitch is 0.2 mm or wider,
mm) (Lead components) but narrower than 0.3 mm.
components (0.135 <= Pitch < vision components whose pitch is 0.135 mm or wider, but
0.2 mm) (Lead components) narrower than 0.2 mm.
components (15 < the smallest vision components whose minimum pitch is wider than 15
pitch <= 22 mm) (Lead mm, but 22 mm or narrower.
components)
components (11 < the smallest Placement data of general vision components whose
pitch <=15 mm) (Lead minimum pitch is wider than 11 mm, but 15 mm or narrower.
components)
components (6.5 < the smallest set in Placement data of general vision components whose
pitch <= 11 mm) (Lead minimum pitch is wider than 6.5 mm, but 11 mm or narrower.
components)
components (0.5 <= the VCS is not set in Placement data of general vision
smallest pitch <=6.5 mm) components whose minimum pitch is 0.5 mm or wider, but
components (0.4 <= the Placement data of general vision components whose
smallest pitch <0.5 mm) (Lead minimum pitch is 0.4 mm or wider, but narrower than 0.5 mm.
components)
components (0.3 <= the data of general vision components whose minimum pitch is
smallest pitch < 0.3 mm) (Lead 0.3 mm or wider, but narrower than 0.4 mm.
components)
components (0.2 <= the general vision components whose minimum pitch is 0.2 mm
smallest pitch < 0.3 mm) (Lead or wider, but narrower than 0.3 mm.
components)
Placement of vision The standard VCS is not set in Placement data of vision
components (15 < the smallest components whose minimum pitch is wider than 15 mm, but
pitch <= 22 mm) (Ball 22 mm or narrower.
components)
Placement of vision The standard VCS or optional 37.5 mm VCS is not set in
components (11 < the smallest Placement data of vision components whose minimum pitch
pitch <15 mm) (Ball is wider than 11 mm, but 15 mm or narrower.
components)
Placement of vision The standard VCS or optional 37.5 mm or 27 mm VCS is not
components (6.5 < the smallest set in Placement data of vision components whose minimum
pitch <= 11 mm) (Ball pitch is wider than 6.5 mm, but 11 mm or narrower.
components)
Placement of vision The standard VCS optional 37.5 mm, 27 mm or 18 mm VCS
components (1.0 <= the is not set in Placement data of vision components whose
smallest pitch < 6.5 mm) (Ball minimum pitch is wider than 1.0 mm, but 6.5 mm or narrower.
components)
4 134
Placement of vision The optional 37.5 mm, 27 mm or 18 mm VCS is not set in
components (0.8 <= the Placement data of vision components whose minimum pitch
smallest pitch < 1.0 mm) (Ball is 0.8 mm or wider, but narrower than 1.0 mm.
components)
Placement of vision The optional 27 mm or 18 mm VCS is not set in Placement
components (0.5 <= the data of vision components whose minimum pitch is 0.5 mm or
components)
components (0.35 <= the vision components whose minimum pitch is 0.35 mm or
components)
Pick-up of all balls or all lands The BGA vision recognition function cannot be used with the
vision recognition components station in Pick data of all balls or all lands vision recognition
components.
If the pitch width is equal to the pith length in the pick data on
vision all ball or all land recognition components (for a BGA
component, the width and length are 2.00 mm or longer and
for an FBGA component, they are 1.00 mm or longer), and
one of the standard type BGA, peripheral type BGA and user
ball pattern is selected as a ball pattern, but there is no
KE-2000 series station.
If the pitch width is not equal to the pitch length and there is
no KE-2000 series station.
Number of all balls or all lands The number of user-defined ball pattern components in Pick
vision recognition ball pattern data is found to exceed 10 with the all balls or all lands vision
components recognition function.
Light type Error conditions of the VCS recognition type specified on the
MSL setup menu and the light type specified in Light data
Reflective Penetra-
VCS recognition type Side light
light tive light
No recognition
BGA vision recognition
Penetrative recognition
Reflective recognition
BGA, penetrative
BGA, reflective
Penetrative, reflective
BGA, Penetrative, reflective
Component for which you can The component size is smaller than 0.6 mm.
select Vision centering
component as its component
type
4 135
Optimization Non-stop option The IC recovery belt is used on the rear side although
option Front to Rear is selected from the Primary Secondary
pull-down menu
- If the area is set to front or rear.
A DTS is installed on your system, and No is not selected
from the Feeder pull-down menu on the Non-Stop
option tab.
A tray holder is used and the menu item Feeder on the
Non-stop tab is not set to No.
- Arrange priority is set to a KE-2000 on the Non-Stop
tab.
(That is, the line includes a KE-2000 station, and the
Arrange priority is set to Line on the Non-Stop option
tab.
A belt feeder is used and the menu item Feeder on the
Non-stop tab is not set to No.
No is not selected from the Feeder pull-down menu on
the Non-Stop option tab even though the machine is not
designed for not-stop operation (this option is not installed
on the station).
4 136
To check a general-purpose vision component, the system assigns priorities to its data as
shown below, then performs the data coherence check in the order of the priorities.
If an error is detected when the system checks data whose priority is relatively higher, the
system finishes checking data on the component at that point.
The detailed error message appears below the item at which an error is detected.
1. Component data
1.1 Component type (lead components, ball components, outline-recognition
components and other components whose vision is used for centering)
1.2 Dimensions
2 Element data
2.1 Element group
2.2 Element
3 Control data
3.1 Light type
3.2 Number of divisions
3.3 Applied VCS
Check that displays the error message Wrong element group setting on the screen
Component dimension X The offset coordinate X is the absolute value of the component
dimension or larger value.
Component dimension Y The offset coordinate Y is the absolute value of the component
Check that displays the error message Wrong element setting on the screen
Component dimension X The offset coordinate X is the absolute value of the component
Component dimension Y The offset coordinate Y is the absolute value of the component
Lead component whose dimension X is Component whose pitch X is not within the range between 0.5 mm
from 2.5 mm to 74.0 mm and 22 mm
from 2.3 mm to 68.0 mm and 15.0 mm
Lead component whose dimension X is Component whose pitch X is not within the range between 0.3mm
Ball component whose dimension X is Component whose pitch X is not within the range between 1.0 mm
Ball component whose dimension Y is Component whose pitch Y is not within the range between 1.0 mm
4 137
Lead component whose dimension X is Element dimension X is not within the range between 0.22 mm and
from 2.5 mm to 74.0 mm 11.0 mm
from 2.1 mm to 48.0 mm 5.5mm
from1.9 mm to 31.0 mm 3.7 mm
Lead component whose dimension Y is Element dimension Y is not within the range between 0.4 mm and
from 2.5 mm to 150.0 mm 20.0 mm
from 2.3 mm to 100.5 mm 14.0 mm
Ball component whose dimension X is Element dimension X is not within the range between 0.4 mm and
Mark component whose dimension X is Element dimension X is not within the range between 2.0 mm and
Mark component whose dimension Y is Element dimension Y is not within the range between 2.0 mm and
from 5.0 mm to 150.0 mm 10.0 mm
from2.5 mm to 72.0 mm 5.0 mm
Check that displays the error message Wrong number of divisions on the screen
Component whose dimension X is When 2 is not selected as the number of divisions
50.0 mm or more
Component whose dimension Y is When 1 is selected as the number of divisions
50.0 mm or more
Component whose dimension Y When 3 is not selected as the number of divisions
is120.0 mm or more
Component whose dimension Y is When 3 is selected as the number of divisions
from 46.5 mm to 48 mm
4 138
Check that displays the error message The light type is different on the screen
Lead component whose dimension X is When the light type is neither Bottom Lights nor Side Lights
Lead component whose dimension X is When the light type is not Back Light
from 9.0 mm to 35.0 mm
Lead component whose dimension Y is When the light type is neither Bottom Lights nor Side Lights
Lead component whose dimension Y is When the light type is not Back Lights
Ball component whose dimension X is When the light type is neither Bottom Lights nor Side Lights
Ball components When the light type is Back Lights
Ball component whose dimension Y is When the light type is neither Bottom Lights nor Side Lights
Outline-recognition component whose When the light type is neither Bottom Lights nor Side Lights
dimension X is from 1.7 mm to 74 mm
Outline-recognition component whose When the light type is not Back Lights
dimension X is from 9.0 mm to 35.0 mm
Outline-recognition component whose When the light type is neither Bottom Lights nor Side Lights
dimension Y is from 1.7 mm to 150.0
mm
Outline-recognition component whose When the light type is not Back Lights
dimension Y is from 9.0 mm to 120.0
mm
Check that displays the error message Different VCS type on the screen
Dimension X of a component is from If a VCS other than the standard VCS is selected
68.0 mm to 74.0 mm and the number of
divisions X is 2.
Dimension X of a component is from If a VCS other than the standard VCS and optional 37.5-mm VCS
50.0 mm to 68.0 mm and the number of is selected
divisions X is 2.
Dimension X of a component is If a VCS other than an optional 37.5-mm VCS is selected
from48.0 mm to 50.0 mm and the
number of divisions X is 2.
Dimension X of a component is from If a VCS other than an optional 37.5- or 27-mm VCS is selected
divisions X is 2.
Dimensions of a component are from If a VCS other than an optional 27-mm VCS is selected
divisions X is 2.
Dimension X of a component is from If a VCS other than an optional 27-mm VCS or 18-mm VCS is
24.0 mm to 31.0 mm and the number of selected
divisions X is 2.
Dimensions of a component are from If a VCS other than an optional 18-mm VCS is selected
divisions X is 2.
Dimension X of a component is from If a VCS other than the standard VCS is selected
divisions X is 1.
4 139
Dimension X of a component is from If a VCS other than the standard VCS or optional 37.5-mm VCS is
24.0 mm to 34.0 mm and the number selected
of divisions X is 1.
Dimension X of a component is from If a VCS other than the standard VCS or optional VCS (37.5-mm or
15.5 mm to 24.0 mm and the number 27-mm) is selected
of divisions X is 1.
Dimension X of a component is from If the component type is a lead component and the standard VCS
2.3 mm to 2.5 mm and the number of is used
divisions X is 1.
Dimension X of a component is from If the component type is a lead component and the standard VCS
2.1 mm to 2.3 mm and the number of or optional 37.5-mm VCS is used
divisions X is 1.
Dimension X of a component is from If the component type is a lead component and a VCS other than
1.9 mm to 2.1 mm and the number of an optional 18.0-mm VCS is selected
divisions X is 1.
Component dimension X is from1.2 If the component type is a ball component and the standard VCS is
mm to 2.0 mm and the number of selected
divisions X is 1.
Dimension X of a component is from If the component type is a ball component and the standard VCS or
1.0 mm to 1.2 mm and the number of optional 37.5-mm VCS is selected
divisions X is 1.
Dimension X of a component is from If the component type is a ball component and a VCS other than an
divisions X is 1.
Dimension Y of a component is from If a VCS other than the standard VCS is selected
100.5 mm to 150 mm and the number
of divisions Y is 3.
Dimension Y of a component is from If a VCS other than the standard VCS or optional 37.5-mm VCS is
100 mm to 100.5 mm and the number selected
Dimension Y of a component is from If a VCS other than an optional 37.5-mm VCS is selected
72 mm to 100 mm and the number of
divisions Y is 3.
Dimension Y of a component is from If a VCS other than an optional 37.5-mm or 27-mm VCS is selected
divisions Y is 3.
Dimension Y of a component is from If a VCS other than an optional 27-mm VCS is selected
divisions Y is 3.
31.0 mm to 46.5 mm and the number
divisions Y is 2.
Dimension Y of a component is from If a VCS other than the standard VCS or optional 37.5-mm VCS is
50 mm to 68 mm and the number of selected
divisions Y is 2.
48 mm to50 mm and the number of
divisions Y is 2.
Dimension Y of a component is from If a VCS other than an optional 37.5-mm or 27-mm VCS is selected
divisions Y is 2.
4 140
divisions Y is 2.
Dimension Y of a component is from If a VCS other than an optional 27-mm or 18-mm VCS is selected
divisions Y is 2.
15.5 mm to 31 mm and the number of
divisions Y is 2.
divisions Y is 1.
Dimension Y of a component is from If a VCS other than the standard VCS and optional 37.5-mm VCS
24 mm to 34 mm and the number of is selected
divisions Y is 1.
Dimension Y of a component is from If a VCS other than the standard VCS and optional VCS (37.5-mm
15.5 mm to 24 mm and the number of or 27-mm) is selected
divisions Y is 1. (That is, if an optional 18-mm VCS is selected)
Dimension Y of a component is from If the standard VCS is selected
divisions X is 1.
Dimension Y of a component is from If the standard VCS or optional 37.5-mm VCS is selected
divisions X is 1.
divisions X is 1.
Dimension Y of a component is If the component type is a ball component and the standard VCS is
from1.2 mm to 2.0 mm and the selected
number of divisions Y is 1.
Dimension Y of a component is from If the component type is a ball component and the standard VCS or
1.0 mm to 1.2 mm and the number of optional 37.5-mm VCS is used
divisions Y is 1.
Dimension Y of a component is from If the component type is a ball component and a VCS other than an
divisions Y is 1.
General-purpose vision component Component whose element pitch is from 0.2 mm to 0.5 mm if the
(lead component) for which the standard VCS is set in Control data
standard VCS is selected in Control
data
General-purpose vision component Component whose element pitch is from 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm or from
(lead component) for which an optional 15.0 mm to 22.0 mm if an optional 37.5-mm VCS is set in Control
37.5-mm VCS is selected in Control data
data
General-purpose vision component Component whose element pitch is from 0.2 mm to 0.3 mm or from
(lead component) for which an optional 11.0 mm to 22.0 mm if an optional 27-mm VCS is set in Control
27-mm VCS is selected in Control data data
General-purpose vision component Component whose element pitch is from 6.5 mm to 22.0 if an
(lead component) for which an optional optional 18-mm VCS is set in Control data
18-mm VCS is selected in Control data
General-purpose vision component Component whose element pitch is from 0.35 mm to 1.0 mm if the
(ball component) for which the standard VCS is set in Control data
data
4 141
General-purpose vision component (ball Component whose element pitch is from 0.35mm to 0.8 mm or from
component) for which an optional 15.0 mm to 22.0 mm if an optional 37.5-mm VCS is set in Control
37.5-mm VCS is selected in Control data data
General-purpose vision component (ball Component whose element pitch is from 0.35 mm to 0.5 mm or
component) for which an optional 27-mm from 11.0 mm to 22.0 mm if an optional 27-mm VCS is set in
VCS is selected in Control data Control data
General-purpose vision component (ball Component whose element pitch is from 6.5 mm to 22.0 if an
component) for which an optional 18-mm optional 18-mm VCS is set in Control data
VCS is selected in Control data
General-purpose vision component (lead Component whose element size X is from 0.08 mm to 0.22 mm if
component) for which the standard VCS the standard VCS is set in Control data
is selected in Control data
General-purpose vision component (lead Component whose element size X is from 0.08mm to 0.15 mm or
component) for which an optional from 7.7 mm to 11.0 mm if an optional 37.5-mm VCS is set in
37.5-mm VCS is selected in Control data Control data
General-purpose vision component (lead Component whose element size X is from 0.08 mm to 0.11 mm or
component) for which an optional 27-mm from 5.5 mm to 11.0 mm if an optional 27-mm VCS is set in Control
VCS is selected in Control data data
General-purpose vision component (lead Component whose element size X is from 3.7 mm to 11.0 if an
VCS is selected as Control data
General-purpose vision component (lead Component whose element size Y is from 0.14 mm to 0.4 mm if the
component) for which the standard VCS standard VCS is set in Control data
General-purpose vision component (lead Component whose element size Y is from 0.14mm to 0.3 mm or
General-purpose vision component (lead Component whose element size Y is from 0.14mm to 0.2 mm or
component) for which an optional 27-mm from 10.0 mm to 20.0 mm if an optional 27-mm VCS is set in
VCS is selected in Control data Control data
General-purpose vision component (lead Component whose element size Y is from 7.0 mm to 20.0 mm if an
General-purpose vision component (ball Component whose element size is from 0.14 mm to 0.4 mm if the
component) for which the standard VCS standard VCS is set in Control data
General-purpose vision component (ball Component whose element size is from 0.14mm to 0.3 mm or from
component) for which an optional 3.5 mm to 5.0 mm if an optional 37.5-mm VCS is set in Control
37.5-mm VCS is selected in Control data data
General-purpose vision component (ball Component whose element size is from 0.14 mm to 0.2 mm or from
component) for which an optional 27-mm 2.5 mm to 5.0 mm if an optional 27-mm VCS is set in Control data
General-purpose vision component (ball Component whose element size is from 1.5 mm to 5.0 mm if an
General-purpose vision component (mark Component whose element size X is from 0.7 mm to 2.0 mm if
component) for which the standard VCS the standard VCS is set in Control data
General-purpose vision component (mark Component whose element size X is from 0.7mm to 1.4 mm or
4 142
General-purpose vision component Component whose element size X is from 0.7 mm to 1.0 mm or
(mark component) for which an optional from 5.0 mm to 10.0 mm if an optional 27-mm VCS is set in
27-mm VCS is selected in Control data Control data
General-purpose vision component Component whose element size X is from 3.0 mm to 10.0 mm if an
(mark component) for which an optional optional 18-mm VCS is set in Control data
General-purpose vision component Component whose element size Y is from 0.7 mm to 2.0 mm if the
(mark component) for which the standard VCS is set in Control data
data
General-purpose vision component Component whose element size Y is from 0.7mm to 1.4 mm or
(mark component) for which an optional from 7.0 mm to 10.0 mm if an optional 37.5-mm VCS is set in
37.5-mm VCS is selected in Control Control data
data
General-purpose vision component Component whose element size Y is from 0.7 mm to 1.0 mm or
(mark component) for which an optional from 5.0 mm to 10.0 mm if an optional 27-mm VCS is set in
27-mm VCS is selected in Control data Control data
General-purpose vision component Component whose element size Y is from 3.0 mm to 10.0 if an
(mark component) for which an optional optional 18-mm VCS is set in Control data
Standard VCS is selected, the number If a value not in the range from - 50 mm to 50 mm is entered as the
of divisions X is 1, and the light type is offset coordinate X
Bottom Lights or Side Lights.
Standard VCS is selected and the If a value not in the range from - 35 mm to 35 mm is entered as the
number of divisions X is 1, and the light offset coordinate X
type is Back Light.
Optional 37.5-mm VCS is selected and If a value not in the range from - 34 mm to 34 mm is entered as the
the number of divisions X is 1. offset coordinate X
Optional 27-mm VCS is selected and If a value not in the range from - 24 mm to 24 mm is entered as the
Optional 18-mm VCS is selected and If a value not in the range from - 15 mm to 15 mm is entered as the
Standard VCS is selected, the number If a value not in the range from - 100 mm to 100 mm is entered as
of divisions Y is 2, and the light type is the offset coordinate Y
of divisions Y is 1, and the light type is offset coordinate Y
Standard VCS is selected, the number If a value not in the range from - 100 mm to 100 mm is entered as
of divisions Y is 2, and the light type is the offset coordinate Y
Back Lights.
of divisions Y is 1, and the light type is offset coordinate Y
Back Lights.
Optional 37.5-mm VCS is selected, and If a value not in the range from - 68 mm to 68 mm is entered as the
the number of divisions Y is 2. offset coordinate Y
Optional 37.5-mm VCS is selected, and If a value not in the range from - 34 mm to 34 mm is entered as the
Optional 27-mm VCS is selected, and If a value not in the range from - 48 mm to 48 mm is entered as the
4 143
(4) Check when inputting data to a production program
At data input, perform the check operation which does not make you take
consideration into the line configuration: note that you have to know the model
name to specify the station.
Classification Error
PWB data A circuit lies off the edge of a board.
PWB data BOC mark out of range error
PWB data Bad mark out of range error
Placement data Component ID duplication
Placement data/PWB data Check to see if a placement point lies off a board or circuit.
Placement data IC mark out of range error
Placement data Number of mark data records check
Component data Component type and centering method coherence check
Component data Placement/coating coherence check
Component data/Pick data Component height range check by the station type
Pick data Package duplication check
Pick data Check of the number of registered tray holders
Pick data Lane number and stick type coherence check
Pick data Tray holder type consistency check
Vision data Coherence check between the component type and the number of
leads/lead position
Vision data Component dimensions check and element data/control data coherence
check
Read permanent information Permanent information and component data overlap check
Station data Check to see if the dry-run position does not lie off a board.
4 144
4.9.2.1 Start up
To invoke the [Data coherence] command, select it on the Data menu.
You cannot execute the [Line coherence check] command if you do not specify any
file name.
If you execute this command although you do not specify any file name, the Give
file name and save dialog box appears on the screen (see Section 4.2.4 Save As
for details).
Specify a file name, and click the <OK> button. The system starts the line
coherence check.
When you click the <Cancel> button, the system stops the process for saving a file
with the specified file name. Therefore, any file is not specified, and the system
cannot execute the line coherence check.
Note that the Give file name and save dialog box that appears when the line
coherence check starts up does not allow you to save the file in the format
applicable to other model unlike the dialog box that appears when you save a file
normally.
4.9.2.2 Reporting the check result

The message box appears on the screen which indicates whether an error occurs or
not and displays the number of errors if any.
If any error is not detected
4 145
If an error is detected
When you click the <OK> button if any error is detected, the message appears
on the screen which asks you whether to display the descriptions of the error(s).
When you click the <OK> button, the error lists appears with the Notepad,
which is bundled with Windows.
The error lists displays the data type, data number, error item name, and cause
of the error detected in this order.
4 146
4.10 Optimization
(1) Outline
The Optimization utility optimizes the feeder mounting position and the
pick-up/placement order of a production program which was created with the
Program Editing utility.
The optimization output result is affected by the factors described in the following
table:
Table 4.10.1 Optimization Factors
Factor Detailed Factor

Machine Setup settings Station types
Used status of each unit
Production Program data Nozzles to be used
Feeders to be used
Number of component reels available to production
Centering method
(2) Types of Optimization Paths

Optimization consists of the Execution Path described in the table below. Each
execution path is loop-processed by the Feedback option.
Table 4.10.2 Execution Paths
Path Function Description

Feeder Layout Outputs the optimum feeder mounting position to the program data that was divided
to each station.
Re-arrange Outputs the optimal pick and placement order according to the feeder layout output.
Placement Order
(3) Optimization Flow and Production Program File
Optimization flow
Start of optimization
Feeder layout
Rearrangement of
placement order
End of optimization
Figure 4.10.1 Optimization Flow and Production Program File
4 147
(4) Optimization Menu Organization
The Optimization menu is organized as shown below:
Figure 4.10.2 Optimization Menu Organization
Table 4.10.3 Optimization Menu Items and Their Descriptions
Item Descriptions
Optimization (G) Sets optimization options and executes optimization
Divided Placement Data (P) Displays placement data distributed to each station
Nozzle layout(N) Displays nozzle information distributed to each station
Component supply count (S) Sets the number of reels for each component type
4 148
4.10.1 Optimization
This command executes optimization:
Figure 4.10.1.1 Optimization Commands
The result of optimization varies greatly depending on the option settings or the
number of components to be fed. We recommend that you understand the meaning
of each option and the number of components to be fed to control the optimization
output.
Select the [Optimization] command from the Optimization menu. The following
Optimization dialog displays:
Figure 4.10.1.2 Optimization Dialog box
4 149
The dialog box consists of options and buttons related to optimization.
Table 4.10.1.1 Optimization Option Types
Option types Purpose

Assignments Option Specifies the options to be referred to by the Optimization utility to assign a
nozzle or Pick data.
Area Option Specifies the area in which feeders can be mounted.
Feeder arrange Option Specifies the option for arranging feeders.
Place order Option Sets the options for rearranging placement order.
2000 Option Specifies the options unique to the KE-2000 series of products.
Non-stop Option Specifies a station that is to perform the Non-stop operation.
Table 4.10.1.2 Common Buttons
Button Name Function

Run Executes optimization with the options specified on the Optimization dialog box.
OK Validates the changes in the Optimization option(s), and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Cancels the changes in the Optimization option(s), and closes the dialog box.
Table 4.10.1.3 Buttons for Each Option
Button Name Function

Save as Default Saves the settings on the Optimization dialog box as the default setting. These
settings are used when a new program is created.
Default Returns the settings to the standard settings at the factory.
4 150
Supplementary Explanation of Terms
The Placement data item for specifying a station and the Pick data items for
specifying a station and component supply position are provided in production
program data to control the optimization output.
Table 4.10.1.4 Supplementary explanation of terms
Terms Explanation
Placement Auto selection Optimization distributes the placement points to the optimum stations.
Data
Pick data Auto selection The item sply is set to "AUTO".
The Optimization utility arranges a feeder to the optimal mounting
position of the station.
When the component supply count is set to automatic, the number
of feeders is optimized. If it is set to manual, the system assigns the
specified number of feeders to components. The item Supply is
also set to automatic selection, but in this Manual, Automatic
selection indicates that a station is automatically selected.
Specify supply The item "Sply" of Pick data is not set to "AUTO".
position
(1) Executing the Optimization Utility

You can start the optimization process by clicking the Run button in the
Optimization dialog box. A dialog box displays to show the optimization option
settings:
Figure 4.10.1.3 Confirmation for optimization options

(displayed with the Program Editing or Production Planning utility)
4 151
By clicking <OK> button, the optimum division will continue:
Figure 4.10.1.4 Optimization process display dialog box
When the Optimization utility finishes successfully, the Optimization process display
dialog box shown above disappears. If an error occurs, the corresponding error
message appears on the screen.
To abort the executed Optimization utility, click the <Stop> button displayed on the
Optimization process display dialog box.
When you click the <Stop> button, the following message displays:
OK Stops the optimization process
Cancel Re-starts the optimization process
Figure 4.10.1.5 Optimization abort confirmation message
Notes: The <Run> button is enabled when the program data is complete.
Otherwise, it is dimmed in gray.
When you click the <Run> button, the consistency check is performed.
When the program data cannot be used for production in the active line,
an error is displayed in the memo.
4 152
(2) Assignments Option
When you select the [Optimization] command from the menu or tool bar, the
Assignments option tab is pre-selected:
Figure 4.10.1.6 Assignments Option
Click on a drop-down button of the option setting you want to change to display the
available choices:
Select the desired one.
Figure 4.10.1.7 When you click the drop-down arrow button of the Pick Data option
4 153
The Assignments options are described in the table below:
Table 4.10.1.5 Assignments option detailed descriptions
Items to be
Function Choices
set
Nozzle Specifies if the Optimization [Auto arrange nozzles]
utility assigns nozzles. The Optimization utility assigns nozzles and ignores
the permanent information/ATC nozzle settings.
[Auto arrange empty nozzle positions]
The Optimization utility assigns additional nozzles if
there are empty ATC slots according to permanent
information/ATC nozzle settings.
[Use permanent nozzle setup from MSL Setup]
Nozzles are assigned according to the permanent
information/ATC nozzle settings. The Optimization
utility does not assign any nozzles.
Pick Data Specifies whether to assign [Use manual station/position assignments]
feeders to the station Assigns a feeder(s) whose component feeding
specified in the Pick data position is specified according to that specification.
station section and supply
section. The Optimization utility assigns feeders when they
are set to auto selection.
[Auto assign all data]
Re-assigns all feeders as if they are set to auto
selection.
If the supply position is not However the permanent feeders are assigned
changed as a result of at the position specified.
optimization, the pick position
XYZ for those feeders will be
kept.
Assign several stick components to one stick feeder.
Assign the same type of stick components to one feeder. If this option is not checked, assign
one lane to one feeder to allow simultaneous pick-up of components.
If the lane is specified for a particular component, then the specified lane is used.
Note: The "permanent nozzle" means a nozzle which you set on the Machine Setup
menu.
4 154
(3) Area Option
Optimization can specify the area that can be used to distribute feeders.
When the Area option is used, the feeder installation range can be switched
between the front and the rear for each program.
By installing the feeders on the feeder trolley ahead of time, you can shorten the
time until the next production start.
Click on the Area Option tab to display the following dialog:
Figure 4.10.1.8 Area Option
When you check the line check box, you can specify the feeder installation range
for the whole line:
Figure 4.10.1.9 Specify area in the line
Both sides Optimization assigns the feeders to both sides.

Front only Optimization assigns the feeders to front side only.
Rear only Optimization assigns the feeder to rear side only.
Front priority Optimization attempts to assign feeders to the front first, but if not
possible, feeders are assigned to the rear .
Rear priority Optimization attempts to assign feeders to the rear first, but if not
possible, feeders are assigned to the front .
4 155
(4) Feeder Arrange Option
When you use the Feeder arrange option, you can specify the optimization
option for assigning feeders.
Click on the Feeder arrange option tab to display the following dialog box:
Figure 4.10.1.10 Feeder Arrange Option
Placement peak
Specify the starting point for assigning feeders. The choices are:
Medium point of placement: Arranges feeder in the median (center) of placement
points
Average point of placement: Arranges feeder in the average point of placement
points
Note: When you check the check box Arrange feeders according to the placement
peak point is fixed on center of the PWB on the 2000 option dialog box, this
item is disabled for a KE-2000 series of station.
4 156
(5) Place Order Option
When you use the Place order option, you can specify the optimization option for
deciding the pick-up/placement order of components.
Figure 4.10.1.11 Place order option
Data order
Specify the placement data order in the station format that is divided and created by
the Optimization utility.
Figure 4.10.1.12 Data
Assign in input order of Production Program File

This is the order that the Optimization utility assigned the placement data at
division.
Assign in optimized order
The optimization order becomes the input order of Placement data.
4 157
(6) 2000 Option
Specify KE-2000 series specific optimization option. Click the 2000 Option tab to
display the following dialog box:
Figure 4.10.1.13 2000 Option
Note: The "2000 Option" is an option common to the KE-2000 series of products.
Therefore, this option is invalid for this model, but it provides selectable options
MTC/MTS Tray Priority

Specify whether the same type of components are to be assigned to an MTC or
MTS or assigned with giving the components feeding speed the highest priority.
Figure 4.10.1.14 MTC/MTS Tray Priority
Group trays with same component type together:

Assigns the same type of components to an MTC or MTS.
Arrange trays to optimize supply time:
Assigns components to an MTC or MTS with giving the component feeding
speed the highest priority.
4 158
Comp Type A Comp Type A
A Comp Type B
A Comp Type C
Comp Type B A
B B
B C
Comp Type C A
C B
C C
When Group trays with same When Arrange trays to optimize

component type together is selected supply time is selected
Figure 4.10.1.15 Example of MTC/MTS Tray Priority
PCB/Circuit
Specify whether to optimize the entire board or a circuit.
Figure 4.10.1.16 PCB/Circuit
When you select Optimize by circuit, the system optimizes a circuit one by one.
When you select Optimize by PCB, the system optimizes each circuit as if
components are assigned on a single plane board.
Order placements from smallest to largest nozzle size

Specify whether to place components in the nozzle number order (from small
number to larger one.)
When you check this check box, HLC optimizes data so that the system will
place components in the nozzle number order and ignores the priority of Place
Order option.
Arrange feeders according to the placement peak point is fixed on center of the
PWB
Specify the calculation method of the component placement peak point to
assign feeders.
When this option is checked, the system assigns feeders so that the center of a
board can be the component placement peak point.
When this option is not checked, the option selected in the Placement peak
pull-down box displayed in the Feeder arrange dialog box is activated.
4 159
(7) Non-stop operation
You can use the Optimization function to specify a station that is to perform the
Non-stop operation. When you use this option, you can replace components
without stopping the current production.
When you select the Non-stop tab, the following dialog box appears on the
screen.
Figure 4.10.1.17 Non-stop option tab
When you check the check box Line, you can specify the Non-stop operation.
Figure 4.10.1.18 Specifying the Non-stop operation
Feeder
Set the Non-stop operation of a feeder.
No: The Optimization utility does not perform the Non-stop
operation.
Tact priority: The Optimization utility assigns components with considering
the tact first.
Arrange priority: The Optimization utility assigns components with considering
the feeder changeover first.
When you select Arrange priority with a KE-2020, an error occurs if the
system executes the line coherence check.
4 160
Primary Secondary
Select which side to be used mainly in Non-Stop operation mode, front or rear.
Front to Rear: The system performs PWB production with the front side mainly,
and uses the rear side when you replace components.
Rear to Front: The system performs PWB production with the rear side mainly,
and uses the front side when you replace components.
MTC/MTS
Select whether to allow an MTC and MTS to perform the Non-stop operation or
not.
4 161
4.10.2 Divided Placement Data
This command displays Placement data which is distributed to each station by the
Optimization utility. Select the menu command [Divided Placement Data] from the
Optimization menu. A submenu from which you can select stations displays. Select
a station whose data is to be displayed.
Figure 4.10.2.1 Divided Placement Data selection menu
Notes: This menu cannot be selected if optimization has not been performed
(the divided files do not exist), or if the production program has been
changed after optimization.
The display order of divided placement data can be either in the
placement order or optimization order: the order is selected with the
[Environment Settings] command displayed on the File menu.
When input order is selected, all Placement data is displayed in
placement order.
When optimization order is selected, data on a component to be
placed only is displayed in the optimized placement order as the
result of optimization.
When you select a station on the station selection dialog box, the corresponding
window appears on the screen as shown below.
Figure 4.10.2.2 Divided Placement Data Display Example (Placement Order)
4 162
Figure 4.10.2.3 Divided Placement Data Display Example (Optimization Order )
Note: When displayed in optimization order, the pair end mark / indicates the
separation of data paired during one pick and placement cycle of operation.
4.10.3 Nozzle layout

This command displays the nozzles assigned to each station by the Optimization
utility.
Figure 4.10.3.1 Nozzle Layout Selection
Select the Nozzle Layout menu command from Optimization menu. The sub-menu
appears which allows you to select a station. Select the desired station on this
sub-menu.
Notes: This menu cannot be selected if optimization has not been preformed or
if the production program has been changed after optimization.
Nozzle displayed here are nozzles that are set in the Machine setup
menu and nozzle used in the program data.
4 163
The following window displays after a station is selected:
Figure 4.10.3.2 Nozzle Layout Display Example
Perm. Nozzle (Permanent nozzle):

Nozzle layout which is set on the Machine setup menu.
Opt. Nozzle (Optimized nozzle):
Nozzle layout which is output with the Optimization utility.
No. of Nozzles:
Number of nozzle resources (Resource), the number of nozzles set as
the permanent information (Perm. Info) and the number of nozzles output
with the Optimization utility (Opt.) are displayed here.
Close: Quits the Nozzle layout dialog box.
4 164
4.10.4 Component supply count
Specify the number of components to be supplied which can be assigned by the
Optimization utility. By using two or more components (reel or tray), the productivity
can be improved.
Figure 4.10.4.1 Component supply count command
When the [Component supply count] menu command is selected, the following dialog
box displays:
Figure 4.10.4.2 Component supply count dialog box example
The detailed descriptions of each item displayed on the Component supply count
dialog box are shown below:
Component name
included in the
program Indicates that the Optimaization
utility is to set the number of
feeders automatically.
When specified manually, it
Displays the number of feeders output displays
by the Optimization utility or the
number of feeders manually assigned
Figure 4.10.4.3 Component supply count dialog box details
4 165
(1) Changing the Component supply count setting
To change the Component supply count setting, select the line of a component
whose quantity is to be changed, then click the <Change> button or double click
the line of a component.
The dialog box appears on the screen as shown below. Enter the number of
components to be supplied.
Figure 4.10.4.4 Change supply dialog box example
Auto The number of the components selected to be supplied is

automatically set. The Optimization utility optimizes the number of
feeders so that it can be within the upper limit of available resources
(number of nozzles and feeders). The number of reels or trays for
available components is assumed not to be restricted.
Manual Manually change the number of components to be supplied. The
Optimization utility assigns feeders or trays according to the specified
number of components. Note that a feeder of which placement point
has not been assigned is deleted, so the number of components may
be less than the specified number.
Select the edit box, then enter a number directly from a keyboard, or click either of the
arrow buttons next to the edit box to set it.
Figure 4.10.4.5 Example for manually setting the number of components to be supplied
4 166
(2) Initializing the Component supply count setting
The <Initialize> button sets the Component supply count automatically or sets it
to the minimum number. When you click the <Initialize> button, the following
When you select the Auto radio button, you can set the upper limit of
Component supply count in the "Limit firld".
The default value is 40.
Figure 4.10.4.6 Example for manually setting the number of components to be supplied
Auto Initializes each Component supply count automatically in the same

manner as the Auto radio button selection does on the Change
supply dialog box.
Minimum Initializes each Component supply count to the total number of the
corresponding components in Pick data.
OK Your change will take effect on the Component Supply Count dialog
box.
Cancel Cancels your change.
(3) OK
Saves the settings and closes the Component supply count dialog box.
(4) Cancel
Cancels the settings and closes the Component supply count dialog.
4 167
4.11 Display
Component form and Component list

If you invoke these commands when Component data appears on the screen, they
changes the Component data display method: form or list. See the Section on
the basic operations of Component data.
Vision Form and Vision List

See Section 5.2.2 Basic operation of Chapter 5 VCS.
Feeder layout
See the Section on the feeder layout.
Tool bar
This command displays or hides the tool bar on the screen.
4.11.1 Feeder layout

When you select the [Feeder layout] command on the Display (V) menu, it
graphically displays the feeder layout per each station according to the list of Pick
data. Mounting or not mounting of each feeder is displayed to allow you to know it
easily.
Figure 4.11.1.1 Selecting the [Feeder layout] command
4 168
1. Feeder layout window
An example of the feeder layout window is shown below.
Figure 4.11.1.2 Example of the Feeder layout window
Note: On the Feeder layout window, displayed are various feeders and trays whose
component feeding positions are specified in Pick data List screen. Feeders
and trays whose Tray Feeder or Sply item is set to Auto are not displayed
on this window.
When you click the <Close> button on the Feeder layout window, this window
closes.
When you press the ALT and F4 keys of the keyboard at the same time, this
window closes also.
(1) When you move the cursor over the figure of a feeder on the Feeder layout
window with a trackball, part of the Component data associated with the feeder
appears on the screen as a pop-up menu.
Feeder mounting position

Feeder type
Component name
Centering method (nozzle number)
Lane number
Figure 4.11.1.3 General format of component data pop-up menu
Figure 4.11.1.4 Component data pop-up menu (for a feeder)
4 169
Figure 4.11.1.5 Component data pop-up menu (for a bulk)
Figure 4.11.1.6 Component data pop-up menu (for a stick)
Figure 4.11.1.7 Component data pop-up menu (for a stick changer)
Figure 4.11.1.7a Component data pop-up menu (for an MTC)
All centering methods (nozzle numbers) which are specified in Component data
are displayed. Although the centering method (nozzle number) which cannot
be handled depending on a model name may displayed, the centering method
and nozzle number which can be handled with the model are assigned to the
model if you perform the Optimization utility.
If there is no centering method/nozzle number which can be handled with the
model, the machine performs the line coherence check to find the appropriate
ones.
For an MTC and tray holder, with a trackball, move the cursor over the
appropriate MTC/tray holder shown on the right side of the figure displayed on
the "Feeder layout" window.
(2) When an IC collection belt is optionally installed on the machine, the following
pop-up men appears on the screen.
IC collection belt mounting position R-71

IC collection belt IC collection belt
Figure 4.11.1.8 General format and example of the

Component data pop-up menu
4 170
If any feeder is designated at the IC collection belt position, the displayed figure
indicates that the IC collection belt is overlaid by the feeder. If the Optimization
utility cannot prevent such an overlaying, an error occurs. Specify the feeder
position so that the IC collection belt cannot be overlaid by the feeder.
Even though you move or copy a feeder over the IC collection belt, any error or
warning does not appear on the screen.
2. Editing data on the Feeder layout window

With a trackball, you can edit the feeder layout on the Feeder layout window.
When you edit the data, and click the <Close> button on the Feeder layout
window or Station chooser dialog box, the message appears on the screen
which asks you whether to save your edition in the program data.
(When you click the Feeder layout window with the left button of a trackball
even once, it is regarded as editing operation. The following message appears
on the screen.)
Figure 4.11.1.9 Update confirmation message
Yes: saves changes in the program data, then Pick data is changed.
The coordinates of a pick point moved or copied are reset to the
designed values.
No: Discards changes.
Cancel: Returns to the state of the machine before you click the <Close>
button.
Each edit function is described below.
Note: An IC collection belt cannot be edited.

Editing data on the Feeder layout window is performed by modifying a
displayed figure with a trackball in the manner you edit Pick data with a
keyboard, for example to edit the feeder mountable area.
4 171
(1) Selecting a feeder
Select a feeder before moving, copying or deleting it. The selected feeder is
displayed in the different manner from that not-selected feeders are. Select a
feeder in one of the following ways:
Table 4.11.1.1 Selecting a feeder
No. Operation Result

1 Point a feeder with a trackball. The pointed feeder is selected.
2 Drag the trackball cursor to Feeders enclosed in a rectangle created by dragging the trackball
enclose a feeder. cursor are selected.
3 While holding the CTRL key, If any other feeder(s) is (are) selected, the feeder pointed with the
point a feeder. CRTL key is selected in addition to the already selected feeder(s).
4 While holding the SHIFT key, Feeders displayed between the feeder you selected first and the
point a feeder. feeder you pointed are selected.
Table 4.11.1.2 Selecting unit
Package type Unit to be selected

Tape and bulk One feeder cassette
Stick One lane
Stick changer One stick
4 172
(2) Moving a feeder (within the same station)
Select a feeder to be moved, drag it to the desired position, then release the
trackball button. The selected feeder moves the the feeder mountable position
nearest to the position at which you released the button.
Point a feeder.
Drag it.
Release the
trackball button.
Figure 4.11.1.10 Figure example for moving a feeder
Note: If the feeder mountable area cannot be prepared on the mountable side
(front or rear) to which you want to move the feeder, the beep sounds, then
your moving feeder operation is canceled. Even if there is any space on
the opposite side, the feeder will not be moved there.
After moving a feeder, the moved feeder is selected.
When you select two or more feeders to be moved, the beep sounds and
your operation is canceled if those feeders cannot be mounted with
maintaining the same space between the consecutive two feeders.
4 173
(3) Copying a feeder
Select a feeder, and while holding the CTRL key, drag it. The selected feeder
is copied.
Note: The selected feeder is copied on the mounting position nearest the original
feeder position. Although the machine tries to copy a feeder on the side
(front or rear) nearest to the position at which you released the trackball
button, the beep sounds and your copy operation is canceled if the
machine cannot occupy the appropriate feeder mounting area on the side
(front or rear) where the selected feeder is copied. Even though there is
the sufficient area on the opposite side, the selected feeder cannot be
copied on that side.
After copied, the copied (not original) feeder is selected.
When you select two or more feeders to be copied, the beep sounds and
your copy operation is canceled if the copied feeders cannot be mounted
with maintaining the same space between them as the original feeders
maintained.
(4) Deleting a feeder

Select a feeder to highlight it, then press the DEL key. The selected feeder is
deleted. When you press the right button of a trackball while a feeder is being
selected, the following pop-up menu appears on the screen which allows you to
delete the selected feeder.
Figure 4.11.1.11 Pop-up menu displayed on the

Feeder layout window
Note: If all feeders associated with a certain component are deleted, its specified
supply position is canceled, then set to Auto and the data disappears from
the screen.
3. Copying a stick component

If there is no stick feeder at the destination, the same type of stick feeder is
newly assigned to the destination. A component is assigned to a Lane 1.
The stick feeder is mounted at the position nearest the copy destination so
that the feeder can occupy the appropriate mounting area.
A stick component can be copied between the same type of stick feeders.
4 174
4. Copying a stick changer component
If there is no stick changer at the destination, the same type of stick
changer is newly assigned to the destination. A component is assigned to
a Lane 1. The stick changer is mounted at the position nearest the copy
destination so that the changer can occupy the appropriate mounting area.
5. Display head image

This command changes Feeder layout window display mode to Head image
display mode. Click the right button of a trackball to open the pop-up menu,
then select the [Display head image] command.
Figure 4.11.1.12 Selecting the [Display head image] command
When you are already in Head image display mode, the check mark appears
next to the [Display head image] command on the pop-up menu.
Figure 4.11 1.13 When you are in Head image display mode
In Head image display mode, the trackball cursor is displayed instead of the
head image figure. If you assign feeders according to the head assignments
and execute the Optimization utility, components will be very likely to be picked
up simultaneously.
Figure 4.11.1.14 Screen example in Head image display mode
Head image display mode is canceled when you click the left button of a
trackball or select the [Display head image] command again after opening the
pop-up menu.
Note: Although it becomes likelier that feeders pick up components

simultaneously after you assign the feeders according to the head
assignments and execute the Optimization utility, those feeder may pick up
components at the same time as other feeders do.
The trackball arrow mark cursor position indicates the same position as the
reference head (normally the left head) of the head image cursor figure
indicates. When you move this reference head over the figure of a feeder,
and click the right button of a trackball, the copy operation functions rapidly.
4 175
6. Copy as line symmetry or Copy as point symmetry
These commands copies the selected feeder symmetrically with respect to a
line or point.
While dragging the trackball to enclose the feeder which is to be copied to
highlight it, press the right button of the trackball. The pop-up menu appears
on the screen as shown below.
Select either of the commands [Copy as line symmetry] or [Copy as point
symmetry].
If you select the front feeder, it is copied to the rear side, while if you select the
rear feeder, it is copied to the front side.
Figure 4.11.1.15 Pop-up menu
(1) When you select the [Copy as line symmetry] command

The selected feeder is copied at the position where the copied feeder fixing hole
faces the original feeder fixing hole.
(2) When you select the [Copy as point symmetry] command

The selected feeder is copied at the opposite position so that a feeder on the
front can be replaced with one on the rear at a time or vice versa.
When a feeder is copied symmetrically When a feeder is copied symmetrically

with respect to a line with respect to a point
R-75 R-79 R-1 R-5
F-75 F-79 F-75 F-79
Notes: A tray component cannot be copied.

If any component was already assigned to the copy destination, the
following error message appears on the screen and any copy operation is
not performed.
4 176
Figure 4.11.1.16 Feeder copy error message
Note: If you select a feeder lying astride the front and rear sides, the system cannot
copy it.
7. Cop to left or right (This function is available only with a KE-2030 station.)
This command copies the selected feeder to the left station or right station
(This function is available only with a KE-2030 station.).
While dragging the trackball to enclose the feeder which is to be copied to
highlight it, press the right button of the trackball. The pop-up menu appears
on the screen. Select the [Copy to left or right] command.
Figure 4.11.1.17 Pop-up menu
4 177
When you select a feeder on the left station, it is copied to the right station,
while when you select a feeder on the right station, it is copied to the left station.
In both cases, the selected feeder is copied onto the same hole position of the
opposite station.
[Copy to left or right] command is executed.
Figure 4.11.1.18 Copy operation with the [Copy to left or right] command
Notes: When you use a station other than a KE-2030, this menu item is displayed
in gray and you cannot select it.
A permanent component or tray component cannot be copied.
If you select a feeder lying astride the left station and right station, the
system cannot copy it.
If any component was already assigned to the copy destination, the error
message shown in Figure 4.11.1.16 appears on the screen, and the system
does not copy the feeder.
4 178
4.12 Machine Operation
This command actually operates the main unit to take various actions.
The Machine operation menu provides menu items corresponding to each action.
The table below describes the sub menu corresponding to each menu item and
outlines its function.
Menu item Sub menu 1 Sub menu 2 Outline of function

Transport PWB load Loads or ejects a PWB into/from the main unit.
PWB eject
Auto conveyor Adjusts the width of a PWB.
Measurement Current Measures a component according to the settings of
component Component data in details.
All component
Inspection Vision Inspects whether vision recognition is available.
recognition
Confirmation Mark BOC Confirms a BOC mark recognition operation and
saves the measured values.
Feeder Bank Confirms a bank mark recognition operation and
(Front/Rear) saves the measured values.
Coordinate Place tracking Checks a position specified with each set of
coordinates of Placement data.
Pick tracking Checks a position specified with each set of
coordinates of Pick data.
Height tracking Checks each height specified in Pick data.
Management Management Mark Database Performs various operations of the mark database.
4 179
4.12.1 Transport
4.12.1.1 PWB load/PWB eject
These commands loads or ejects a PWB respectively.
After you select either of these commands, the Conveyor dialog box, which moves
the axis to the safety position, appears on the screen if the safety cover opens.
Check the safety of the machine and yourself, then press the <Start> button.
Figure 4.12.1.1.1 Conveyor - safety confirmation dialog box
After the axis moves to the safety position, the following Pwb conveyor dialog box
Figure 4.12.1.1.2 PWB conveyor dialog box
4 180
1) Operation
Loading/Ejecting a PWB
Select whether to load or eject a PWB on the Conveyor operation list.
BOC alignment
Select whether to perform BOC alignment operation after loading a PWB.
When you select the radio button Follows the operation option., the setting
of the teaching item provided as the Operation Options is applied to the BOC
alignment operation.
2) State
The current PWB transport operation settings and status are displayed
sequentially.
To start transporting a PWB, press the <Start> button (or click the <Execution>
button). To finish transporting a PWB, click the <Exit> button. To abort operation
while a PWB is being transported for some reason, press the <Stop> button.
4 181
4.12.1.2 Auto conveyor
This command adjusts the width of the PWB transport rails.
When you select this command, the following dialog box appears on the screen.
Figure 4.12.1.2.1 Automatic conveyor width adjustment dialog box
1) Move of conveyor width

The <Move> button changes the width of the PWB transport rails to the width:
PWB dimension (Y) + the margin. The values of the following items are applied to
the actual width during transportation of a PWB.
2) PWB dimensions
Use the spin button or enter a number from a keyboard to set the dimensions of a
PWB. As the default setting, the PWB dimension (Y) specified in PWB data is
entered here.
4 182
3) Margin
Margin (W)
Use the spin button or enter a number from a keyboard to set the margin
between a PWB and the PWB transport rails.
<Get> button
This button subtracts the PWB dimension (Y) from the current width of the
PWB transport rails, and sets the result as the margin. Use the knob located
on the front of the main unit to adjust the PWB transport rails width before
clicking this button.
4) <Conveyor> button
This button invokes the Conveyor dialog box.
5) Origin width
This button zeroes the automatic PWB width adjustment device.
6) <Apply> button
This button applies the value set as the margin to the production conditions.
To quit this dialog box, click the <Exit> button.
4.12.2 Measurement
This command allows a component to be attached on actually to measure it with each
hardware device, then loads the measured result to a production program.
4.12.2.1 Measurement mode

Two types of modes are provided for measurement operation: Continuous
Measurement and Single Measurement. To switch mode, select the
corresponding command.
The command and its corresponding measurement mode are shown in Table below:
Table 4.12.2.1 Measurement mode and its corresponding menu command
Command on the
Measurement mode Description
Measurement sub-menu
Current component Single Measurement Measures a component displayed on the
Component form screen.
All component Continuous Measurement Measures all components/components which
satisfy the conditions specified in a production
program. In Single Measurement mode, you can
measure a component which failed to be measured
for some reason individually.
4 183
The operation flow in each mode is shown below.
Figure 4.12.2.1.1 Operation flow in Figure 4.12.2.1.2 Operation flow in

Single Measurement mode Continuous Measurement mode
Start of current
component Start of continuous
measurement measurement
Setting of the conditions Setting of the conditions

(in the dialog box) (in the dialog box)
No component
Start of measurement to be
measured
Abort
Any component
to be measured ? Abort
Re-measurem
Measurement
ent
End Yes
Display of the
result Measurement
(in the dialog box)
Measurement
of the next
Saving the result component
into a production
program. Display of the
End result (in the
dialog box)
Detailed
End of the current measurement
component
measurement
Saving the result

Single
into a production
Measurement
program.
End of Continuous
Measurement
4 184
4.12.2.2 Measurement type
The items to be measured are outlined in the table below.
Table 4.12.2.2 Outline of the measurement items
Measurement item Description Remarks

Dimensions of a Measures the dimensions of a component.
component (length Width
and width)
Length
Automatically calculates the optimal nozzle number.
Nozzle number
Pick-up vacuum Measures the vacuum pressure used to pick up a
pressure component.
Height of a component Measures the height of a component.
Height of a component
Automatically calculates the optimum values set for Available to a component
laser centering. centered with laser only.
Laser height
Value used for judging if a component is placed
on its side (if a tombstone error occurs).
Dimensions of a lead Measures the dimensions of a lead. Available to a component
centered with the VCS only.
Lead pitch
Lead length
Number of leads/missing lead information
4.12.2.2.1 Function of each measurement item

Component dimensions measurement function
This function measures the width and length of a component with laser or the VCS
depending on the centering method of a component to be measured. At the
same time, the optimum nozzle number is automatically calculated also. The
measurement methods are shown in Table below.
Table 4.12.2.2.1.1 Component dimensions measurement methods
Component to be measured Method

Component which is to be 1. Obtain the angle of the current component with laser.
recognized with laser
2. Rotate a component to 0 degrees in the theta direction so that the width
of laser can be the horizontal dimension.

3. Rotate a component to 90 degrees in the theta direction so that the
width of laser can be the vertical dimension.
Component which is to be 1. Recognize a component with the VCS to obtain its dimensions.
recognized with the VCS
2. Set the responded values to the width and length of a component.
4 185
Component height measuring function
This function measures the height of a component with laser. At the same time,
the system automatically calculates the optimum laser height and the value to be
used for judging if a chip is placed on its side (if a tombstone error occurs). The
measurement method is described in Table below.
Table 4.12.2.2.1.2 Component height measurement method

Component which is to be 1. Move up and down a component.
Component which is to be 2. Handle the shade of a component as the height of a component.
Component vacuum pressure measuring function

This function measures the vacuum pressure used to pick up a component. The
measurement method is described in Table below.
Table 4.12.2.2.1.3 Component vacuum pressure measurement method

Component which is to be 1. Pick up a component and obtain the head vacuum pressure level.
Component which is to be 2. Set the obtained value as the head vacuum level.
Lead information measuring function

This function obtains the lead information with the VCS, and it is available to only a
component which is to be centered with the VCS. The measurement method is
described in Table below.
Table 4.12.2.2.1.4 Lead information obtaining method

Component to be recognized 1. Recognize a component with the VCS to obtain the lead information.
with the VCS
2. Set the obtained values as the lead dimensions.
4 186
4.12.2.2.2 Measurement restrictions imposed depending on the component type
The measurement items are restricted depending on the component type of
Component data as shown in Table below.
Table 4.12.2.2.2 Measurement items available depending on the component type

Measurement items
Centering Dimensions of a Pick-up
No. Component type Laser Lead
method component vacuum
height information
Length/width Height pressure
1 Square chip Laser
2 MELF Laser
3 Aluminum electrolytic Laser
capacitor VCS
4 GaAsFET Laser
5 SOT Laser
6 SOP Laser *3 *3
VCS *1 *1
7 SOJ Laser
VCS
8 QFP Laser *3 *3
VCS *1 *1
9 PLCC (QFJ) Laser
VCS
10 PQFP (BQFP) Laser *3 *3
VCS *1 *1
11 TSOP Laser *3 *3
VCS *1 *1
12 TSOP2 Laser *3 *3
VCS *1 *1
13 BGA Laser
VCS
14 Network resistor Laser
15 Trimmer Laser
16 Unidirectional lead Laser
connector VCS
17 J lead socket Laser *2, *3
VCS *1, *2
18 Gull-wing socket Laser
VCS
19 Socket with a bumper Laser
VCS
20 Other components Laser
21 Bidirectional lead Laser *3 *2, *3
connector VCS *1 *1, *2
22 SOP with a heat sink Laser *3
VCS *1
23 FBGA Laser
24 Z lead connector Laser
VCS
25 Extension-lead VCS
connector
*1 Only components which have seven or more leads
*2 The parts configured with the same shape of leads and without any arm or metal fitting at both ends.
*3 Measured with the VCS device.
4 187
4.12.2.3 Actions taken during measurement
Head used to pick up a component
The system automatically selects a head used to pick up a component so that a
nozzle can be replaced with another one lest frequently by attempting to use a
nozzle already attached on a head. The system may use a different head every
time it measures a component depending on the nozzle attachment conditions.
Return of a component after measurement
Some components are returned to the original position and other ones are discarded
after measurement depending on their packaging style as shown in Table below.
When the setting item Compo Reject to, indicating the component discarding
method, is set to Trash conveyor or Protect, the system discards a component
according to this setting. The place onto which the system discards a component is
based on the Compo Reject to setting of Component data. Since a component
whose size is 1 mm or less may be placed on its side (tombstone error) or turned
upside down when it is returned, the system asks you how to handle it.
Table 4.12.2.3 Conditions for returning/discarding a component

Packaging Returning a Discarding a
Condition 1 Condition 2
style component component
Tape 32-mm tape feeder
Tape feeders other The shorter side length of the outer Query * 1
than the above dimensions is 1 mm or less.
The shorter side length of the outer *2
dimensions is 1 mm or more.
Bulk The shorter side length of the outer Query * 1
dimensions is 1 mm or less.
The shorter side length of the outer *2
dimensions is 1 mm or more.
Holder *2
MTC *2
MTS *2
Stick
*1 The system displays a dialog box which asks you whether to return a component or discard it. In
Continuous Measurement mode, the system displays such a dialog box before starting continuous
measurement operation.
*2 The system discards a component when the setting item Compo Reject to is set to Trash
conveyor or Protect.
Selecting a feeder which is used to pick up a component

If there are two ore more feeders assigned to the same type of component in Pick
data, a component starts being picked up based on the data you entered first as
the default setting. Only in Single Measurement mode, you can change a feeder
as desired.
Changing the coordinates of a pick-up position
If the system cannot pick up a component properly, manually enter the coordinates
or use the HOD device to teach the coordinates to change the coordinates of a
pick-up position.
Manual component pick-up
If there is no Pick data created, you can manually attach a component to the
nozzle. However, in this case, you cannot enter coordinates that indicate the
component pick-up position. You cannot operate a feeder either.
4 188
4.12.2.4 Measurement operation
4.12.2.4.1 Transition of measurement operations
The displayed screen and machine state change as shown below in
Single/Continuous Measurement mode.
Dialog box Process only

User operation Process condition
All component Start of continuous

menu measurement
Continuation measurement Executing continuous
Selection of a menu
conditions setting dialog box measurement dialog box
BACK
STOP Normally
Error Finishing
measurement of STOP
all components
Display of a No Result of continuation
Current measurement error measurement dialog box
component
menu
BACK Single
measurement
Yes
BACK (in Continuous START
Measurement mode)
OK/NEXT
Single
measurement
Executing measurement
Measurement dialog box
dialog box
Normally
OK Error
Cancel OK
HOD device key Result of measurement dialog
Display of measurement error
ENTER/CANCEL box
Teaching
PREV/NEXT
FEED RETRY
Feeder knocking Change of a pick-up position
4 189
4.12.2.4.2 Single measurement
Select the [Current component] command on the menu. The Measurement
Set each measurement item on the Measurement dialog box.
When you click the <MEAS.> button (F10 key), the system starts measuring a
component. When the system finishes measuring it, the Result of measurement
When you click the <OK> button (F8 key) on the Result of measurement dialog
box, the measurement result is saved into Component data, then the
Measurement dialog box reappears.
When you click the <CANCEL> button (ESC key) on the Result of measurement
dialog box, the system displays the Measurement dialog box again without saving
the result.
On the Measurement dialog box, you can manually enter a component pick-up
position or teach it. When you check the check box The taught result is reflected
in the pick data, the system saves the taught result into Pick data.
On the Measurement dialog box, you can use the NEXT or PREVIOUS key of the
HOD or F5 or F6 key to move to an alternative component.
(1) Setting on the Measurement dialog box

When you select the Current component command on the menu, the
Measurement dialog box appears on the screen as shown in the figure below.
Figure 4.12.2.4.2.1 Measurement dialog box
4 190
1) Component of meas. (Component of measurement)
The descriptions of a component to be measured are displayed here.
2) Pickup position
The component pick-up position is displayed here. You can change the
pick-up position to the previous or next alternative component. If there is no
Pick data created, each menu item is not displayed, so you cannot change the
component pick-up position, knock a feeder, or perform a teaching operation.
<FEED> button
When clicked, this button knocks a feeder (excluding a 32-mm paper tape
feeder) once to feed a component.
The taught results reflected in the pick data.
Check this box if you are to save the taught result into Pick data with the
HOD device. When unchecked, the coordinates displayed are used to
pick up the current component only.
3) Meas. Item (Measurement Item)

Select the item to be measured. As the default setting, all available items
are selected. Some of the measurement items are dimmed in gray
depending on the component type selected. You cannot select such a
dimmed item.
4) <MEAS.> button (F10 key)

This button measures the current component.
5) <BACK> button (ESC key)

This button finishes measuring the current component, then displays the
previous screen again.
4 191
6) Short-cut keys
In the Measurement dialog box, the following short-cut keys are provided.
Keyboard Operation
HOD key Operation
key panel key
F10 ENTER Measures the current component.
F4 Knocks a feeder.
F5 PREVIOUS Moves to the previous alternate component.
F6 NEXT Moves to the next alternate component.
ESC CANCEL Returns to the previous screen.
7) Changing the component pick-up coordinates

If the pick-up position of a component to be measured is different from the
current one, use the HOD to teach the coordinates of a component placed.
You can manually enter the coordinates to change the current ones also.
Step 1) Move the cursor to the X or Y coordinate.
Step 2) Press the HOD device button to teach the coordinates, then the
ENTER button to validate them.
Figure 4.12.2.4.2.2 Coordinates Teaching dialog box
4 192
(2) Executing measurement dialog box
While the system is measuring the current component, the following dialog box
appears on the screen. On this dialog box, the descriptions of a component
which is being measured and its pick-up position are displayed. The process
being performed is displayed also.
Figure 4.12.2.4.2.3 Executing measurement dialog box
To forcibly abort measurement, press the <Stop> button. The following dialog
box appears on the screen. Select whether to abort measurement or not.
Figure 4.12.2.4.2.4 Question to interrupt process dialog box
Depending on the packaging style of a component, the dialog box ,which asks
you whether to return a component to its original position or discard it after
measurement, may appear on the screen if the size of a component is 1 mm or
less.
Figure 4.12.2.4.2.5 Question to return dialog box
4 193
If the laser height that is calculated based on the dimensions is different from the
original value, the following message appears on the screen.
Figure 4.12.2.4.2.6 Laser height overwrite confirmation dialog box
If the height that is calculated based on the dimensions to judge whether a

component is located on its side is different from the original value, the following
message appears on the screen.
Figure 4.12.2.4.2.7 Chip-rise judging height overwrite confirmation dialog box
4 194
(3) Result of measurement
When the system finishes measuring the current component, the following
Result of measurement dialog box appears on the screen.
Figure 4.12.2.4.2.6 Result of measurement dialog box

The description of a component to be measured and its pick-up position are
displayed here.
2) Result of measured (component)

The result of measurement operation is displayed here. Data in parentheses
indicates the values of the original Component data. *** appears in the
items not measured.
4 195
3) <OK> button (F8 key)
This button validates the result of measurement, then saves the obtained
values into Component data. The Measurement dialog box reappears.
4) <CANCEL> button (ESC key)

This button cancels the result of measurement, then the previous
Measurement dialog box reappears.
5) <RETRY> button (F10 key)

This button measures the current component under the same conditions
again.
6) Short-cut keys
On the Result of measurement dialog box, the following short-cut keys are
provided.
Keyboard Operation
HOD key Operation
key panel key
F8 ENTER Validates the result.
F10 Re-measures the current component.
4.12.2.4.3 Continuous measurement

When you select the [All component] command on the menu, the Continuous
component hight measurement dialog box appears on the screen.
On the Continuous component hight measurement dialog box, set the
measurement items and range.
When you click the <MEAS.> button or press the <START> switch on the
Continuous component hight measurement dialog box, the system measures
components within the range you specified, and displays the Result of Continuous
component hight measurement dialog box every time it finishes measuring one
component.
When you click the <OK> button, the result of measurement is saved into
Component data. The system repeats this operation until it finishes measuring the
last component within the range specified, then returns to the Continuous
component hight measurement dialog box.
If you click the <STOP> button (or ESC key) or if the system detects an error during
measurement, the system enters Single Measurement mode.
4 196
(1) Setting on the Continuous component hight measurement dialog box
When you select the [All component] command on the menu, the following
Continuous component hight measurement dialog box appears on the screen.
Figure 4.12.2.4.3.1 Continuous component hight measurement dialog box

Set the item(s) displayed here if you want to measure only components which
satisfy the certain requirements of Component data.
All compo. (All components)

Measures all components specified in Component data.
Thin compo. (Thin components)
Measures only components whose height is specified in the edit box or
lower.
Appointed compo. type (Appointed component type)
Measures only components whose type is specified in the combo box.
4 197
Appointed nozzle No.
Measures only components which require a nozzle selected in the combo
box.
Laser centering compo. (Laser centering components)
Measures only components which are to be centered with laser.
Vision centering compo. (Vision centering components)
Measures only components which are to be centered with the VCS (not
available to a KE-2030/KE-2010).
2) Bounds of meas. (Bounds of measurement)

Check this check box to specify the component number to further select
components among those which already satisfy the conditions specified with
the Component of meas. items. When you check this check box, you can
specify the following items.
Start compo. No. (Start component No.)

Check this check box to specify the component data number of the first
component to be measured.
Check this box, then change the first component number displayed in the
edit box.
End compo. No. (End component No.)
Check this check box to specify the component data number of the last
component to be measured.
Check this box, then change the last component number displayed in the
edit box.
Only placement compo. (Only placement components)
Check this check box if only components specified in Placement data are
to be measured.
4 198
3) Meas. Item (Measurement Items)
Select the item(s) to be measured. As the default setting, all available items
are selected.
4) <MEAS.> button (<START> button)

Starts measuring all components.
5) <BACK> button (ESC key)

Returns to the previous screen.
6) Short-cut keys
On the Result of continuation measurement dialog box, the following
short-cut keys are provided.
Keyboard Operation
HOD key Operation
key panel key
START Starts measuring all components
ESC Returns to the previous screen.
7) Question dialog box

Immediately after the system starts measuring all components continuously,
the dialog box, which asks you how to handle a component whose size is 1
mm or less after measurement, appears on the screen.
Figure 4.12.2.4.3.2 Question - to return the minimum component dialog box
Throw away every time

Discards a component in a way you specified.
Returns every time
Returns a component to its original position.
Inquires every time
Every time the system finishes measuring one component, it displays the
dialog box which asks you how to handle it if its size is 1 mm or less.
4 199
(2) Executing continuous measurement dialog box
While the system is executing continuous measurement operation, the following
dialog box appears on the screen. The description of a component being
measured and its pick-up position are displayed on this dialog box. The process
being executed is displayed also.
Figure 4.12.2.4.3.3 Executing continuous measurement dialog box
1) Progress situation
The progress bar indicates the current progress situation.
To forcibly abort the current continuous measurement operation, press the

<STOP> button. The following dialog box appears on the screen. Select
whether to abort the measurement operation or not.
Figure 4.12.2.4.3.4 Question - to interrupt process dialog box
4 200
(3) Result of continuation measurement dialog box
When the system finishes continuous measurement completely, the following
Result of continuation measurement dialog box appears on the screen.
Figure 4.12.2.4.3.5 Result of continuous measurement dialog box

The description of a measured component and its pick-up position are
displayed here.
2) Result of measured
The measured values are displayed here. Values specified in Component
data appear in parentheses. *** appears in the item(s) which were not
measured.
4 201
3) <OK/NEXT> button (<START> button)
This button validates the result of measurement, then saves the measured
values into Component data. Then, the system starts measuring the next
component.
4) <STOP> button (ESC key)

This button cancels the result of measurement, then stops the current
continuous measurement operation to return to the previous Continuous
component hight measurement dialog box.
5) <MEAS.> button (F7 key)

This button allows the system to enter Single Measurement mode.
6) Short-cut keys
On the Result of continuation measurement dialog box, the following
short-cut keys are provided.
Keyboard Operation
HOD key Operation
key panel key
START Validates the result, then measures the next
component.
ESC STOP Aborts the continuous measurement
operation.
F7 Enters Single Measurement mode.
7) If a measurement error occurs

If a measurement error occurs for any reason, the following dialog box
appears on the screen to allow you to enter Single Measurement mode.
Figure 4.12.2.4.3.6 Continuous measurement error dialog box
4 202
(4) When continuous measurement finishes
When the system finishes measuring all components which satisfy the specified
conditions, the following dialog box appears on the screen.
Figure 4.12.2.4.3.7 Information - End of continuous measurement dialog box
4 203
4.12.3 Checking a component with vision recognition
This check attaches a component to a head actually to check to see if a component
can be centered with the vision recognition function.
4.12.3.1 Checking a component with vision recognition

The operation flow for checking a component with the vision recognition function is
shown below.
Start of check with

vision recognition
Execution of check
(on the dialog box)
Check
Check with vision

recognition
End
Display of the
result (on the
dialog box)
End of check with

vision recognition
Figure 4.12.3.1.1 Operation flow for checking a component with vision recognition
in Single check mode
4.12.3.2 Methods for checking a component with vision recognition

The system exercises a series of controls over the vision centering function according
to the settings of Component data, and checks to see if no error occurs.
4 204
4.12.3.3 Operations done during checking a component with vision recognition
The system automatically selects a head that is used to pick up a component.
It also selects a nozzle already attached on a head rather than one not attached
so that nozzles can be replaced less frequently.
However, the system may use a different head every time it measures a
component depending on the nozzle attachment condition.
Returning a component after check
After checking a component, the system returns some components onto their
original positions and discards other ones depending on their packaging styles as
shown in the table below.
The system discards a component on a position that is set with the Compo
Reject to selection of Component data. For a component whose size is 1 mm or
less, it may be placed on its side or be turned upside down when it is returned
onto its original position. Therefore, the system asks you how to handle such a
component to return it.

Packaging Condition 1 Condition 2 When When
style returning discarding
Tape 32-mm feeder
Tape feeders other Components whose shorter side is 1 Inquiry *1
than the above mm or less
Components whose shorter side is 1
mm or more
Bulk Components whose shorter side is 1 Inquiry *1
mm or less
Components whose shorter side is 1
mm or more
Holder
MTC
MTS
Stick
*1 The system displays the dialog box that asks you whether to return a
component or discard it. In Continuous Measurement mode, the system
displays this dialog box before starting measurement.
Selecting a feeder used to pick up a component

If two or more feeders are assigned to the same type of components in Pick data,
the system, by default, starts picking up components from one whose data was
entered first of all.
However, you can change a feeder to another one intentionally.
If a component is not picked up properly, manually enter the coordinates of the
component pick-up position or use the HOD device to teach these coordinates to
change them.
Manual pick-up
If there is no Pick data created, you can manually attach a component to a nozzle.
However, in this case, you cannot enter coordinates of the component pick-up
position. You cannot operate a feeder either.
4 205
4.12.3.4 Check operation with vision recognition
4.12.3.4.1 Operation transition during checking a component with vision recognition

The displayed screen and the system state are changed during checking a
component with the vision recognition function as shown below.
User operation
Dialog box Process

only
Process
Check of a
component with
vision recognition Check
Selection Vision inspection dialog Executing inspection

dialog box box
b
Return. Correct/Error
Feeder
HOD device key PREV/NEXT
ENTER/
CANCEL
Teaching Feeder knock Change of a component

pick-up position
Figure 4.12.3.4.1 State transition while the system is checking a component with
vision recognition
4 206
4.12.3.4.2 Vision recognition inspection operation
(1) Vision recognition operation

When you select the [Vision recognition] command, the following dialog box
Figure 4.12.3.4.2 Vision inspection dialog box
1) Component of insp. (inspection)

Component data required to perform the vision recognition inspection
appears on the dialog box.
Figure 4.12.3.4.3 Component of insp. Section

2) Pickup position
Data on the component pick-up position appears on the dialog box. You
can change the component pick-up position to the previous or next
alternate component position also. If there is no Pick data created, or if
MTC is specified as a feeder, each item on this section is not displayed,
so you cannot change the component pick-up position, perform the
feeder-knock operation or teaching operation.
Figure 4.12.3.4.4 Pick-up position of a component to be checked

4 207
<FEED> button
This button knocks a feeder once to feed a component (except a 32-mm
paper tape).
Update pick data with new coordinates
Check this check box to use the HOD device and store the taught result in
Pick data.
If you do not check this box, the taught coordinates are applied to the
current pick-up operation only.
3) Executing inspection screen

While the system is checking a component with the vision recognition
function, the following dialog box appears on the screen. On this dialog
box, data on a component being inspected and its pick-up position are
displayed. The process being performed is also displayed.
Figure 4.12.3.4.5 Executing inspection screen
4) Result of inspection
After checking a component, the system displays the result in the Result
of inspection section of the screen. OK appears if a component can be
centered based on its vision, while NG and the reason of an error
appear in the Message space if not.
Figure 4.12.3.4.6 Result of inspection section
5) <INSP.> button
This button checks a component with the vision recognition function.
6) <Exit (ESC)> button
This button finishes checking a component with the vision recognition
function and returns to the previous screen.
4 208
7) Short-cut keys
The following short-cut keys are available on the Vision inspection
screen.
Table 4.12.3.4.1 Available short-cut keys
Operation
Keyboard HOD key Action
panel key
F10 ENTER Starts checking a component with the
vision recognition function.
F4 Knocks a feeder.
F5 PREVIOUS Previous alternate component
F6 NEXT Next alternate component
4.12.4 Confirmation
4.12.4.1 Mark - BOC
This command recognizes a BOC mark, then saves the measured coordinates of the
recognized BOC mark to the main unit. These measured coordinates are used to
correct coordinates during teaching of Placement data.
If the safety cover opens after you select the BOC command, the following dialog box
appears on the screen because the function to be invoked operates the axis.
Check the safety of the machine and yourself, then press the <Start> button.
Figure 4.12.4.1.1 BOC alignment - safety confirmation dialog box
4 209
When you press the <Start> button, the following dialog box appears on the screen
during BOC alignment operation.
To abort the operation for some reason, press the <Stop> button.
Figure 4.12.4.1.2 BOC mark alignment dialog box
1) State
Circuit no
The number of circuit being recognized is displayed here. This number is
indicated in the format: current circuit number/total number of circuits.
(Normally, only a BOC of the reference circuit is recognized.)
Station (available to a KE-2030 only)

The station which is recognizing a BOC mark is displayed here.
2) Progress
The progress bar indicates the progress of the current operation.
4 210
If the system fails to recognize a BOC mark, the following dialog box appears on the
screen.
Figure 4.12.4.1.3 BOC mark recognition error dialog box
To recognize the BOC mark again, select one of the following radio buttons displayed
in the Restart Mode column.
Re-try at same position.

Recognizes the BOC mark again without changing the current OCC camera
position.
Re-try at taught position.
Recognizes the BOC mark again at the position whose coordinates were taught
with the CAMERA button of the HOD. This item is available only after you
validate the result of teaching operation.
Use taught position as center.
Validates the position whose coordinates were taught with the CAMERA button of
the HOD as the actual center of the recognized BOC mark. This item is
available only after you validate the result of teaching operation.
To restart the BOC mark recognition operation after selecting one of the above radio
buttons, click the <Restart> button.
When you click the <Ignore> button, the system does not recognize a BOC mark at
each circuit/board hereinafter.
4 211
4.12.4.2 Mark - Feeder Bank (Front/Rear)
This command recognizes a feeder bank mark, then saves the coordinates which
were recognized and measured. These coordinates are used to correct coordinates
during teaching Pick data
To recognize a mark on the front feeder bank, select the [Front] command. To
recognize a mark on the rear feeder bank, select the [Rear] command.
(When you select either of these commands with a KE-2030, marks on the left or right
station are to be recognized twice.)
Figure 4.12.4.2.1 The bank mark recognition confirmation dialog box
If the system fails to recognize a bank mark, the following dialog box appears on the
screen. In this case, the recognition result is not saved. Select with which timing a
mark is to be recognized.
(1) The mark correction is not done to the bank descent.: A mark is not corrected
until the bank moves down.
(2) The mark correction will be done next time: A bank mark is recognized the next
time.
Figure 4.12.4.2.2 The bank mark recognition error dialog box
4 212
4.12.4.3 Place tracking
This command allows a camera to track a component placement position. You can
see the component placement position displayed on the monitor, so you can use the
HOD to teach and edit it if the position is not appropriate. (See Chapter 7
PRODUCTION PROCEDURES for tracking during production.)
Operation flow for tracking a component placement position.
Selecting the [Place

tracking] command on the
Machine operation menu
Select
Setting the conditions for
tracking a component placement
position with a camera
<Execution> button Move to each set

Tracking a component of coordinates Checking coordinates
placement position with specified in on the monitor.
a camera Placement data.
Modify each set
of coordinates.
Change of each set of coordinates take effect.
Teaching with the HOD
(1) Setting the tacking conditions

When you select the [Place tracking] command on the menu sequentially invoked
from the Machine Operation menu provided with the Program Editing utility, the
following Placement position camera trace dialog box appears.
Figure 4.12.4.3.1 Placement position camera trace dialog box
4 213
1) Feed method
Automatic feed
The camera shoots a component placement position one by one at
regular intervals. The camera stops for the time of period specified with
the Automatic feed interval slider bar displayed below, then moves to
the next position.
(Automatic feed interval)
Use this slider bar to
adjust the stop time
within the range from 10
msec to five seconds.
Manual feed
The camera stops without moving to the next position until an operator
operates it.
2) Range
Enter the range of Placement data used for tracking: from the start point to
the end point. As the
default setting, all
placement positions are to
be tracked.
After you specify the setting
items, press the <Start>
button or click the
<Execution> button.
When you click the <Exit> button, the system returns to the previous screen.
(2) Executing the BOC alignment operation

Immediately after the camera starts tracking a component placement position, the
system executes BOC alignment operation to improve the precision of the
component placement position if a production program on which a BOC mark is
set is used. (BOC marks of all circuits are to be recognized.)
Figure 4.12.4.3.2 BOC mark alignment dialog box
4 214
(3) While the camera is tracking a component placement position
After you click the <Execution> button or press the <Start> button, the following
dialog box appears on the screen while the camera is tracking each set of
coordinates of the component placement position.
Figure 4.12.4.3.3 Placement position tracing dialog box
1) State
Mode
Manual or Automatic which is set with
the radio button Feed method appears
here.
Range
When all placement points are to be
tracked, the first point and end point
are displayed here. If you change the
tracking range, the changed step
number is displayed.
Status
Moving indicates that the axis is
moving. Pause indicates that the axis
pauses temporally in Automatic Feed
mode. Stop indicates that the axis is stopped manually or intentionally.
Axis esc indicates that the axis is moving to the safety position. Mark
recog indicates that an IC mark is being recognized.
Stop remaining time
The progress bar indicates the remaining stop time in Automatic Feed
mode.
4 215
2) Placement data
The station whose component placement point is being tracked is
displayed here.
Step no.
The step number of
Placement data
being tracked is
displayed here.
Compo ID
(Component ID)
The ID of a component being tracked is displayed here.
Compo name (Component name)
The name of a component being tracked is displayed here.
Circuit no
The circuit number being tracked/total number of circuits are displayed
here.
3) Placement position
The coordinates of a component placement position being tracked is
displayed here. You can manually change the coordinates or use the
teaching function to change the coordinates displayed.
4) <Set> and <Cancel> buttons

These buttons are activated when you manually change the coordinates or
use the teaching function to change them. When you click the <Set> button,
the changed coordinates are saved into Placement data. If you do not want
to save the changed coordinates, click the <Cancel> button.
5) Progress
This slide bar moves one by one as the tracking position moves. While the
tracking operation pauses, you can move this slider bar to move the tracking
position to the previous point, the next point and so on.
4 216
(4) Operation during tracking
While the system is tracking a component placement position, you can use the
following keys/switches to control the tracking operation.
Operation Keyboard Operation panel HOD

Start of tracking F1 Start button ENTER
Stop of tracking F2 Stop button PAUSE
Moving to the previous point F5 PREVIOUS
Moving to the next point F6 NEXT
Component Verify check F7
SOT Angle check F8
Changing data F9
End of tracking Pressing the ESC Pressing the Stop Pressing the
key while the button while the CANCEL button
machine is stopping machine is stopping. while the machine is
stopping.
If there is no data when you try to move the camera to the previous point, the
If there is no data when you try to move the camera to the next point, the following
If you abort the tracking operation due to either of the reasons above, the following
4 217
(5) Monitor display
During tracking, the following information on each component placement position
is displayed on the monitor.
------- PLACE TRACE -------

Station:L R CENTER
Cur.No:
[CENTER]
Pla.No : indicates the center of a component.
Compo: [TOP-L] [TOP-R] [BTM-L] [BTM-R]
Angle : indicate four corners of a component

respectively: left on the top side, right on the
top side, left on the bottom side and right on
the bottom side.
Pos X : Y:
Indicates the center or four corners of a component.
Indicates the coordinates viewed from the home position.
Display of the center and four corners of a component varies depending on the
component size.
Component size Four corners of a component Center of a component

Component whose The window frame displayed on the monitor Center of the point at
shorter side is 4.5 indicates four corners of a component. A which lines are crossed.
mm or less placement point whose angle was set is displayed
by rotating the window frame itself.
Other components The camera moves to each set of coordinates of After the camera moves
(large components) four corners: [TOP-L], [TOP-R], [BTM-R] and to all of four corners,
[BTM-L] in this order. For a component [CENTER] is displayed
placement point whose angle was set, the camera on the monitor. The
moves to the coordinates obtained by rotating four camera moves to the
corners. center of a component.
(6) Teaching coordinates during tracking

If the tracked coordinates are different from the actual ones, you can use the
HOD to teach the component placement point.
Step 1) Move the cursor to the X or Y coordinate.

Step 2) Press the HOD device button to teach the coordinates, then press the
ENTER key to validate them.
4 218
Figure 4.12.4.3.4 Coordinate Teaching dialog box
Step 3) To enable the validated coordinates, click the <Set> button or press the
ENTER key again.
To reset the validated coordinates to their original values, click the
<Cancel> button or press the CANCEL key.
Operation flow for teaching during tracking of a component placement point
Move the input focus to the

component placement
coordinates XY edit box.
Press the HOD

device key.
Teaching operation
After validating
the coordinates
Click the <Set> button or Change

ENTER Placement data.
press the ENTER key.
Click the <Cancel> button

CANCEL or press the CANCEL key.
4.12.4.4 Pick tracking/Height tracking

These commands allow the camera to track the component pick-up point. You can
see the component pick-up point displayed on the monitor, so you can use the HOD
to teach the pick-up point if the entered coordinates are not appropriate.
If you use the HMS, you can track the component pick-up height. In this case, the
system displays on the monitor values detected by the HMS one by one. If the
height of a component is quite different from that specified in Pick data, the system
teaches the height of a component in the same manner it does coordinates. (See
Chapter 7 PRODUCTION PROCEDURES for tracking during production.)
4 219
Operation flow for tracking a component pick-up point (height)
Select the [Pick tracking] or

[Height tracking] command on
the Machine Operation menu
Select the command.
Setting of the pick-up point

tracking conditions
Moving to each set of

Execution coordinates specified in
Executing of the Pick data Checking of the
component pick-up point coordinates/value detected
(height) tracking operation with the HMS on the monitor
Modification of each
Modified coordinates take effect. set of coordinates
Teaching with the HOD
(1) Setting the tracking conditions

To track a component pick-up point, select the [Pick tracking] command on the
menu invoked from the Machine Operation menu provided with the Program
Editing utility.
When you select this [Pick tracking] command, the following "Pick position
tracking" dialog box appears on the screen as shown in the figure below.
Figure 4.12.4.4.1 Pickup positions tracking dialog box
4 220
To track the component pick-up height, select the [Height tracking] command on
the menu invoked from the "Machine Operation" menu provided with the Program
Editing utility. The following "Pick height tracking" dialog box appears on the
Figure 4.12.4.4.2 "Pick height tracking" dialog box
1) Feed method
Automatic feed
The camera or HMS obtains a component pick-up point one by one at
regular intervals. The camera or HMS stops for the time of period
specified with the Automatic
feed interval slider bar
displayed below, then moves to
the next position.
(Automatic feed interval)
Use this slider bar to adjust the
stop time.
Manual feed
The camera or HMS stops without moving to the next position until an
operator operates it.
4 221
2) Order and range
The order of component data
Enter the range of Component
data used for tracking: from the
start point to the end point. As
the default setting, all
components are to be tracked.
The order of feeder
The camera or HMS tracks the front/rear of the feeder bank sequentially.
Select the feeder bank to be tracked.
3) Action of each points (displayed on the "Pick height tracking" dialog box)
The [Height tracking] command allows you to specify the action to be
performed after the machine moves to each tracking point.
Trace stops if there is a difference of the measurement value.

If the difference between the value measured with the HMS and the
component pick-up height set in Pick data exceeds the "Difference
judgment level", the dialog box appears on the screen to stop the tracking
operation. (Difference judgment level)
Set the +/- upper and lower limits with the slider bar.
Trace stops if it is not possible to measure.
If the HMS cannot measure the pick-up height (for example, because
there is no component at the measured pick-up point), the dialog box
appears on the screen to stop the tracking operation.
The measurement value is taken.
This choice allows you to save the value measured by the HMS into Pick
data by asking whether to save it for each point.
Position confirm by OCC.
Before moving the HMS to the pick-up point, you can check the pick-up
point on the VCS monitor.
) After you specify the setting items, press the <Start> button or click the
<Execution> button.
When you click the <Exit> button, the system returns to the previous screen.
4 222
(2) Executing the bank mark alignment operation
If the bank mark recognition is set on the Setup menu, the system recognizes a
bank mark to improve the precision of the component pick-up point before the
camera or HMS moves to each feeder bank. The following dialog box appears
on the screen. Click the <OK> button. If you click the <Cancel> button, the
precision of the component pick-up point is not corrected.
Figure 4.12.4.4.3 Feeder bank recognition confirmation dialog box
(3) While the camera is tracking a component pick-up point/the HMS is tracking
component height
After you press the <Start> button or click the <Execution> button, the following
dialog box appears on the screen while the system is tracking each pick-up
position (height).
Figure 4.12.4.4.4 Pickup position (height) camera trace dialog box
4 223
1) State
Mode
Manual or Automatic which is set with the
radio button Feed method appears here.
Order
Feeder order or Cmp order appears here as
specified with the Order and Range radio
button.
Range
The first component number and end
component number to be tracked are displayed
here. Or, which feeder bank is to be tracked is
displayed.
Status
Operating indicates that the axis is moving. Pause indicates that the
axis pauses temporally in Automatic Feed mode. Stop indicates that
the axis is stopped manually or intentionally. Waiting indicates that the
axis is moving to the safety position.
Stop remaining time
The progress bar indicates the remaining stop time in Automatic Feed
mode.
2) Pickup data
The station whose component pick-up point is being tracked is displayed
here.
Package
The packaging style of a
component being tracked is
displayed here.
Installation Feeder
The fixing hole position of a
component being tracked is displayed here: if a stick feeder is used, the
lane number is displayed also, while if a tray is used, the corner number
is displayed also.
Cmp. name (Component name)
The name of a component being tracked is displayed here.
4 224
3) Pickup position
The coordinates of a component pick-up position being tracked is displayed
here. You can manually change the coordinates or use the teaching
function to change the coordinates displayed.
4) <Set> and <Cancel> buttons

These buttons are activated when you manually change the coordinates or
use the teaching function to change them. When you click the <Set> button,
the changed coordinates are saved into Pick data. If you do not want to
save the changed coordinates, click the <Cancel> button.
5) Progress
This slider bar moves one by one as the tracking position moves. While the
tracking operation pauses, you can move this slider bar to move the tracking
position to the previous point, the next point and so on.
4 225
(4) Operation during tracking
While the system is tracking a component pick-up position, you can use the
following keys/switches to control the tracking operation.
Operation Keyboard Operation panel HOD

Start of tracking F1 Start button ENTER
Stop of tracking F2 Stop button PAUSE
Moving to the previous point F5 PREVIOUS
Moving to the next point F6 NEXT
End of tracking Pressing the ESC Pressing the Stop Pressing the PAUSE
key while the button while the button while the
machine is stopping machine is stopping. machine is stopping.
If there is no data when you try to move the camera or HMS to the previous point,
the following dialog box appears on the screen.
If there is no data when you try to move the camera or HMS to the next point, the
If you finish the tracking operation due to either of the reasons above, the
4 226
(5) Monitor display

During tracking, the following information on each component pick-up
position is displayed on the monitor.
------- PICK TRACE -------

Station:L CENTER
Device:
[CENTER]
Fdr No :
indicates the center of a component.
Compo:
[TOP-L] [TOP-R] [BTM-L] [BTM-R]
Angle :
indicate four corners of a component
respectively: left on the top side,
right on the top side, left on the
bottom side and right on the bottom
side.
Pos X:
Indicates the center or four corners of a component.
Display of the center and four corners of a component varies depending on

the component size.
Four corners of a large component located on the front feeder may not be
displayed because the camera or HMS cannot always move to four corners.
(Front feeder)
shorter side is 4.5 indicates four corners of a component. A pick-up which lines are crossed.
mm or less point whose angle was set is displayed by rotating
the window frame itself.
Other components [CENTER] is displayed
(large components) on the monitor, then the
camera moves to the
center of a component.
4 227
(Rear feeder)
shorter side is 4.5 indicates four corners of a component. A pick-up which lines are crossed.
mm or less point whose angle was set is displayed by rotating
the window frame itself.
Other components The camera moves to each set of coordinates of After the camera moves
(large components) four corners: [TOP-L], [TOP-R], [BTM-R] and to all of four corners,
[BTM-L] in this order. For a component pick-up [CENTER] is displayed
point whose angle was set, the camera moves to on the monitor. The
the coordinates obtained by rotating four corners. camera moves to the
Height tracking
While the HMS is tracking the component pick-up height, the following
information is displayed on the monitor.
------- PICK Z TRACE -------

Station:L
Device:
Fdr No :
Compo:
Angle :
Z :
Hms :
Pos
After the HMS stops at the center of a component, the

height specified in Pick data and that detected with the
HMS are displayed here.
If the HMS cannot detect the height, <*****> appears here.
The position measured with the HMS varies depending on the size of a
component as shown below.
Size of a component Component height measured position
All components Center of a component
4 228
(6) Teaching coordinates during tracking
If the tracked coordinates are different from the actual ones, you can use the
HOD to teach the component pick-up point.
Step 1) Move the cursor to the X, Y or Z coordinate.

Step 2) Press the HOD device button to teach the coordinates, then press the
ENTER key to validate them.
Coordinate Teaching dialog box
Step 3) To enable the validated coordinates, click the <Set> button or press the
ENTER key again.
To reset the validated coordinates to their original values, click the
<Cancel> button or press the CANCEL key.
Teaching operation flow during tracking of a component pick-up point
Move the input focus to the

component pick-up
coordinates XYZ edit box.
Press the HOD

device key.
Teaching operation
After validating
the coordinates
Click the <Set> button or Change Pick

ENTER press the ENTER key. data.
Click the <Cancel> button

CANCEL or press the CANCEL key.
4 229
(7) Action to be performed at each point while the machine is tracking the component
pick-up height
When you check the check box "Trace stops if there is a difference of the
measurement value." on the "Pick height tracking" dialog box, the dialog box
appears on the screen as shown in the figure below if the difference is detected.
If you select "Automatic feed" as the "Feed method", the machine stops tracking
a pick-up point. Check the height specified in Pick data.
When you check the check box "Trace stops if it is not possible to measure" on
the "Pick height tracking" dialog box, the dialog box appears on the screen as
shown in the figure below if the HMS cannot measure the height.
If you select "Automatic feed" as the "Feed method", the machine stops tracking
a pick-up point. Check the height specified in Pick data.
When you check the check box "The measurement value is taken" on the "Pick
height tracking" dialog box, the dialog box, which asks you whether to save the
value measured by the HMS as the Z coordinate of Pick data, appears on the
screen. To save it, click the <Yes> button.
4 230
When you check the check box "Position confirm by OCC." on the "Pick height
tracking" dialog box, the pick-up position is displayed on the VCS monitor.
When the following dialog box appears on the screen, check the position with
your eyes. When the position is correct, click the <Yes> button. If you want to
teach it again, click the <No> button to teach the coordinates as described in Item
(6).
(8) Checking the direction of an SOT component being tracked

The system can check the direction of an SOT component when the tracking
operation pauses.
The following screen appears when the system is checking the direction of an
SOT component:
After the system finishes checking the direction of an SOT component, it displays
the result: OK or NG.
4 231
(9) Verification during tracking
The system can perform the verification check when the tracking operation
pauses.
The following screen appears when the system is performing the verification
check:
After the system finishes the verification check, it displays the result: OK or
NG.
4 232
4.12.5 Mark database
This command manages the mark database which was registered during teaching of
mark data described in Chapter 5 "TEACHING".
Figure 4.12.5.1 "Mark database management" dialog box
(1) Registration
This list displays the mark data registered in the database. The meaning of
each item is described in Table below.
Item Meaning
Name Name of a mark
(The mark shape is displayed before the name itself.)
Update date Date when a mark was registered in the database.
Size Number of horizontal and vertical pixels consisting of a mark
aaa x bbb
aaa = number of horizontal pixels
bbb = number of vertical pixels
Polarity Negative/positive shot of a mark
Positive: white mark on black background
Negative: black mark on white background
Scale Image data scale of a mark
Grayscale: mark data is read as a multi-scale image.
Binaryscale: mark data is read as a binary-scale image.
Station (available to a Station which obtained a mark
KE-2030 only) Left = A mark was read with the OCC located on the left station.
Right = A mark was read with the OCC located on the right station.
4 233
(2) Operation
<Rename> button
This button allows you to change the registered name. Move the cursor to
the data line you want to change, then click the <Rename> button. The
right dialog box appears on the screen. Enter a new name.
Figure 4.12.5.2 "Mark data rename" dialog box
<Delete> button
This button allows you to delete the registered data. Move the cursor to the
data line you want to delete in the list, then click the <Delete> button.
The right dialog box appears on the screen. Click the <OK> button.
Figure 4.12.5.3 "Question - to delete mark data" dialog box
4 234
4.13 Database
When you register Component data or Vision data on the Component database, you
can browse or copy data with the Program Editing utility.
See the FLEXLINE database for details.
4.13.1 Register
This command registers Component data in the Component database while you are
editing a program. Since this command updates the Component database in real
time, you can call the registered data immediately with the [Call list] command.
When you register data in the Component database on the Program Editing screen,
data whose name already exists in the database is written over the old data.
Screens which allow you to register data into the Component database
Component data form screen
Component data list screen
When you select the [Register] command in the Component data screen
Component data you have edited is registered onto the Component database.
When you select the [Register] command, the following confirmation dialog box
When you click the <OK> button, data is registered into the Component
database.
When you click the <Cancel> button, the machine returns to the state before
you selected the [Register] command without registering any data.
4 235
When you select Yes for Notification of database entry completion on the
Environment setting dialog box, the following message appears on the screen
to inform you that data is registered onto the database completely.
When you select No for Notification of database entry completion, the

message above will not appear on the screen.
4.13.2 Call list

When you invoke this command from the Placement data or Component data
screen
If any component name is not entered to Placement data, you can select this
command from the Placement data screen. If any component name is entered,
you cannot execute this command: this command is dimmed on the screen.
If you select the [Call list] command when no component name is entered, the data
selection screen like one shown below appears on the screen.
4 236
When you click the <OK> button or double-click the desired data
When you select the data to be called and click the <OK> button, or when
double-click the desired data, the following confirmation message appears on
the screen.
When you click the <OK> button on the screen above, the Component data
which you selected is copied from the Component database. If any Vision
data is linked to the Component data, those data are copied also at the
same time.
However, if there is Pick data already created, the following message appears
on the screen.
When you select "Yes" on this dialog box, the pick-up angle is updated.
When you select "No", the angle set as Pick data is not updated.
When you click the <Cancel> button, the machine returns to the Component
database call screen.
If the same component name is displayed on the screen, any copy operation
will not be performed.
If any component name is entered on the Placement data screen, execute the
[Call list] command from the Component data screen. When you call this
command from the Component data screen, only the selected component data
is copied, and the component name is not changed.
L If a comment on the component data you called is longer than 30 characters,

HLC handles the first 30 characters as a valid comment, and copies them. If
a line feed code is include in a comment on the component data you called,
HLC handles characters located after the line feed code as invalid data, and
copies characters located before the line feed code only.
Cancel button
When you click this button, the machine returns to the screen from which you
selected the [Call list] command.
4 237
Refer button
When you click the Refer button, the following Component search dialog box
appears on the screen. This dialog box allows you to find data from the
Component database.
Set the conditions for finding data, then click the Search for all button or
Search for one item button.
Data search conditions: data which satisfies the conditions you set is to be
found.
Item Description
String of letters to Specify a component name, adhesive pattern name, comment and nozzle number with
be searched the corresponding buttons.
For a component name, adhesive pattern name, and comment, the machine is to search
data which includes the specified character string.
For nozzle numbers, specify two or more nozzle numbers with separating them with a
comma (,), or specify the range of nozzles with using a hyphen (-); for example 101 -
105.
Producer Select one of the registered manufactures.
Component type Select one of the registered component type.
Feeder Select one or two more feeder(s)
Centering Specify the centering method. You can specify two or more centering methods. When
you specify two or more centering methods, it is supposed that they satisfy the search
conditions if one of the selected centering methods is already set.
Search for all button

This button displays all data pieces which satisfy the conditions you set.
Search for one item button

Moves the cursor to the first data line which satisfies the conditions you set.
When you click the <Cancel> button, the machine returns to the Database list
screen.
4 238
4.13.3 Re-search
The "Re-search" function searches component data, pick data or vision data from the
database or the permanently supplied information again, and updates program data
with it.
When you click the Re-search command, the following dialog box appears on the
screen.
When you click the <Yes> button, all pick-up angles are updated.
When you click the <No> button, any pick-up angle set in Pick data is not
updated.
L When this command is executed, component data, pick data, and vision
data are updated (by overwriting). Once executed while data (component
form) is edited, this command cannot be cancelled.
The conditions of calling this command from the permanently supplied
information or database can be changed by the MSL set up program.
If a comment on the component data you called is longer than 30
characters, HLC handles the first 30 characters as a valid comment, and
copies them. If a line feed code is include in a comment on the
component data you called, HLC handles characters located after the line
feed code as invalid data, and copies characters located before the line
feed code only.
4 239
4.14 Help
This command invokes the online manual.
4.14.1 Version information

This command displays the information on this program (Program Editing utility).
The message shows a corresponding version number.
Example.
4 240
CHAPTER 5 VISION RECOGNITION
5.1 Outline
5.1.1 Position of components for vision recognition
Using the VCS camera, view the position of the component picked up with the vision
correction head to obtain the balance and angle offset of the component. At this
time, components bent leads are also checked as faulty. After moving to the PWB
placement point, the obtained balance and angle offsets are corrected for placement
at right balance and angle.

Center of Nozzle

Figure 5.1.1.2
51
5.2 Vision Data Input
Vision data is used to recognize the component using vision recognition function.
The vision data can be entered only for the component types shown below and which
have been selected for vision centering of the component data.
QFP, SOP, TSOP, TSOP2, PLCC (QFJ), BAG, SOJ, PQFP (BQFP) one-way lead
connector, J lead socket, gull wing socket, socket with bumper, aluminum electrolytic
capacitor, and GaAsFET, two-way lead connector, SOP (with a heat sink), FBGA, Z
style lead connector
The following shows the component types. For data setting, it is defined to 0 of the
components when the components are oriented as shown below.
QFP (Top view)
SOP (Top view)
TSOP (Top view)
TSOP2 (Top view)
52
QFJ (PLCC) (Top view)
One-way lead connector (Top view)
BGA, FBGA (Bottom view)
Normal assignment Stagger assignment
Note: The ball diameter shall be entered as lead width, and ball pitch as lead pitch.
Aluminum electrolytic capacitor (Bottom view)
53
GaAsFET (Top view)
J lead socket (Top view)
Gull wing socket (Top view)
54
Socket with bumper (Top view)
SOP (with a heat sink) (Top view)
Two-way lead connector (Top view)
55
BQFP (PGFP) (Top view)
SOJ (Top view)
Z style lead connector (Top view)
56
(1) Setting Items
Setting item Description
1 Pitch (lead pitch) Set the lead (ball) pitch (distance between two consecutive leads or balls).
2 Len (lead length) Set the lead length.
3 Wd (lead width) Set the lead width.
4 Bot., L, Top and R Enter the number of leads located on each side.
(Number of leads/side:
bottom, left, top and right sides)
5 Bend/Level Set the level for checking a bent lead with the ratio of a bent lead to the
(Bent lead detection level) lead pitch.
6 Missing Start/No Set the first missing lead position and the number of missing leads.
(Missing lead start position and
number of missing leads)
7 Contrast Set the recognition pattern.
8 Base Style Set the BGA base style.
9 Ball Pattern Set the BGA recognition pattern.
10 NumLn (number of lines) Set the number of lines on which balls are located with being viewed from
the outside of a peripheral pattern.
11 Diameter/Level Set the level for checking the diameter of a ball.
(Diameter check level)
12 Variant/Level Set the level for checking deformation of a ball.
(Ball deformation check level)
13 View (Recognition field of view) Set the field of view range for recognizing divided images of a component.
(This item is provided for compatibility with KE-740/760 data. You cannot
set this item with any KE-2000 series of products. Set the field of view for
recognizing divided images with the setting item Ctrl.
14 View Field (leads to be Set the range of leads to be recognized and not recognized when the
recognized and not recognize) machine recognizes divided images of a component.
15 Corr. (Brightness correction) Set the threshold for recognizing an outline-recognized component.
16 Exp (Expansion) Set a general-purpose lead connector.
17 elem. (Element) Set a general-purpose vision component.
18 Ctrl (Control) Set the recognition control items.
19 Light Set the light control items.
57
5.2.1 Setting range
5.2.1.1 Lead components
(1) QFP, PQFP, PLCC (QFJ) and IC socket
Components having fine-pitch lead on four sides
Allowable setting range/Description Default
Setting items
Minimum Maximum value
QFP, PQFP 0.30 mm (Note 1) 1.27 mm

1 Pitch (lead pitch) QFJ (PLCC) 1.27 mm 1.27 mm None
IC socket 1.00 mm 1.27 mm
2 Len (lead length) 0.30 mm 3.00 mm None
3 Bot., R, Top, L (number of leads on each side) 7 (Notes 3 and 4) 128 None
4 Bend (Bent lead detecting level) 15% 20% 25% 30% None (No check) 20%
Missing Start/No (First missing lead/Number of Up to three blocks of missing leads
5 0
missing leads) can be set.
(2) SOP and TSOP

Components having fine-pitch leads on two sides (three sides also)
Setting items
0.30 mm (Notes
1 Pitch (lead pitch) 1.27 mm None
1 and 3)
3 Bot., R, Top, L (number of leads on each side) 7 (Note 3) 128 None
Missing Start/No (First missing lead/Number of Up to three blocks of missing leads
5 0
missing leads) can be set.
(3) Unidirectional lead connector/Bidirectional lead connector/Z-shaped lead

connector
Setting items
1 Pitch (lead pitch) 0.30 mm (Note 1) 2.54 mm None

3 Bot., R, Top, L (number of leads on each side) 2 (Notes 2, 3 and 5) 128 None
Missing Start/No Up to three blocks of missing leads
5 0
(First missing lead/Number of missing leads) can be set.
Select one of the settings: All, Only
6 View Field (Range of leads to be recognized) the both ends lead, and Both ends All
lead exclusion.
When you select Only the both ends
L Top, R Top, L Bot., and R Bot. lead or Both ends lead exclusion at
7 None
(Upper left, upper right, lower left and lower right) the View Fi eld setting item, set the
number of leads here.
58
(4) SOJ
Components having J leads on two sides
Setting items
1 Pitch (lead pitch) 1.27 mm 1.27 mm None

3 Bot., R, Top, L (number of leads on each side) 7 (Note 4) 128 None
5 0
(First missing lead/Number of missing leads) can be set.
(5) Aluminum electrolytic capacitor (See Note 6.)

Setting items

2 Wd (lead width) 0.50 mm 1.50 mm None
(6) GaAsFET (See Note 6.)

Setting items
Len Bot, R
1 1.00 mm 15.00 mm None
(length of a lead on the bottom and right sides)
Wd Bot, R
2 0.50 mm 1.50 mm None
(width of a lead on the bottom and right sides)
(7) SOP (equipped with a heat sink)

Setting items

3 Bot., R, Top, L (number of leads on each side) 7 128 None
5 0
(First missing lead/Number of missing leads) can be set. (Note 7)
Note 1: The lead pitch less than 0.4 mm is optional. When the lead pitch is less than 0.4 mm, the
dimensions of a component should be 24 mm x 24 mm or less (for a 27-mm VCS).
Note 2: The recognition precision of a component whose number of leads is less than four cannot be
guaranteed.
Note 3: When image of a component is divided into two for recognition, the minimum number of leads
is 14. When it is divided into three, the minimum number of leads is 21.
Note 4: The machine cannot recognize divided images of a PLCC (GFJ) or SOJ component for
recognition.
Note 5: Only the standard VCS can divide and recognize image of a connector.
Note 6: The machine cannot recognize divided images of an aluminum electrolytic capacitor. Only
the standard VCS can recognize this type of component.
Note 7: For this component, enter the number of missing leads on a heat sink.
59
5.2.1.2 Ball components
(1) BGA
Setting items

2 Wd (lead width) 0.50 mm 1.00 mm None
Bot., R, Top, L (number of
3 4 51 (Note 1) None
leads on each side)
Missing Start/No (First
4 missing lead/Number of Up to three blocks of missing leads can be set. 0
missing leads)
Select one of the settings: PWB, Ceramic, All balls and
5 Contrast All balls
All land. (Notes 2 and 3)
Select one of the settings: Standard, Index mark 4
corner, Index mark 3 corner, Index mark 2 corner, Index
6 Base Style Standard
mark 1 corner, Outer belt type mark and Mark overspill
type.
Select one of the settings: Browse, Edit, Standard BGA,
Peripheral BGA, Staggered std. BGA (More out),
7 Ball Pattern None
Staggered per. BGA (More out), Staggered std. BGA
(Fewer out) and Staggered per. BGA (Fewer out) (*).
For a peripheral ball pattern, set the number of lines on which
8 NumLn None
balls are located with being viewed from the outside.
Select Yes or No to check the diameter of a ball and set
9 Diameter/Level No (50%)
the level for checking the diameter (1 to 100 %)
Select Yes or No to check deformation of a ball and set the
10 Variant/Level No (50%)
level for checking deformation (1 to 100 %).
(2) FBGA
Setting items
1 Pitch (lead pitch) 0.35 mm (Note 4) 2.00 mm None

2 Wd (lead width) 0.14 mm (Note 5) 0.63 mm None
Bot., R, Top, L (number of
3 4 51 (Note 1) None
leads on each side)
Missing Start/No (First
4 missing lead/Number of Up to three blocks of missing leads can be set. 0
missing leads)
Select one of the settings: All balls and All land. (Notes 2
5 Contrast All balls
and 3)
Select one of the settings: Standard, Index mark 4
corner, Index mark 3 corner, Index mark 2 corner, Index
6 Base Style Standard
mark 1 corner, Outer belt type mark and Mark overspill
type.
Select one of the settings: Browse, Edit, Standard BGA,
Peripheral BGA, Staggered std. BGA (More out),
7 Ball Pattern None
Staggered per. BGA (More out), Staggered std. BGA
(Fewer out) and Staggered per. BGA (Fewer out) (*).
For a peripheral ball pattern, set the number of lines on which
8 NumLn None
balls are located with being viewed from the outside.
Select Yes or No to check the diameter of a ball and set
9 Diameter/Level No (50%)
the level for checking the diameter (1 to 100 %)
Select Yes or No to check deformation of a ball and set the
10 Variant/Level No (50%)
level for checking deformation (1 to 100 %).
5 10
Note: For a BGA, meaning of some setting items is changed: from lead pitch to ball pitch, lead
width to ball width, and number of leads to number of balls on the outer frame.
Note 1: For a staggered type of BGA (see of Section 5.2), the maximum value is 25.
Note 2: The checking precision cannot be guaranteed when you select Ceramic.
Note 3: When you select PWB or Ceramic, the machine cannot divide and recognize image of a
component. For an FBGA, PWB and Ceramic do not appear on the pop-up menu.
Note 4: The minimum ball pitch is 0.7 mm for an optional 37-mm VCS, 0.5 mm for an optional
27-mm VCS, and 0.35 mm for an optional 18-mm VCS.
Note 5: The minimum ball diameter is 0.28 mm for an optional 37-mm VCS, 0.2 mm for an optional
27-mm VCS, and 0.14 mm for an optional 18-mm VCS.
Notes:
The machine cannot recognize a component if:
the machine does not detect any clear contrast between a solder ball and a
board on which a solder ball is mounted,
the machine does not recognize a ball alone because a pattern whose
diameter is the same as that of a solder ball is connected to a solder ball, or
there is a through-hole whose diameter is the same as that of a solder ball on
a board on which a solder ball is mounted.
5 11
5.2.1.3 Outline-recognized components
(1) Outline recognition
Setting item Allowable setting range/Description Default value
1 Contrast Select one of the settings: 4sides, 4corners and Center. 4sides
2 Corr. -127 to 127 0
Note: Outline-recognized components

1) Component size (with a reflective light)
- Maximum component size: 50 mm x 50 mm
- Maximum component size recognized with optional VCSs
Optional 37-mm VCS: 34 mm x 34 mm
Optional 27-mm VCS: 24 mm x 24 mm
Optional 18-mm VCS: 15.5 mm x 15.5 mm
- Minimum component size: 3 mm x 3 mm
2) Component size (with a penetrative light)
- Maximum component size: 35 mm x 35 mm
- Minimum component size: 9 mm x 9 mm
Note that only the standard VCS can divide and recognize image of an
outline-recognized component.
5 12
5.2.2 Basic operation
Vision data is displayed in two ways: in the list format and the form format.
Select the [Display] command form the menu bar on the Program Editor windows,
and select the [Vision Form] or [Vision List] command on the displayed menu.
When you double-click on the Vision List displayed on the screen, the Vision
Form appears also.
Figure 5.2.2 Selecting Vision data screen format
5.2.2.1 Vision list

Sample Vision data and its basic operation are shown below.
Figure 5.2.2.1 Vision list screen

Description of basic operation
Input focus
A line on which the input focus is located is reverse-displayed, while a cell in
which the input focus is located is not.
An input character is echoed back onto the formula bar as you enter it.
When you validate it, it is entered in a cell.
Cursor movement range
Column: The cursor can move to any line on which a component name is
entered. You cannot move the input field to any line on which a
component name is entered yet.
Row: The cursor can move between the rows Type and Contrast.
5 13
Setting items for which you do not have to enter any data
An asterisk mark (*) appears in a cell which does not require any data entry.
Although you can move the input focus to such a cell, you cannot enter any
data in it.
Horizontal scroll
All of the Vision data setting items cannot be displayed on the screen at a time.
Enter data while scrolling the screen horizontally.
Except for a component whose leads are arranged irregularly, when you enter
data for the items from Type to Bot., R, Top and L, Vision data on a
component is completed (Contrast also for a BGA type of component).
For a component having no lead at some point, scroll the screen in the right
direction to specify the lead arrangement on each side.
- When you reach the last item filed by scrolling the screen in the right
direction, the input focus cannot move any more even though you are to
move it. To move the input focus to the next line, move it to the field below
the current one.
Vertical scroll
When you press the up arrow key or Up button if the input focus is located on
the top line of the data display area of the window, but this line is not the first
line, the screen is scrolled down by one line.
When you press the down arrow key or Down button if the input focus is
located on the bottom line of the data display area of the window, and a
component type is entered in the Type cell of the next line, the screen is
scrolled up by one line.
Scroll bar
- When you click the scroll bar on the upper side of the vertical scroll box, the
screen is scrolled down by one page.
- When you click the scroll bar on the lower side of the vertical scroll box, the
screen is scrolled up by one page.
- When you click the scroll bar on the left of the vertical scroll box, the screen
is scrolled in the right direction by one page.
- When you click the scroll bar on the right of the vertical scroll box, the
screen is scrolled in the left direction by one page.
Scroll bar box
When you drag the scroll box, the machine compares the data display area of
all data to the length of the scroll bar, then scrolls the screen with regarding the
scroll box position as the display position.
Moving to the beginning or end of a line
When you press the Home key, the machine displays the screen up to the left
limit and moves the input field to a Type cell.
When you press the End key, the machine displays the screen up to the right
limit and moves the input field to the rightmost cell.
Making a choice to enter data
To enter or change data, press the F2 key or right button of the trackball.
The pop-up menu appears which allows you to select the desired value.
5 14
5.2.2.2 Vision Form
Sample Vision data and its basic operation are shown below.
Figure 5.2.2.2 Vision Form screen
Description of basic operation

Input focus
A line on which the input focus is located is reverse-displayed, while a cell in
which the input focus is located is not.
An input character is echoed back onto the formula bar as you enter it.
When you validate it, it is entered in a cell.
Cursor movement range
You can move the cursor to the items displayed on the screen only. To move
the input focus, press the <TAB> key or press the <SHIFT> key and <TAB>
key at the same time.
Setting items for which you do not have to enter any data
The items to which you do not have to enter any data show their respective
values on the screen.
5 15
5.2.3 Detailed description of operation
When you invoke Vision data for the first time, data appears in the Component
name, Type, SizeX and SizeY cells only.
Figure 5.2.3.1 Vision data initial screen

(1) How to set the items
Component name
A component name entered on the Placement data screen appears in this cell.
Type
A component type entered on the Component data screen appears in this cell.
Size X
The width of a component, which was entered on the Component data screen,
appears in this cell.
Size Y
The length of a component, which was entered on the Component data screen,
appears in this cell.
1) PitchX
Enter the horizontal pitch between two consecutive leads (balls) from the
formula bar. The input range varies depending on the component type.
2) PitchY
Enter the vertical pitch between two consecutive leads (balls) from the
formula bar. The input range varies depending on the component type.
Ball pitch Ball pitch

(Normal assignment) (Stagger assignment)
Figure 5.2.3.2 Pitches applied to each component type
5 16
Len Bot, R, Top and L
Enter the length of a lead section that is in contact with a board from the
formula bar. When an asterisk mark * is displayed in a cell, you do not have
to enter any data to this cell.
- When a component has leads on its two or more sides, enter the length of a
lead on one side only if the length of leads on each side is the same as
each other.
- Data in the Bot, R, Top and L cells is based on the component feeding
angle with referring the final component feeding direction.
The side whose lead length should be entered and the range of
the lead length vary depending on the setting of the Type item.
Figure 5.2.3.3 Entering the lead length from the formula bar
Lead length
Figure 5.2.3.4 Range of the lead length

Wd Bot, R, Top, L (lead or ball width)
Set the width of leads on each side: bottom, right, top and left sides in this
order. The side whose lead width should be entered and the range of the
lead width vary depending on the setting of the Type item.
For a ball component, enter the diameter of a ball.
Figure 5.2.3.5 Entering the lead (ball) width

Ball width
Figure 5.2.3.6 Lead (ball) width

5 17
Bot, R, Top and L (bottom, right, top and left)
Enter the number of leads on each side: bottom, right, top and left sides in this
order. When an asterisk mark * appears in a cell, you do not have to enter
any data to the cell.
- The input range of the number of leads varies depending on the setting of
the Type setting item.
- For a ball component, enter the number of balls located on the outer frame.
If you do not set the same number of balls for all sides, the largest value is
regarded as valid.
Figure 5.2.3.7 Entering the number of leads on the top,

bottom, left and right sides.

Top
Top

Left Right Left

1 Right
Bottom

1
Bottom

Top
Top

Left Right

1
1
1
11 Bottom
Bottom

Top

Balls located on the outer frame
Figure 5.2.3.8 Explanation of the top, bottom, left

and right sides of each component type
5 18
Bend
When the machine detects a bent lead, it discards the component having a
bent lead onto the IC discard position as operation for an error. Enter the
level for detecting a bent lead here.
- When data is entered to the setting item Type, the default value is
automatically set here.
- To change the default value, press the F2 key, then select a value from the
displayed list.
Figure 5.2.3.9 Specifying the level for detecting a bent lead
L
L
Bent lead detection level = L

L
Definition of the bent lead detecting level
Down Missing Start/No, Right Missing Start/No,

Top Missing Start/No, Left Missing Start/No
Specify the missing leads by setting the missing lead position and the number
of missing leads. The value to be set as the setting item number of leads
includes the missing leads.
- Up to three blocks of missing leads can be set per side.
- When a component has no missing leads, set 0/0.
- Set the first missing lead position obtained with counting it anti-clockwise as
shown below.
1
1
1
1
Figure 5.2.3.10.1 Lead counting direction on each side
5 19
The following Figure 5.2.3.10.2 shows a QFP component whose bottom side
has a missing lead(s).
<Example> Missing pins on the bottom side: Pins 1, 8, 9, 15, 16 and 17
Enlarged bottom view of QFP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 pin from pin 1. 2 pins from pin 8. 3 pins from pin 15.
Figure 5.2.3.10.2 Lead setting example
Notes
For a BGA component, specify the number of missing balls located on the
outer frame only.
For a BGA component, the missing balls should be viewed from the bottom
(rear), then set.
5 20
Contrast
Set the contrast between a pin (ball) and molding section of a BGA
component, or set the recognition pattern for an outline-recognized
component.
1) For a BGA
Setting items
Table 5.5.3.1
Selection on the
Recognition range Type
pop-up menu
PWB Recognizes balls on the PWB type whose molding section looks black
Ceramic outer frame only. Ceramic type whose molding section looks white
All balls Recognizes all balls of a Ball recognition by a pattern
All land component. All land recognition of an LGA
If you change the setting of this item to PWB or Ceramic after you
select All balls or All land and set a ball pattern, the ball pattern is
initialized.
How to set
When you click this setting item with the right button, the selection
pop-up menu appears on the screen.
2) For an outline-recognized component

Setting items
Table 5.2.3.2
Selection on the pop-up
Recognition method
menu
Recognizes a component with four sides of a rectangle. This setting is
4sides
effective for a rectangle component whose corner is unclear.
4corners Recognizes a component with four corners of a rectangle.
Recognizes a component by calculating the center of the substance which
Center
is currently being shot.
How to set
5 21
3) Limitation on components depending on the recognition method
(A) Side recognition
Recognition conditions:
Components whose whole shape is a rectangle or regular square
Components whose linear portion (line segment) of a side is 1/2 or more of
the component outline size but whose linear portion (line segment) should
be 3 mm or more
Components whose side middle section is straight: 1.5 cm on both sides of
the center.
Component
outline size
Line
segment
1.5 mm
1.5 mm
Fig. 5.2.3.11-1 Explanatory Drawing of

Recognition Conditions 1), 2) and 3)
Components whose component angle is within 90 0.5.

Components whose sides are 0.3 mm or more when their insides are
imaged darkly at imaging
0.3mm or more

Recognition Condition 5)
Components whose side roughness forming a linear portion is 0.1 mm or

less
0.1mm or less

Components whose component shape is not convex.

When the above conditions are satisfied, side recognition is enabled.
5 22
(B) Corner recognition
Recognition conditions:
Components whose whole shape is a regular square or rectangle
Components whose corner angle R is 0.5 mm or less
Components whose linear portion length forming each side is 2 mm or more
2.00 mm
0.5 mm
2.00 mm

Recognition Conditions 2) and 3)
Components whose 4 corner points are at vertexes of a regular square or

rectangle
Components whose outline is not convex
Components with concave portions whose L1 is 10% or less of L2
L1
L2
Fig. 5-2.3.11-5 Explanatory Drawing of
Components whose sides are 0.3 mm or more when their insides are
imaged darkly at imaging
0.3mm or more

Components whose side roughness forming a linear portion is 0.1 mm or

less
0.1mm or less

When the above recognition conditions are satisfied, corner recognition is

enabled.
5 23
(C) Center recognition
Recognition conditions
Components whose ratio of width to length is 1:2 or more
Components whose side portion is 0.3 mm or more (The inside of a side
may be hollow at imaging.)
When the above conditions are satisfied, center recognition is enabled.
Note: Concavity and convexity may exit on the component outline. However, they
have an effect on the center position and inclination.
In this case, adjust the placement data, etc.
4) Recognition component examples

The components to be supported by the component outline recognition function
are those whose shapes are close to a rectangle or regular square. The edges
forming an outline should be 0.3 mm or more.
* In the component drawing shown in the following table, the black/white is
reversed unlike the reality.
Table 5.2.3.11-1 Recognition Components Table
No. Recognition component shape Recognition method Remarks
1 Center recognition (Note) Rectangular component
Side recognition
Corner recognition
2 Center recognition (Note) The inside of the

Side recognition component is hollow.
Corner recognition Outline edge should be
0.3 mm or more.
3 Center recognition (Note) The inside of the

Side recognition component is undefined.
Corner recognition
4 Side recognition Square component

Corner recognition
5 Side recognition CBGA

Corner recognition
6 Side recognition The inside of the

Corner recognition component is hollow.
7 Side recognition The inside of the

Corner recognition component is hollow.
8 Corner recognition The side shape is concave.
5 24
No. Recognition component shape Recognition method Remarks
The inside of the component
is undefined.

Center recognition (Note) However, only components
of point symmetry.
11 Side recognition The inside of the component

Center recognition (Note) is hollow. The outline edge
should be 0.3 mm or more.
12 Side recognition Missing corner
13 Side recognition Missing corner. The inside

Center recognition (Note) shape is undefined.
Note: Center recognition is enabled when the longer side is twice or more as long as the shorter side.
5 25
Base Style
Set the base style of a BGA component. This item is available only when you
select All balls or All land at the Contrast setting item.
A base style is combined with a ball pattern, then used as a recognition
pattern.
Base style + Ball pattern Recognition pattern
Base style Ball pattern Recognition pattern

Default pattern
User pattern
How to set
When you select Browse
Figure 6.7-2-18 (b) Base Style browser dialog box
5 26
Setting items
Selection on the
Base style
pop-up menu
Browse Displays sample images: from Standard to Mark over spill, and allows
you to select the desired style from the displayed images.
Standard There are only balls located on the outer frame of a package.
This setting is available for a conventional BGA whose pitch is narrow and
whose balls are small. This is available also for a component whose index
balls are on the grid.
Index mark 4 corner There are only balls and index balls on the outer frame of a package, and
index balls are outside the grid.
Index balls are located at four corners outside the grid.
Index balls are located at three corners outside the grid (when there is no
index ball at the lower left corner, it should be called 0 degrees).
Index balls are located at two corners outside the grid (when there is no
index ball at the lower left and right corners, it should be called 0 degrees).
Index balls are located at one corner outside the grid (when there is no
index ball at the lower right corner, it should be called 0 degrees).
Outer belt type mark There is something whose density is similar with a ball like a belt on the
outer frame of a package.
Mark over spill There is something other than a ball on the outer frame of a package.
Note: An index mark is not a ball but a mark that indicates a certain position, or
ball-shaped substance used for partial pressure.
Default base style sample image
Standard Index mark 4 corner Index mark 3 corner
Index mark 2 corner Index mark 1 corner Outer belt type mark Mark overspill
Note: The size of an index ball varies and the center of an index ball and that of a
ball are not always aligned with each another on a line. To clearly identify
each setting of Index mark 4 corner, Index mark 3 corner, Index mark 2
corner and Index mark 1 corner, we define the index ball position and its
corresponding setting as follows.
5 27
When index balls are located on the ball grid, the machine handles such a
component as the Standard type.
When an index ball is outside the ball grid, the machine handles such a
component as one of types: Index mark 1 corner to Index mark 4 corner
Ball pattern
Set the recognition pattern of a BGA component.
This setting item is available only when you select All balls or All land at the
Contrast setting item.
When you click this item with the right button, the pop-up menu appears on
the screen as shown below.
Figure 5.2.3.22 BGA component recognition pattern setting

- When you want to use a default pattern, select one from the pop-up
menu shown above.
Ball Pattern Specify the ball pattern name.

If the number of leads (balls) is different from that of the ball
pattern you specified, HLC regards the number of balls of
the specified ball pattern as a valid value to set it to the
number of leads (balls) and the number of missing leads
(balls) (all set to zero).
5 28
1) Default patterns
A default pattern is a ball pattern built into the machine by default. The
following default patterns are provided. The available default patterns vary
depending on the lead (ball) pitch you entered.
Type Default pattern Selection conditions (Ball pitch range)
1 Standard BGA 1.00 mm to 1.99 mm
2 Peripheral BGA 1.00 mm to 1.99 mm
3 Staggered std. BGA (More Out) 2.00 mm to 3.00 mm
(More balls are located on the outer frame)
4 Staggered std. BGA (Fewer Out) 2.00 mm to 3.00 mm
(Fewer balls are located on the outer
frame)
5 Staggered per. BGA (More Out) 2.00 mm to 3.00 mm
6 Staggered per. BGA (Fewer Out) 2.00 mm to 3.00 mm
2) Default pattern sample images

Default pattern sample images
Standard BGA Peripheral BGA Stagger Std. BGA

(More OUT)
Stagger Per. BGA Stagger Std. BGA Stagger Per. BGA

(More OUT) (Fewer OUT) (Fewer OUT)
5 29
) When you select Browse on the pop-up menu
The following Ball pattern list dialog box appears on the screen.
[How to set]
In the same manner as when you invoke the database list, double-click a
ball pattern to be set or select a ball pattern, then click the <OK> button.
The confirmation dialog box appears on the screen.
Notes:
When you call a ball pattern from the database, call the Component data
(Vision data) on which the ball pattern is set.
You cannot directly call a ball pattern only.
OK Sets a ball pattern. After setting the ball pattern, the dialog box shown above closes.
Cancel Cancels setting of a ball pattern, then closes the dialog box.
This is the ball pattern preview function. When you select a ball pattern and click the
Preview
Preview command, the selected ball pattern appears on the screen.
Ball pattern preview dialog example
X Number of ball columns

(Number of balls arranged
in the X direction)
Number of balls
Y Number of ball rows
(Number of balls arranged
in the Y direction)
When you click the <Close> button, the Ball

pattern list dialog box reappears on the
screen.
5 30
4) When you select Edit on the pop-up menu
The following BGA Editor appears on the screen.
- Register the desired ball pattern with the BGA editor.
- Up to 70 patterns can be registered.
- The registered pattern name is added to the Ball pattern list dialog box.
Description of the BGA editor

Tool box Ball/Index When you click the left button of the trackball, it allows you to
create a ball pattern. When you click the left button again,
a ball pattern is cleared.
When you click the right button of the trackball, it allows you
to create an index mark. When you click the right button
again, an index mark is cleared.
Rectangle When you move the trackball while holding down the left
button of the trackball, you can arrange balls in a rectangle.
Filling patterns Pattern setting For a solid rectangle pattern, select one of these filling
patterns.
Current Row, Col. Displays the coordinates of the start and end points of the
selection (Column) area that is selected with a rectangle provided in the Tool
box.
Current position Row, Col. Displays the X- and Y-coordinates of the cursor position.
Buttons OK Validates the current pattern editing.
Cancel Cancels the current pattern editing. Note that the
registered patterns will not be cleared.
Save Use this button to save the edited ball pattern.
If you edited a new ball pattern, assign a name to the ball
pattern, then save it.
Delete Deletes a registered ball pattern. Select a ball pattern from
the list box to be deleted.
Ball pattern List box Displays the registered ball patterns.
Make a new Allows you to create a new ball pattern. When you click this
pattern button, it allows you to enter a ball pattern type in the
Pattern Type combo box displayed below this button.
Pattern Type Select a ball pattern type from this combo box.
Rows, Columns Set the maximum number of balls.
Peripheral Sets a peripheral when you select the staggered peripheral
type of pattern in the Pattern Type combo box.
5 31
How to edit a ball pattern
1) Set a ball pattern.
1-1 When setting a ball pattern from the list box
When you select a registered ball pattern name, the corresponding
ball pattern appears on this dialog box.
Click the <Make a new pattern> button.
Edit a ball pattern if necessary.
1-2 When setting a new ball pattern

Click the <Make a new pattern> button.
Select a ball pattern from the Pattern Type combo box, then enter
the number of Rows and that of Columns of a new pattern.
If you select a peripheral pattern, enter the number of lines on
which a ball is located.
When you click the <Show Pattern> button, the ball pattern you set
appears on this dialog box.
By clicking each cell to add/delete a pin, edit the displayed pattern.
* If the number of leads (balls) set on the Vision data screen is different from
the number of balls set on the Ball pattern list dialog box, the number you
set on this dialog box is regarded as valid, and the number of leads (balls)
and the number of missing leads (balls) are all set to zero.
The confirmation message appears on the screen.
5 32
2) Edit a ball pattern.
2-1 Creating a ball pattern
Select the Ball/Index push button provided in the Tool box. Move the
cursor over the displayed ball pattern, then click the left button of the
trackball. It allows you to create a ball pattern.
- When you click the left button again, the displayed ball pattern is
cleared.
2-2 Creating an index mark

When you click the right button of the trackball, it allows you to create
an index mark.
- When you click the right button again, the displayed index mark is
cleared.
2-3 Arranging balls in a rectangle

Select the rectangle push button provided in the Tool box. Move the
cursor over the area you want to edit of the displayed ball pattern.
Move the trackball while holding down the left button of the trackball.
You can arrange balls in a rectangle.
- The color of the area of balls you set changes, and the coordinates
of the start and end points of the area being selected appear in the
Current Position fields.
5 33
2-4 Selecting a ball pattern
When you select one of four filling patterns, the ball pattern of the
selected area is changed to the selected pattern.
* Four types of ball pattern selecting screens are shown below.
Pattern 1 Pattern 2
Pattern 3 Pattern 4
5 34
3) Saving
3-1 Quitting the ball pattern editing operation
After editing a ball pattern, click the <OK> button.
- The following screen appears.

When you click the <Cancel> button, it cancels your ball pattern
editing.
When you click the <Yes> button, the Add a new ball pattern dialog
When you click the <No> button, the edited ball pattern is saved.
- Enter a ball pattern name, then click the <OK> button. The
edited ball pattern is saved.
- When you click the <Save> button, the Add a new ball pattern
dialog box appears on the screen. Enter a ball pattern name,
then click the <OK> button. The edited ball pattern is saved.
- When you click the <Cancel> button, the machine cancels your
ball pattern editing.
5 35
4) Deleting
4-1 Deleting a registered ball pattern
This section describes how to delete a registered ball pattern.
- Select the name of a ball pattern that you want to delete from the list
box.
- When you click the <Delete> button, the following screen appears.
- When you click the <OK> button, the selected ball pattern is
deleted from the list box.
- When you click the <Cancel> button, the machine cancels
deleting of the selected ball pattern.
5 36
NumLn (number of lines), Diameter/Level, and Variant/Level
NumLn Set the number of lines on which balls are located with being viewed from the
outside of a peripheral pattern.
Diameter/Level This item is not available when you select All land at the Contrast setting item.
Variant/Level This item is not available when you select All land at the Contrast setting item.
1) Setting the number of lines on which balls are located for a peripheral
pattern
In this example, the

number of lines where
balls are located is 4.
5 37
2) Settings for checking a ball
Set each ball shape check operation.
- Specify whether to check the diameter.

- Enter the level for checking the diameter (default: 50 %).
- Specify whether to check deformation of a ball.
- Enter the level for checking deformation of a ball (default: 50 %).
Inspecting the diameter of a ball

The length and width of a ball is measured by the ball diameter inspection
function. If either of these measurements is not within the setting range, the
recognition error is supposed to occur. The diameter of a ball is inspected
based on the entered value, so enter the correct diameter of a ball. We
recommend that you specify 40 % or higher as the inspection level.
V
The entered value for the ball diameter is supposed to be R. If either of 1 -
(H/R) or 1 - (V/R) is greater or smaller than the set value (%), the ball
diameter is regarded as "illegal".
Inspecting the variation
This means the ball area inspection. The area of a ball is converted into binary
data, then its bright pixels are counted. The threshold of the binary data is
optimized for each ball. If the number of pixels counted is smaller or larger
than the value set for the ball area which is calculated from the entered
diameter value, the recognition error occurs. The ball area which is calculated
from the entered diameter value is converted into the number of pixels, then
inspected. Enter the correct ball diameter value in the same manner as that
for the ball diameter inspection. This function performs the stricter inspection
than the ball diameter inspection, so we recommend that you specify 45 % or
higher as the inspection level.
Inspecting lack of a ball
If you specify Inspect of diameter or Inspect of variation, the system checks
whether any ball is omitted or not. This inspection is based on the average
value of each ball brightness and the total of each ball brightness to decide if a
ball should be omitted or not. A ball which is darker than other balls is handled
as nonexisting.
5 38
View
Set the field of view range when you want to recognize a component with
dividing its image.
- When you click this item with the right button, the selection pop-up menu
- You can select one of the settings: Standard, Vertical 2, and Vertical
3.
Notes:
This item is provided for compatibility with KE-740/760 data only. You cannot
set this item with any KE-2000 series of product.
For the field of view range, set the Split Recognition field of the Vision
Control dialog box.
Only the standard VCS can recognize a connector with dividing its image.
5 39
View Field, L Top, R Top, L Bot., and R Bot.
Set the range of leads to be recognized and that not recognized of a connector.
When you click this setting item with the right button, the selection pop-up
menu appears on the screen.
All Recognizes all leads.

Only the both ends lead Specify the range of leads to be recognized with being viewed from the leads
on both ends.
Both ends lead exclusion Specify the range of leads not recognized with being viewed from the leads
on both ends.
- When you select Only the both ends lead or Both ends lead exclusion,
enter the number of leads on each side to the L Top, R Top, L Bot., and
R Bot. fields to specify the range of leads recognized or not recognized.
- When you select All, you cannot specify the range of the number of leads.
1) Meaning and image of each lead recognition pattern

All leads: All leads are to be recognized.
Only the both ends lead:

Only leads located on both sides are to be recognized.
Both ends lead exclusion:

Leads except the specified leads located on both sides are to be
recognized.
5 40
2) Number of leads to be recognized
Enter the number of leads at each corner to be recognized. See the
conditions for entering the number of leads shown in Table 5.2.3.16 below.
Table 5.2.3.16.1 Range of the number of leads
Range of the number of leads
Component type Recognition pattern Upper Upper Lower Lower

left right left right
corner corner corner corner
All **** **** **** ****
Unidirectional
Only the both ends lead 1-3 1-3 **** ****
connector
Both ends lead exclusion 0-3 0-3 **** ****
Bidirectional
All **** **** **** ****
connector
Only the both ends lead 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-3
Z-shaped lead
Both ends lead exclusion 0-3 0-3 0-3 0-3
connector
Corr.(Brightness correction)
Set the threshold to be applied when the machine recognizes an
outline-recognized component.
- 0 is set as the initial value. If the machine cannot recognize such a
component, adjust the initial value between 127 and + 127. When a
component looks darker, set the smaller number. When you can see even
the background of a component, increase the value.
5 41
Exp (Expansion)
Set this item for an extended-lead connector, or unidirectional connector.
- When you click this item with the right button, the selection pop-up menu
When you click the [Edit] command, the following screen appears.
Profile Set the shape of a lead.

- Flat lead
- Gullwing lead
By default, Gullwing lead is selected.
Recog offset Displays the recognition center offset which was set on

(Recognition the Expansion window invoked from the Component
offset) data screen. You cannot edit any of these values on
this screen. This item shows the coordinates of the
lead center A with being viewed from the component
pick-up position C.
LREP. Enter the coordinates of the rightmost lead position:
(Rightmost coordinates of the rightmost lead center B with being
lead position) viewed from the lead center A. The default value is
determined based on the lead pitch and number of
leads.
When you finish entering all of data, click the <OK> button. The Vision
data screen reappears.
Notes:
The machine cannot recognize images of an extended-lead connector with
dividing it.
Note that only one point, the rightmost lead position is set on this screen, so
the recognition precision is insufficient.
5 42
5.2.4 General-purpose vision components
5.2.4.1 Overview of a general-purpose vision component
The following types of components are handled as a general-purpose vision
component (GNRL. vision displayed as the component type):
- Components having multi-pitch leads, components having various sized leads,
and components having leads at not-regulated positions (these components are
called multi-lead components; see Figure -1.)
- Area array components having two or more arrays (called complex array
components; see Figure -2.)
- Components having balls/lands on not-regulated positions (called random
component)
- Components having a side or corner (outline-recognized components)
The components above are classified into the following sub-component types:
Multi-lead component: Lead component group
Complex array component and random component: Ball component
group
Outline-recognized component: Outline-recognized component group
The data format definition of each type of components is as follows:
Multi-lead component, complex array component and outline-recognized
component Element group/Element format
Random component Extended array data format
* The Element group/Element format specifies an element to be recognized such

as a lead and ball, defines the group of the same elements (element group): the
pitch and/or quantity is the same, and specifies the direction and position of the
group.
The Extended array data format defines the element (ball and land) arrangement
with X and Y coordinates.
Ball component group
Lead component group (Multi-lead component) (Complex array component)
Figure -1 Figure -2
5 43
5.2.4.2 Specifications of a general-purpose vision component
1) Quantity
- Up to 20 element groups can be defined per component.
- Only one element can be specified per element group.
2) Dimensions
Element Setting item Standard VCS Optional VCS1 Optional VCS2 Optional VCS3
Lead Pitch 0.5 22.0 mm 0.4 15.0 mm 0.3 11.0 mm 0.3 6.5 mm
element
Wd (lead width) 0.22 10.0 mm 0.15 7.0 mm 0.12 5.0 mm 0.12 3.5 mm
Len (lead length) 0.4 10.0 mm 0.3 7.0 mm 0.2 5.0 mm 0.14 3.5 mm
Number of leads 1 to 384/element group
Ball/Land Pitch 1.0 22.0 mm 0.7 15.0 mm 0.5 11.0 mm 0.35 6.5 mm
element
Diameter 0.4 5.0 mm 0.28 3.5 mm 0.2 2.5 mm 0.14 1.5 mm
Number of balls 3 to 6936/element group
3) Shape and size specifications of an outline-recognized component group

- The specifications of the corner/side shape are the same as those of the
outline-recognized component group (See Limitation on components
depending on the recognition method of Contrast, 5.2.3 Detailed
description of operation).
- A filled circle and square marks can be used. A mark whose size is from 2
mm to 10 mm can be recognized with the standard VCS.
5.2.4.3 elem. (element)

This setting item is provided for components whose component type is set to GNRL.
vision in the Type cell and which cannot be recognized with normal Vision data
because their lead (ball) pitch or lead length is not the same as each other although
their component type is the same.
- When you click this setting item with the right button, the selection pop-up menu
appears on the screen as shown below.
When you click the [Edit] command on the pop-up menu, the following screen
appears.
5 44
(1) Setting items
1) Select a component type from the Component Type combo box at first:
- Leaded Component
- Ball Component
- Outline Component
2) Define the data format.
Check either one of the corresponding check boxes for defining the data
format:
- Element group/Element format
- Extended array data format
When you select Element group/Element format
When you select Extended array data format
Element
Use this data format for a component whose elements are arranged regularly.
group/Element format
Extended array data Use this data format for a component having an irregular ball pattern (available
format only if you select Ball Components as the Component Type).
5 45
1) Editing data
- When you click the <Add> button, the detailed Element Group screen or
Extended Array screen appears which allows you to create new data.
- When you select an element group from the Element Group List and click
the <Edit> button, the detailed Element Group screen or Extended Array
screen appears in the same manner when you click the <Add> button to
allow you to edit the displayed data.
- When you select an element group from the Element Group List and click
the <Delete> button, the selected element group is deleted.
3.1 Element group/Element format

This screen allows you to group components whose lead (ball) pitch, lead
length or ball diameter is the same as each other, and create or edit data
on a group.
- Up to 20 element groups can be defined.
- When you check the Element group/Element format check box and
click the <Add> or <Edit> button, the following screen appears.
5 46
3-2. Detailed description of each setting item

Element group Name Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters to assign an element group name. You
can omit this setting item. When omitted, ELGxxxx is assigned to an element
group, where xxxx is a four-digit integer automatically obtained.
First element Offset Enter the coordinate of the center (or ball center for a ball component) of the
position (X, Y, Z, Theta) reference lead (reference element) end with being viewed from the center of a
component.

Reference element
Center of a
Reference element component
Arrangement direction (0 degrees)
Note that when you select 2D as the Dimension, enter 0 to the Theta field.
You cannot enter any other value here. The center of a component is normally
that of the outline of the component.
Tolerance Enter the allowable offset coordinate range.
Layout Set the level used for checking an element layout error (default: 20 %).
inspection
Dimension Point (Side, Select this radio button if you set only one lead (ball) to be checked.
corner, mark)
1D (lead) Select this radio button if you set leads arranged in a column to be checked.
Arrangement direction
Reference element
Reference element
Arrangement direction
TOPVIEW
2D (Ball, Land) Select this radio button if you set leads (balls) arranged in a row and column to be
checked.
Arrangement direction of
a row
Reference element
Arrangement direction of
a column
BOTTOMVIEW
5 47
Column, Row Count Set the number of leads (balls) to be checked.
Pitch Set the distance between two consecutive leads (balls) to
be checked.
Tolerance Enter the allowable pitch range. (Not used)
Missing Elements Column, Start, Set the missing leads (balls) to be checked.
Row Count Up to four blocks of missing leads or balls can be set per
column/row.
Set blocks from a block of missing leads/balls nearest the
reference lead (ball).
Element Add Sets a new reference element.
(Only one element can be
set for an element group.) Edit Allows you to edit an element already set.
See Section 3-5 Element. Delete Deletes an element.
OK Registers data then displays the Extended Vision screen,
where the registered data appears on the Element Group
List.
Cancel Cancels your entering/editing, then displays the Extended
Vision screen again.
3.3 Extended array data format

When you check the Extended array data format check box, and click
the <Add> or <Edit> button, the following screen appears.
5 48
3-4 Detailed description of each setting item

Name Enter a name (up to 32 alphanumeric characters) to be assigned to an extended
array.
You can omit this item. When omitted, ENGxxxx is assigned to a name, where
xxxx is a four-digit integer automatically obtained.
Location X, Y Enter the coordinates of a ball to be checked with being viewed from the center
of a component. Up to 256 balls can be defined.
Element Add Adds an element setting.
See Section 3-5 Edit Allows you to edit an element already set.
Element.
Delete Deletes an element.
Layout Inspect Level Set the level used for checking a layout error.
Inspection
OK Registers data then displays the Extended Vision screen where the registered
data appears on the Extended Array List.
Cancel Cancels your creating/editing, then displays the Extended Vision screen again.
3.5 Element
When you click the <Add> or <Edit> button displayed on the Element
Group or Extended Array screen, the following screen appears.
- Set the conditions under which a lead (ball) is to be checked.
When you select an element type from the Type combo box, the
following dialog box appears on the right side of the screen shown
above.
5 49
(1) When you select Outer Lead or Inner Lead
(2) When you select Ball
(3) When you select Land
(4) When you select Column
5 50
(5) When you select Mark
(6) When you select Corner
Detailed description of each setting item

Element Type Select an element type according to the Dimension setting as shown below:
1D
- Outer Lead (referred from the top view)
- Inner Lead (referred from the top view)
1D and 2D
- Ball (referred from the bottom view)
- Land (referred from the bottom view)
- Column (referred from the bottom view)
Point
- Mark (referred from the bottom view)
- Marginal area (referred from the top view)
- Side (referred from the top view)
- Corner (referred from the top view)
Reference pos. Select the element reference position:
(position) - Center: center of an element (selected when Ball, Land, Mark or
(A displayed Marginal area is selected)
value is set, and - Center of the bottom side: (selected when Outer Lead, Inner Lead or
fixed according to Side is selected) (for a lead component)
the Type - Lower left position: (selected when Corner is selected)
setting.)
Polarity Select the brightness of an element:
- Bright
- Dark
Offset X, Y, Z and Theta Set an offset if the coordinates set in the Element Group screen should be
offset further. (Not used)
Tolerance Set the allowable offset range. (Not used)
Element size Size Enter the size of an element: dimensions of a lead.
- X indicates the width and Y indicates the length.
Tolerance Set the allowable size range. (Not used)
Outer Lead/Inner Profile Set the lead type:
Lead - Flat
- Gullwing
- J-bent
Coating Select coating applied to a lead:
- Bare (No plating)
- Gold-plating
- Solder-plating
5 51
Cut shape Select a cut shape of a lead:
- Flat
- U-shape cut
- Cut at the lower left corner
- Cut at the lower right corner
Cut length Enter the length of a cut portion of a lead (L).

Cut width Enter the width of a cut portion of a lead (W).
Lead size Enter the length and width of a foot portion of a lead.
Width
Lead
Length
Board
Ball/Land/Column Inspection Set whether to check a ball/land/column and the reference level.
(Diameter, Area,
Ball exist? And
Average
diameter)
OK Registers data and displays the Element Group or Extended Array screen
again.
Cancel Cancels data registering and displays the Element Group or Extended Array
screen again.
5 52
5.2.4.4 Procedure for creating general-purpose vision component data
5.2.4.4.1 Lead components (Element group/Element format)
This section describes the procedure for creating data on lead components
(multi-lead components).
1) Operation on the Extended Vision screen
- Select Lead Component on the Component Type combo box.
- Check the Element group/Element format check box in the Define data
format field.
- Click the <Add> button on the Element Group List.
2) Operation on the Element Group screen
Define an element group on this screen.
An element group is composed of components whose lead size and pitch are the
same.
See Figure 5.2.4.4.1 for an example of a multi-lead component. The procedure
for creating data on this component is to be described below.
Description
In the example below, four element groups are defined. The size and pitch of
leads of the first and third element groups are the same, while the direction and
position of leads of these groups are different from each another. The size and
pitch of leads of the second and fourth element groups are the same also, but
leads of these groups are not arrange continuously, so the lead pitch is not the
same. If the distance between these leads is an integral multiple of the specified
pitch, they can be defined as one element group that has an area having no lead.
However, we recommend that you define them as separate element groups.
To define the direction and position of the element group, specify the component
posture. In Figure 5.2.4.1.1, the direction of a component shown is normal. The
posture of multi-lead components is regulated from the top view.
Fourth element Second
group Third element element group
group
First element Top View

group
Figure 5.2.4.4.1
5 53
If the length of a lead changes alternatively as shown in Figure 5.2.4.4.2, define
two groups: one having long leads and another having short leads. The pitch is
also defined for a group of long leads and that of short leads separately.
Second element group
Pitch 2 First element group

Pitch 1
Figure 5.2.4.4.2
Name
Name an element group to be handled. When you want to change an
element group, specify its name to edit it.
- A name is assigned automatically with serial numbers.
- Users can change this numbered name to an alphanumeric name (up to 32
characters).
In the example, the numbered name is used.
First element position
Specify the position (X, Y) and direction (Theta) of an element group.
As the position, specify the distance (offset) from the center of a component.
Normally, the center of a component is the center of the component outline.
- If the placement coordinates set in Placement data of a production program
is not based on the center of the component outline, you can specify the
coordinates of the reference component center with coordinates different
from the center of the component outline.
Figure 5.2.4.4.3 indicates that the center of the component outline is the
center of a component, while Figure 5.2.4.4.4 indicates that the center of
component body is the center of a component.
Center of a component
(Center of the component outline)
Top View
Figure 5.2.4.4.3
(Center of the component body)
Top View
Figure 5.2.4.4.4
5 54
- To be precise, the First element position is the distance (offset) from the
center of a component to the first element.
In the same manner as defined for a standard lead components (such as a
QFP, SOP and connector), the first element is the leftmost element when an
element group is located on the bottom side, the lowest element when
located on the right side, the rightmost element when located on the top
side, or the top element when located on the left side. Figure 5.2.4.4.5
shows the first element position of the component used as an example.
For a lead element, the first element position is the end of the first lead with
being viewed from the center of a component.
Direction: 180 degrees
Top View
Direction: 0 degrees
Figure 5.2.4.4.5
- The direction (angle) of an element group is 0 degrees when it is located on

the bottom side, 90 degrees when located on the right side, 180 degrees
when located on the top side, and 270 degrees when it is located on the left
side with counting anti-clockwise.
In the example, the angle of the first element group is 0 degrees and the
angle of each group from the second element group to fourth element group
is 180 degrees.
- The VCS finds each element group of a general-purpose vision component,

then recognizes it with assuming that the component center obtained when
you set the element group layout is on the VCS center.
If the component pick-up position is shifted from the center of a component
as shown in Figure 5.2.4.4.6, set the following values as the recognition
offset: an offset for recognizing a component so that the center of a
component can be located on the VCS center.
Recognition offset X: (Xcenter Xpick)
Y: (Ycenter Ypick)
When the machine recognizes a general-purpose vision component, the
center for recognizing a component is the component center obtained when
you set the element group layout.
Therefore, if the placement center position of a component is shifted from
the center of a component as shown in Figure 5.2.4.4.6, set the following
values as the Placement offset: an offset for placing a component so that
the placement center point of a component can be moved on the placement
position on a board.
Placement offset X: (Xplace Xcenter)
Y: (Ycenter Ycenter)
5 55
Placement center point of a component
Component center position (Xcenter, Ycenter)

(component outline center)
Cross
Component pick-up position (Xpick, Ypick) Top View section
Figure 5.2.4.4.6
When the first lead end position is set to (- 20.0 mm, - 5.0 mm), set each value
in the First element position field as follows:
Offset X: - 20.0
Offset Y: - 5.0
Offset Z: 0 (not used)
Offset Theta: 0
Set 0 to each field of the setting item Tolerance.
* Next, set the element group arrangement.
To set the element group arrangement, the setting items Dimension, and
Count and Pitch of the Column and Row are provided.
Dimension
For a lead element, the dimension is one. Select 1D.
In the example, the number of leads located in the first element group is 30.
Enter 30 to the Count field displayed under the setting item Row.
The pitch of each element group is shown in Figure 5.2.4.4.3.
- When the pitch is 0.5 mm, enter 0.5 in the Pitch field.
- Set 0 to the Tolerance field.
Lead pitch of the fourth Lead pitch of the

element group Lead pitch of the third element second element group
group
Lead pitch of the first element

Top View
group
Figure 5.2.4.4.7
Layout inspection
Set the level used for checking the layout of an element group (checking a
bent lead of a lead component). If you are to check the layout, check the
Layout inspection check box. In the same manner as setting of a QFP, use
the ratio of a bent lead to the lead pitch to set the bent lead detection level.
- When you want to set the level to 20 %, check the Layout inspection
check box, then check 20 %.
5 56
Missing elements
In the example, there is no missing lead on the element group. If there is/are
a missing element(s), specify this setting item also in the same manner as that
of a QFP.
Up to four blocks of missing leads can be specified per element group.
To specify a block, set the position of the first missing lead and the number of
missing leads located continuously in the same manner when you set those of
a QFP component.
- If three leads are not located from the fifth lead,
Enter 5 to the Start field of the Row setting item, 3 to the Count field.
Here, you have finished setting an element group. Next, define a recognition
element of this element group.
Only one element can be defined per element group. Even though you define
two or more elements, they are handled as invalid.
Click the <Add> button in the Element setting field.
1) Element screen
Type
The lead element types are mainly classified into two: inner leads and outer
leads.
An inner lead refers to a lead whose end faces toward the inside of a
component. An outer lead refers to a lead whose end faces toward the
outside of a component.
- In the example, a component Example of
consists of outer leads. inner leads (of
Select Outer Lead from the a socket)
Type combo box.
Figure 5.2.4.4.8
Reference pos. (position)
The element origin of a lead element is the lead end as described earlier.
- Select Center of the bottom from the Reference pos. combo box.
Polarity (element polarity)
Specify how bright the image of an element should be.
- Select Bright from the Polarity combo box because a lead element looks
bright under the reflective light.
Offset
Normally, the offset is not used. Set 0 to the Offset fields.
5 57
Element size
Enter the element size. In the example, the lead length is 1.0 mm, and the
lead width is 0.2 mm. In this case, enter the following values:
Size Width: 0.2
Length: 1.0
Normally, the tolerance is not used. Enter 0 to the Tolerance fields.
Outer Lead/Inner Lead
Profile (lead shape)
As shown in Figure 5.2.4.4.9, a lead whose shape is flat entirely is called a
flat lead, a stepped lead is called a gullwing lead, and a J-shaped lead is
called J-Bend lead.
* A flat lead is often used for a unidirectional connector.
* A gullwing lead is often used for a QFP and SOP.
* A J-Bend lead is used for a PLCC (QFJ) and SOJ.
Gullwing lead Flat lead J-Bend lead
Figure 5.2.4.4.9
- In the example, a gullwing lead is shown.
Select Gullwing from the Profile combo box.
Cut shape
Specify the shape of a lead end.
All of the settings other than Flat are handled in the same manner. When
you select a setting other than Flat, set the Cut width and Cut length
fields.
- In the example, the shape of a lead end is flat.
Select Flat from the Cut shape combo box.
Coating
This item is not to be used. Select Bare from this combo box.
Cut width
This item is not to be used. Enter 0 to this field.
Cut length
Set this item if you select a setting other than Flat from the Cut shape
combo box.
Enter the length of a not-flat portion measured from the lead end.
- In the example, the shape of a lead end is flat.
Enter 0 to the Cut length field.
5 58
Lead size
For a gullwing lead, enter the lead foot size here.
The lead foot size indicates the portion of a gullwing lead which is in contact
with a board.
- In the example, the length of a gullwing lead foot is 0.5 mm.
Enter the following values:
Width: 0.2 (same as the lead width)
Length: 0.4
- Here, you have finished entering element data. When you click the <OK>
button displayed on the lower right corner, the Element Group screen
reappears.
- You have finished defining the first element group. When you click the
<OK> button displayed on the lower right corner, the Extended Vision
screen reappears.
When you have the next element group to be defined at this point, click the <Add>
button to define the element group by entering data in the same manner.
In the example, there are four element groups. Define four element groups.
All data to be entered is shown below:
Forth element group Third element group Second element group

(X, Y): (- 9.50, 5.1) mm (X, Y): (7.5, 4.9) mm (X, Y): (13.31, 5.1) mm
Theta: 180 degrees Theta: 180 degrees Theta: 180 degrees
Pitch: 0.5 mm, Count: 4 Pitch: 0.5 mm, Count: 31 Pitch: 1.27 mm, Count: 4
Lead length: 1.2 mm Lead length: 1.0 mm Lead length: 1.2 mm
Lead width: 0.4 mm Lead width: 0.2 mm Lead width: 0.4 mm
Gullwing lead: Flat Gullwing lead: Flat Gullwing lead: Flat
Foot length: 0.6 mm Foot length: 0.4 mm Foot length: 0.6 mm
Foot width: 0.4 mm Foot width: 0.2 mm
First element group Top View

(X, Y): (- 7.25, - 5.1) mm
Theta: 0 degrees
Pitch: 0.5 mm, Count: 30
Missing leads: three from
the fifth lead
Lead length: 1.0 mm
Lead width: 0.2 mm
Gullwing lead: Flat
Foot length: 0.4 mm
Foot width: 0.2 mm
Figure 5.2.4.4.10
5 59
Element First
Layout Missing Element Element Element
group element (Dimension) Element Cutting Lead size
inspection elements offset size shape
name position
ELG0001 X:-7.25 25% ID Start: 5 Type: Outer Offset: all Size Profile: Cut width: Size
Y: -5.1 Count: 3 Lead set to 0. X: 0.2 Gullwing 0 X: 0.2
Count of
Z: 0 Column: 30 Reference Tolerance: Y: 1.0 Cut shape: Cut length: Y: 0.4
pos.: all set to 0. Tolerance: Flat 0
: 0 Pitch of Tolerance:
Center of the all set to 0. Coating:
Column: all set to 0.
Tolerance: bottom Bare
0.5
All set to 0. Polarity:
Tolerance:
Bright
0
ELG0002 X: 13.31 25% ID Type: Outer Offset: all Size Profile: Cut width: Size
Y: 5.1 Lead set to 0. X: 0.4 Gullwing 0 X: 0.4
Count of
1.27
Tolerance:
Bright
0
ELG0003 X: 7.5 25% ID Type: Outer Offset: all Size Profile: Cut width: Size
Count of
0.5
Tolerance:
Bright
0
ELG0004 X: -9.5 25% ID Type: Outer Offset: all Size Profile: Cut width: Size
Count of
1.27
Tolerance:
Bright
0
Click the <OK> button at the lower left corner of the screen after you define all element groups to finish the Extended Vision
data entry.
5 60
5.2.4.4.2 Ball components (Element group/Element format)
This section describes the procedure for creating data on ball components
(complex array components).
1. Operation on the Extended Vision screen

- Select Ball Component from the Component Type combo box.
- Check the Element group/Element format check box in the Define data
format field.
- Click the <Add> button on the Element Group List.
2. Operation on the Element Group screen
Define an element group.
An element group consists of components whose size and pitch is the same as
each other.
A complex array component refers to an area array component whose size is
different or whose ball/land pitch is different from each other.
When the lead pitch is not the same even though the polarity is the same, set
element groups separately. If the polarity is the same, the size and shape of the
polarity is the same also.
In the example shown in Figure 5.2.4.4.11, a complex array component that
consists of four element groups is shown.
The procedure for creating data on this component is to be described below.

The element size and pitch of the second and third element groups are the
same as each another. However, columns of elements are not aligned with
each another. Define them as two different element groups.
The posture of a complex array component is viewed from the bottom in the
same manner as an area array component such as a BGA and FBGA.
Fourth element group

Third element group
First element group
Bottom View
Figure 5.2.4.4.11
5 61
When a component has a staggered pattern of elements partially as shown in
Figure 5.2.4.4.12, divide them into two grid arrangement groups, then define them.
Element group 2
Element group 1
Figure 5.2.4.4.12
Name
Name an element group to be handled. When you want to change an
element group, specify its name to edit it.
A name is automatically assigned with serial numbers. Users can change this
numbered name to an alphanumeric name (up to 32 characters).
- In the example, the numbered name is used.
First element position
Specify the position (X, Y) and direction (Theta) of an element group.
As the position, specify the distance (offset) from the center of a component.
Normally, the center of a component is the center of the component outline.
- If the placement coordinates set in Placement data of a production program
is not based on the center of the component outline, you can specify the
coordinates of the reference component center with coordinates different
from the center of the component outline.
Figure 5.2.4.4.13 indicates that the center of the component outline is the
Center of a component (Center of

the component outline)
Bottom View
Figure 5.2.4.4.13
5 62
To be precise, the First element position is
12 34 56
the distance (offset) from the center of a Line
(row)
component to the first element. number
The direction (angle) of the element group is
basically 0 degrees. 1 2 3 4 5
Column number
Figure 5.2.4.4.14 shows the relation between
the lines (rows) and columns.
Bottom View
The first (ball or land) element positions at the
coordinates of the element (ball/land) at the Figure 5.2.4.4.14
lower left corner.
- This layout of elements is different from that of a standard BGA
component having balls on the outer frame.
Figure 5.2.4.4.15 shows the first element (ball/land) position of the
component shown in the example above.
For a ball/land element, the center of the first ball/land viewed from the
center of a component becomes the coordinates of the first (ball/land)
element.
(Center of the component outline)
Bottom View
Figure 5.2.4.4.15
When the first lead end is set to (- 6.0 mm, - 5.0 mm), set each value in the
First element position field as follows:
Offset X: - 6.0
Offset Y: - 5.0
Offset Z: 0 (not used)
Offset Theta: 0
- Normally, enter 0 to each field of the setting item Tolerance.
Next, set the element group arrangement.

To set the arrangemen, the setting items Dimension, and Count and Pitch
of the Column and Row are provided.
5 63
Dimension
For a ball/land element, the dimension is two. Select 2D.
Note: For arrangement of only one column and one row, specify 2D also.
Figure 5.2.4.4.3 shows the pitch of each element group.
- In the example, the number of lead columns located in the first element
group is nine. Enter 9 to the Count field displayed under the setting
item Column.
Note: For arrangement of only one line, enter 1.
- When the pitch is 1.5 mm, enter 1.5 to the Pitch of the Column field.
Note: For arrangement of only one line, enter 1.5 also.
- Normally, enter 0 to the Tolerance field.
- Since the number of lead rows located in the first element group is six,
enter 6 to the Count field of the Row setting item.
Note: For arrangement of only one row, enter 1 to the Count field.
- When the pitch is 1.27 mm, enter 1.27 to the Pitch field of the Row
setting item.
Note: For an arrangement of one row only, enter 1.27 to the Pitch
field too.
- Normally, set 0 to the Tolerance field.
The pitch of each element group is shown in Figure 5.2.4.4.16.
Pitch of the Column of the

fourth element group
Pitch of the Column of the third
element group
Pitch of the Row of the third
element group
Pitch of the Row of the second Pitch of the Row of the fourth
element group element group
Pitch of the Column of the
second element group
Pitch of the Row of the

first element group
Bottom View
Pitch of the Column of
the first element group
Figure 5.2.4.4.16
Layout inspection
This item is not used by the current version.
5 64
Missing Elements
In the example, there is missing balls (lands) on the first element group. If
there is/are a missing ball(s)/land(s), specify this setting item also in the same
manner as that of a BGA/FBGA.
Up to four blocks of missing balls/lands can be specified per element group.
To specify a block, set the first missing ball/land position of the column and
row respectively and the number of lines having missing balls/lands located
continuously in the same manner when you set those of a BGA/FBGA
component.
- If there is no ball/land on three columns from the second column and no
balls/lands on two rows from the fourth row, enter values as shown below:
Start of the Column field: 2
Count of the Column field: 3
Start of the Row field: 4
Count of the Row field: 2
Note: If there is no ball/land at five or more portions, divide the element
group further, then define those divided element groups.
- Here, you have finished setting an element group.

- Next, define a recognition element of this element group.
Only one element can be defined per element group. Even though you
define two or more elements, they are handled as invalid.
Click the <Add> button in the Element setting field.
3. Element screen
Type
You can specify a ball or land as an element type of ball components. This
version does not support a column.
When you specify a land as an element, you can select a circular land or
rectangular land.
For a bump, specify Ball as an element type from the Type combo box.
For an electrode that is flat entirely, specify Land.
- In the example, a ball is used. Select Ball from the Type combo box.
Reference pos. (position)
The reference position of a ball/land element is the center of an element.
- Select Center of an element from the Reference pos. combo box.
Polarity
This item specifies the brightness of the shot image of an element.
- Normally, the light that illuminates a ball/land element brightly is used for
ball components. Select Bright from the Polarity combo box.
Note: Since a CBGA illuminates the surroundings of a ball, select Dark.
Offset
Normally, this setting item is not used. Enter 0 to each field of this item.
5 65
Element size
Enter the size of an element.
Since the shape of a rectangular land is still a square, enter the same value to
both the Width and Length fields.
- In the example, the diameter is assumed to be 0.5 mm. Enter the following
values.
Width: 0.5
Length: 0.5
- Normally, the Tolerance setting item is not used. Do not change this field
setting 0.
Ball/Land
For a land, you can select a circular land or rectangular land. Click the
corresponding check box.
- In the example, a ball element is used, so these check boxes do not appear
on the screen.
Inspection
Click the check box of the item to be inspected.
The check items Diameter and Area are the same as those for a
BGA/FBGA. Specify the corresponding check level in %. The default value
for each check level is 50 %.
Specify the check level of the Ball exist? check in %. also However, the
percentage indicates the internal evaluated characteristics. Normally use the
default value, 30 %. For a land element, this item is handled as invalid
even though you specify this item, and the machine does not perform the
check to see if a ball exists on a component.
- Normally, the setting item Average diameter is not used.
- If you perform the Diameter, Area and Ball exist?checks with specifying
the default value respectively, the following values are used for each check:
Inspection Area: 50 % (default)
Diameter: 50 % (default)
Ball exist: 30 % (default)
Average diameter:
You have to click each check box only.
Here, you have finished entering data on an element. When you click the
<OK> button at the lower right corner, the Element Group screen reappears.
You have finished defining the first element group. When you click the <OK>
button at the lower right corner, the Extended Vision screen reappears.
If you have another element group to be defined, click the <Add> button again
to enter data on the element group. In the example, there are four element
groups. Define four element groups.
When you finish defining all element groups, click the <OK> button at the lower
left corner to finish entering the Extended vision data.
5 66
All of the entered data is shown below.
Forth element
(X, Y): (1.5, 5.5) mm
Pitch of Column: 1.5 mm, Count: 5
Pitch of Row: 0.8 mm, Count: 3
Missing Elements: none
Ball diameter: 0.5 mm
Inspection: Area 50 %
Diameter 50 %
Ball exist? 30 %
Third element group Second element

(X, Y): (-7.5, 4.0) mm (X, Y): (-8.25, 1.5) mm
Pitch of Column: 1.5 mm, Count: 5 Pitch of Column: 1.5 mm, Count: 12
Pitch of Row: 1.0 mm, Count: 4 Pitch of Row: 1.0 mm, Count: 2
Missing Elements: none Missing Elements: none
Ball diameter: 0.5 mm Ball diameter: 0.5 mm
Inspection: Area 50 % Inspection: Area 50 %
Diameter 50 % Diameter 50 %
Ball exist? 30 % Ball exist? 30 %
First element
(X, Y): (-6.0, -5.0) mm
Pitch of Column: 1.5 mm, Count: 9
Pitch of Row: 1.27 mm, Count: 6
Missing Elements:
Start 2 Count 3 Bottom View
Start 4 Count 2
Ball diameter: 0.5 mm
Inspection: Area 50 %
Diameter 50 %
Ball exist? 30 %
Figure 5.2.4.4.17
Element First Layout

Missing Element
Group element inspectio (Dimension) Element Element size (Shape) Inspection
Elements Offset
Name position n
ELG0001 X: -6.0 0% 2D Column Type: Ball Offset: all Element size (Since an element Diameter:
Y: -5.0 Start: 22 Reference pos.: set to 0. Width: 0.5 is a ball, the 50
Count of Column: 9
Count: 3 Center of element Tolerance: Length: 0.5 selection screen Area: 50
Z: 0 Pitch: 1.5 does not appear
Row Polarity: Bright all set to 0. Tolerance: Ball exist?:
: 0 Count of Row: 6 Start: 4 all set to 0. which allows you
to select a circular 30
Tolerance: Pitch: 1.27 Count: 2
or rectangular Average
All set to 0. Tolerance: 0 shape.) diameter: 0
ELG0002 X: -8.25 0% 2D Type: Ball Offset: all Element size (Since an element Diameter:
Y: 1.5 Count of Column: Ref set to 0. Width: 0.5 is a ball, the 50
erence pos.: Length: 0.5 selection screen Area: 50
Z: 0 12
Center of element Tolerance: Tolerance: does not appear
Pitch: 1.5 which allows you Ball exist?:
: 0 all set to 0. all set to 0.
Pol to select a circular 30
Tolerance: Count of Row: 2
arity: Bright or rectangular Average
All set to 0. Pitch: 1.0 shape.) diameter: 0
Tolerance: 0
ELG0003 X: -7.5 0% 2D Type: Ball Offset: all Element size (Since an element Diameter:
Y: 4.0 Count of Column: 5 Ref set to 0. Width: 0.5 is a ball, the 50
Center of element Tolerance: Tolerance: Ball exist?:
: 0 Count of Row: 4 all set to 0. all set to 0. which allows you
Tolerance: Pitch: 1.0 arity: Bright or rectangular Average
ELG0004 X: 1.5 0% 2D Type: Ball Offset: all Element size (Since an element Diameter:
Y: 5.5 Count of Column: 5 Ref set to 0. Width: 0.5 is a ball, the 50
Center of element Tolerance: Tolerance: Ball exist?:
: 0 Count of Row: 3 all set to 0. all set to 0. which allows you
Tolerance: Pitch: 0.8 arity: Bright or rectangular Average
When you finish defining all element groups, click the <OK> button displayed at the lower left corner to finish the extended
vision data entry.
5 67
5.2.4.5 Limitations of a general-purpose vision component
1. Quantity
- Up to 20 element groups can be defined per component.
- Only one extended array group can be defined per component.
- The maximum number of lead elements that can be defined per element group
is 384, and that of ball elements is 6936. These numbers include missing
leads/balls.
- One corner/side/mark element should be defined per element group
respectively.
- The maximum number of ball elements that can be defined per extended array
group is 256.
- Up to four blocks of missing elements can be defined per element group. If
you want to define five or more blocks of missing elements, divide the element
group into two or more groups.
- Up to 6936 balls can be defined per component.
- Up to four corners/sides and up to three marks can be defined per component.
- The total number of element groups that can be handled with one production
program is up to 1,024.
- The total number of extended array groups that can be handled with one
production program is up to 256.
2. Combination
- Both a lead element and a ball (or land) element cannot be defined for one
component at the same time.
- Combination of elements that are seen under the same light only can be
defined for one component.
- Both an element group and an extended array group cannot be defined for one
component at the same time.
3. Lead components
- At least one element group including two or more leads has to exist on a
component.
- As the lead size, the ratio of the length to width should be 1 or more. For a
gull-wing lead, the ratio of the length to the length specified in the Lead size
should be 1 or more.
Length Length
The length of a lead
Width should be longer than
Width the width.
Normal lead Gull-wing lead
5 68
- When a lead end (lead end position) of one lead element group is laterally
located near another lead element group, whose lead end height is almost the
same with that of the former lead element group (that is, the height difference
should be 0.5 times of the pitch or less), the centers of the adjacent two leads
should be located far from one another by two times of the pitch. For an
element group that has only one lead, the center of one group should be far
from that of another one by two times of the lead width. If a lead-like shaped
substance is located near a lead, they should be far from one another in the
same manner.
P1 P2 <T O P V IE W > P 1: P itch of E lem ent group 1

P 2: P itch of E lem ent group 2
L: D istance betw een tw o elem ent groups
H: D ifference betw een lead ends of tw o elem ent

groups
H 0.5 P 1 and H 0.5 P 2

L 2P 1 and L 2P 2
- If another lead group is located in the longitudinal direction of a lead of one

lead group, it should be far from the lead by the distance equal to the lead
width and at least by 1 mm.
<T O P V IE W >
W 1: P itch of E lem ent group 1

P W 2: P itch of E lem ent group 2
L: D istance betw een tw o elem ent groups in
W1 W2 the longitudinal direction
L W 1, W 2 and L 1 m m
- In any case: if you define all lead groups or if you define only certain groups
to recognize them, you have to follow the two requirements described just
above.
- For a connector on which two types of leads are arranged alternatively: long
one and short one, you can define two groups: a group of long leads and that
of short leads. You can define these lead groups even though they overlap
one another if leads themselves do not overlap each other. The requirements
on the lead distance described above are not applied to these lead groups
unless bent leads of the different groups do not overlap.
Pitch 2 First element group

Pitch 1 <TOP VIEW>
- If you specify only the limited leads of one lead group, we cannot guarantee
their recognition precision (due to the Version 1.10 limitations).
- You cannot define one lead for two different groups. You cannot define leads
that overlap each other. Note that you happen to define leads in these ways
if you set the wrong lead pitch, number of leads and/or lead width.
- You cannot specify an inner lead as the lead element type. If you specify in
this way, we cannot guarantee the recognition precision (due to the Version
1.10 limitations).
5 69
4. Ball components
- At least one ball group consisting of three or more balls of the same size
should exist on a component.
- When the similar size of ball/land groups (the diameter ratio should be less
than 1.5) are located closely, the center of one group should be far from that of
another group by 2 times of the ball/land diameter or more.
D1: Ball diameter of Element group 1

D2: Ball diameter of Element group 2
L: Distance between the centers of the two
D1 adjacent balls

When D1 < 1.5D2 or D2 < 1.5D1,

L 2D1 and L 2D2
D2
<BOTTOM VIEW>
- In any case: if you define all ball groups or if you define only certain groups to
recognize them, you have to follow the requirement described above.
- For a staggered type of BGA, you can define it as two square-grid ball groups.
In this case, you can specify these two groups even though these ball groups
overlap one another. However, any ball of these groups should not overlap
with each other, and the centers of two adjacent balls of each group should be
located far from on another by 1.5 times of their diameters.
L Element group 2
D: Ball diameter
L: Distance between the
centers of two adjacent balls
L >= 15
<BOTTOM VIEW>
Element group 1
- If you specify only limited balls of one ball group, we cannot guarantee their
recognition accuracy (due to the Version 1.10 limitations).
- If the diameter check precision is the diameter 50 % or less, the recognizable
pitch and recognizable ball diameter are limited greatly.
- A rectangular land should be a square. (Note that the machine may
recognize an element as a lead if the ratio of the lead width to the lead length
of a rectangular land is 1 : 1 or less.)
- You cannot define a ball for two different ball groups. You cannot define balls
that overlap each other either. Note that you happen to define balls in these
ways if you set the wrong ball pitch, number of ball lines and/or ball diameter.
5 70
5. Outline-recognized components
- If you define an outline-recognized component with only one type of element
(corner, side or mark) other than a lead and ball, you have to specify two or
more corresponding elements. If you specify another type of element also,
you only have to specify one corresponding element (excluding a side).
- Up to four corners can be specified for this type of component. Note that you
cannot specify two or more corners whose specified angle is the same (theta
offset).
270Corner 180Corner Although there are two corners

whose theta angle is 0 degrees, you
can specify just one corner of them.
0Corner1
<TOP VIEW>
0Corner2 90Corner
- If another corner or an element (lead, rectangular land or rectangular mark)

having a corner whose angle is the same is located near one corner element,
they should be far from one another by 4 mm or more provided that the
standard VCS is used.
(Since an intersection point outside the outer frame is regarded as a corner
due to the Version 1.10 limitations, two corners (or corner-shaped substance)
should be far from one another by 4 mm or more also.)
- Up to four sides can be specified per component. However, note that two or
more sides whose specified angle is the same (theta offset) cannot be
specified per component. A side should be located on the outer frame, and
its length should be half or longer of the dimension of the component. When
you specify a side (sides) only as an element, include two sides that are
orthogonal
to one 180Side Although there are two sides whose
theta angle is 0 degrees and those
another. 270Side 1 0Corner1 whose theta angle is 270 degrees
90Side
respectively, you can specify only
270Side 2 either of two sides whose angle is
the same.
0Side 2
<TOP VIEW>
- Up to three marks can be specified per component.

- You can specify a hole as a circle mark of the reverse polarity (dark). In this
case, it has to be displayed as a circle clearly on the screen. (Note that a
hole may not be displayed as a circle clearly on the screen when a thick
component is to be recognized with the perspective light.)
- A mark should be located far from a similar-sized mark or similar-shaped and
similar-sized element (ball or circular land) by 5 mm or more provided that the
standard VCS is used.
6. Notes when a general-purpose vision component data format is used
- Use this format for an element group (especially lead element group) whose
positioning precision is sufficient to be recognized. When you use this format
for an element group (especially lead element group) whose positioning
precision is uncertain, a recognition error may occur frequently.
5 71
5.2.5 Ctrl (Control)
When you click the [Edit] command displayed on the Ctrl field, the following screen
appears.
Set the light used for recognizing divided image in the following order:
1. Set a VCS used for recognizing a component.
2. Determine the division recognition.
3. Specify the Light type and sub type (when the Light type is Back lights or
Side lights).
4. Set the other items.
Detailed description of each setting item
Item Description
Light type Select the light type:
- Bottom Lights
This type of light is a red light consisting of three light blocks: coaxial light
(half mirror light), bottom light and red side light (upper and lower stages).
- Back Lights
This type of light is a green light used for using the shade of a component
to center the component that cannot be illuminated with the back light.
- Side Lights
This is a light (normally blue light) used for recognizing a solder ball of a
BGA (FBGA).
Sub type Select the sub light type.
Bottom
- Standard
- CBGA
- LGA
Side
- Red side light
- Red side light equipped with a pop-up light
- Blue side light
- Blue side light equipped with a pop-up light
Split Count Set the number of divisions of image in the X, Y and Z directions.
recognition The number of divisions in each direction is:
X: 1 to 2
Y: 1 to 3
Z: 1 to 2
(See Section 5.2.5.1 Applicable component dimensions during division
recognition.)
Pitch Specify the distance over which a VCS moves. The value range varies
depending on the selected VCS.
5 72
Item Description
VCS Select a VCS used for recognizing a component:
Selection Standard (50 mm)
37.5 mm option VCS
27 mm option VCS
18 mm option VCS
VCS Focus Specify the height the VCS recognizes.
Height (Distance from the component bottom to the lead bottom side)
Placement X, Y, Z, Enter an offset for each component which is used for placement. Note that
Offset this offset functions in the same manner the recognition offset of
Component data does.
Motion At Pick Check this check box when you set the posture of a component at the
Control Position pick-up position.
(The machine checks the posture of a component when it picks up the
component, then moves it onto the VCS.)
XY speed Select the speed for controlling the posture of a component:
- Very Slow (default)
- Slow
- Medium
- High
Angle Enter the angle of the component posture after it is picked up.
Allowable input range: 0 to 359 degrees (default: 90 degrees)
This angle is automatically and optimally controlled.
Height Enter the height when a component is being rotated.
Allowable input range: - 20.0 mm to 20.0 mm (default: 0 mm)
On VCS Check this check box when you want to set the component posture control
on the VCS.
(This item is available only for a large component.) (When the machine
recognizes divided images of a component)
XY speed Select the speed for recognizing divided images of a component:
- Very Slow
- Slow
- Medium
- High
Rotate speed Select the rotation speed when the machine recognizes divided images of a
component:
- Very Slow
- Slow
- Medium
- High
Z Axis Select the speed of the Z axis when the machine recognizes divided
images of a component:
- Very Slow
- Slow
- Medium
- High
Angle Enter the posture of a component when the machine recognizes it.
Allowable input range: 90 degrees
The angle is automatically and optimally controlled.
Height Enter the height of a component when it is being rotated (Not used).
Allowable input range: - 20.0 mm to 20.0 mm
OK Sets the data.
Cancel Cancels the data setting.
5 73
5.2.5.1 Applicable component dimensions during division recognition
Standard VCS (54.00 mm x 54.00 mm)
- Bottom (reflective) light
Dimensions of applicable components
Division mode Longer side Shorter side
Standard 50.00 3.00 mm 50.00 3.00 mm
12 100.00 50.01 mm 3.00 50.00 mm
13 150.00 100.01 mm 3.00 50.00 mm
22 75.00 50.01 mm 75.00 mm 50.01 mm
- Back (penetrative) light

Standard 50.00 9.00 mm 35.00 9.00 mm
12 100.00 50.01 mm 35.00 17.00 mm
13 120.00 100.01 mm 35.00 17.00 mm
Optional 37.00 mm-VCS

Standard 34.00 3.00 mm 34.00 3.00 mm
12 68.00 34.01 mm 34.00 3.00 mm
13 102.00 68.01 mm 34.00 3.00 mm
22 68.00 34.01 mm 68.00 mm 34.01 mm

Standard 34.00 9.00 mm 34.00 9.00 mm
Optional 27.00-mm VCS

Standard 24.00 3.00 mm 24.00 3.00 mm
12 48.00 24.01 mm 24.00 3.00 mm
13 72.00 48.01 mm 24.00 3.00 mm
22 48.00 24.01 mm 48.00 mm 24.01 mm

Standard 24.00 9.00 mm 24.00 9.00 mm
5 74
Optional 18.00-mm VCS
Standard 15.50 3.00 mm 15.50 3.00 mm
12 31.00 15.51 mm 15.50 3.00 mm
13 46.50 31.51 mm 15.50 3.00 mm
22 31.00 15.51 mm 31.00 mm 15.51 mm

Standard 15.50 9.00 mm 15.50 9.00 mm
5 75
5.2.6 Light
To change the light data, use the Light Control data-editing screen shown in Section
5.2.5 Ctrl.
- Split view settings on the Light Control screen: The available setting items vary
depending on the value set in the Split Recognition fields displayed on the
Vision Control screen.
- Light pattern on the Light Control screen: The available setting items vary
depending on selection of the Light type and Sub type on the Vision Control
screen.
When Back Lights is selected from the Light Type combo box and
Standard is selected as the sub type
* When EBGA or LGA is

selected as the sub type, the
Red Side Light 1 and 2 check
boxes are not checked.
When Bottom Lights is selected from the Light Type combo box
5 76
When Side Lights is selected from the Light Type combo box, and Blue
side light equipped with a pop-up light is selected from the sub type combo
box
* When you do not select the light

equipped with a pop-up light as
the sub type on the Vision
Control screen, the Activate Air
Cylinder check box is not
checked.
- When you select Red side light as the sub type on the Vision Control
screen, the setting items Red Side Light 1 and 2 become available, and the
setting items Blue Side Light 1 and 2 become unavailable.
When you click the <OK> button, data is set. When you click the <Cancel>
button, data setting is canceled.
Detailed description of each item

Item Description
Split view Check box Check this check box to perform a specific division of image.
settings
Pattern Enter the number of a light pattern to which a specific pattern is linked.
name link
Index Displays the order the specific division is illuminated with the light.
You cannot change this order.
Light Activate Air Check this check box if you use a cylinder with turning it upward.
pattern Cylinder
Light check Check the light enabled by settings of the Light Type and sub type to use it.
boxes
Bottom Light Type: Half-Mirror (coaxial light), Bottom Light 1 and 2, Red
Side Light 1 and 2
Back Light Type: Front/Rear, Left/Right, Red Side Light 1 and 2
Side Light Type: Red Side Light 1 and 2, Blue Side Light 1 and 2
Control Enter the control level of the light enabled by settings of the Light Type and
level sub type.
Input range: 10 % to 200 %
OK Sets the entered data.
Cancel Cancels the entered data.
Note:
When a lead or ball is not displayed clearly, change the default value of the light.
5 77
(Relative component height when
QFPSOPCONNPLCC....ETC
air cylinder is moved down)
the()
(Relative component height

PBGAPBGA_ALL
when the air cylinder is moved
()
1
Blue side light 1
1
Red side light 1
2
Blue side light 2
Red side light 2

2
Red diffuser

VCS bottom light 1
VCS1
VCS bottom light 2

VCS2

Half mirror
UP
DOWN

Coaxial light

Air cylinder
Figure 5.2.6.1 Bottom and side light units
5 78

Head back light
Green diffuser

VCS back lights

VCS VCS
VCS back lights
left and
right right
left and
Left Right
VCS
VCS back lights front and rear
Side View
VCS back lights VCS back lights front and rear VCS back lights
VCS
left and right VCS VCS
left and right
Front

Left Right
VCS back lights

VCS
front and rear

Rear
Top View
Figure 5.2.6.2 Back light unit
5 79
5.3 Commands
Command list
The commands to be invoked from Vision data are shown below. Commands shown in a
hatched area indicate that they cannot be selected when the input focus is located in Vision
data.
Display
File (F) Edit (E) Data (C) Optimization (O) Machine operation Database (D) Help (H)
(V)
Create new (N) Ctrl+N PWB data (B) Component form Command (C)
Open (O) Ctrl+O Placement data (P) Component list How to use Help (H)
Overwrite&save (S) Ctrl+S Component data (C)
Pick data (I) Feeder layout Version information (A)
Save As (A) Vision data (V) Tool bar
File information (I) Data completion status (S)
Print (P) Station data (E)
Environment setting (C) Data coherence check (L)
End of program editing (X)
Register (B)
Call list (C)
Re-search (R)
Cut (T) Ctrl+X Optimization (O)
Copy (C) Ctrl+C
Paste (P) Ctrl+V Division placement data (P)
Insert line (I) Nozzle layout (N)
Double line (U) Number of components to be fed (S) Transport (T)
Jump (J) Ctrl+G Measurement (M)
Search (S) Ctrl+F Status display (D) Confirmation (C)
Search next item (N) F7 Management (A)
Cell copy (O) Ctrl+E
Cell paste Ctrl+R
Sort (R)
Change Component Name (H)
Matrix copy (M)
Vision copy (V)
5 80
CHAPTER 6 TEACHING
This chapter describes how to perform teaching operation.

There are two types of teaching; one is for coordinates and the other for recognition.
This section starts describing teaching operation from how to operate the HOD which is
basically used for these two types of teaching operations.
6.1 How to Use the HOD

The appearance of the HOD is shown in Figure 6-1 below:
Move keys
Device selection keys HMS HEAD CAMERA

VACUUM
ON/OFF
JUKI
Liquid crystal display
(LCD)
Function keys F1 F2 F3 F4
No. keys No.

-X+Y +Z+Y +X+Y
-X
- FAST +X
+ Emergency switch
-X-Y -Z-Y +X-Y
DEV. NAME DEV.NAME
(device name) keys
WINDOW PREVIOUS PAUSE
CANCEL NEXT ENTER
Figure 6-1 Appearance of the HOD
Use the DEV. NAME key to select a device other than the camera and HMS. To
select such a device, press either of two DEV. NAME keys (up or down direction) to
display the device name you want to select on the LCD.
Use the No. key to display (select) the device name and device number.
Use the ENTER key to validate your selection.
Use the move key to move the X- and Y-axes.
61
6.2 Functions
(1) Coordinates teaching

The device names which can be taught and the teaching items are shown in Table
6.1 below. Note that the device names which are options not installed and those
designated as Not to be used on the Machine Setup menu cannot be selected.
Table 6.1 Teaching device and teaching items
Teaching coordinates (): can be taught

Teaching device X/Y Mark recognition
Z coordinates coordinates
coordinates parameter
MNLA Head
FMLA Head
Bad mark sensor
OCC camera
OCC2 camera
HMS
The 1 POINT, 2 POINT, and 3 POINT device keys on the HOD become effective
when OCC camera is selected as the teaching devices. The 1 POINT key is the
default key when a device is selected.
When any other device key on the HOD is pressed while the machine is teaching
coordinates, the newly selected device moves to the coordinates defined by the
currently selected device, thus switching the device to be taught.
62
The detailed teaching items are shown in Table 6.2 below.
Table 6.2 Teaching items

Corrected by Corrected by
Mode during
Input data item Data origin Boc Feeder bank
teaching
alignment recognition
Machine Reference pin position XY coordinates origin
setup
Follower pin position XY coordinates origin
Shape clamp position XY coordinates origin
MTC shuttle pick position XY coordinates origin
Component discard position XY coordinates origin
Vacuum value without nozzle
Head waiting position XY coordinates origin
Production PWB Hole reference position Board reference position
program
PWB layout offset Board reference position
Circuit position reference Board reference position
Circuit position reference Board reference position
BOC mark position Board reference position or *1
circuit reference position
BOC mark recognition
parameter
Bad mark position Circuit reference position
PWB height
PWB thickness
Placement Placement position Board reference position or *2
data circuit reference position
IC mark position Board reference position or *2
Pick data Pick position XY XY coordinates origin or rear *3
origin
Pick position Z Z-axis origin (Top side of a
board)
Production Placement position XY Board reference position or *2
Pick position XY XY coordinates origin or rear *3
origin
Pick position Z Z-axis origin (Top side of a
board)
* 1 For single pattern boards, the board reference position is used as the origin.
For matrix and non-matrix multiple pattern boards, when PWB mark is used is
selected as the BOC type board reference position is used as the origin, and when
circuit mark is used is selected as the BOC type the circuit reference position is
used as the origin.
* 2 For single pattern boards, the board reference position is used as the origin.
For matrix and non-matrix multiple pattern boards, the circuit reference position is
used as the origin.
* 3 For pick position of the component feeding devices installed on the front of the
machine, XY coordinates origin is used as the origin. For those installed on the
rear of the machine, the rear origin is used as the origin.
63
If the feeder bank is never recognized (since the machine is zeroing, or
the bank moves down then up), it may be recognized automatically
before the machine moves to the pick position. Since the head moves
across the feeding device while the bank mark is being recognized, do
CAUTION not place your hand in the machine, nor move your face or head close
to the machine. Especially, take care when the feeder bank is
recognized not from the menu but while the machine is teaching or
tracking a pick position.
(2) Teaching recognition

The data obtainable by teaching recognition is shown below.
BOC mark shape, mark size, data required for projection data recognition, and
area window for balance detection
IC mark shape, mark size, data required for projection data recognition, and
area window for balance detection
Notes: 1) During recognition teaching, the device is set for a camera only, and it
cannot be changed.
2) When Zeroing has not been performed yet or the machine is in servo
free state, recognition teaching cannot be performed.
3) XY coordinates for the mark shall be entered beforehand.
64
6.3 Teaching Coordinates
6.3.1 Basic operating procedure
Coordinates teaching is basically done by the following procedure.
Move the cursor to the desired data position.
For X- and Y-axes, the coordinates of both axes can be taught, while Z-axis must
be individually taught.
Figure 6.3.1 Teaching coordinates (1)
Using the HOD device selection keys, select the device to be taught.
If an illegal device is selected, an alarm beeps, prompting the operator to reselect
the device.
If coordinates have previously been entered, the selected device moves to this
coordinates position.
If not, the device does not move.
CAUTION move your face or head close to the machine while operating the HOD.
65
If the head is selected and a different nozzle is installed other than that used in
teaching, the nozzle is replaced.
In this case, the following information is shown on the screen.
Selected device name

X/Y coordinates of the selected device
Z coordinate of the selected device
-axis value of the selected device
Vacuum value of the selected device
The name of the device you selected appears on the LCD of the HOD so that you
can make sure of which device is to be taught.
Figure 6.3.2 Teaching coordinates (2)
Using the axis drive keys on the HOD (XY, Z and ), move the selected device.
As the device is moved, the numerals (coordinate values, etc.) shown on the
screen change.
An alarm beeps when the device reaches its motion limit, warning that the device
cannot be moved further.
The FAST key on the HOD may be used to change the motion speed of the X-
and Y-axes.
66
When the device reaches the desired position, press the ENTER key on the HOD
to store the taught coordinates data into the machine memory.
In teaching during production, the teaching parameters must be first set by the
operator before pressing the ENTER key.
This completes the coordinates teaching procedure.

The down arrow key of the DEV. NAME keys or the NEXT key of the HOD may
be used to move to the next teaching parameter after you set one parameter. In
the same way, you can go back to the previous parameter by pressing the up
arrow key of the DEV. NAME keys or the PREVIOUS key of the HOD.
Teaching is terminated if the CANCEL key of the HOD is pressed during teaching.
If the CANCEL key is pressed during production, the device returns to the
coordinates at which the device was located before teaching. The device does
not move if production is not in progress when the key is pressed.
If the servo power supply is turned off during teaching (because you
pressed the Emergency Stop button or the area sensor was activated), the
buzzer sounds and a KE-2000 series station finishes teaching operation.
67
6.3.2 Teaching X/Y-axis
The X and Y axes (coordinates of the X- and Y- axes) can be taught by using each
nozzle of the head, the bad mark sensor, or the camera. The operator can select the
device according to his/her need.
Note, however, that some device may not be selected depending on the teaching
conditions.
The following explains the teaching procedure used for each of the three different
methods.
(1) Teaching by the nozzle of each head or bad marks

For teaching by the head, select the device which is to be taught with the HOD
first.
(2) Teaching by the camera

For teaching by the camera, select the camera as the device which is to be
taught with the HOD first.
It is also necessary for the teaching by the camera to select the number of the
input points (select with 1, 2, or 3 POINT key). Determine the position for the
number of times corresponding to the number of the teaching points, and enter
them. For teaching of 2 POINTS and 3 POINTS, move the device and press the
ENTER key on the HOD the same times as the number of input points to enter
the data (for 2 POINTs, move the device, press the ENTER key, move the device,
then press the ENTER key again)
For teaching by the camera, obtain the coordinates at the center (cross point) of
the crosshair cursor for each point, or move along each edge of the box window
and obtain its center as the coordinates.
Normally, use the crosshair cursor for point-by-point teaching, and use the axis
drive key for X- and Y-axes to move the crosshair cursor.
To obtain the coordinates using the box window, press the WINDOW key on the
HOD. The cursor on the screen then changes from the crosshair to window.
Normally, the crosshair Window cursor

cursor appears
WINDOW
key
68
Move around the top, left, bottom, and right of the window frame using the axis
drive key for X- and Y-axes.
Move to the top and left first, and press the ENTER key.
Next, move to the bottom and right, and press the ENTER key.
When the ENTER key is pressed after moving to the bottom and right, the
camera moves so that the center of the window box is placed at the center of the
previous crosshair cursor. The window box is then changed to the crosshair
cursor.
Press the ENTER key here, to obtain the coordinates.
For 2- or 3-point teaching, perform as follows:
CAUTION move your face or head close to the machine while you are operating
the HOD.
69
2-point teaching
A PWB pad
C B
Enter points A and B. The coordinates of point C, which is the center between
points A and B, is then computed and taught.
3-point teaching
C A
D1
D
Enter points A, B, and C. The coordinates of point D is then computed and

taught.
(Coordinate X of the point D is obtained as the center point between points A or B
and C; coordinate Y of the point D is obtained as the center point between points
A and B.)
Note that teaching of three points is effective only when the placement angle of a
component is 0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees.
6 10
6.3.3 Teaching Z-axis
For Z-axis teaching, the operator must first select the device with which Z-axis is to be
taught as described in the procedure given in 6.3.1 Basic operating procedure.
Only the head and HMS can be selected as the device to teach the Z axis. An error
results with an alarm beep if any other device is selected, and the operator must start
the operation from the device selection.
This teaching is for height teaching. Move down slowly the nozzle tip until it touches
the object for measurement, and measure the height. Never push the nozzle into
the object.
To perform teaching with using the HMS, use the camera to teach the XY axes.
Move the camera to the measurement point, then press the HMS key of the device.
The HMS starts teaching operation and data entry is allowed with your pressing the
ENTER key.
Note: When you use the HMS to perform teaching, laser beam is reflected at
random depending on the top side (side to be measured) surface condition
of a component to be measured (such as gloss and roughness), then the
component may not be measured. In this case, move the laser beam over
the tape carrier as shown in the figure below, then teach the Z axis by using
that spot as a substitute of the measured point.
Component
Measured point
Tape carrier
When you use the HMS, avoid the direct of indirect (reflected with a
CAUTION mirror or the like) laser beam getting into your eyes.
6 11
6.4 Teaching a Mark
6.4.1 Teaching of a board mark
The following describes the basic operating procedure for teaching the board mark.
Move the cursor to the mark of the desired data position.

To start teaching recognition, X- and Y-coordinates of the mark shall be entered
beforehand.
Figure 6.4.1 PWB mark teaching (1)
6 12
Press the CAMERA key of the HOD, then specify the L and R heads.
The following dialog box appears on the screen.
Click the <Continue> button to start teaching the mark.

The camera moves to the X and Y coordinates of a mark, then the pattern of the
selected mark (to be memorized) appears on the monitor screen. If there is no
pattern which you want to teach displayed on the monitor screen, check to see if
the entered coordinates are correct.
If you press a key other than the CAMERA key, an error beep sounds and you
cannot perform a teaching operation for recognition.
CAUTION move your face or head close to the machine while you are operating
the HOD.
6 13
Perform the scale frame (mark data) teaching.
Using the top, bottom, left, and right arrow keys, adjust the scale frame in the
order: top, left, bottom and right, and enter the data (pressing the FAST key can
change the moving speed of the scale frame).
The mark is automatically recognized, then the data necessary for correction is
obtained.
The camera picture and a rectangle frame appear.
Set the top and left scale frames first. Adjust them so
that they match with the top and left of the mark.
When adjustment is complete, press the ENTER key.
In the same manner as above, set the bottom and right

scale frames.
When adjustment is complete, press the ENTER key.
The noise cut level around the mark is automatically obtained and displayed on the
monitor.
Using the and keys (up and down arrow keys for moving the XY axes) on the
HOD, adjust the level so that the mark can be viewed clearly and the noise around
the mark is decreased as much as possible.
After completing the adjustment, press the ENTER key.
6 14
[*]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] PR
If, for some reason, the result has an error, using the and keys (up and
down arrow keys for moving the XY axes) on the HOD, select the correct mark.
When selecting the correct mark, press the ENTER key.
Note: When the data on the mark is the same but you want to teach again the
detection frame only, press the NEXT key on the HOD. You can skip Step
above.
However, if the mark recognition is made newly, the NEXT key has no
effect.
6 15
Next, perform the detection frame teaching.
After completing Step 3 above, the window whose size is 1.5 times of the mark
size is automatically displayed at the center of the screen (default window).
To change the detection window, perform the same procedure as Step 3 above.
Set the detection frame in the same

manner as the scale frame is set.
After completing the adjustment, press

the ENTER key.
Note: Pressing the PREVIOUS key on the HOD here brings the operation back to
teaching of the scale frame (Step ).
When teaching has been completed, an message asking you whether or not to
register the taught mark onto the mark database appears for confirmation.
Figure 6.4.2 PWB mark teaching (2)
6 16
Note: The mark size is indicated with the number of pixels.
To register the taught data onto the mark database newly, enter the name for
registering the data, then click the Add button.
To replace the taught data which was already registered with the newly taught data,
enter the new name, then move the cursor to the data line to be replaced, which is
displayed in the Registration area, then click the Replacement button.
If you do not want to register the taught data onto the mark database, click the
<Cancel> button.
No. Button to be selected Description

1 Add Enters the registration name, registers the taught data onto the
mark database, then quits teaching operation.
2 Replacement Replaces the data displayed and selected on the cursor line.
3 Cancel Quits the teaching operation without registering the taught data
onto the database.
Here, all operations of recognition teaching have been completed.

After completing recognition teaching, an asterisk (*) appears next to the mark data,
indicating that the teaching of that item is completed. Perform the teaching for all the
marks to be used.
If the CANCEL key on the HOD is pressed during teaching, the teaching is
terminated at that moment. (The data entered before this operation will become
invalid.)
When the CANCEL key is pressed, the device does not move.
Note: The machine detects a white part as the mark. Whether the mark is
recognized as white or black with respect to the board color depends on the
contrast between the mark and the board, and on the light level around the
cameras field of view. Normally, the mark is recognized as white.
If, however, there are lands, patterns, or silk printings around the field of
view of the camera, the mark may be recognized as black with respect to
the board color. In this case, correction cannot be made normally.
Reverse the black and white by pressing the CAMERA key on the HOD so
that the mark appears as white. If a mark is recognized as black against
the board, press the CAMERA key to reverse the black and white so that
the mark can be recognized as white.
Reverse display of the mark by the CAMERA key is possible only when you
are entering the scale frame.
Note: If you use the user defined template, the taught data registration window
does not appear on the screen.
6 17
6.4.2 Teaching of the User Defined Template
The basic operation for teaching the template is explained as follows:
Move the cursor to the mark position whose data is to be taught.

Note that the X and Y coordinates of the mark must be entered before teaching
the recognition mark.
Figure 6.4.3 Teaching the user defined template
Press the CAMERA key of the HOD to start teaching.

The camera moves to the X and Y coordinates of the mark, then the pattern to be
taught (to be stored) appears on the monitor display. If such a pattern does not
appear, check to see if the entered coordinates are correct.
If any key other than the CAMERA key is pressed, the error sound beeps, and
the mark recognition cannot be taught.
6 18
3. Teach the scale frame (template setting frame).
Use the up, down, left and right arrow keys to adjust and enter the scale frame
(FAST key changes the moving speed of the scale frame) in the order: upper
side, left side, bottom side, then right side.
The mark is automatically recognized, then the data necessary for correction is
obtained.
The image shot from the camera and the rectangle frames
are displayed.
Pad printing part
First, set the upper side and the left side of the scale
frame.
Set the upper side and left side to be recognized (by
moving the sides indicated with the arrow marks).
Press the ENTER key.
Set Left-Top Point appears at the bottom line of the

screen.
**********
In the same manner, set the bottom side and the right side
of the scale frame.
After adjustments, press the ENTER key.
Set Right-Bottom Point appears at the bottom line of the

screen.
**********
Note: To teach the scale frame only again without changing the information on
the mark, press the NEXT key of the HOD. Step 3 operation can be
skipped. However, the NEXT key pressing becomes invalid if the mark is
newly recognized.
The noise cut level around the mark is obtained, then displayed on the
monitor automatically.
Adjust the noise level so that the mark can be seen clearly and the noise
level can be decreased as much as possible with the up and down arrow
keys of the HOD (up/down arrow keys for moving X- and Y- axes).
6 19
Next, select PR as the mark judge setting.
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
Move the * mark over the position of PR
[ ]
with the up and down arrow keys of the
[ ]
[ ] HOD (up and down arrow keys for
[ ] moving the XY axes), then press the
[ ]
ENTER key.
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] Select Mark by Up or Down Key

[ ]
[ ]
appears on the bottom of the screen
[ *]
**********
Note: Since the template size does not exceed the size 256 x 256 pixels,
approximately quarter of the screen size selection of the template whose
size is too large displays an error, then the machine returns to Step 3.
Teach the center of the template screen.
The scale frame and the cross-hair cursor are

Use the HOD to move the cross-hair cursor to decide
the center of the template (this position is matched with
the mark coordinates of the PWB data).
TempMatch-Set Center appears at the bottom of the

screen.
**********
6 20
Teach the detection frame.
After Step 4 is performed, automatically the window whose size is 1.5 times of
that of the frame set in Step 3 appears at the position where the center of this
window is matched with the center of the screen itself (default window). To
change the size of the detection window, follow the instruction described under
Step 3.
If you do not have to change the detection frame, press the ENTER key only.
Set the detection frame in the same manner as the

scale frame.
The frame with the dotted line indicates the
template setting frame, and does not appear on
the screen actually.
Set Left-Top Point appears on the bottom of the
screen.
**********
Set Right-Bottom Point appears at the bottom of

the screen.
**********
Note: When the PREVIOUS key of the HOD is pressed here, you can return to
the operation described under Step 3 (teaching of the scale frame).
After the mark recognition is taught completely, the T mark is displayed next to
the mark data, indicating that the mark is already taught. Perform the teaching
operation for all marks to be used. When the CANCEL key of the HOD is
pressed during teaching, the teaching operation is terminated in a half way.
(Data entered before you pressed this key becomes invalid).
When the CANCEL key is pressed, the device does not move.
Notes on setting the template

1) Check to see if there is no pattern similar with the template set inside the
detection frame.
2) Specify 0.5 to 3 mm as the pattern size in the same manner as the standard
mark.
3) Use the designed values (CAD data) as the coordinate value. With the user
defined template data, the center position of the pattern cannot be calculated
correctly. Since the mark is taught with moving the cross-hair cursor, the user
defined position becomes the center position (the normal mark generates no
error because the calculated center position becomes the center position of the
pattern).
6 21
4) The vision copy of the user defined template cannot be made.
6 22
5) To store the production program which uses the user defined template on the
floppy disk, check to see if there is enough space for it. If there is not sufficient
space on the disk, a production program may not be stored.
6) Since it takes a long time for the production program which uses the user defined
template to be read from or store on the floppy disk, it is recommended that the
production program is not read nor stored from/onto the floppy disk directly.
7) To copy the production program which is stored on the hard disk, select the [File
Management (Explorer)] command on the [File] menu invoked from the main
menu to copy it onto a floppy disk.
Patterns which can be registered as the user defined template

Patterns which can be registered as the user defined template
Wiring pattern
Pad and land pattern where no screen is printed (no solder paste is put)
PWB marks other than JUKI standard marks (whole or part)
Notes on registration as the user defined template

Through hole and pier hole
Since the pattern generation process is different from the holing process, the
same positioning cannot be always achieved. (The hole position is
undefined for a pattern.)
To register the template based on the through hole or pier hole, include the
wiring pattern around the hole.
Pattern which cannot be registered as the user defined template

Silk (character) pattern
Since the pattern and pad generation process is totally different from the silk
printing process, the placement position cannot be determined based on the
silk print.
Pad and land pattern printed on the silk screen
The solder paste on the screen is in the form of grains, so lighting cannot be
stable depending on the environment or condition. The template matching
is highly appropriate for change of lighting conditions, but not for the change
of polarity (positive and negative).
The similar pattern is located on the same recognition screen
The template whose difference between the brightness and the darkness is
little.
6 23
Pattern whose scale (size) and/or angle changes
Especially if a part of the pattern is specified as the user defined template,
change of the scale affects the recognition accuracy. Therefore, specify
the entire pattern as the user defined template if possible.
The farther the gravity center of the template (as described above) is from
the that of the template, the more the angle change affects the recognition
operation: the recognition position is shifted. Set the user defined
template so that the gravity center of the template matches with the center of
the template as correctly as possible.
Note: The machine detects a white part as a mark. Whether the mark is
recognized as white or black with respect to the board color depends on the
contrast between the mark and the board, and on the light level for the
cameras field of view. Normally, the mark is recognized as white. If,
however, there are lands, patterns, or silk printings around the field of view
of camera, the mark may be recognized as black with respect to the board
color. In this case, normal correction is impossible. Reverse the black
and white by pressing the CAMERA key on the HOD so that the mark
appears as white. If a mark is recognized as black against the board,
press the CAMERA key to reverse the black and white so that the mark can
be recognized as white.
Reverse display of the mark by the CAMERA key is possible only when you
are entering the scale frame.
6 24
CHAPTER 7 PRODUCTION PROCEDURES
7.1 Preparations
7.1.1 Component feeders

Make sure that all component feeders (the tape feeders and the stick feeders,) are
mounted in place correctly.
7.1.2 ATC
Check to see if the number of each nozzle mounted on the ATC is equal to the ATC
number and nozzle number selected in the ATC nozzle assignment item of the
Machine Setup menu.
<Mounting and dismounting nozzles on the ATC>

Procedure
1. Turn off the power of the machine. Set the valve to OFF.
2. Open the slide plate .
3. With aligning the flat portion of the nozzle with the long hole of the ATC
bracket , mount the nozzle onto the ATC.
Slide plate
Nozzle
ATC bracket
When the slide plate 2 is opened Flat portions
Figure 7.1.2.1
Notes: Return the nozzles where they were. When a nozzle is replaced, perform
the laser height adjustment for nozzle assignment of the setup data
4. Nozzles are also dismounted in this state.

5. Do not attach the nozzle directly to the head. (The face of the laser becomes
dirty and this can cause errors.)
Before starting to work, turn off the power of the machine to avoid a risk
WARNING
of injury caused by unpredictable activation of the machine.
71

1
2
13 3
14 4
15 5
16 6
17 7
18 8
9
A 10
11
B 12
ATC bracket ATC OPEN sensor

Slide plate ATC CLOSE sensor
Nozzle outer support ATC numbers (1 to 18, A to C)
Air cylinder Nozzle
Speed controllers
Figure 7.1.2.2
72
7.1.3 Preparation of PWB transport section
7.1.3.1 Entire view of PWB transport section
Figure 7.1.3.1
IN sensor Pusher X (Shape reference option)

OUT sensor Centering pin
STOP sensor BU table
C-OUT sensor Motor control
BU-UP sensor BU pin
BU-DOWN sensor Pusher Y (Shape reference option)
PWB transport motor Depressure valve (Edge reference option)
Drive shaft Wait sensor
Stopper
73
7.1.3.2 Basic adjustment
(1) Adjustment of the distance between the transfer rails (Figure 7.1.3.1)
1) Mount the hand knob 35 to the handle shaft and turn the handle to set the
distance between the rails to the width of a PC board to be transferred +1
mm.
2) Move the PC board to be produced fully from one end of the rails to the other
end and make sure that the PC board can move smoothly on the rails.
3) When completing the adjustment, remove the handle knob and keep it on the
storage tray on the side of the machine.
WARNING
(2) Adjustment of the centering pin (Omitted when the board outline is used for
reference) (Figure 7.1.3.2, Figure 7.1.3.3)
1) Turn off the power, and also turn off the air valve.
2) Loosen the M4 hexagon socket head bolts 37 used to fix the guide block
36 1 with the ball driver (supplied tool).
3) Move the stopper 24 by hand, and push the produced board (avoid the
center of the board and any cutouts of the board to contact the stopper)
against the stopper (as far as it goes).
4) Slide the guide block 36 in the X direction, and fit the centering pins 27
with the reference holes of the board. Allow a space of 0.5 mm between the
stopper 24 and the board. If the space is too small, the board may not be
set with ease.
5) While holding the guide block pushed to the guide rail 38 , tighten the M4
hexagon socket head bolts 37 to lock the guide block.
Notes: Adjustment procedures 1) through 5) under (2) above can also be

adjusted manually by turning on the power and the air valve, and
using the independent control in the conveyor system of the manual
control and the automatic control.
When the centering pin is moved, be sure to reenter the position of
the reference pin for the machine setup. If it is not reentered, the
reference position of the data is made differently.
There is no need of adjustment for the board of same specifications.
Adjustment items 1) through 5) under item (2) above can be
performed by turning on the machine and using independent control
of transportation system, manual control or automatic control.
(See Chapter 9 " MANUAL CONTROL ".)
WARNING
74
38
27
36
38
Pressing
direction 0.5mm
24
Board
Figure 7.1.3.2 Figure 7.1.3.3
(3) Placement of backup pins

1) Place the backup pins (8 medium pins, 12 large pins and 16 extra large
pins are supplied as the standard accessories.) on the backup table
28 according to the board to be produced.
2) Avoid placing the pins where the components are located on the back of the
board.
Note: If backup pins are located under the components which requires accurate
placement, such as QFP, higher accuracy can be achieved.
WARNING
75
(4) Adjustment of the centering pin (Omitted for the use of pin reference)
(Figures 7.1.3.4, 7.1.3.5, 7.1.3.6)
1) Turn off the power, and also turn off the air valve.
2) Move the stopper 24 by hand, and push the production board (avoid the
center of the board and any cutouts of the board to contact the stopper)
against the stopper (as far as it goes).
3) Slide the guide block 36 in the X direction and manually fit the pusher A
44 , 45 with the edge of the board. There shall be no space between the
stopper 24 and the board.
Contact
, 24
Board
Figure 7.1.3.4
44 , 45
37
36 38
Push in this direction.
Figure 7.1.3.5
4) While holding the guide block pushed to the supporting bar 38 , tighten the M4
hexagon socket head bolts 37 to lock the guide block.
76
5) The centering pin 27 is not used. Therefore, push down the stopper lever
B and rotate it with hooking it over the dumper plate C so that the centering pin
27 is pushed down to be locked.
27
B
C
Figure 7.1.3.6
Notes: Adjustment procedures 1) through 5) under (4) above can also be

adjusted manually by turning on the power and the air valve, and
using the independent control in the conveyor system of the manual
control and the automatic control.
When the stopper is moved, be sure to reenter the position of the
edge reference for the machine setup. If it is not reentered, the
reference position of the data is made differently.
There is no need of adjustment for the board of same specifications.
WARNING
(5) Entering the position of the centering pin (Skip this step when the board outline is
used for reference) (Figure 7.1.3.6)
1) Turn on the power of the machine, and also turn on the air valve.
Perform zeroing (origin setting).
2) Lift up the BU plate displaying the mechanical setup pop-up menu on the
"Machine setup" menu.
3) Select the [Reference pin position] on the [Setting Group] menu to select the
centering pin position.
4) Press the CAMERA key of the HOD. The OCC camera moves over the
centering pin 27 .
5) While observing the CRT screen, perform teaching for the center of the
centering pin 27 .
(Use the WINDOW key or the 2 POINT key.)
6) Next, perform teaching for the follower pin (see Section 8.2.2.3 of Chapter 8
"MACHINE SETUP").
77
WARNING move your face or head close to the machine during operation of the
HOD.
(6) Entering positions for the use of Board outline reference (Skip this step for the use
of pin reference) (Figure 7.1.3.7)
1) Turn off the machine, and also turn off the air valve.
2) Turn on the stopper 24 with displaying the mechanical setup pop-up menu
on the "Machine setup" menu.
3) Select [Shape clamp position] on the [Setting Group] menu.
4) Set a board on the board transfer rails, then push it against the stopper 24
lightly.
5) Align the cursor with the X window, then press the CAMERA key of the HOD.
The OCC camera moves to the current outline reference position.
6) While observing the CRT screen, align the crosshair cursor with the side of
the board. Then press the Enter key. Only the value of the X coordinate is
input. Note that a board should contact with the PWB guide closely.
7) Align the cursor with the Y window, then press the CAMERA key of the HOD.
The OCC camera returns to the outline reference position.
8) While observing the CRT screen, align the crosshair cursor with the side of
the PWB guide then press the Enter key. Only the value of the Y coordinate
is input.
WARNING
move your face or head close to the machine.
Board 24 Stopper
PWB guide
Edge reference position
Figure 7.1.3.7
78
7.1.3.3 Adjustments of Other Parts
(1) Odd shape board
The board sensor may missdetect the board if the board is an odd shape board
such as the board with cutouts. Therefore, enter the PWB transport sensor
delay time according to the size of the cutouts.
For the odd shape board, the positions of the stopper and board sensor can be
changed.
a. PWB transport sensor delay
1) Select "PWB conveyor" from "Set up group" of the machine setup.
(See Chapter 7 " MACHINE SETUP ".)
2) According to the length of the cutouts, enter the appropriate delay from
the keyboard. As a standard setting, set 60 ms for a cutouts of 30 mm
long.
A: Cutouts length
A:
Figure 7.1.3.8
3) If each PWB sensor does not detect the cutouts part of the board, delay
input is not necessary.
b. Stopper (Figure 7.1.3.1, Figure 7.1.3.9)
The stopper 24 can be moved in Y (plus, back) direction.
Move the stopper for the board which has a cutouts at its front edge.
1) Turn off the power of the machine, and also turn off the air valve.
2) Loosen the M4 hexagonal socket head bolts 40 used to fix the stopper
assembly 39 , and move the stopper assembly 39 along the long hole of
the rail support 41 .
3) Tighten the M4 hexagonal socket head bolts 40 at an appropriate
position, and fix the stopper assembly 39 . In this case, fix the stopper
assembly 39 while lightly pushing it in the direction of the arrow.
79
40 41
Pushing
39
Figure 7.1.3.9
4) The STOP sensor and the C-OUT sensor are fixed with the
stopper assembly, and they move together with the stopper.
5) When the stopper assembly 39 has been moved, re-enter the position by
referring to "7.1.3.2- (6) Entering positions for the use of Board outline
reference".
WARNING
c. Board sensor (Figure 7.1.3.10)

The sensing positions of the IN sensor and the OUT sensor can be
changed by changing the fixed position of the sensor bracket 42 .
1) Turn off the power of the machine.
2) Loosen also the M3 hexagonal bolt 43 used to fix the sensor bracket B 42 , and
move it backward and forward or to the left and right along the long hole.
3) After adjustment is complete, tighten the screws.
4) Check that setting to the board is performed in transportation system of manual
control or that of program edit.
42
43
Figure 7.1.3.10
WARNING
7 10
(2) Compensation
See Section 7.5 "Trial Run" to test-place components on one of the production
PWB and check for the deviations between elements and pads. When detecting
any deviation, compensate its X and Y coordinates in "Placement offset" in
Production mode.
Pad
Element
Element
Pad
Figure 7.1.3.11
(3) Notes on board transport

Note the following for board transport.
The three-motor conveyor uses the three buffers, so each operation (PWB
automatic transport, manual transport, and idle transport) is controlled according
these buffers.
Set PWBs above the IN sensor (Input buffer Entrance sensor), Stop sensor
(Centering buffer stop sensor) and OUT sensor (Output buffer Exit sensor)
respectively.
If a PWB is set between two sensors, various error occurs during board
transportation.
If a PWB is set above the C.OUT sensor, an error occurs also.
7 11
Transport sensor delay time (See Section 8.2.2.8 "PWB conveyor" of Chapter
8 "MACHINE SETUP".)
STOP C.OUT
W2
IN
W1 W3
Cutouts length: W2 > W1 > W3
Set to W2 (Set to the longest one)

Example: Enter 10 mm or 20 mm.
Notes: Do not set the delay of board transport sensor too long.
Especially be sure to set the value so that the sum of the PWB size (X
direction) and the delay setting should not exceed the maximum board
size (330 for the standard size, and 410 for the large size).
When placing a board above the IN sensor, check that the red LED of the
sensor is lit.
When the machine stops operation because of an error of BOC mark
recognition, etc., recover it after stopping the machine on the previous stage
to enter it to the pause state.
<When the machine is connected to another machine>
Transfer direction
IN CENTER OUT IN CENTER OUT
#1 NG #2
If a board is located above the If a board is set above the

OUT sensor of the machine #1 WAIT sensor, the board, which
to be sent to the machine #2, is on the previous stage of the
do not set a board above the IN machine #1, is set above the IN
sensor of the machine #2 buffer sensor after the board is
before production starts. set above the Centering buffer
from the WAIT sensor.
To produce boards with the connected machines, do not place a board in the
CENTER buffer nor OUT buffer.
(If a board is placed, it is fed to the next machine as the produced board.)
7 12
If you press the Stop switch while the centering buffer is transferring a board, the
boards located in each buffer stop at the current position. (The dialog box
appears which asks whether to stop the board transfer operation.)
Select the "OK" button to stop the board transfer operation. (The CANCEL
button continues the transfer operation.)
On board transport specifications of a KE-2020L and KE-2020E
1. Board transport in Production mode

1) For a board whose width (X direction) is 50 mm to 330 mm, the system
functions in the same manner as the standard specifications of machine
does.
2) For a board whose width (X direction) is 331 mm or wider, the speed of the
center motor automatically decelerates to 300 mm/s, and the timing for
transferring a board onto the center buffer is: a board on the center buffer
is supplied when the stop sensor is turned off.
2. Board transport in Manual mode or Edit mode
See 2) above.
7 13
7.2 Production
While the <ONLINE> indicator on the operator panel is off, the machine is in the
offline status and works as a standalone machine completely.
Contrarily when the <ONLINE> switch is pressed and the <ONLINE> indicator lights,
the machine is connected online to the HLC and functions under control of the HLC.
In Online mode, the producing conditions of the machine are all determined by the
HLC. (See the operation manual for details of the HLC.)
This section explains production in the Offline mode.
(1) Production main menu

Main menu Pull-down menu Sub menu Description
1 File See Section 4.2 "File".
2 View See Section 4.11 "Display".
3 Production 1 PWB Displays the PWB production conditions dialog box
conditions Production which allows you to set the conditions for PWB
production.
2 Trial Run Displays the Trial Run conditions dialog box which
allows you to set the conditions for trial run operation.
3 Dry Run Displays the Dry Run conditions dialog box which
allows you to set the conditions for dry run operation.
4 Window 1 Production Displays the PWB Production screen which indicates
Condition the settings done on the PWB Production conditions
Screen dialog box or Operation option dialog box.
2 Production Displays the screen which appears at start of
status production and indicates data such as step No. used
during production.
3 Management 1 Total Displays accumulated data unique to a production
Info. program.
2 Left Front Displays accumulated data such as number of pick-up
operations already done per a pick-up position on the
left front side.
3 Left Rear Displays accumulated data per a pick-up position on
the left rear side.
4 Right Front Displays accumulated data per a pick-up position on
the right front side. (available with a KE-2030 only)
5 Right Rear Displays accumulated data per a pick-up position on
the right rear side. (available with a KE-2030 only)
6 Holder Displays accumulated data per a level of a tray holder.
7 MTC Displays accumulated data per a level of an MTC.
8 MTS Displays accumulated data per a level of an MTS.
9 Clear Clears all accumulated production management
information.
4 Production info Displays the screen indicates data such as all place
rate used during production.
5 Tool 1 Parts no. setup Displays the "Parts no. setup" dialog box which allows
you to set the number of components in Pick data.
2 Operation Displays the Operation option dialog box which allows
option you to make settings of operations to be done during
production.
3 Retry list 1 Unplaced list Displays the Error Logging (Unplaced list) dialog box.
2 Supplier Displays the Error Logging (Supplier information) dialog
information box.
4 Check 1 Verify Current Performs a single verify check.
check
2 Verify All check Performs a continuous verify check.
3 SOT Current Performs a single SOT check.
check
4 SOTAll check Performs a continuous SOT check.
5 Laser check Checks the laser height.
5 Edit Data Changes Component data partially.
6 ATC control Displays the AWC control dialog box on the screen.
7 14
(2) Operation flow before the start of production
START
Select the producing conditions.
Specify the execution mode.
Trial run Blank run

Execution mode?
Board production
Setting of
Setting of test-run conditions actual producing conditions Setting of blank-run conditions
Setting of the number Setting of the number

of components to be placed of components to be placed Blank run
Trial run Board production
N
End?
End
END
Figure 7.2.1 Production flow
(3) Production mode

There are three types of production modes.
No. Production mode Description
1 Board production mode Determines the number of PWBs on which components are placed, and
actually places components on the PWB.
2 Trial run mode Test-places a preset number of components on a PWB, check the status of
placement of components on the PWB. In case the placement is found not
satisfactory by the camera tracking function, teaching can be performed.
3 Blank run mode Test-runs the machine without using component. This mode is used to
check the pickup and placing operations of the machine.
Each of the above operations can have its operating conditions (production
condition, test-run condition, or blank-run condition).
7 15
(4) Execution modes
Each production mode has two kinds of execution modes.
No. Execution mode Description
1 Continuous Keep on placing components on PWBs until the specified production ends or the
production is terminated by pressing the <STOP> switch in Pause mode.
2 Step Pauses production at the end of every production step.
The pause positions are as follows:
1) After reaching the pickup position
2) After reaching the placing position
3) After reaching the bad-mark position
4) After reaching the fiducial position
5) After reaching the component discarding position
6) After the X- or Y-axis moves (except the cases above)
To restart the production, press the <START> switch.
Even in Continuous mode, when you press the <STOP> switch once, the machine
pauses temporarily.
(5) At start of production, values specified on the Production condition dialog box and
those specified on the Operation option dialog box are displayed.
Figure 7.2.2 shows the screen displayed at start of production.
Figure 7.2.2 Production conditions screen (displayed before production starts)
7 16
7.2.1 PWB production
When you select the [Production conditions] command from the menu bar, then the
[PWB production] command, the PWB production conditions dialog box appears on
the screen as shown in Figure 7.2.1.1.
Figure 7.2.1.1 At start of production (PWB production conditions dialog box)
7.2.1.1 Production conditions

(1) Setting items
No. Item Description
1 Setting items selection Switches the dialog box to be displayed among the PWB production conditions
dialog box, Trial run conditions dialog box, and Blank run conditions dialog
box.
2 Prod. PWB Set the number of boards to be produced.
3 Sequence Select either Input order or Opt. (Optimization) order as the placement
sequence.
4 Exec. mode Select either "Continuous" or "Step" execution mode.
5 Step No. Specify a range of placement data with the placement start line and the
placement end line.
Specify the data in the order of "Input order".
When the item "Sequence" is set to "Opt. order", you cannot enter any data
here.
6 Placement ofs. Specify total offsets for all placement positions. This adds the set offset to the
placement data for actual placement.
7 Starting pos. This item is available only for the board fed initially after start of production.
Specify the circuit and placement number where the first placement is
performed. If, for any reason, board production on the machine is put in a halt,
this setting continues the production.
This is effective to place the remaining components on the board to which
placement was put in a halt.
* For the item of "Ref. pin Adjust", the status set on the Operation Options menu is displayed only. It cannot be
changed here.
7 17
(2) Operation
Setting items selection
Select a dialog box to be displayed among the PWB production conditions
dialog box, Trial run dialog box, and Blank run dialog box.
Prod. PWB
Enter the number of PWBs on which components are to be placed in the
"Plan" field.
The number of boards already processed displayed in the "Results" field is
reset to 0 when the Production screen is displayed.
Normally, the preset number of PC boards for "Plan" and "Results" are set in
their initial statuses. When item "Accumulated the number of boards
produced" of "Production" radio button on the Operation Options menu has
been selected, the number of "Plan" and that of "Results" are those of the
previous production. If, in this status, production is started, counting of the
board starts from the previous result number and the production continues
until the number of produced boards reaches the number set as "Results". If
a new number of boards is set for the "Plan", and the number in the "Results"
field is cleared to zero, the board production can be started newly.
Sequence
Select either "Input order" or "Opt. order" as the placement sequence and
click the radio button for it. For the data with which optimization has not been
performed by program editing, you cannot select "Opt. order".
Normally, "Input order" is selected as the default setting. However, when the
created production program initially appears on the Production window after
the Optimization utility is executed, "Opt. order" is selected as the default
setting.
Exec. mode
Select either "Continuous" or "Step" execution mode and click the radio
button for it.
Step No.
Enter the placement start line and the placement end line in the "Start" and
"Stop" fields to set a range of placement. The "Placed" field displays the
number of components to be placed. These fields display initial values.
When the "Opt. order" is selected as the Sequence, you cannot set this item.
Placement Ofs. (Offset)
In case a certain production lot has a specific offset (in printing process or in
reference holing process), enter the X and Y offsets in this field. The
position of placement that has been entered can be offset. You can enter the
offset for the left and right stations respectively with its own combo box.
7 18
Starting pos. (Position)
This setting is effective for the board which put in production halt after some
components are already placed.
Or, if necessary, a new number can be entered to start newly the production
at a specific sequence. This setting is effective, however, only for the first
board if the "Prod. PWB" is set to two or more.
For the "Ckt. No" field, the number of circuits of the production board is
displayed.
For a single pattern board, "1" is displayed at the "Ckt. No" field, and any
circuit number other than 1 cannot be set in the "Circuit" field.
7.2.1.2 Setting the number of components

After setting components to the component feeder unit specified in Pick data (Tape
feeder, Stick feeder, Bulk feeder), set the number of the components to be supplied to
the main body.
When the number of remaining components becomes below a certain level, it is
possible to flash the yellow signal light for warning. This can be done by setting the
number of components.
If a pick up retry over error occurs at a feeder, the feeder is regarded as faulty, and is
skipped over to continue production. To continue the production after adjusting the
machine for correct pick up of the components, this error status must be reset. The
reset operation can also be performed by setting the number of components.
(1) Setting items

Items being displayed when called
1 Sply (Supply) Shows the component supplied position. (L: front, R: rear, H:holder)
2 L Shows the lane for a stick feeder.
3 Pkg. (Package) Shows the package of components. (Tape, stick, bulk, etc.)
4 Component name Shows the name of components.
7 19
Items to be set
1 Initial Set the number of components supplied as packed and before they are used. The
number of remained components displayed in the "Remain" field also changes when the
initial setting is changed or a new value is entered.
When "0" is set for a feeder component
The subtraction of the remained number is not performed, and the machine continues
placing components on a board until a retry over error occurs.
When a number other than "0" is set
This value is entered for as remaining number also when the [Replenish component]
command is used. The remaining number is counted down, and when it becomes
below the specified value, the signal light flashes to warn the operator.
2 Remain Displays the number of remaining components when the number of components is
referred to.
The number is counted down every time a component is picked during production.
No subtraction is made when the value set in the "Initial" field is 0.
When the initial value is changed, the number of remaining components changes
accordingly.
Only the number of remaining components can be changed depending on the supplied
components.
When the number of components becomes below the specified value, the signal light
flashes to warn the operator.
For a tape, stick, or bulk feeder, if the number of remaining components becomes 0,
subtraction stops. In this case, however, the components are picked up until a retry
over error occurs.
When a retry error over occurrs, the machine is put in error status.
3 Level When the number of remaining components becomes below the specified value in the
Level field, the yellow signal light flashes to warn the operator. This is not effective
when the initial value is set to 0. When a initial value is set, this field is initialized.
4 Warning Displays a component feeding error.
*: This indicates that the number of components is below the specified value.
E: This indicates that a pick up retry over occurred, and pick up action from that feeder is
stopped.
To exit from this status, enter newly the number of remaining components or use the
reset command.
For a tray component, an error is set when the "Remain" item shows zero.
When two or more trays are provided, the signal light flashes in yellow only by
checking the number of remaining components on the last tray.
(2) Flashing the yellow signal light

In the following status, the signal light flashes in yellow to warn the operator.
Feeder type Conditions under which the yellow signal flashes
Tape feeder For each feeder:
Stick feeder - When the number of remaining components becomes below the specified value.
Bulk feeder - When a pick up retry over occurred.
Tray holder For each feeder:
MTC - When the number of remaining components becomes below the specified value.
MTS - When a pick up retry over occurred.
- When components whose number was set are all used..
7 20
(3) Operation
Invocation
Select the [Tool] command in the menu bar of the PWB production screen,
then the [Parts no. setup] command. Figure 7.2.1.2.1 shows the "Parts no.
setup" screen.
Figure 7.2.1.2.1 Component number setup screen
Operation
Figure 7.2.1.2.2 shows the "Parts no. setup" screen when "Front" is selected
as the "Supply Choice".
Figure 7.2.1.2.2 Parts no. setup screen for components set on the front side
7 21
Supply Choice:
This combo box is used for switching the Parts no. setup screen:
screen for components set on the front side or that for rear side.
1 Front Displays the components set on the front side only.
2 Rear Displays the components set on the rear side only.
3 Holder Displays the components set on the holder.
4 DTS Displays the components set on the DTS.
5 MTC Displays the components set on the MTC.
6 MTS Displays the components set on the MTS.
Initial: Enter an initial number of components at the field at which the

input focus is located.
Remain: Enter the number of remaining components at the field at which
the input focus is located.
Level: At the field at which the input focus is located, enter the level of
the number of remaining components at which a warning is
output.
Warning: The input focus does not move to this item. The indication
disappears when the number of remaining components is
validated or when the component replenishing command is
executed.
Descriptions of the buttons displayed on the screen

No. Button Description
1 DTS change Replaces a tray of the DTS with another one. You cannot select this button if any
DTS component is not specified with the production program.
2 Replenish Comp Enters the value set in the "Initial" field into the "Remain" field of the line at which
the input focus is located, and clears all warnings.
3 Clear Set a value in the Initial field to the Remain field, and clears all warnings.
4 OK Validates the settings in the displayed "Parts no. setup" screen, quits this screen,
then returns to the screen form which you called this command, the "Production
conditions" or "Production status" screen.
5 Cancel Quits the "Parts no. setup" screen without validating the settings on this screen,
then returns to the screen from which you called this command, the "Production
conditions" or "Production status" screen.
6 APPLY Validates the settings on the "Parts no. setup" screen.
7 22
Setting the [Remain] field
When you click any "Remain" field with the right button of a track ball, the list
showing the following commands appears on the screen.
No. Command Description
1 Replenish Comp Enters the number set in the "Initial" field to the "Remain" field of the line at which
the input focus is located, then clears all warnings.
2 Clear Set a value in the Initial field to the Remain field, and clears all warnings.
3 Replenish all Executes the [Replenish Comp] command for all components.
feeders
4 Clear all Executes the [Clear] command for all components.
When the machine is in Non-Stop Operation mode, the following menu appears
on the screen also (if your model is a KE-2020 only).
-1 When a TR5D is used
Figure7.2.1.2.3 TR5D pop-up menu
5 MTS(TR5D) When the machine is in Non-Stop Operation mode that uses a TR5D,
this menu appears on the screen.
1 Replenish main feeders Replenishes the main side (21 to 40) with components fully.
2 Replenish sub feeders Replenishes the sub side (1 to 20) with components fully.
-2 When a TR6D is used
Figure7.2.1.2.4 TR6D pop-up menu
5 MTS(TR5D) When the machine is in Non-Stop Operation mode that uses a TR6D,
this menu appears on the screen.
1 Replenish main feeders Replenishes the main side (16 to 30) with components fully.
2 Replenish sub feeders Replenishes the sub side (1 to 15) with components fully.
The MTS/MTC menu appears on the screen only if an MTS (TR5D) or MTC
(TR6D) is set to be used on the Setup menu and the setting item Non-stop operation
(MTS) or Non-stop operation (MTC) is checked on the Use Unit tab of the
Operation option menu. Otherwise, these menus will not appear on the screen.
7 23
7.2.2 Start of production
After setting the number of PWBs to be produced, press the <START> switch on the
operator panel to start production.
The head starts to move immediately after the <START> switch is

pressed, and then the machine starts PWB production.
move your face or head close to the machine during operation.
Before pressing the <START> switch, check that there is no one who is
CAUTION working in the machine.
Before pressing the <START> switch, check that there is no one who
can be injured when the head starts to move.
Before pressing the <START> switch, check that there are no
obstacles (tools and jigs) attached or left in the machine.
If the feeder bank is never recognized (since the machine zeroes, or the
bank moves down then up), it may be recognized automatically before
the machine moves to the pick position. Since the head moves across
CAUTION the feeder while the feeder bank is being recognized, do not place your
hand in the machine, nor move your face or head close to the machine.
The PWB production starts and the green signal lamp lights to indicate that PWB
production is in progress.
If home positioning has not been completed when the <START> switch is pressed,
press the <HOME> key to execute home positioning, then press the <START> switch
again.
7 24
(1) Display of production status
When PWB production starts with the <START> switch pressed, the status of
production is displayed on the screen.
Figure 7.2.2.1 shows the "Production status" screen to b displayed while the
machine is producing PWBs normally. Figure 7.2.2.2 shows the screen to be
displayed when the item "Shows the number of boards produced in large
characters" is selected on the "Production (Display)" tag of the Operation Options
menu.
Display of normal production status
Figure 7.2.2.1 Production status screen (1)
In case in which "Shows the number of boards produced in large characters" is

selected on the "Production (Display)" tag of the Operation Options menu
Figure 7.2.2.2 Production status screen (2)
7 25
Prod. Rest number
Prod. Number : The total number of PWBs to be processed, which
has been set in the "Production condition"s
screen.
Result number : The number of PWB that have been already
processed.
* When the item "Accumulate planned number of boards produced" is
selected on the Production (Display) tag of the Operation option menu
(Figure 12.4.2), counting starts from the "Prod" value (See Chapter 12).
When the item "Count down the number of boards produced" is selected on
the Production (Display) tag of the Operation option menu, this field
displays the number of PWBs that have not been produced yet.
Production mode
Shows the current production mode (Parallel, Sequential or Mixed). (This is
available only when your model is a KE-2030.)
Ckt. No.
Shows the number of a circuit on which a component is to be picked, then
placed by the heads.
Step No.
Shows the number when created with the placement data of the component
to be picked, then placed by the heads.
Total No.
Shows the number of components to be placed on a board (Maximum :
"number of placed components" multiplied by the "number of circuits".)
Pick Pos. (Position)
Shows the feeder number from which the heads pick up components.
Note: Since an MTC itself searches a level to supply components when the
stocked components run out, the level displayed may be different from the
actual one in case of components supplied from an MTC.
Nozzle No.
Shows the number of the nozzle which is attached on the heads.
Compo (Component) Name
Shows the name of components which are picked up with the heads.
Compo. (Component) ID
Shows the component ID of a component to be picked, then placed by the
heads.
Sequence
Shows the component placement sequence being currently performed.
Production status
Displays the current production status of the machine as follows:
7 26
Displayed message Description
PWB transferring A board is being transported.
IC mark recognizing The machine is processing the recognized IC mark data.
BOC mark recognizing The machine is recognizing a BOC mark.
Bad mark detecting The machine is detecting a bad mark.
Placement position The machine is placing a component or moving to the component placement
position.
Pick-up position The machine is picking up a component or moving to the component pick-up
position.
COPLA recognizing The machine is recognizing a COPLA
Attaching a nozzle The machine is mounting a nozzle or moving to the nozzle mounting position.
Returning a nozzle The machine is returning a nozzle or moving to the nozzle return position.
Discarding a component The machine is discarding a component or moving to the component discarding
position.
Bank mark reading The machine is reading a bank mark.
Other positions The machine is performing an operation not described above.
All Placed
Shows the total number of components placed on a board.
(2) Pause
To temporarily stop board production, press the <STOP> switch on the operator
panel.
When the <STOP> switch is pressed in the Continuous execution mode, or when
the production in the Step execution mode stops at a step position, the machine
enters the pause status.
Figure 7.2.2.3 shows the Pause dialog box.
Figure 7.2.2.3 Pause status screen
7 27
When the <START> switch is pressed, the Pause dialog box disappears and the
machine exits from the pause status. When the <STOP> switch is pressed, the
machine goes to production interrupt processing.

pressed, and then the machine starts PWB production.
Before pressing the <START> switch, check that there are no obstacles
(tools and jigs) attached or left in the machine.
In the pause status, it is possible to change the pickup position, position of

placement, and vacuum pressure by teaching.
When "Step" is checked as the Exec. mode on the "Production conditions" screen,
the "Pause" dialog box (Figure 7.2.2.3) appears too without displaying the
Production status screen when the <START> switch on the operation panel is
pressed to start production.
When the system stops in Step production mode, or when it pauses in Continuous
production mode, press the F8 key to change the execution mode to
Continuous/Step and vice versa. Clicking the <Continuous> or <Step> button
change Execution mode also. The <Continuous> or <Step> button displayed on
the dialog box switches Production mode also.
When the machine is put in the pause mode during production, the following data
can be taught according to the cause and position of the pause.
Pick data Placement data Mark data

Cause Position Remarks
X,Y Z Vac X,Y Z Vac X, Y
User request by a key Pick point - Starts from XY teaching
Cover opened - Effective HOD device
Feeder bank lifted keys are CAMERA and
down Placement
HEAD
Feeder rise detected point
Mark recognition Mark position - Only the CAMERA key is

error effective.
1. Teaching of pick points is set in the order of input, and only possible for
sequential pickup.
2. Teaching of placement points is possible only during reference circuit pattern
placement, and is not possible for the boards with which a bad mark of
reference circuit pattern is detected.
3. Teaching of vacuum pressure at the pick point can be performed in the
following steps with the HOD manually.
Picking a component by moving down the Z axis Teaching the vacuum
the pressure Discarding the component
4. Teaching of the vacuum pressure at the placement point is performed as it is
to be and vacuum cannot be set to ON/OFF.
7 28
5. Teaching of the vacuum pressure is set for the component data which is
referred to by the placement data or the pick data being taught.
6. Data loaded with teaching is data on the teaching items whose associated
LEDs of the HOD have lit immediately before you press the ENTER key of
the HOD. To obtain the data on the "XY", "Z" and "Vac" by teaching,
execute teaching operation for each of them separately.
7. Teaching of the tray component pick-up position is impossible.
(3) Stop
The STOP switch is used to stop board production before the preset number of
PWBs are processed. When the STOP switch is pressed while production
temporarily stops, the Figure 7.2.2.4 "Abort-Stop Production" dialog box appears.
Figure 7.2.2.4 "Abort-Stop production" confirmation dialog box

When the <OK >button is selected, the PWB is unclamped and the machine
returns to the "Production conditions" screen. When the <Cancel> button is
pressed, the previous condition (pause) is restored.
Even when the production is stopped, the X and Y axes and the head
continue to move to carry out nozzle replacement.
CAUTION To avoid a risk of injury, do not place your hand in the machine, nor
move your face or head close to the machine even after stopping the
production.
(4) Exit
When the preset number of PWBs are processed, the "Production conditions"
screen is restored. The three signal lamps light simultaneously to indicate that
the preset number of PWBs has been processed.
To exit the production operation, select the [File] command on the menu bar, then
the [Exiting Application] command on the displayed File menu, or click the

mark located at the upper right corner of the screen. The "Exit" dialog box
shown in Figure 7.2.2.5 appears on the screen.
The "Exit Production" dialog box has radio buttons used to select whether or not
to save the file.
Figure 7.2.2.5 Exit Production dialog box

7 29
7.2.3 Production management information
In Continuous production mode, production management information is stored. This
section explains the procedures for displaying the production management
information that has been stored.
(1) Conditions for creating the production management information data

When the production mode is set for the PWB production and the production
is performed for all placement positions.
Once the production data is created, new data for the next production is
added to the previous data.
If you want entirely new data to be created, clear the data already created.
(2) Items
Total management information
1 Number of produced PWBs The number of boards produced after production management
information is cleared. (Only for complete boards)
2 Number of produced PWBs (Ckt) The number of produced circuits (Number of produced PWBs
Number of circuits - Number of bad marks detected)
3 Prod start time Date and time when the first production is started after the
production management information is cleared the last time.
4 Prod end time Date and time when the last production was ended with this
production program.
5 Operation time The time duration from when production was started to when the
production is completed excluding any stop time duration and the
conveyor waiting time. Pause time duration is also excluded.
6 PWB Carry in Waiting time The accumulated time of durations from when the clamped board is
released to when the IN sensor is set to ON.
Note that this indicates a value of the item Carry out Waiting time
if there is a board on the OUT buffer when the clamped board is
released. If there is no board on the OUT buffer and In sensor or
Wait sensor is already set to ON when the clamped board is
released, no time is added to this PWB Carry in Waiting time.
Even though the station pauses while it is waiting for a board to be
sent in, any pause time is not added to this PWB Carry in Waiting
time.
7 Carry out Waiting time The accumulated time of durations from when the clamped board is
released to when the OUT sensor is set to off (that is, when the
board located on the OUT buffer is ejected from the station) if the
OUT sensor is set to ON when the clamped board is released.
Note that any time is not added to this Carry out Waiting time if
there is no board on the OUT buffer when the clamped board is
released (For a KE-2030, the next process unit should be accept a
board from it.) However, in case of the last board, the time duration
from when the clamped board is released to when the station
finishes transporting it is added to this time of period regardless the
OUT sensor status: ON or OFF. Even though the station pauses
while it is waiting for a board to be ejected, any pause time is not
added to this PWB Carry in Waiting time.
8 Conveyor Waiting time The accumulated time of durations from when the system starts
transporting a PWB to when it finishes transporting the PWB. Even
though the station pauses while it is waiting for a board to be
transported, any pause time is not added to this Conveyor Waiting
time.
7 30
9 Momentary Stop time The accumulated time of durations for which the machine cannot
produce boards due to errors including a pause and emergency stop
from start of production to end of production.
[Momentary Stop time] = [Stop time caused by trouble] + [Stop time
caused by Out-of-Component]
10 Maintenance stop time The accumulated time duration for which the machine pauses due to
a user request (by pressing the STOP key).
Pauses due to component protection or cycle stops are regarded as
a user request, and added to this Maintenance stop time.
11 Stop time caused by trouble The time duration obtained by adding system pauses: pauses as
the result you check the check box Stop system on any error on
the Production (Pause) tab invoked from the Operation option
dialog box, pauses due to the condition the system cannot produce
any PWB (for example, the IC recovery belt is full of components),
and pauses due to asynchronous events (for example, the bank
moves down).
Note that if the system pauses because the stocked components run
out, the pause time duration is added to Stop time caused by
Out-of-Component
12 Stop time caused by The accumulated time of durations for which the machine stops
Out-of-Component because the stocked components run out or because it displays the
Retry list..
13 Stop time The total time duration of the "Maintenance stoop time", "Stop time
caused by trouble" and "Stop time caused by Out-of-Component".
14 Ratio of Pick-up (Number of normal pick-up operations / (Number of normal pick-up
operations + Number of pick-up errors)100
15 Ratio of Placement (Number of normal placement operations / (Number of normal
pick-up operations + Number of pick-up errors) 100
16 Ratio of Retry 100 - "Ratio of Pick-up"
17 Number of Picked components This means the number of successfully picked components.
18 Number of Placed components This means the number of successfully placed components.
19 Number of Detect Bad mark This means the number of circuits whose bad mark is detected.
20 Number of BOC mark This means the number of BOC mark recognition errors.
21 Number of IC mark This means the number of IC mark recognition errors.
22 Number of STOP caused by out of This means the number of times the machine stopped because the
component stocked components run out.
7 31
Management information per feeder
1 Picked The number of components successfully picked from the feeder.
2 Placed The number of components successfully picked , then placed from the
feeder.
3 Pick Err. The number of pickup errors occurred at the feeder.
4 Empty Comp. How many times the stocked components run out at the feeder.
5 Retry The number of retry over errors occurred at the feeder.
6 LA Recog The number of laser recognition retry over errors occurred at the feeder.
7 Vrecog The number of VCS recognition errors which occurred at the feeder
(available with a KE-2020/2040 only.)
8 Lead The number of components whose bent lead(s) was (were) detected.
9 Dimension The number of components whose dimensions were incorrect.
10 Vrfy The number of components which causes a verify errors.
11 Chip The number of components that are picked from the feeder and cause a
chip rise error.
12 Cpla The number of components whose floating lead(s) was (were) detected
with the coplanarity check.
Note: For a component fed by a feeder, the retry error means that the stocked
components run out. For a component fed by a tray, when the number of
remaining components reaches zero, it is regarded as Empty Comp. error, and the
retry over error is detected according to the number of retries already performed.
7.2.3.1 Basic operation to display production management information
7 32
Total
To display the production management information, select the [Window]
command from the menu bar, the [Management Info.] command on the displayed
menu after you select the [Window] command, then the [Total] command. The
screen shown in Figure 7.2.3.1.1 appears.
Figure 7.2.3.1.1 Prod. Information (Total)
Front
When you select the [Window] command from the menu bar, the [Management
Info.] command on the displayed menu, then the [Left Front] command, the
screen shown in Figure 7.2.3.1.2 appears.
Figure 7.2.3.1.2 Prod. Information (Front)
7 33
Rear
Info.] command on the displayed menu, then the [Rear] command, the screen
shown in Figure 7.2.3.1.3 appears.
Figure 7.2.3.1.3 Prod. Information (Rear)
Holder
Info.] command on the displayed menu, then the [Holder] command, the screen
Figure 7.2.3.1.4 Prod. Information (Holder)

7 34
MTC
Info.] command on the displayed menu, then the [MTC] command, the screen
Figure 7.2.3.1.5 Prod. Information (MTS)
Clear
To clear the production management information displayed on the screen, select
the [Window] command from the menu bar, the [Management info.] command
on the displayed menu, then the [Clear] command.
7.2.3.2 Storing the production management data

When you perform the "Save" command for a file after production, you can save the
production management information as a file separately.
7 35
7.2.4 Production information
Figure 7.2.4.1 Selecting the [Production Info.] command
Production information display the tact of a leaf PWB, all place rate, all pick rate, and
vacuum levels.
This section explains the procedures for displaying the production information.
(1) Conditions for creating the production information data

When the production mode is set for the PWB production.
Once all place rate and all pick rate is displayed, new data for the next
production is added to the previous data.
If you want entirely new data to be created, clear the data already created
from production management information.
(2) Items
Total management information

1 Tact on a board Procedure time on a board.
2 All Place Rate Shows the component placement ratio of the entire machine.
3 All Pick Rate Shows the component pick-up ratio of the entire machine.
4 Pick Pos. Picking up a component or moving it to the pick-up position.
5 After component picked Now vacuum level after component picked of heads
6 After component placed Now vacuum level after component placed of heads
7 Attaching a nozzle Now vacuum level attaching a nozzle (no component) of heads
(no component)
8 Picking a component Now vacuum level picking a component (component data) of heads
(component data)
9 After component picked Now thresholed after heads picked a component
thresholed
10 After component placed Now thresholed after heads placed a component
thresholed
11 Judged result of vacuum error Judged result of vacuum error (after comp. picked) comparing now
(after comp. picked) threshold to now vacuum level
12 Judging result of vacuum error Judged result of vacuum error (after comp. placed) comparing now
(after comp. placed) threshold to now vacuum level
7 36
7.2.4.1 Basic operation to display production information
To display the production information,select the [window] command from the menu
bar, the [Production Info.] command. The screen shown in Figure 7.2.4.2 appears.
Figure 7.2.4.2 Production information
To clear all pick rate and all place rate of the production information displayed on the
screen,select the [Window] command from the menu bar,the [Managemen info.]
command on the dsiplayed menu,then the [Clear] command.
To clear tact,all pick rate and all place rate of the production information displayed on
the screen,when the file reading.
The tact is showed producing and idling.
Shown used to produced tact in idling.
Shown vacuum level used during production.
7 37
7.3 Retry List Display
The Retry List display function displays information of errors that occurred in the
execution of board production to be checked. The information contains the following
items.
(1) Unplaced item list

No. Item displayed Contents
1 Compo. ID Unplaced component ID of the placement data
2 Ckt. Unplaced circuit pattern No.
3 Step Unplaced placement step
4 error Reason of unplacement
Descriptions of errors
(a) Approximate classification
No. Display Cause of the error
1 Mark recognition Unplaced because of failure of IC mark recognition
2 LA recognition Unplaced because of failure of component LA recognition
3 Component Unplaced because of component type errors
4 Feeder unit type Unplaced because of failure of feeder units
5 Setting Unplaced because of failure of setting such as setup
(b) Details
Details of errors are available for each error of approximate classification and
show the cause of each error, and they are displayed as follows:
VCS recognition errors
Value Error contents Value Error contents
20 Bent lead 41 Ball outer frame recognition error (Bottom
side ball detecting error [Detection result:
less than 1/3])
21 Lead length error 42 Ball outer frame recognition error (Left side
ball detecting error [Detection result: less
than 1/3[]
22 Lead pitch error 43 Ball outer frame recognition error (Right side
ball detecting error [Detection result: less
than 1/3])
23 The number of detected leads is less than the 44 Ball outer frame recognition error (Ball top
specified number. and bottom sides inclining error [three
degrees or more])
24 The number of detected leads is more than 45 Ball outer frame recognition error (Ball left
the specified number. and right sides inclining error [three degrees
or more])
25 No lead is detected. 46 Ball outer frame recognition error (Distance
between the top side and the bottom side on
which balls are located is wide [half-pitch].)
26 The number of detected leads is one to three. 47 Ball outer frame recognition error (Distance
between the left side and the right side on
which balls are located is wide [half-pitch].)
27 Component frame detection error 60 All balls recognition error (Ball pitch error)
7 38
28 Fine-pitch lead detection error 61 All balls recognition error (Ball recognition
error [dimmed or dark])
29 The number of detected leads is less than the 62 All balls recognition error (The ball top and
specified number. bottom sides inclining error [three degrees or
(Extended-lead connector) more])
30 The number of detected leads is more than 63 All balls recognition error (The ball left and
the specified number. right sides inclining error [three degrees or
(Extended-lead connector) more])
40 Ball outer frame recognition error (Top side 64 All balls recognition error (Distance between
ball detection error [Detection result: less the top and bottom sides on which balls are
than 1/3]) located is wide [half-pitch])
65 All balls recognition error (The distance 107 Multi-lead recognition error (Impossible
between the right and left sides on which ball positioning)
are located is wide [half-pitch])
66 All balls recognition error (Ball inspection 108 Multi-lead recognition error (Lead detection is
area creating error) impossible.)
67 All balls recognition error (Ball deformation 120 Random ball recognition error (Ball pitch
inspection error) error)
68 All balls recognition error (Ball diameter 121 Random ball recognition error (Ball
inspection error) deformation inspection error)
69 All balls recognition error (Ball brightness 122 Random ball recognition error (Ball diameter
error) inspection error)
70 All balls recognition error (Ball existence 123 Random ball recognition error (Ball existence
inspection error) inspection (diameter) error)
80 Outline recognition error (No component) 124 Random ball recognition error (Ball existence
inspection (intensity) error)
81 Outline recognition error (Component size 125 Random ball recognition error (Ball existence
error) inspection (intensity) error: the number of
samples is not enough.)
82 Outline recognition error (There is no target 140 Ball inspection error (Ball detection error)
pattern in the inspection frame.)
83 Outline recognition error (IC mark inclining 141 Ball inspection error (Matrix size error)
error [one degree or more])
84 Outline recognition error (Distance between 142 Ball inspection error (Number of balls error)
the top and bottom marks or right and left
marks is wrong. [+ 0.5 mm or wider])
85 Outline recognition error (OFC component 143 Ball inspection error (Ball diameter error)
recognition error)
100 Multi-lead recognition error (Bent lead) 144 Ball inspection error (Intensity reference
obtaining error)
101 Multi-lead recognition error (Lead length 145 Ball inspection error (Intensity characteristics
error) error)
102 Multi-lead recognition error (Lead pitch error) 160 Outline measurement error (Component is
tilted too much.)
103 Multi-lead recognition error (The number of 161 Outline measurement error (Dimensions are
detected leads is less than the specified too large.)
number.)
104 Multi-lead recognition error (The number of 162 Outline measurement error (Dimensions are
detected leads is more than the specified too small.)
number.)
105 Multi-lead recognition error (No detected 163 Outline measurement error (No component)
lead)
106 Multi-lead recognition error (The number of 999 Other recognition error
detected leads is one to three.)
7 39
LA recognition
64 No component 93 A component is too small for the system to
decide its angle that is used for determining
its width.
65 The MCM processor cannot respond to 94 An error occurs while the system is
measurement. calculating the angle.
67 The MCM received a command that aborted 95 An error occurs while the system is
measurement. calculating the angle.
70 The firmware detected the state that could 96 An error occurs while the system is
not be generated. calculating the angle.
75 The system found the previous peak 98 The system could not detect the angle used
detection error while it was detecting the for determining the minimum width within the
next peak. limit angle.
77 Sufficient contrast for the system to detect 99 The system detected the process over-run
the margin of a component cannot be error.
obtained.
78 An error occurs indicating that a small 103 The system detected an error indicating that
window, 2000 micron or less, is specified. the intensity was too low to check the image
of a component.
79 The system detected a blocked window 104 The system detected an error indicating that
state. region boundary for checking the image of a
component was not set correctly.
80 The system detected an error indicating that 105 The system failed to check the image of a
the leftmost window was blocked. component.
81 The system detected an error indicating that 106 The system detected the error level not
the rightmost window was blocked. regulated.
82 The system detected an error indicating that 207 Chip rise
the both left and right window edges were
blocked.
90 An error occurs while the system is 208 Wrong dimensions of a component
calculating the angle.
91 An error occurs while the system is 209 Component direction error
92 An error occurs while the system is 210 Feeder pitch gap
Component
1 Chip standing 16 Illegal component junk
2 Component fall 17 Placement check error
3 Verify error 33 LLL Colinearity
7 Unplaced 34 LLL Coplanarity
8 Other component 35 LLL lead count
9 Pick miss 36 LLL compo pos.
10 Ball inspection
Feeder unit type

1 Run out of components
7 40
MTC
1 Command error 73 Over run error(Y + limit)
2 Parameter error 74 No.2 Head error
3 No component 75 Over Run Shuttle
4 READY time out 78 Y Holder Error
5 ETX time out 79 Not finish initialize
6 Sync char time out 80 Mounter emergency stop
7 Response time out 81 Over run eror(Z - limit)
8 Data error 82 Over run eror(X - limit)
9 Rspns error 83 Over run eror(Y - limit)
10 Request at offline 84 No.1 Head Sensor error
13 Stacker Lock 85 Over run eror( Shuttle )
14 Picking error 86 Interlock error
15 Picking error(shuttle) 91 Z error
16 Not recovery component 92 X error
18 Could not detect tray 93 Y error
19 Cover open 94 No.2 Head Sensor error
24 Transport error(head) 95 Shuttle error
25 Transport erorr(shuttle) 99 Door, Cover SW
26 Supply 100 Overrun error
28 No Stacker 101 Z axis sensor error
29 Door open 102 X axis sensor error
30 Component remain 103 Y axis sensor error
35 BGA Holder error 107 RAM error
36 Detecting Board on the Conveyor 108 Illegal break current
40 Receive pick finish during shuttle 109 Holder Sensor error
transporting
44 Head Vaccum No.1 Sensor 110 Motor Off
45 Shuttle Vaccum No.1 Sensor 111 Sensor error(Z + limit)
46 Failed to detect Origin Auto PWB Conveyor 112 Sensor error(X + limit)
48 Teaching spot turned off 113 Sensor error(Y + limit)
49 MS parameter not entered 115 Shuttle sensor error
54 Head Vaccum No.2 Sensor 117 NV-RAM error
55 Shuttle Vaccum No.2 Sensor 118 Close/open sensor error
56 Detecting Motor Error Auto PWB conveyor. 122 Driver Alarm(X)
61 Home position error(Z) 123 Driver Alarm(Y)
62 Home position error(X) 125 Driver Alarm(shuttle)
63 Home position error(Y) 128 Tray Error.
64 No.1 Head Error 135 Change error(shuttle pad)
65 Shuttle error 141 Impossible servo driver on(Z)
68 Shutter close error 145 Soft Limit (Shuttle)
69 Shutter open error 151 Servo alarm
70 Emergency stop 165 Bulb bad motion
71 Over run error(Z + limit) 171 Request cancell
72 Over run error(X + limit) 182 Switch Off-line
7 41
183 Switch Supply 235 IPC Object Close Error (DTS-1)
184 Press MTC EMG Sw 236 IPC Object Close Error (DTS-2)
185 Retry Out 241 IPC Send Error (MTC-1)
186 Empty Parts 242 IPC Receive Error (MTC-1)
187 Supply 243 IPC Send Error (MTC-2)
203 MTC COMM ERR (Data Error) 244 IPC Receive Error (MTC-2)
204 MTC COMM ERR (Communication Error) 245 IPC Send Error (MTS-1)
205 MTC COMM ERR (Procedure Error) 246 IPC Receive Error (MTS-1)
206 MTC COMM ERR (Synchronous Error) 247 IPC Send Error (MTS-2)
207 MTC COMM ERR (Power Off) 248 IPC Receive Error (MTS-2)
208 Step Number of Tray is Wrong 249 IPC Send Error (DTS-1)
209 MTC is not Available in Setup Data 250 IPC Receive Error (DTS-1)
210 Not Finding STX ETX 251 IPC Send Error (DTS-2)
211 Undefined Command Code is Specified 252 IPC Receive Error (DTS-2)
212 Parts Request Send Multiplexy (WAIT) 301 Move error
213 Parts Request Send Multiplexy (KICK) 302 Retry over
214 Parts Request is Abnormal 303 No component
215 Response Time Out 304 Offline
218 MTC Initialize Incompletely 305 Supply
219 Unmovable by Off-line 306 Pick miss
220 Unmovable by Air-Down 402 Time Out (Ready Waiting Observation 10sec)
221 IPC Object Open Error (MTC-1) 403 Time Out (Sync Character Observation
4sec)
222 IPC Object Open Error (MTC-2) 404 Time Out (ETX Observation 3sec)
223 IPC Object Open Error (MTS-1) 405 MTC Power Off
224 IPC Object Open Error (MTS-2) 406 Time Out (Responseless Observation 60sec)
225 IPC Object Open Error (DTS-1) 407 Receive Data Validity Error
226 IPC Object Open Error (DTS-2) 408 Ring Buffer Access Error
231 IPC Object Close Error (MTC-1) 409 Time Out (Data Link Release 1)
232 IPC Object Close Error (MTC-2) 410 Time Out (Data Link Release 2)
233 IPC Object Close Error (MTS-1) 411 MTC Communication Initialize Failed
234 IPC Object Close Error (MTS-2)
Setting
1 Unused option
MTS
1 Command error 6 Sync char time out
2 Parameter error 7 Response time out
4 READY time out 8 Data Error
5 ETX time out 9 Rspns error
7 42
10 Request at offline 123 Driver Alarm(Y)
13 Stacker Lock 126 Escape Error(Y)
18 Could not detect tray 128 Tray Error
20 Main Cover open 133 Detect Compo Floating
26 MTS is Supply 138 Clamping Stacker Error
28 No Stacker 141 Impossible servo driver on(Z)
29 Door open 151 Servo alarm
30 Not Receiving Parts Taking Completion 161 Test Mode Moving Time Out
already
40 Receive pick finish during tray 171 Request cancell
transporting
49 MS parameter not entered 182 Switch Off-line
52 Request Changing Stacker when 183 Switch Supply
Normal Mode
61 Home position error(Z) 184 Press MTC EMG Sw
63 Home position error(Y) 185 Retry Out
68 Shutter close error 186 Empty Parts
69 Shutter open error 187 Supply
70 Emergency stop 203 MTS COMM ERR (Data Error)
71 Over run error(Z + limit) 204 MTS COMM ERR (Communication
Error)
73 Over run error(Y + limit) 205 MTS COMM ERR (Procedure Error)
78 Y Holder Error 206 MTS COMM ERR (Synchronous Error)
79 Not finish initialize 207 MTS COMM ERR (Power Off)
80 Mounter emergency stop 208 Step Number of Tray is Wrong
81 Over run eror(Z - limit) 209 MTS is not Available in Setup Data
83 Over run eror(Y - limit) 210 Not Finding STX ETX
88 Interlock error 211 Undefined Command Code is Specified
91 Z error 212 Parts Request Send Multiplexy (WAIT)
93 Y error 213 Parts Request Send Multiplexy (KICK)
98 Opening Y Holder when Z Axis Moving 214 Parts Request is Abnormal
99 Door, Cover SW 215 Response Time Out
100 Overrun error 218, MTS Initialize Incompletely
101 Z axis sensor error 219, Unmovable by Off-line
103 Y axis sensor error 220, Unmovable by Air-Down
106 Clamping Stacker Error 221, IPC Object Open Error (MTC-1)
107 RAM error 222 IPC Object Open Error (MTC-2)
108 Illegal break current 223 IPC Object Open Error (MTS-1)
109 Holder Sensor error 224 IPC Object Open Error (MTS-2)
111 Sensor error(Z + limit) 225 IPC Object Open Error (DTS-1)
113 Sensor error(Y + limit) 226 IPC Object Open Error (DTS-2)
116 Changing Stacker Error 231 IPC Object Close Error (MTC-1)
117 NV-RAM error 232 IPC Object Close Error (MTC-2)
118 Close/open sensor error 233 IPC Object Close Error (MTS-1)
121 Drive Time Out(Z) 234 IPC Object Close Error (MTS-2)
7 43
235 IPC Object Close Error (DTS-1) 302 Retry over
236 IPC Object Close Error (DTS-2) 303 No component
241 IPC Send Error (MTC-1) 304 Offline
242 IPC Receive Error (MTC-1) 305 Supply
243 IPC Send Error (MTC-2) 402 Time Out (Ready Waiting Observation
10sec)
244 IPC Receive Error (MTC-2) 403 Time Out (Sync Character Observation
4sec)
245 IPC Send Error (MTS-1) 404 Time Out (ETX Observation 3sec)
246 IPC Receive Error (MTS-1) 405 MTS Power Off
247 IPC Send Error (MTS-2) 406 Time Out (Responseless Observation 60sec)
248 IPC Receive Error (MTS-2) 407 Receive Data Validity Error
249 IPC Send Error (DTS-1) 408 Ring Buffer Access Error
250 IPC Receive Error (DTS-1) 409 Time Out (Data Link Release 1)
251 IPC Send Error (DTS-2) 410 Time Out (Data Link Release 2)
252 IPC Receive Error (DTS-2) 411 MTS Communication Initialize Failed
301 Move error

33 A coplanarity judgemennt error. 51 The motor revolution is abnormal.
34 A coplanarity centering position error 52 A memory of sencer is abnormal.
35 A lead count error. 53 A initialize error of coplanarity unit.
36 A colinearity judgemennt error. 54 An axis error of coplanarity measurement.
43 A coplanarity unit error. 62 The component type can not be measured.
44 ,A illegal data or illegal operation. 63 The component size is too large.
45 A time-out or other error. 64 The component size is out of range.
46 A coplanarity adjust error. 65 The component height is too high.
47 A hardware error of coplanarity controler. 66 The meas. mode isn't corr. or the compo.
cann't be measured.
48 A measurement software error. 67 The electrode can not be measured.
49 A lasor diode is abnormal. 68 A coplanarity sensor is unused.
50 A cable connection error.
(2) Feeder unit information

No. Displayed items Contents
1 Sply (Supply) Feeder unit of the component pickup failed
2 L Lane No. for feeding by stick feeder
3 Pkg. (Package) Package of the component pickup failed
4 Component name Component name of the component pickup failed
5 Error Reason of component pickup failed
7 44
Error contents
No. Display (Cause of the error)
1 No components
2 Different component type
3 LA retry over
4 Retry over
5 Off line
6 Supply
7 Operation error
8 Laser recognition error
9 Chip rise
10 Transfer mistake
11 Feeder bank invalid
12 Stacker invalid
7.3.1 Retry List display after the end of board production

(1) Unplaced list
To call the retry list after board production ends, select the [Tool] command from
the menu bar, the [Error log] command on the displayed menu, then the
[Unplaced list] command.
The screen shown below (Unplaced list) in Figure 7.3.1.1 appears on the screen.
In this list, up to 100 retry errors per each station can be displayed in the order in
which the errors occurred. However, the Retry List (Supplier information) screen
in Figure 7.3.1.2 appears if there is any feeder which failed to pick up a
component although all components were placed on boards. If all components
are picked and placed, no error appears on the screen.
7 45
Figure 7.3.1.1 Retry List (Unplaced list) screen
(2) Feeder information

When you select the [Tool] command from the menu bar, the [Error log] command
on the displayed menu, then the [Supplier information] command after production,
the screen shown below in Figure 7.3.1.2 appears.
In this list, up to 100 errors can be displayed.
Figure 7.3.1.2 Retry List (Supplier information) screen
7 46
7.3.2 Retry list display during board production
In the execution of production, the error list whose contents vary depending on the
error actually occurred appears on the screen as shown in Figure 7.3.2.1.
Figure 7.3.2.1 Retry List display dialog box (Supplier information)
The error log displayed in the execution of production is used to determine whether or
not the production should be continued.
Therefore, with seven buttons displayed on the screen, control the production
condition after an error occurs. The function activated with your button selection is
described below.
1) Retry
When you select the "Retry" button, the following dialog box appears on the
screen as shown in Figure 7.3.2.2.
Figure 7.3.2.2 Dialog box displayed when you select the <Retry> button
When you press the <START> switch on this dialog box, the system resumes the
placement operation from the component where the error occurred to continue
production. The system automatically supplies with components the feeder where
components run out.
When you press the <Cancel> button, the screen returns to the Retry list display.
7 47
The head starts to move immediately after the "Retry" button is selected
and the <START> switch is pressed, and then the machine restarts
PWB production.
CAUTION Before pressing the <START> switch, check that there is no one who is
working in the machine.
2) Ignore
When you select the "Ignore" button, the dialog box appears on the screen as
shown in Figure 7.3.2.3.
Figure 7.3.2.3 Dialog box displayed when you select the <Ignore> button
When you press the <START> switch on this dialog box, the system skips the
component (its layer) displayed on the error log, then starts production from the
next layer.
When you press the <Cancel> button, the screen returns to the error log display.
The head starts to move immediately after the "Ignore" button is

selected and the <START> switch key is pressed, and then the
machine restarts PWB production.
Before pressing the <START> switch check that there are no obstacles
7 48
3) Abort
When you select the <Abort> button, the dialog box shown in Figure 7.3.2.4
Figure 7.3.2.4 Dialog box displayed when you select the <Abort> button
This button stops production and moves down the backup plate so that the PWB
can be ejected. In this case, the nozzle attached to the head is removed to finish
the operation. The same operation can be resumed by pressing the <STOP> key
on the operation panel.
After selection of the <Abort> button, the X and Y axes and the head
still continue to move to change the nozzle.
CAUTION To avoid a risk of injury, do not place your hand in the machine, nor
move your face or head close to the machine even after stopping PWB
production.
4) Tracking
When you select this button, the pick position correction process will be
performed for the position which caused the error displayed in the list box.
For details, see the description for the 7-3-3"Pick point correction".
5) Supply
When you select this button, you can control the number of components by
opening the Part no. setup window. See the Section 7.2.1.2 "Setting the number
of components" for details.
7 49
6) Displ. (Display)
This button switches the screens between the unplaced list and the supplier
information screen.
Figure 7.3.2.5 Retry List (Unplaced list) dialog box
7) Edit
This button allows you to modify Component data.
See Section 7.4.13 "Editing data" for details.
7.3.3 Pick point correction

7.3.3.1 Pick point correction using the Retry list (unplace list) dialog
When you click the <Tracking> button on the screen shown in Figure 7.3.2.5,
components are automatically replenished whose pick-up position has been already
corrected among all of components whose Pick data is referenced from Placement
data, which is associated with the component ID displayed on the list box.
7.3.3.2 Operation
Entering conditions
When the [Pick track] is selected in the Retry list dialog box, the dialog box is
displayed as shown in Figure 7.3.3.2.1. By entering the conditions for pick point
camera tracking, tracking can be started with the <START> switch on the
operation panel.
The tracking conditions which can be entered are as follows:
- Selection between automatic pick point tracking at every automatic feeding
interval or manual pick point tracking by the user using the HOD.
- Stop time duration at the pick point for the tracking at automatic feeding
intervals
7 50
Figure 7.3.3.2.1 Pos. adjust condition dialog box
Starting tracking operation

When the "Pick pos. adjust condition" dialog box above in Figure 7.3.3.2.1
appears, press the <START> switch on the operation panel. The machine
displays the screen as shown in Figure 7.3.3.2.2, then starts tracking a pick
position under the conditions you entered on the "Pick pos. adjust condition"
dialog box.
When tracking operation is complete, the "Pick pos. adjust condition" dialog box
appears again. So, tracking operation can be repeated as many as possible to
check the pick point.
Figure 7.3.3.2.2 Pick position camera tracking dialog box
7 51
If the feeder bank is never recognized (since the machine zeros or the
bank moves down then up), it may be recognized automatically before
the machine moves to the pick position.
Since the head moves across the feeder bank while the feeder is being
CAUTION
recognized, do not place your hand or head in the machine, nor move
your hand or face close to the machine. Especially, extreme care is
required when the feeder bank is recognized not from the menu but
during teaching or tracking a pick position.
Tracking operation and teaching

During tracking operation, in the same manner as the other pick point camera
tracking operations, operation can be done using the <START> switch and the
<STOP> switch of the panel of the main unit and the HOD. Teaching of pick
coordinates is also possible.
Figure 7.3.3.2.3 "Coordinate Teaching" dialog box
Finishing pick point correction

When pressing the <Exit> button on the "Pick pos. adjust condition" dialog box,
the number of components setup operation is performed for all pick data of the
components listed as component ID here, regarding that the feeder change and,
etc. have been completed. Then, pick point correction process is finished and the
Retry list dialog box appears again.
Other operations
The other operations during pick point correction are the same as those for pick
point tracking.
7 52
7.3.3.3 Pick point correction using the Retry list (supplier information) dialog box
When the Retry list (supplier information) dialog box appears, select the [Pick track]
button. Pick point tracking of the feeders selected in the list box is performed, and its
pick point can be corrected. The feeders subject to pick point correction are fully
loaded automatically.
Figure 7.3.3.3.1 Retry list (Supplier information) dialog box
7.3.3.4 Operation
Starting tracking operation
When the <Pick track> button is selected on the Retry list dialog box, the "Pick
camera tracking" dialog box appears on the screen immediately, and the head
moves to the pick point of the feeder displayed in the list box. This operation is the
same as that of pick point tracking operation (manual operation) when only one
piece of pick data exists.
Using the device key of the HOD, teaching of pick points is also possible here.
Fishing pick point correction
When tracking of the subject pick data (one piece of the data) has been
completed, tracking operation is finished automatically, and the Retry list dialog
box appears again.
7 53
7.3.4 Printing the Retry List
displayed menu, and the [Retry List] command after PWB production, the retry list
printing dialog box appears on the screen.
Select the data to be printed with checking either of the Output Type radio
buttons.
If the retry list cannot be displayed, you cannot select the [Print] command on the
[File] menu.
Figure 7.3.4 Retry list printing dialog box
When you click the <Print> button, the system starts printing the specified data.
When you click the <as Text File> button, the File Save dialog box appears on the
screen. Specify the path and file name, then click the <Save> button. The specified
data is output as a text file.
When you click the <Cancel> button, the display returns to the screen displayed
before you selected the [Print] command.
7 54
7.4 Operation during Board Production
7.4.1 Run-out of components stock

When one of the following events (indicating a runout of components stock) occurs,
take the actions stated below.
(1) Occurrence of a Runout-of-Components-Stock event

If a retry over error occurs when the machine picks up a component from a
tape feeder or stick feeder
(2) Machines action for run-out of components stock
Blinks the signal lamp in yellow.
Continues processing.
Places another type of components that can be placed.
Uses an alternate feeder (if available) in the next and later pickup and
placement cycles. However, when the "Stop the system when components
runout" operational option is selected, the machine immediately stops,
displays a dialog box shown below, and waits for a user's input.
When you check the operation option "Stop the system when components
run-out" and the machine pauses, the dialog box shown in Figure 7.4.1.1
The actually displayed names

under the caption Head vary
depending on the model you use.
Model Head name

KE-2010 L1 to L4
KE-2020 L1 to L4, R1
KE-2030 L1 to L4, R1 to R4
KE-2040 L1, R1
Figure 7.4.1.1 Empty component dialog box (Screen example when you use a KE-2020)
Pressing the <START> switch on the operation panel restarts the production.
Pressing the <STOP> switch puts the production temporarily in halt with the
temporarily halt dialog box displayed.
When "The height of component is measured on restart component run out"
operational option is selected, the system resumes production after it
measures the height of a chip or MELF which runs out.
If the system fails to measure the height, the dialog box shown in Figure
7.4.1.2 appears on the screen.
7 55
Figure 7.4.1.2 "Question" dialog box
When you click the <Yes> button, the system remeasures a component fed by a
feeder which failed to be measured.
When you click the <No> button, the system measures the height of a component
fed by the next feeder whose stocked components run out, or tries to restart
production.
In the same manner, when you check the check box The verification inspection is
done on restart component run out. on the Production (Pause) tab invoked from
the Operation option dialog box, the machine restarts production after performing
verification check for a chip or MELF component that runs out.
If the machine fails to perform a verification check, the dialog box shown in
Figure 7.4.1.2.1 appears on the screen.
Figure 7.4.1.2.1 Question dialog box
When you click the <Yes> button, the system re-checks components of a feeder
that failed to be checked.
When you click the <No> button, the system performs a verification check for
components fed by the next feeder whose stocked components run out, or tries to
restart production.
L If you check both of the check boxes Re-measure component height

when components run out. and The verification inspection is done
on restart component run out. on the Production (Pause) tab invoked
from the Operation option dialog box, the system measures the height of all
applicable components, and then performs a verification check.
It does not measure the component height and performs a verification
check alternately.
The system does not perform a verification check for a component whose
height fails to be measured.
7 56
In the same manner, when the Operation option Pick and trace before retry. is
checked, the system picks up a component and tracks this picking-up operation
according to the specified requirements before resuming the suspended production.
Before picking up and tracking a component, the Auto Pick Trace Set dialog box
appears on the screen as shown in Figure 7.4.1.3.
Figure 7.4.1.3 Auto Pick Trace Set dialog box
Enter the maximum length of the shorter side of a component to be picked up/tracked
in the input area. The system will not pick up and track a component whose shorter
side is longer than the value you specified here.
When you press the <START> switch, the system picks up and tracks a component,
and then resumes the suspended production. When you press the <STOP> switch,
the system enters Pause mode again.
The combo box displayed on the dialog box above indicates the setting of the
Operation option, and you cannot change or select it.
7 57
Production restart mode
How production restarts when the <START> switch on the operation panel is
pressed differs as shown below, depending on the selection of the radio
button on the dialog box.
Restart mode Operation when production is restarted

Retry Searches all alternative feeders for the runout components, and if all the feeders have run out
of the components, all the feeders are fully loaded with the components. Then, operation
restarts from the current pick and placement cycle.
Skip Skips the components which have been run out, and production starts from the next pick
cycle.
(3) Tracking and pick position correction of a feeder where components run out
Feeders to be tracked
The system can track a tape feeder, stick feeder, and bulk feeder; all feeders
where a retry over error occurs or components run out. However, it does not
track a feeder which is set as "Unused".
How to enter Tracking mode
Press one of the CAMERA, HEAD and HMS device keys of the HOD to
activate its function.
Other operation
The other operations during this tracking and correction are the same as
those for pick position tracking.
(4) Detailed information

When you click the <Detail> button, the system displays the list of the heads that
cause an error.
Figure 7.4.1.4 Error Detail dialog box (Screen example when you use a KE-2020)
7 58
* The actually displayed names under the caption Head on the screen shown
in Figure 7.4.1.4 vary depending on the model you use.
Model Head names

KE-2010 L1 to L4
KE-2020 L1 to L4, R1
KE-2030 L1 to L4, R1 to R4
KE-2040 L1, R1
The errors actually displayed under the caption Error are the same as those
of a Retry list.
The detailed description of errors actually displayed under the caption Detail
is the same as that of a Retry list.
<OK>: When you click this button, the Error Detail dialog box closes.
<START>: When you press this button, the Error Detail dialog box and the
component run-out dialog box close and the system resumes
production.
<STOP>: When you press this button, the Error Detail dialog box closes, and
the dialog box displayed when you try to abort production opens to
ask you whether to abort production actually.
Obtaining the coplanarity information (available with a KE-2020/2040 only)
If a coplanarity error occurs, the <Copla Info.> button appears on the Error
Detail dialog box.
Figure 7.4.1.5 <Copla Info.> button
When you click this button, the machine obtains the coplanarity information and
shows it on the memo pad.
When you click the line of the head on which a coplanarity error occurs with the
right button, the Copla Info pop-up menu appears on the screen.
When you click the corresponding command from this pop-up menu, you can
obtain the coplanarity information and display it on the memo pad also.
If the Pause dialog box appears on the screen due to a coplanarity error, this
pop-up menu appears also.
7 59
1) Output format of the coplanarity information
The example of the output coplanarity information is shown below.
[See the next page for descriptions of the format.]

Reference No.
CoplaResults
wHead=7,wNozzle=508,wATCNo=8,wCompoType=102,wCompoIdx=0,wErrorCode=1
No,Judge,lX,lY,lZ,nZCop,nZCol
0,0,2.188,-4.000,0.067,-0.033,0.000
1,0,1.878,-4.000,0.074,-0.026,0.000
2,0,1.608,-4.000,0.068,-0.032,0.000
3,0,1.300,-4.000,0.064,-0.035,0.000
70,0,-11.878,6.160,0.069,-0.030,0.000
71,0,-11.875,6.450,0.062,-0.037,0.000
72,0,-11.878,6.750,0.067,-0.033,0.000
111,0,-1.975,11.880,0.080,-0.026,0.000
112,1,-1.683,11.870,-0.010,-0.129,0.000
113,0,-1.380,11.870,0.072,-0.034,0.000
165,0,3.940,-1.620,0.082,-0.020,0.000
166,0,3.945,-1.940,0.074,-0.028,0.000
167,0,3.940,-2.230,0.081,-0.020,0.000
2) Descriptions of the output format
Header information (fixed character string)

Measurement requirements data
wHead=7 Head information (L1=3, R1=7)
wNozzle=508 Nozzle number
wATCNo=8 ATC hole number
wCompoTYpe=102 Component type number (192, ., QFP)
wCompoIdx=0 Component number
wErrorCode=1 Coplanarity error number
(1: coplanarity error, 2: terminal positioning error,
3: number of leads error, 4: colinearity error,
5: measurement error)
Measurement requirements data may be expanded without notice.
Format
7 60
Detailed information
Lead number, measurement result, X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, Z-coordinate,
coplanarity value and colinearity value are shown here.
The lead numbers are assigned sequentially from 0.

The measurement result 1 indicates that an error was detected at the
lead.
Coordinates are output in mm.
The X-coordinate and Y-coordinate are relative coordinates viewed from
the center of a component.
The Z-coordinate, coplanarity value and colinearity value indicate the
reference position viewed from the lead height. (If the lead height is
higher than the reference position, a negative value is output.)
Each item of the detailed information is output in order independent of the

measurement posture, and the bottom side, right side, top side and of the left
side of component data are output in this order.
If a coplanarity error occurs, only a coplanarity value is set but a colinearity
value is not set. If a colinearity error occurs, only a colinearity value is set.
A Z-coordinate is always output.
or the "Skip" button is selected, and the <START> switch is pressed.
Then the machine restarts PWB production.
Before pressing the <START> switch check that there is no one who
CAUTION
Even when "Stop production after ejecting PWB" is selected, X and Y
axes and the head continue to move to replace nozzles.
production.
7 61
7.4.1.1 Setting the number of components
After setting components on the feeder units (tape feeder, step feeder, bulk feeder,
tray holder, MTC and/or MTS) specified on the Pick data screen, set the number of
components to the main unit.
The system has the function for indicating that the number of remaining components
is less than the specified level by flashing the yellow signal light. If you set the
number of components, you can use this function.
If a component pick-up retry over error occurs at a feeder, holder, MTC or MTS, the
Production utility handles that feeder as a malfunctioning feeder and skips it to
continue the current production.
To resume the suspended production after adjusting the malfunctioning feeder so that
it can pick up a component, you have to clear the error with this number of component
setting function.
Descriptions of the buttons

1 DTS change Replaces a tray of a DTS with another one. You cannot select this button if
any DTS component is not specified with the production program.
2 Replenish Enters the value set in the Initial field into the Remain field of the line at
Comp which the input focus is located, and clears all warnings.
3 Clear Enters the value set in the Initial field into the Remain field of the line at
which the input focus is located, and clears all warnings.
4 OK Validates the settings on the displayed Parts no. setup dialog box, quits this
dialog box, and then returns to the Production conditions or Production
status screen from which you invoked this dialog box.
5 Cancel Quits the displayed Parts no. setup dialog box without validating the settings
on this dialog box, and then returns to the Production conditions or
Production status screen from which you invoked this dialog box.
6 APPLY Validates the settings on the Parts no. setup dialog box.
How to set the number of the remaining components

When you click the right button of a trackball, you can set the following items by
selecting them from the displayed list.
1 Replenish Enters the value set in the Initial field into the Remain field of the line at
Comp which the input focus is located, and clears all warnings.
2 Clear Enters the value set in the Initial field into the Remain field of the line at
which the input focus is located, and clears all warnings.
3 Replenish all Executes the [Replenish Comp] command for all types of components.
feeders
4 Clear all Executes the [Clear] command for all types of components.
7 62
7.4.2 When an error occurs
When you check the check box Stop system on any error. displayed on the
Production (Pause) option setting screen, the system pauses if an error such as a
retry over error, LA recognition error and VCS error, which is to be displayed on the
Retry list, occurs.
The actually displayed names

under the caption Head vary
Model Head name

KE-2010 L1 to L4
KE-2020 L1 to L4, R1
KE-2030 L1 to L4, R1 to R4
KE-2040 L1, R1
Figure 7.4.2.1 Dialog box indicating that an error occurs

(Screen example when you use a KE-2020)
When you press the <START> switch, the system restarts production, and when you
press the <STOP> switch, the production stop dialog box appears on the screen, then
the system starts aborting the current production.
Production Restart mode

Depending on your selection of the radio button displayed on the dialog box,
the system restart-operation to be performed when you press the <START>
switch varies as shown below:
Restart mode Operation to be performed when the system restarts production

Retry The system restarts production from the pick-up/placement cycle of the component which
caused an error.
Skip The system skips the pick-up/placement cycle of the component which caused an error, and
restarts production from the next pick-up cycle.
When you select Retry, the following message appears on the screen if the stocked
components run out at the feeder that caused an error.
7 63
(1) Tracking and component pick-up position correction of a feeder that caused an
error
The system operates in the same manner when the stocked components run out.
or the "Skip" button is selected, and the <START> switch is pressed.
Then the machine restarts PWB production.
Before pressing the <START> switch check that there is no one who
CAUTION
Even when "Stop production after ejecting PWB" is selected, X and Y
production.
(2) Detailed information

The system operates in the same manner as it does when the stocked
components run out.
(See (4) of Section 7.4.1 Run-out of component stock.)
7 64
7.4.3 Mark recognition error
When a BOC or IC mark recognition error occurs during BOC or IC mark recognition
operation, the dialog box appears as shown in Figure 7.4.3.1 and the machine is set
in the pause status. Note that the radio button "Recognize on same position" is
checked and displayed in the lighter color in Production restart mode, which cannot be
changed.
Figure 7.4.3.1 BOC mark recognition error dialog box
When the machine pauses due to a mark recognition error, recognize marks or use
the taught coordinates which are checked with your eyes as the mark coordinates in
order to restart the next production. Otherwise, the machine cannot place a
component on a board correctly.
When pressing the CAMERA key of the HOD, and the camera device at the station
which causes an error, the cameras view moves to the mark coordinates displayed
on the dialog box, and the mark coordinates can be taught.
When finishing teaching using the ENTER key of the HOD, the color of the radio
button displayed changes to deep black. Here, production can be continued by
performing the mark recognition at the taught coordinates or checking the mark with
your eyes.
However, when the left and right BOC recognition causes an error, you cannot select
the radio button unless you finish the teaching operation for the left and right BOC
marks.
If you perform teaching operation again, but click the <CANCEL> button to abort it
after you perform teaching operation once and the radio button is displayed in dark
black, the machine condition returns to the state before you performed teaching
operation first (in this case, perform teaching operation again).
The teaching here is effective only for the subject board. If a mark recognition error
occurs again and again with the other boards, finish production once. Then, perform
coordinate and recognition teaching of the mark again on the Program Editing menu.
7 65
Pressing the <START> switch on the panel of the main unit restarts the production,
and pressing the <STOP> switch stops the production while displaying the production
stop dialog box.
move your face or head close to the machine when operating the HOD.
CAUTION Even though you abort production, do not place your hand in the
machine or move your face or head close to the machine to avoid a risk
of injury.
Note: Teaching here is effective only for the subject board. If an error occurs during
continuous production, correct the PWB data.
7 66
7.4.4 Cover was open
When the protective cover is opened during production, the dialog box appears as
shown in Figure 7.4.4.1 and the machine is put in the pause state.
Figure 7.4.4.1 "Cover was open" dialog box
Pressing the <START> switch on the panel of the main unit restarts the production,
and pressing the <STOP> switch stops the production while displaying the production
stop dialog box. If the <START> switch is pressed to restart the production when the
cover is opened, the production starts at the low speed.
7.4.5 Feeder bank down

When the feeder bank is being moved down, pressing the <START> switch on the
operation panel causes an error and cannot start/restart production.
If the feeder bank is moved down during production, the dialog box appears as shown
in Figure 7.4.5.1 and the machine is put in the pause state.
Figure 7.4.5.1 "Feeder bank down" dialog box
To start/restart the production, set correctly the feeder overall changer and move up
the feeder bank. Then, press the <START> switch on the operation panel. When the
<STOP> switch is pressed with this dialog box displayed, the production stop dialog
box appears on the screen and the production stops.
7 67
7.4.6 Detect feeder sensor
When the feeder float sensor is detecting a feeder float state, pressing the <START>
key causes an error and cannot start/restart production.
If the feeder float state is detected during production (when the XY axes are moving),
the dialog box appears as shown in Figure 7.4.6.1 and the machine is put in the
pause state. However, when the menu item "Pauses immediately when the feeder
floats." is checked on the Setup menu, the current production is terminated due to an
error, and this dialog box does not appear on the screen.
Figure 7.4.6.1 "Detect feeder sensor" dialog box
To start/restart the production, set correctly the feeder and press the <START> switch
on the operation panel. When the <STOP> switch is pressed with this dialog box
displayed, the production stop dialog box appears and the production stops.
7 68
7.4.7 Pause as component protection
If a recognition error occurs at a component designated as a protective component
specified in the component data of production program (on the Expanded window),
the machine is put in the pause state and the message box appears as shown in
Figure 7.4.7.1.
Figure 7.4.7.1 "Pause as component protection" dialog box
Remove the component being picked by the nozzle with your hand, and select the
<OK> button. Then, the machine is put in the pause state with the dialog box
displayed as shown in Figure 7.4.7.2.
Figure 7.4.7.2 Pause dialog box due to component protection
Pressing the <START> switch on the panel of the main unit scraps the component,
and then restarts the production. Pressing the <STOP> switch puts the machine in the
pause state with the production stop dialog box displayed.
7 69
7.4.8 Checking to see if a laser head is stained
When you check the check box Check dirty of Laser sensor. of the Production
(Function 2) tab that is invoked from the Operation Option screen, the system checks
to see if laser heads are stained when a board is sent into the machine. If the
system detects any stain stuck to the laser head(s), the system pauses.
The laser head(s) that is (are) found to be stained is displayed in blue on the
screen.
The stained head stops temporarily after moving to the front side. Clean the
laser head.
Figure 7.4.8.1 Pause dialog box
When you press the <START> switch, the system checks to see if the laser heads are
stained again. When it does not detect any stain on the laser heads, it restarts
production. Otherwise, the following message appears on the screen.
Figure 7.4.8.2 Dirty laser head message
When you click the <Yes> button: the system starts production.
When you click the <No> button: the Pause dialog box reappears on the screen.
The system checks to see if the laser heads are stained again. The stained
laser head(s) is (are) displayed in blue. Clean the laser head(s) displayed in
blue. When you press the <STOP> button on the Pause dialog box, the
system displays the Abort dialog box to abort the current production.
7 70
7.4.9 Filling the feeder with components when the system pauses a production
operation
If you check the Production (Display) tag of the Operation option menu, then check
the item "The "Supply" button is applied to the pause dialog", the <Supply> button is
displayed on the "Pause" dialog box as shown below.
This button is displayed when the system temporarily stops a production operation.
However, note that it is not displayed when the system stops because components
run out or the mark recognition error occurs.
Figure 7.4.9.1 Pause dialog box equipped with the Supply button
When you click the <Supply> button, the system fills the feeder such as a tape, stick
or bulk feeder with the corresponding components.
If the remaining number of components is zero, it is reset to the initial value, then
component run-out t information is cleared. If the remaining number is not zero, the
component run-out information is just cleared.
When you click the <Supply> button, the message box as shown below will appear on
the screen. When you click the <YES> button on this box, the system performs the
component-filling operation, then closes the message box. When you click the <NO>
button, the system does not perform any operation, then closes the message box.
Figure 7.4.9.2 "Is the component supply reset?" (Confirmation) dialog box
7 71
7.4.10 Continuous Production
When production is terminated unusually (asynchronous operation occurred or
abnormal end of production), you can resume the current production by following the
procedure described below. However, this operation is possible only if at least one
component has been picked and placed, and is impossible if there is no component
which has been picked and placed (for example, the system only recognizes a BOC
mark).
Abnormal end of production

When you click the <OK> button on an error message box which indicates that
the current production was terminated abnormally, the following dialog box
appears. The operator can know how far the production has been completed.
Figure 7.4.10.1 "A starting position to continue the production." dialog box
When you click the <OK> button on the dialog box above, the production
conditions screen reappears.
When production starts the next time, the dialog box, which asks you whether to
start production from the position displayed on the dialog box above, appears on
the screen. However, if you edit a production program with the Program Editing
utility, production starts normally without displaying such a dialog box on the
screen.
The "Step No." on the "A starting position to continue the production." dialog box
shown in Figure 7.4.10.1 displays the next production starting point on which no
component is placed yet.
7 72
Start of continuous production
When you press the <START> switch after production is terminated abnormally,
then you recover the system from the error condition. By clicking the desired
check box Continue the production. or Produce newly.. displayed on the dialog
box shown in Figure 7.4.14 (a) of Section 7.4.14 PWB production without
transporting a board, you can start the continuous production.
If you check the check box Continue the production., the system resumes the
suspended production. If checking the Produce newly.., the system starts
normal production without resuming the suspended production. When you press
the <START> key after selecting the check box Produce newly.., the Question
dialog box, which asks you whether to continue the production. appears (see
Figure 7.4.10.2) on the screen.
Figure 7.4.10.2 "Question - to delete the file" dialog box
When you click the <Yes> button, the system deletes the continuous production
data and you cannot resume the continuous production which was terminated
abnormally the last time. When you click the <No> button, the system does not
perform any continuous production this time, but the "Question - to continue the
production." dialog box appears on the screen when you start production the next
time. Note that if the system creates the continuous production file with the
current production, it overwrites the old continuous production file remained.
7 73
Continuous production data-deleting button
When there is continuous production data to be used for resuming the suspended
production, the P-DEL (continuous production data-deleting) button becomes
effective on the screen ( shown in Figure 7.4.10.3). Use this button to delete
continuous production data before starting resuming the suspended production.
When you click this button, the Question dialog box, which asks you whether to
delete the file, appears (see Figure 7.4.10.2.) on the screen. After the system
deletes the data, this button becomes inactive.
Figure 7.4.10.3 Screen for confirming you

that the continuous production data is to be deleted
Process for tracking placement of components when the continuous production

starts
A component may be already placed even at the next placement point of the last
placement point depending on the condition the previous production was aborted.
Therefore, the system allows you to track the placement operation to check to see
if a component is already placed on the next placement point.
The following dialog box which allows you to track a placement result appears on
the screen after production starts and a PWB is clamped.
Figure 7.4.10.4 Tracking placement point confirmation dialog box
7 74
When you select the Execute radio button and press the <Start> key, the system
starts tracking the placement result. Check to see if a component is already
placed on the next placement point of the last placement point.
When you select the Not Execute radio button and press the <Start> key, the
system starts the continuous production without tracking the placement result.
After tracking the placement result, the system displays the following dialog box.
Figure 7.4.10.5 Restart Mode dialog box
If a component is not placed on the tracked position, select the Do place radio
button. Otherwise, select the Do not place radio button. Then press the
<Start> key to start the continuous production.
Question dialog box displayed when the continuous production starts

When you change the sequence (from Input order to Opt. order) on the PWB
production conditions dialog box and start the continuous production, the following
Warning appears on the screen.
7 75
7.4.11 Check items at starting of production
When you press the <START> switch at start of production, the system checks the
following items to decide if it can start production. If the machine cannot start
production, an error occurs.
Check items Check contents

Hardware Origin setting If origin return is performed. Without origin return, normal operation is
impossible.
Servo If servo is set ON. With the servo set OFF, normal operation is
impossible.
Air If air pressure is too low. With insufficient air pressure, normal operation
is impossible.
Feeder bank If the feeder bank is lifted up. Components cannot be placed if the
feeder bank is moved down.
Feeder floated If the feeder is installed correctly. The head may collide with the feeder if
operations started with the floated feeder.
Production Completed PWB PWB data Checking completeness of PWB data
program Checking whether BOC mark recognition teaching is
completed
Placement Checking completeness of placement data of each
data placement point (except for those to be skipped)
Checking whether IC mark recognition teaching is
completed
Component Checking completeness of component data to be referred
data by placement data
Pick data Checking completeness of pick data to be referred by
placement data
MS parameter Checking if the PWB reference side, PWB transport direction and PWB
matching positioning system set for the machine are the same as those set in PWB
data of a production program. If they are not the same as each another
respectively, the machine cannot place components on a board correctly.
Placement With the software limit, checking whether the head is located within its
coordinates movable area when the machine places components in input order.
Pick coordinates With the software limit, checking whether the head is located within its
movable area when the machine places components in input order.
Offset of automatic Checking the pick coordinates: if they have been changed to outside the
calculation specified limit range with respect to the result of automatic calculation.
Match of the circuit Checking whether the rotation angle of the non-matrix PWB is 90, 180,
assignment (angle) 270, or 360 degrees if the BOC mark type is circle, eclipse, or not-binary.
Compo Checking the Compo abandonment selection (specified as Component
abandonment data) and the usage of the IC collection belt.
Number of nozzles Check to see if all of the nozzles necessary for production are installed.
For optimization order production, if the number of nozzles actually
installed is different from that of the nozzles to be used, the machine is not
in the optimized state. To do check this state, the machine checks the
number of nozzles installed.
Head Checks to see if the head is used or not used. If you are to place a
component with a unused head, or if all heads are set as unused, the
machine cannot place a component properly.
OCC2 If the OCC2 camera is set as unused, the machine cannot recognize a
mark or feeder bank.
Bad mark sensor Checks to see if you are to detect a bad mark although the bad mark
sensor is set unused.
7 76
Check items Check contents
Production Shape reference Check to see if you select Shape reference as PWB data although the
program shape reference function is set unused.
IC conveyor belt Checks to see if you select IC conveyor belt for component
abandonment although the IC conveyor belt is set unused.
Coplanarity Checks to see if you are to perform the coplanarity check although the
Coplanarity option is set unused.
Tombstone Checks to see if there is any component which is set to be
detection Tombstone-checked although Tombstone detection is not selected.
Template matching Checks to see if there is any mark which uses the user-defined template
although the template matching function is not selected.
Different type of Checks to see if there is any component whose dimension is to be
component checked although the Dimension check function is not selected.
detection
Standard VCS Checks to see if there is any component which is set to be recognized
with the standard VCS although the standard VCS is set unused.
Option VCS Checks to see if there is any component which is set to be recognized
with the optional VCS although the optional VCS is set unused.
Multi-view Checks to see if there is any component whose multi-view is set to be
recognition recognized although the Multi-view recognition function is not selected.
BGA all ball Checks to see if there is any BGA component whose balls are all to be
recognition (for recognized (including the user-defined pattern) although the All balls is
standard VCS) not selected as the recognition type(for the standard VCS).
BGA all ball Checks to see if there is any BGA component whose balls are all to be
recognition (for recognized (including the user-defined pattern) although the All balls is
option VCS) not selected as the recognition type(for the optional VCS).
Supply device Check to see if there is any component for which all supply units are set
as unused.
Notes: 1. The machine checks the feeder bank only if a feeder bank is checked
on the "Device enable" menu invoked from the Machine Setup menu.
2. For coordinate check, a fault can be regarded as "Warning" and
production can be forcibly started. In this case, however, an operation
error of shaft driver may occur during production.
3. "Warning" of coordinate range check is to be referred by input order
placement of optimized production program.
The same check is performed for editing of production program and for
optimization. So, this item is to be ignored when production is
performed with the data not optimized or when optimization production
is performed.
4. If the actual pick coordinates largely differ from the automatically
calculated pick coordinates, a non-standard feeder may be installed or
correct pickup may be impossible because the incorrect mounting hole
was specified in Pick data. To prevent such a mistake from occurring,
the difference between the actual pick-up coordinates and the pick-up
coordinates automatically calculated is checked. However, when a
non-standard feeder (stick feeder in particular) is used, warning can be
ignored and production can be started although the warning is
5. The corresponding message appears on the screen if an error occurs
during hardware check.
7 77
(1) Error (warning) message display
When an error (warning) occurs as a result of production program check, the
descriptions about the error (warning) will be displayed as a list. (Up to 100 cases
are displayed.)
When "a production program incompletion (PWB data, placement, etc.) error is
detected" or when "the number of detected errors (warnings) exceeds 100" is
displayed, the error check will be stopped immediately and detected error
(warning) messages will be displayed.
(2) Processing after message display

When an error is detected, the current production cannot be started.
Even when only a warning is detected, the current production cannot be started if
the number of detected ones exceeds 100. If the number is less than 100, the
production can be started by pressing the Start key once again.
Error messages are displayed in the following format:
Data name, data number, error (warning) symbol [model name], error message
(Example)
Comp., 006, E, [2030], The specified nozzle (No. 506) is not set.
As the error (warning) symbol, three symbols are used: #1, E and W.
Errors: #1 or E
Warning: W
(3) Messages and their meanings

The following table shows the messages appearing upon detection of errors
(warnings) and their contents.
Message Meaning
Error Device/All heads unused. All heads are set to unused at machine setup.
PWB/Incompleteness. PWB data is not complete.
PWB/BOC mark recognition teaching BOC mark recognition teaching is not completed.

non-completion.
PWB/ For BOC marks (two out of 3 points or one out of 2 points),
the user-defined template is used. (Template matching is
set to unused at machine setup.)
PWB/Mark cannot be recognized. A BOC mark cannot be recognized unless the circuit

.)
(Ckt. rotate isnt 90 arrangement is in units of 90 is used.
PWB/PWB reference plane of the The production program edited in an environment in which

opposite. the reference side is set to the opposite side is used.
PWB/PBW transporting direction of The production program edited in an environment in which
the opposite. the transport direction is set to the opposite direction is
used.
PWB/Shape reference is selected. Shape reference is selected as PWB data. (Shape

(Shape reference unit not connected.) reference is set to unused at machine setup.)
PWB/BOC mark align on the straight 3-point BOC marks are arranged on a straight line.

line.
PWB/BOC mark is same position. The BOC mark coordinates are overlapped.
Place/No.*1 Incompleteness. Placement data is not complete.
Place/No.*1 IC mark coordinates IC mark coordinates are not entered.

uninput.
7 78
Message Meaning
Place/No.*1 IC mark %d recognition IC mark recognition teaching is not completed.
Error
teaching non-completion.
Place/No.*1 Template cant be used. The user-defined template is used as an IC mark.

(Machine setup isnt check.) (Template matching is set to unused at machine setup.)
Place/No.*1 It is not possible to move There is a placement point to which the head cannot

in the head. move.
Place/No.*1 Mark can't be recognized. Unless the circuit arrangement is in units of 90, an

.)
(Ckt. rotate isn't 90 unrecognizable type of IC mark is used.
Place/No.*1 IC mark is same position. The IC mark coordinates are overlapped.
Place/No.*1 The head is not specified After optimization, there are placement points to which

by optimization. any head is not assigned.
Comp./No*2 Incompleteness. Component data is incomplete.
Comp./No.*2 There is not enough The nozzle specified in component data is not set in ATC.

nozzle (*5) to product.
Pick/No.*3 Incompleteness. Pickup data is incomplete.
Vision/No.*4 Incompleteness Vision data is incomplete.
The production program breaks. The production program is destroyed.
Device/HEAD unused. (There is There is Placement data which specifies a head which is
WARNING
Place point.) set to "unused" at machine setup.
Device/Production program with the BOC and IC marks are used. (OCC is set to "unused" at

mark data. (OCC unused.) machine setup.)
Device/The bank mark recognition The bank mark recognition is "enabled" at machine setup.

can't be executed. (OCC2 unused.) (OCC2 is set to "unused" at machine setup.)
Device/The bad mark detection can't The bad mark detection is selected in PWB data. (The

be executed. (Device disable) bad mark sensor is set to "unused" at machine setup.)
Device/It can't be execution of the The verify inspection is set at component data inspection
CVS inspection. (Device disable) setup. (Component verification is set to "unused" at
machine setup.)
Device/It cannot be use of LLL. Coplanarity is set at component data inspection setup.

(Device disable) (Coplanarity is set to "unused" at machine setup.)
Device/There are component(s) which The chip rise detection is set at component data
detect the tombstone. (Device inspection setup. (Chip rise detection is set to "unused" at
disable) machine setup.)
Device/There are component(s) which Different dimensions of component judgment is set at
judge different component. component data inspection setup. (Different type of

(Device disable) component detection is set to "unused" at machine
setup.)
Device/There are vision centering The vision centering method is selected. (Standard

parts. (Standard [Option] VCS unused) [option] VCS is set to "unused" at machine setup.)
Device/There is a multi-view Multi-view recognition is specified for vision components.
recognition component. (Multi-view recognition is set to "unused" at machine
setup.)
Device/BGA all ball is recognized. BGA components are used. (BGA all ball recognition
(Standard [option] VCS unused) (for standard [option] VCS) is set to "unused" at machine
setup.)
Device/The supply is arranged on IC The IC conveyor belt position is overlapped with other

conveyor belt. supply device position.
PWB/Template can't be used. The use-difined template is used for the BOC mark (one
(Machine setup isn't check.) our of 3 points). (Template matching is set to unused at
machine setup.)
7 79
Message Meaning
PWB/BOC mark (*6) is outside PWB
WARNING There is a circuit located outside the PWB.
or circuit.
Place/No.*1 There is supply device There is a supply device where the head cannot move.

where the head can't move.
Place/No.*1 Placement position is The placement position is outside the PWB (circuit).

outside PWB or circuit.
Place/No.*1 IC mark (*6) is outside The IC mark is outside the PWB (circuit).

PWB or circuit.
Comp./No.*2 The supply device is all The supply unit is all unused for components.

unused.
Comp./No*2 There is not enough The number of nozzles assigned to ATC is less than the

nozzle(s) (*5) to product. optimized number.
Comp./No.*2 There is too many The number of nozzles assigned to ATC is more than the

nozzle(s) (*5) to product. optimized number.
Comp./No.*2 IC conveyor belt The IC conveyor belt is selected at the component
selection at compo. abandonment. abandonment position. (The IC conveyor belt is set to
("Unused" at machine setup) "unused" at machine setup.)
Pick/No.*3 Pick position is too far from The pick position coordinates deviate much from the

calculated position. coordinates obtained by automatic calculation.
Pick/No.*3 Head cannot move. Because the interference unit sensor is turned on, there

(Interference detection is on.) is a pick position to which the head cannot move.
*1: Placement No. *2: Component No. *3: Pickup No. *4: Vision No.
*5: Nozzle No. *6: Mark No.
7.4.12 Cycle stop

When you press the <SINGLE CYCLE> switch on the operation panel of the main unit,
and the switch lights, the machine is put in Cycle Stop mode. The system ejects a
board and the current production stops when the PWB being processed is completed.
In this case, the production is assumed to be completed normally.
When you check the check box Do not carry out the PWB on cycle-stop on the
Function 2 tab invoked from the Operation Options screen, the system pauses
without ejecting a board after processing it completely. When you press the
<START> switch at this point, the system restarts production. When you press the
<STOP> switch, the system displays the Abort dialog box to abort the current
production.
The <SINGLE CYCLE> switch is a toggle switch.
The <SINGLE CYCLE> switch is available only during production.
7 80
7.4.13 Editing data
You can modify some part of data created on the Component data screen (such as
component dimensions and laser height) without quitting the "PWB production" screen.
Therefore, you can edit data while maintaining the continuous production status which
allows you to abort production.
If you want to change items not provided with the <Edit> button, terminate the current
production, then edit the production program. Note that you cannot resume the
continuous production and you have to start production newly.
You can invoke this editing data function from the men bar before production starts:
by selecting [Tool] command, then [Operation option] command, or invoke it when
production pauses (because the stocked components run out, laser recognition error
occurs, tombstone error occurs or so on).
Figure 7.4.13.1 Edit Data dialog box
7 81
7.4.14 PWB Production without transporting a board
Conventionally, a machine has to remove a board before production if it is located on
the PWB transport path at start of production. However, this function allows the
machine to fix (clamp) a board again if it is on the PWB transport path at start of
production, so the machine can start production without loading any board into the
machine.
Normally a board remains on the PWB transport path in the following conditions:
Production is aborted (due to an asynchronous event and so on), or
An operator stops production forcibly.
Use this function to recover the system from the conditions described above.
If you load a production file to the system and quit the Production
screen before starting production, this function cannot obtain the
condition of the PWB transport path when production is interrupted.
Therefore, it may cause some component(s) not to be placed on a board
or to be placed at a wrong position of a board. Be careful to use this
function.
If a board size is extremely large or a board is very heavy when the
system performs PWB production without transporting a board, the
system may fail to clamp it.
To execute this function, clamp a board again on the Processing before

production begins dialog box, and then start production.
7.4.14.1 Process before production starts

The contents of the screen displayed as Processing before production begins dialog
box vary depending on the condition: if there is a continuous production file or if
there is no continuous production file as shown below.
Figure 7.4.14(a) If there is a continuous production file
7 82
Figure 7.4.14(b) If there is no continuous production file
When you press the <START> switch on this dialog box, the system starts the
selected operation.
When you press the <STOP> switch on this dialog box, the system enters
Production Idle mode again.
(1) Detailed explanations of the Processing before production begins dialog box
Continuous production information

When there is a continuous production file, the continuous production
information and the radio buttons; Continue the production. and Produce
newly. are displayed on the Processing before production begins dialog box
as shown below.
Figure 7.4.14.1.1 Continuous production information

When you select the radio button Continue the production., the system
resumes the production. When you select the radio button Produce newly.,
the system starts new production at the position specified at the menu item
Starting pos. on the Production conditions screen.
(However, if 0 is entered at either the Circuit or Step No column of the
menu item Starting pos., the system starts production from the beginning
of the first circuit.)
Production operation
Regardless of whether there is a continuous production file, the Processing
before production begins dialog box displays the radio buttons specifying
whether the system will start after load a new PWB or after the board is
clamped.
Figure 6.4.14.1.2 Choice whether the system will start production after a board is
loaded into the system or after re-clamp current PWB
7 83
When you select the radio button Load a new PWB., the system ejects a board if
any board is located on the PWB transport path, and produces a PWB after
loading a board at start of production. When you select the radio button
Re-clamp current PWB, the system clamps a board located on the PWB
transport path, and starts PWB production without loading any board at start of
production.
Depending on whether there is a board on the PWB transport path, or whether the
system obtains the PWB transport path information when the current production
was interrupted, you may not be able to perform PWB production on the
Production resume dialog box as shown below:
Table 7.4.14.1 List of production possibilities

Whether Choice of the radio button
Whether a board is PWB transport path
to Load a new PWB Re-clamp current PWB
located on the information obtained
continue (Production after a board (Production after a board
PWB transport when production was
the is loaded) is clamped)
path interrupted
production
Yes Yes A board is located. Not visible Visible
No board is located.
No information Visible Visible
Note A board is located. Visible Visible
No Yes A board is located. Visible Visible
Note A board is located. Visible Not visible (None)
There is Yes A board is located. Not visible (None) Visible
no No board is located. Visible Not visible (None)
continuous No information Visible Visible
production Note A board is located. Visible Visible
file. No board is located. Visible Not visible (None)
Note: Not visible if the system starts new production, while visible if the system
resumes production.
Condition of the PWB transport path

The Processing before production begins dialog box displays the condition of
the PWB transport path regardless of whether there is a continuous production file
or not as shown below:
Figure 7.4.14.1.3 Processing before production begins dialog box (Condition of

the PWB transport path)
The stop sensor detects whether there is a board on the PWB transport path.
When ON appears on the screen, there is a board on the PWB transport path.
When OFF appears on the screen, there is no board on the PWB transport path.
7 84
1). When the radio button Load a new PWB. is selected
The system displays the condition of the PWB transport path detected by the stop
sensor on the screen as the station that is to eject a board.
There is no board on the PWB transport path.
A board is to be ejected from the PWB transport path.

Although a board was detected on the PWB transport path while
production was being interrupted, the system has to eject it since
all of the necessary components are already placed on the
board.
A board is to be ejected from the PWB transport path.
However, some component(s) may not be placed on the board
or may be placed at a wrong position. Be careful to eject the
board.
If you click this image, the system moves a board located on the center station
to a position where the system can re-clamp it.
2). When the radio button Re-clamp current PWB is selected

The system displays the condition of the PWB transport path detected by the stop
sensor on the screen as the station that is to clamp the board again. Or, if the
system has the information on the PWB transport path obtained when the
previous production was interrupted (that is, if you have not loaded a production
file and not quitted the Production screen before resuming the production after
interrupting it), it displays the same condition of the PWB transport path as the
previous condition on the screen when it clamps a board.
There is no board on the PWB transport path.
The system clamps a board on the PWB transport path again.
The system clamps a board on the PWB transport path again.

However, some component(s) may not be placed on a board or
placed at a wrong position of a board. Be careful to clamp a
board again.
The system re-clamps a board that was located on the PWB

transport path when production was interrupted. However,
there is no board on the PWB transport path
If you click this image, the system moves a board located on the center station
to a position where the system can re-clamp it.
7 85
Operation information displayed when the system ejects a board or clamps it
again
The system displays the various notes on your selection of the radio button Load
a new PWB. or Produce after re-clamp. and actual operation to be performed
depending on the continuous production information and the condition of the PWB
transport path.
Figure 7.4.14.1.4 Operation information when you are to eject a board or clamp it
again
7 86
The actual operation to be performed according to your selecting
each item on the Processing before production begins dialog box is
described below.
When there is a continuous production file

Whether Information on
Whether there is a the PWB
Step to resume Production board on transport path Operation after you press
No. productio operation the PWB obtained when the <START> key
n transport production was
path interrupted
Yes Production Yes A board is Load a new PWB. is not selectable.
after a board located on the
is loaded path.
(when you No board (Normally, the system does not
select Load
perform any operation.)
a new
PWB.) No information After a board is ejected, a new board is
loaded before start of production, and the
system resumes the production (Be
careful to start production).
None After a board is loaded before start of
production, the system resumes the
production.
Yes Production Yes A board is Load a new PWB. is not selectable.
after a board located on the After a board is clamped again, the system
is clamped path. resumes the production without loading a
(when you board before starting production.
select No board (Normally, the system does not
Re-clamp
current
PWB) No information After a board is clamped again, the system
resumes the production without loading a
board before starting production (Be
None Error (No board)
No Production Yes A board is After a board is ejected, the system loads
after a board located on the a new board before start of production,
is loaded path. and starts new production (Be careful to
(when you start production).
select Load No board (Normally, the system does not
a new
PWB.)
No information After a board is ejected, the system loads
a new board before start of production,
and starts new production (Be careful to
start production).
None After a board is loaded before start of
production, the system starts new
production.
No Production Yes A board is After a board is clamped again, the system
after a board located on the resumes the production without loading a
is clamped path. board before starting production (Be
again (when careful to start production).
you select No board (Normally, the system does not
Re-clamp
current
PWB) No information After a board is clamped, the system starts
new production without loading a new
board before starting production (Be
None Error (No board)
7 87
Step
When a board is located on the PWB transport path and the PWB transport path
information indicates that there is a board on the path when production is interrupted
You cannot select Continue the production. or Load a new PWB.. The system
always selects Re-clamp current PWB automatically. (See of I. When there is
a continuous production file.)
Step
When a board is located on the PWB transport path and the PWB transport path
information indicates that there is no board on the path when production is interrupted
When you select Continue the production. and Load a new PWB., the screen
shows the condition of the PWB transport path as illustrated below.
Figure 7.4.14.1.5 Condition of the PWB transport path

When you execute the selection described above, the PWB ejecting dialog box
appears on the screen. Then, after a board is ejected, a new board is loaded before
start of production to continue the production. However, if all of components are
already placed on a board that is located on the PWB transport path when production
is interrupted, the operation described above will not be performed since there is no
continuous production file.
(See of II. When there is no continuous file.)
Step .
When there is a board on the PWB transport path, but there is no information on the
PWB transport path when production is interrupted
shows the following condition of the PWB transport path:

appears on the screen. Then, after a board is ejected, a new board is loaded before
start of production to continue the production.
In such a case, since there is no information on the PWB transport path when
production is interrupted, some component(s) may not be placed on the board ejected.
Be careful to eject a board.
7 88
Step .
When there is no board on the PWB transport path and the PWB transport path
shows the following PWB transport path condition:

When you execute the selection described above, the system loads a board before
start of production, and resumes the production.
Step .
When there is a board on the PWB transport path, and the PWB transport path
When you select Continue the production. and Re-clamp current PWB, the screen

When you execute the selection described above, the Re-clamp dialog box appears
on the screen. After a board is clamped again, the system resumes the production
without loading any board before starting production.
Step .
When there is a board on the PWB transport path and the PWB transport path
information indicates that there is no board when production is interrupted
You cannot select Continue the production. and Re-clamp current PWB.
The system always selects Load a new PWB. automatically.
(See of I. When there is a continuous production file.)
Step .
information indicates that there is no board on the path
7 89
When you execute the selection described above, the Re-clamp dialog box
appears on the screen. After the system clamps a board again, it resumes the
production without loading any board before starting production.
In this case, since there is no PWB transport information when production is
interrupted, some component(s) may not be placed on a board or may be placed
at a wrong position of a board. Be careful to perform production.
Step .
information shows that there is a board on the path when production is interrupted
Figure 7.414.1.5 Condition of the PWB transport path

When you execute the selection described above, an error occurs since there is
no board on the PWB transport path.
Steps to .
If you select Produce newly. and Load a new PWB. regardless of what the PWB
transport path information indicates during production interruption and whether there
is a board on the PWB transport path or not, the screen shows the following PWB
transport path condition:
7 90
appears on the screen. After ejecting a board, the system loads a board before
starting production, and performs new production or resumes production.
The system operates with assuming that there is a board created during the
previous production on the PWB transport path. Some component(s) may not be
placed on the ejected board or some component(s) may be placed at a wrong
position of the board. Be careful to start production.
Step .
When you select Produce newly. and Load a new PWB., the screen shows the
following PWB transport path condition:
When you execute the selection described above, the system loads a board
before starting production to perform new production or continue the production.
Step .
information indicates that there is a board or no board on the path
You cannot select Produce newly. or Re-clamp current PWB.
However, these items can be selected when you are to continue the production.
interrupted. In this case, the system operates in the same manner as it does when
there is no PWB transport path information.
(See of I. When there is a continuous production file.)
Step .
When you select Produce newly. and Re-clamp current PWB, the screen shows
the following PWB transport path condition:
7 91
When you execute the selection described above, the system displays the
Re-clamp dialog box, and executes a new PWB production or resumes the
current production without loading any board before starting production.
Some component(s) may not be placed on a board or may be placed at a wrong
position during new production or resumed production after the board is clamped
again. Be careful to start production.
Step .
When a board is located on the PWB transport path, and the system obtains no PWB
transport path information when production is interrupted
When you select Produce newly. and Re-clamp current PWB, the system displays

appears on the screen. After clamping a board again, the system resumes the
production without loading a board before starting production.
In this case, since the system obtains no PWB transport path information when
production is interrupted, some component(s) may not be placed on the clamped
board or may be placed at a wrong position of the board when it starts new
production or continue the production. after clamping the board. Be careful to
produce a PWB.
Step .
information indicates that there is a board on the path
When you select Produce newly. and Re-clamp current PWB, the screen shows
When you execute the selection described above, it causes an error since there is
7 92
When there is no continuous production file
Information on
Whether a
the PWB
board is
Step Production transport path Operation after you press
located on the
No. operation obtained when the <START> key
PWB
production was
transport path
interrupted
Production Yes A board is located The radio button Load a new PWB. is not
after a board on the path. selectable.
is loaded Yes No board After ejecting a board, the system loads a new board
(when you before start of production, and then starts a new
select Load production or resumes the current production.
a new
Yes No information After ejecting a board, the system loads a new board
PWB.)
before start of production, and then starts a new
production or resumes the current production (Be
None A board is located The system starts a new production or resumes the
on the path. current production.
None No board
None No information The Processing before production begins dialog box
(The system starts a new production or resumes the
current production immediately.)
Production Yes A board is located After clamping a board again, the system starts new
after a board on the path. production or resumes the current production without
is clamped loading any board before starting production.
again (when Yes No board The radio button Re-clamp current PWB is not
you select selectable.
Re-clamp
Yes No information After clamping a board again, the system starts new
current
production or resumes the current production without
PWB)
loading any board before starting production. (Be
careful to start production.)
None A board is located An error (There is no board.)
on the path.
None No board
The Processing before production begins dialog box
None No information
(The system starts new production or resumes the
current production immediately.)
Step .
You cannot select the radio button Load a new PWB..
7 93
Step .
When you select Load a new PWB., the screen shows the following PWB transport
path condition:

appears on the screen. After ejecting a board, the system loads a new board
before starting production, and then starts a new production or resumes the
current production.
Since the system obtains the PWB transport path information when production is
interrupted, it functions with assuming that there is a board produced by the
previous production on the PWB transport path.
Step .
When there is a board on the PWB transport path and the system has no PWB
transport path information obtained when production is interrupted
When you select the radio button Load a new PWB., the screen shows the following
PWB transport path condition:
Figure 7.4.14.1.6
appears on the screen. After ejecting a board, the system loads a new board
before starting production, and starts new production or resumes the current
production.
In this case, since the system obtains the PWB transport path information when
production is interrupted, it functions with assuming that there is a board produced
by the previous production on the PWB transport path. Check the ejected board
carefully because some component may not be placed on it.
7 94
Steps to .
When there is no board on the PWB transport path, and the PWB transport path
information indicates that there is a board on the path or there is no board on the path
When you select Load a new PWB., the screen shows the following PWB transport
path condition:
When you execute the selection described above, the system loads a new board
before starting production, and starts new production or resumes the current
production.
Step .
The Processing before production begins dialog box does not appear on the screen.
The system starts new production or resumes the current production immediately.
Step .
When you select Re-clamp current PWB, the screen shows the following PWB
appears on the screen. After clamping a board again, the system starts new
production or resumes the current production without loading any board before
starting production.
by the previous production on the PWB transport path.
7 95
Step .
You cannot select Re-clamp current PWB.
Step .
When there is a board on the PWB transport path and the system has no PWB
transport information obtained when production is interrupted
Figure 7.4.14.1.6 PWB transport path condition
appears on the screen. After re-clamping a board, the system starts new
production or resumes the current production without loading any board before
starting production.
by the previous production on the PWB transport path. If the system starts new
production or resumes the current production after re-clamping a board, some
component(s) may not be placed on a board or may be placed at a wrong position.
Be sure to start production carefully.
Step .
7 96
Step .
Step .
The Processing before production begins (displayed if there is no continuous
production file) does not appear on the screen.
The system starts new production or resumes the current production immediately.
7 97
7.4.14.2 Continuous production data delete confirmation dialog box
If you select Produce newly. when there is a continuous production file, the
Question dialog box, which asks you whether to delete a continuous production file,
Figure 7.4.14.2 Continuous production data delete confirmation dialog box
When you select the <Yes> button, the system deletes the continuous production
data. (It deletes the data actually at start of production.) It cannot continue the
production. that was aborted the last time.
When you select the <No> button, the system displays the Processing before
production begins dialog box (if there is a continuous production file) when it loads
a file the next time.
When you select either of these buttons on the Continuous production data delete
confirmation dialog box above, it displays the Production start (for new
production) dialog box.
7 98
7.4.14.3 Production start (New production) dialog box
If you select Produce newly. and Re-clamp current PWB on the Processing before
production begins dialog box (when there is a continuous production file), or if you
select Re-clamp current PWB on this dialog box (when there is no continuous
production file), the Production start (new production) dialog box appears on the
screen.
Figure 7.4.14.3 Production start (new production) dialog box
When you press the <START> key on this dialog box, the operation you selected
starts.
When you press the <STOP> key on this dialog box, the system re-enters Idle
mode.
When you check the check box Start production after placement tracking., and
press the <START> key, the system starts tracking component placement
operation.
With your eyes, check to see if any component is placed on the production start
point via the component placement tracking operation. This production start
point is determined at the menu item Starting pos. on the Production
conditions screen. However, if 0 is entered to CKT. No. or Step No., the
system starts production from the beginning of the first circuit.
After tracking operation, the Production start dialog box appears on the screen.
When you check the check box Start production at above placement at once.
and press the <START> key, the system starts production from the production
start point immediately. This production start point is determined at the menu
item Starting pos. on the Production conditions screen. However, if 0 is
entered to CKT. No. or Step No., the system starts production from the
beginning of the first circuit.
7 99
7.4.14.4 PWB ejecting dialog box
When you press the <START> switch on the PWB eject dialog box, the PWB
ejecting dialog box appears on the screen, and then the system ejects a board.
When the system finishes ejecting the board, it starts production.
Figure 7.4.14.4 PWB ejecting dialog box
When you press the <STOP> switch on the dialog box above, the system stops
ejecting a board, and enters Production Idle mode again.
7.4.14.5 Re-clamp dialog box

When you check the radio button Re-clamp current PWB and press the <STAT>
switch on the Processing before production begins dialog box, the Re-clamp dialog
box appears on the screen, and the system clamps a board again. When the system
finishes ejecting a board, it starts production if the continuous production is specified.
Otherwise, the Production start (new production) dialog box appears on the screen.
Figure 7.4.14.5 Re-clamp dialog box
When you press the <STOP> switch on the dialog box above, the system stops
re-clamping a board, and enters Production Idle mode again.
7 100
7.4.14.6 Production start dialog box
When you check the radio button Start production after placement tracking. on the
Production start (new production) dialog box, the following Production start dialog
box appears on the screen, and prompts you to decide whether to start production.
Figure 7.4.14.6 Production start dialog box
When you press the <START> switch on the dialog box above, the system
resumes the current production.
When you press the <STOP> switch on the dialog box above, the system enters
Production Idle mode again. (If a board located on the PWB transport path is
clamped, the system releases the clamped board.)
7.4.14.7 In/Out conveyor checking dialog box

The In/Out conveyor checking dialog box appears on the screen before the machine
ejects a board or re-clamps it on the Processing before production begins dialog box,
[Figure. 7.4.14 (a)-(b)] or before the machine starts new production. If a board is
located on the PWB transport path between the IN and the OUT sensors, the machine
automatically sets the board over the sensor.
Note that this function can be activated only when the machine starts production after
an error occurs while the machine is transporting a board from the entrance or to the
exit.
This function cannot be activated when a board is already on the sensor either.
When you check the check box Not automatically check the IN/OUT board
sensor on the Production (Function 2) Figure. 12-4-4 tab invoked from the
CHAPTER 12 OPTIONS dialog box, the machine does not check a board at
start of production.
Figure 7.4.14.7 In/Out conveyor checking dialog box
When you press the <STOP> switch on this dialog box, the machine enters
7 101
7.4.14.8 PWB set dialog box
When you click an image indicating the condition of the PWB transport path displayed
on the Processing before production begins dialog box, the machine moves a board
located on the center station to a place where the system can re-clamps it.
Figure 7.4.14.8 PWB set dialog box
When you press the <STOP> switch on this dialog box, the machine enters
7 102
7.4.15 Resuming and Returning All Axes to Their Home Positions
7.4.15.1 Normal Axes-Returning

If you press the <ORIGIN> key when the system starts up or when the system cannot
resume and return all axes to their home positions, the following Originating dialog
Figure 7.4.15.1 Normal axes-returning dialog box
<OK> button: returns all axes to their home positions respectively.

<CANCEL> button: quits the ORIGINATING dialog box.
7.4.15.2 Resuming and axes returning

If you press the <ORIGIN> key when the system can return all axes to their home
positions respectively, the following ORIGINATING dialog box appears on the
screen.
Figure 7.4.15.2 Resuming and axes-returning dialog box
<LOCK> button: locks the servo of each axis and moves the PWB transport
support plate to its waiting position.
<INIT.> button: returns all axes to their home positions respectively.
<CANCEL> button: quits the Originating dialog box.
7 103
Requirements for resuming and axes returning
To display the Originating dialog box, all axes should have been returned to their
home positions respectively at least once.
If an asynchronous event occurs that turns off the servo power supply, whether
the system can resume and return all axes to their home positions is described on
the table below.
Table 7.4.15.1
Whether the system can resume
No. Asynchronous event
and return all axes
1 The main unit stops due to emergency.
2 The system stops for a second because it
detects a feeder float error.
3 Each axis limit sensor is activated.
4 The MTC stops due to emergency.
5 The MTS stops due to emergency.
6 Each axis alarm is output.
7 The system stops due to emergency to
prevent heads from interfering each other.
8 The area sensor is activated.
9 Power off (for a CE machine only)
If either of the following events occurs, the system cannot resume and
return all axes to their home positions.
The system tried to return all axes to their home positions respectively,
but could not.
The system tried to resume and return all axes to their home positions,
but could not completely.
7 104
7.5 Trial Run
[Trial Run] command on the displayed menu, the "Trial Run conditions" screen
appears.
The "Trial run" starts immediately after the <START> switch is pressed.
(1) Setting items

1 Setting items Switch the displayed dialog box among the "Production conditions" dialog box,
selection "Trial run conditions" dialog box, and the "Dry run conditions" dialog box.
2 Trial PWB no. Set the number of boards for trial run.
3 Trial ckt. Set the circuit for trial run. This is not used for single circuit boards. The
following setting can be made.
All ckt.: Components set for trial run are placed for all circuits.
Ref. ckt.: Components set for trial run are placed for reference circuits only.
4 Trial range Set the range for trial run. The following setting can be made.
Spec. place: Only for the placement positions set as Yes for the trial field of
the placement data.
Spec cmpnt: Only for the components set as Yes for the trial field of the
component data.
All: For all placement positions.
5 Tracking Station Select the unit to be tracked: left, right or both.
6 Placement ofs. Designate offset for all placement positions. This offset is added to the
placement positions for
actual component placement. (Range: 2.0 mm)
7 Place tracking After trial run of the board, designate whether or not to perform placement
tracking by the camera. If performed, set whether it is manual or automatic.
Off: Placement tracking is not performed.
Automatic: Placement tracking is performed automatically.
Manual: Stops at each placement position, and then goes to the next
placement position through a key-in by the operator.
8 Pick tracking Before trial run of the board, designate whether or not to perform pickup position
Off: Pickup tracking is not performed.
Automatic: Pickup tracking is performed automatically.
Manual: Stops at each pickup position, and then goes to the next pickup
position through a key-in by the operator.
9 Automatic interval When tracking is performed automatically, designate the stop time duration at a
stop position. (Unit is in 10 ms, and 1 is equivalent to 10 ms.)
7 105
Notes: The item "Ref. pin Adjust" is displayed as it is specified on the Operation option
menu. You cannot change this setting.
Note that the placement offset specified on the "PWB production menu" is also
applied to the trial run.
The item "Ref. pin Adjust" is displayed as it is specified on the Operation option
menu. You cannot change this setting.
(2) Operation
Figure 7.5.1 shows the "Trial" dialog box.
Figure 7.5.1 "Trial" start-up dialog box

Switches the dialog box to be displayed: Production conditions dialog box,
Trial Run dialog box, and Dry Run dialog box.
Trial PWB no.
Enter the number of PWBs on which you want to place parts for test.
Trial ckt.
Select either "All ckt." or "Ref. ckt." for trial circuits by the radio button.
When the board has only one circuit, you can select any of the circuits.
When "All ckt." is selected for the use of multi-circuit PWBs, parts specified in
the "Trial range" box are placed on all circuits of the PWBs.
When "Ref. ckt." is selected, parts specified in the "Trial range" box are
placed on the reference circuits of the PWBs.
Trial range
Select a trial range by the radio button.
Spec. place: Places only components for which "Yes" is specified in "Trial"
field of placement data.
Spec. cmpnt: Places only components for which "Yes" is selected in "Trial"
field of component data.
All: All placement positions entered are subject to operation.
7 106
Tracking Station
Select which station is to be used for tracking a placement operation.
Placement ofs.
If the boards of a certain lot have a specific offset (during printing process and
reference hole making process), enter here X and Y offsets to apply the
entered offset of the placement positions to the board.
Place tracking
Using the radio button, set whether or not to perform placement tracking after
trial run by the camera, and also the types of tracking.
Pick tracking
Using the radio button, set whether or not to perform pickup tracking before
trial run by the camera, and also the types of tracking.
Automatic interval
Enter the time interval of automatic run in the edition box. (Input value: 1 to
500)
7.5.1 Starting the trial run

To start the trial run, press the <START> switch after setting the trial run conditions.
The green signal lamp lights to indicate that the production is in progress.
7.5.2 Display of the production status

When the <START> switch is pressed and production starts, the status of the
production (the same as that of the board production) appears on the screen.
For details, see section "Display of the production status" of the "PWB production".
The Operations of the Pause, Stop, and Exit commands in the execution of the test
production are the same as those of the board production.
7.5.3 Monitoring by camera

(1) Automatic run
When "Automatic" is selected in the "Place tracking" field, the placement monitor
camera moves over a trial placement position after trial run, shoots the
component placed circuit and outputs the result to the monitor screen.
The camera stops over the point for a time period set by the item "Automatic
interval", then goes to the next point of placement to be monitored.
For a part whose length or width is specified longer than 5.00 mm in component
data, the camera moves to the four corners of the component.
7 107
After trial run, tracking by the camera continues. To avoid a risk of
CAUTION injury, do not place your hand in the machine, nor move your face or
head close to the machine during operation of the machine.
To stop the camera

To temporarily stop the camera, press the PAUSE key (on the HOD). The
camera pauses at the next point of placement when the camera is moving, or
stops at the current position when the camera pauses there.
Figure 7.5.3.1 shows the Place camera tracking dialog box.
Figure 7.5.3.1 Place camera tracking dialog box
To cancel the pause status, press the <START> switch to restart operation,
and press the <STOP> to terminate operation. When you press the <STOP>
switch, the confirmation dialog box appears on the screen.

pressed, and then tracking restarts.
CAUTION can be injured when the head starts to move.
Even when the <STOP> switch is pressed to stop tracking, X and Y
move your face or head close to the machine even after stopping
tracking.
7 108
Changing points of placement
In the stop status, the point of placement can be taught by the CAMERA key
of the HOD.
It is also possible to change the point of placement directly by numeric keys
on the ten-key pad.
Value correction can be made manually. The input range is limited within the
software range. After a new value is entered, note that the head moves
when the setting button is pressed.
move your face or head close to the machine during operation of the
CAUTION HOD. Note that the head moves to the X and Y coordinates you
entered when the cursor is moved.
Returning to the previous point of placement

In the stop status, you can return to the previous point of placement by
pressing the PREVIOUS key of the HOD.
The stop status is still held even after the camera returns to the previous point
of placement.
The head starts to move immediately after the PREVIOUS key is

pressed.
HOD.
CAUTION Before pressing the PREVIOUS key, check that there is no one who is
Before pressing the PREVIOUS key, check that there is no one who
Before pressing the PREVIOUS key, check that there are no obstacles
Going to the next point of placement

In the pause status, you can go to the next point of placement by pressing the
NEXT key of the HOD.
The stop status is still held even after the camera goes to the next point of
placement.
The head starts to move immediately after the NEXT key is pressed.
CAUTION HOD.
Before pressing the NEXT key, check that there is no one who is
7 109
(2) Manual run
When "Manual" is selected in the "Place tracking" field, the monitoring camera
moves over the first point of placement after trial run, shoots the component
placed circuit, outputs it to the monitor screen, and pauses there.
After trial run has been completed, the camera continues to move to the
first point of trial placement. To avoid a risk of injury, do not place your
CAUTION hand in the machine, nor move your face or head close to the machine
during operation of the machine.
7.5.4 Pickup tracking

(1) Automatic run
When "Automatic" is selected in the "Pick tracking" field, the pickup monitor
camera moves over a pickup point after trial run, shoots the picked-up component,
and outputs the result to the monitor screen.
The camera stops over the point for a time period set by the item "Automatic
interval", then automatically goes to the next pickup point.
If the feeder bank is never recognized (since the machine is zeroed, or

across the feeder while the feeder bank is being recognized, do not
CAUTION place your hand in the machine, nor move your face or head close to
the machine. Especially, take care when the feeder bank is
recognized not from the menu but during teaching or tracking a pick
position.
To stop the camera temporarily

To temporarily stop the camera, press the PAUSE key (on the HOD). The
camera pauses at the next pickup point when the camera is moving, or at the
current position when the camera rests there.
Figure 7.5.4.1 shows the Pick camera tracking dialog box.
Figure 7.5.4.1 Pick camera tracking dialog box
7 110
To cancel the pause status, press the <START> or <STOP> switch. When
the <START> switch is pressed, monitoring by camera restarts immediately.
When the STOP switch is pressed, monitoring by camera terminals and a
dialog box for confirmation appears.
Changing a pickup point
When the machine is in the stop status, the pickup point can be taught by the
CAMERA key of the HOD.
It is also possible to change the pickup point directly by numeric keys on the
ten-key pad.
- The value to be entered manually is the value displayed on the screen 3
mm.
The head starts moving when you enter the coordinates and press the
<SET> button.
Returning to the previous pickup point
When the machine is in the pause status, you can return to the previous
pickup point by pressing the PREVIOUS key of the HOD.
The pause status is still held even after the camera returns to the previous
pickup point.
Going to the next pickup point
In the pause status, you can go to the next pickup point by pressing the
NEXT key of the HOD.
The pause status is held even after the camera goes to the next pickup point.
When the NEXT key is pressed again at the last pick point, the following
message box appears to tell the operator that that is the last tracking point.
Figure 7.5.4.2 Last tracking position message box
When the <START> switch is pressed at the last pick point, the following
dialog box (Figure 7.5.4.3) appears and the operator is asked whether to
enter Production mode.
Figure 7.5.4.3 "Tracking was end." dialog box
7 111
(2) Manual run
When "Manual" is selected in the "Pick tracking" field, the monitoring camera
moves over the first point of pickup after trial run, shoots the picked up component,
outputs it to the monitor screen, and pauses there.
The pause screen for "Manual" is the same as that for "Automatic".
(3) Subjects of pick camera tracking and tracking order

Pickup tracking is performed from No.1 to No.60 at the left front, from No.60 to
No.1 at the left rear, then the right station in this order.
Any pick points used for pick data are subject to tracking operation regardless of
the range of trial run (specified placement points/components).
(4) Operation mode

The following chart shows the mode transition in the operation mode.
For manual tracking For automatic tracking
Condition setting Condition setting
START switch START switch
One point tracking Production starts. One point tracking Production starts.
STOP START STOP START STOP

switch switch switch switch switch
CANSEL NEXT Movement finishes. CANSEL NEXT PAUSE
PERVIOUS CANSEL
HOD device key HOD device key
Pause Teaching Pause Teaching
Teaching completes. Teaching completes.
Movement finishes. NEXT PERVIOUS
One point tracking
- Information of vision camera

The following two types of data are displayed on the vision camera
Raw image at pick points
Cursor (Crosshair or window cursor)
The size of the window cursor displayed here is the same as the size of
components. For large components which cannot be viewed with the vision
camera or for the components with which the window cursor cannot be used
because their pick angle is not a multiply of 60 degrees, the crosshair cursor
is used instead of the window cursor.
Conditions for displaying information on the vision camera screen

Item Type Conditions
Cursor Crosshair cursor For the components whose pick angle is neither 0, 90, 180 nor 270,
or whose dimensions is more than 5.00 mm.
Window cursor For the components whose pick angle is 0, 90, 180 or 270.
7 112
7.6 Blank Run
[Dry Run] command on the displayed menu, the "Dry Run conditions" menu appears
on the screen.
(1) Setting items

1 Setting items Switch the dialog box to be displayed on the screen among: Production
selection conditions dialog box, Trial Run conditions dialog box, and Dry Run conditions
dialog box.
2 Prod. PWB Set the number of boards for blank run.
3 Sequence Select the order of placement sequence: the input order or Opt. (optimized)
order.
4 Exec. mode Select continuous production or step-by-step production.
5 Placement ofs. Designate offset for all placement positions. This offset is added to the
placement positions for actual component placement.
6 Step No. Designate the start line number and the end line number of the range of the
placement data in the input order.
When "Opt. order" is selected as the "Sequence", the start and end line
numbers are handled as the optimized data numbers also.
7 Place tracking After blank run of a board, designate whether or not to perform placement
Off: Placement tracking is not performed.
Automatic: Placement tracking is performed automatically.
placement position through a key-in by the operator.
8 Pick tracking Before blank run of a board, designate whether or not to perform pickup position
Off: Pickup tracking is not performed.
Automatic: Pickup tracking is performed automatically.
pickup position through a key-in by the operator.
9 Automatic interval When camera tracking is performed automatically, designate the waiting time
duration at a stop position. (time duration in 10 msec: "1" indicates "10 msec")
Note: The value specified on the Operation option menu is displayed at the item
"Reference pin correction", and cannot be changed on this dialog box.
7 113
(2) Operation
Figure 7.6.1 shows the Initial dry run conditions menu box.
Figure 7.6.1 Initial Dry run conditions menu box

Switches the dialog box to be displayed among: Production conditions dialog
box, Trial Run conditions dialog box, and Dry Run conditions dialog box.
Prod. PWB
Enter the predetermined number of PWBs to be produced. The number of
"Result" field is displayed according to setting for the number of produced
boards specified on the Operation Options menu.
Sequence
Using the corresponding radio button, select the placement sequence: either
input order or optimized order.
Exec. mode
Select either "Continuous" or "Step" execution mode with the corresponding
radio button.
Placement ofs.
In case a certain production lot has a specific offset (in printing process or in
reference holing process), enter the X and Y offsets in this field. The entered
offset is applied to the entered placement position.
Step No.
Enter the start line number and end line number to specify the range of
placement. The number of placement points on a board is displayed in the
"Placed" field, and the initial value is displayed in each field. When "Opt.
order" is selected as the "Sequence", you cannot change these initial values.
Place tracking
Using the radio button, set whether or not to perform placement tracking after
blank run by the camera, and also the types of tracking.
7 114
Pick tracking
Using the radio button, set whether or not to perform pickup tracking before
blank run by the camera, and also the types of tracking.
Automatic interval
Enter the interval of automatic run.
7.6.1 Starting the blank run

To start the blank run, press the <START> switch on the operation panel after setting
the desired blank-run conditions.

pressed, and then "Blank run" starts.
machine.
The green signal lamp lights to indicate that the blank run operation is in progress.
If the feeder bank is never recognized (since the machine is zeroed, or

across the feeder while the feeder bank is being recognized, do not
CAUTION place your hand in the machine, nor move your face or head close to
the machine. Especially, take care when the feeder bank is
recognized not from the menu but during teaching or tracking a pick
position.
7 115
7.6.2 Display of the production status
When the <START> switch is pressed and the production starts, the status of the
production (the same as that of the board production) appears on the screen.
For details, see the section "Display of the production status" of the "PWB
production".
Any production management information is not created.
For the item of "Result", the number increases with the increasing number of
produced boards but it is not loaded into the production management information.
The Pause, Stop, and Exit commands used during blank run operation are the same
as those during the board production.
7.6.3 Monitoring by camera

Same as the "Monitoring by camera" of "Trial run".
7 116
7.7 Checking
After a component is attached on a head, use each hardware device to perform
various types of inspection.
7.7.1 Single/continuous verification check Single/continuous SOT check

Refer to the supplied "Component Verification Operating Instruction".
7.7.2 Laser height check

7.7.2.1 Checking the laser height
Two mode: "Continuous check" and "Single check" are provided to check the laser
height. See Table below for the function provided in each mode:
Table 7.7.2.1
[Tool] menu Operation mode Description
Single check Checks a component which caused an error in
Continuous check mode individually.
Laser check Continuous check Checks all components or components which satisfy the
specified conditions in a production program. In Single
check mode, you can individually check a component
which the system failed to check for some reason.
The operation flow for checking laser height is shown below.

Start of the continuous

laser height

measurement operation
Start
of laser
height single

check
Setting of the No component

satisfying the
conditions (on the
()
conditions
dialog box)
Check
(on the Measurement
of laser height
dialog box)
()

Any component

Execution
of check to be checked ? Cancel

Yes

Check of laser
Measurement

height
of
laser
height
Check of the Check of the

next component
laser height
End

End
Display of the Display of the

result (on the result (on the Cancel

() ()
dialog box) dialog box)
Display
of the
Check
result (on the
()
dialog box)

Saving of the
result into a pro-

Check error
ductionprogram
Single
check
of
the laser
height
End of single
End of the

laser height continuous laser

measurement height check
Figure 7.7.2.1.1 Operation flow for checking Figure 7.7.2.1.2 Operation flow for checking
the laser height in Single check mode the laser height in Continuous check mode
7 117
7.7.2.2 Laser height checking method
The system performs the laser centering control operation based on the laser height
set in Component data to check to see if no error occurs. In Single check mode,
you can specify the desired laser height or the laser height obtained after measuring
it to check the laser height.
7.7.2.3 Measuring the laser height

If the system detects an error by checking the laser height, it enters Single check
mode. In Single check mode, you can measure the laser height.
To measure the laser height, the system repeats a check of the laser height under
the conditions described below, and assumes that the laser height which allows it to
center a component with laser is optimum.
Table 7.7.2.3 Conditions for repeating measurement of the laser height
Item Move direction Direction of movement Description

1 Present position Alternation Start checking the laser height from the current
position to the upper direction, then down direction
alternately.
Up Starts checking the laser height from the current
position to the upper direction only.
Down Starts checking the laser height from the current
position to the down direction only.
2 Pick face of compo. Checks a component from its picked-up side to the
-> face under compo. top side continuously based on the component
height.
3 face under compo. -> Checks a component from its bottom side to the
Pick face of compo. picked-up side continuously based on the
component height.
7 118
Measurement operation (relation between a component and laser height)

Move direction: Present position
Direction of movement: Alternation

Nozzle

Compo-

Laser height nent


Direction of movement: Up

Nozzle

Compo-

Laser
height nent


Direction of movement: Down

Nozzle

Compo-

nent

Move direction: face under compo. -> Pick face of compo.

->
Direction of movement:

Nozzle

Compo-

nent
(Before
measurement)
()
Move direction: Pick face of compo. -> face under compo.

->
Direction of movement:

Nozzle

Compo-

nent

(Before
measurement)
()
Figure 7.7.2.4 Range for repeating measurement of the laser height
7.7.2.4 Operations done during laser height check/measurement

The system automatically selects a head which is used to pick up a component.
The system selects a nozzle already attached on a head rather than one not
attached so that the frequency of nozzle replacement can be reduced.
However, the system may use a different head every time it measures laser
height depending on the nozzle attachment condition.
7 119
Returning a component after check
After checking laser height, the system returns some components onto their
original positions and discards other ones depending on their packaging style
as shown in Table below. When the setting item Compo Reject to, indicating
the component discarding method, is set to Trash conveyor or Protect, the
system discards a component according to this setting. The system discards a
component on a position which is set with the "Compo abandonment" selection
of Component data. For a component whose size is 1 mm or less, it may be
placed on its side or be turned upside down when it is returned onto the original
position. Therefore, the system asks you how to handle it.
Packaging Condition 1 Condition 2 When When

style returning discarding
Tape feeders other Components whose shorter side is 1 Inquiry *1
than the above mm or less
Components whose shorter side is 1 *2
mm or more
Bulk Components whose shorter side is 1
mm or less
Components whose shorter side is 1 *2
mm or more
Holder *2
MTC *2
MTS *2
Stick
*1 The system displays the dialog box which asks you whether to return a
component or discard it. In Continuous measurement mode, the system
displays this dialog box before starting measurement operation.
*2 The system discards a component when the setting item Compo Reject to
is set to Trash conveyor or Protect.
Selecting a feeder used to pick a component

If two or more feeders are assigned to the same type of components in Pick
data, the system, as the default setting, starts picking up components from one
whose data was entered first of all. Only in Single check mode, you can
change the feeder intentionally.

When a component is not picked up properly, manually enter the coordinates or
use the HOD device to teach them to change the coordinates of a pick-up
position.

If there is no Pick data created, you can manually attach a component to the
nozzle. However, in this case, you cannot enter coordinates that indicate the
component pick-up position. You cannot operate a feeder either.
7 120
7.7.2.5 Laser height check operation
7.7.2.5.1 Operation transition during laser height check

Displayed screens and state are changed during laser height check as shown
below:
User operation
Dialog box Process only
Process
MEAS.
Laser check START
Selection "Continuous inspection"
dialog box "Inspection" dialog box
BACK All components
finish being
checked. Normally
Error
Change/laser
BACK (only in Continuous

BACK check mode)
Single check "Inspection" dialog box

"Inspection" dialog box for displayed in Single check
setting the conditions mode
Success/error
HOD device key
BACK INSP.
ENTER/CANCEL
Teaching PREV/NEXT "Laser position

measurement" dialog box
FEED
Feeder knock Change of a component

pick-up position
7 121
7.7.2.5.2 Continuous inspection
When you select the [Laser check] command on the [Check] menu invoked
from the [Tool] menu, the "Continuation inspection" dialog box appears on the
screen.
Set the "Component of meas." and "Bounds of meas." menu items on the
"Continuation inspection" dialog box.
When you click the <INSP.> button or press the <START> switch on the
"Continuation inspection" dialog box, the system starts checking the laser
height within the range specified.
When the system centers a component successfully, the result of the check
operation is displayed on the "Inspection" screen, but the system does not
pause temporarily.
The system repeats a check of a component until it finishes checking the last
component within the specified range, then returns to the "Continuation
inspection" dialog box.
If the system detects an error during check, it enters Single check mode.
(1) "Continuous inspection" dialog box

When you select the [Check] command on the [Tool] menu, then the [Laser
check] command, the following "Continuation inspection" dialog box, which
allows you to set the conditions for checking components continuously,
Figure 7.7.2.5.2.1 "Continuation inspection" dialog box
7 122
1) Component of meas. (measurement)
Set one of the radio buttons to check only components which satisfy the
certain condition from Component data.
All compo.:
Checks all components specified in component data.
Thin compo.:
Checks only components whose height is the value you specified in
the edit box or lower.
Appointed compo. type:
Checks only components whose types are specified with the combo
box.
Appointed nozzle No.:
Checks only components which are to be picked by the nozzle whose
number is specified with the combo box.
Laser centering compo.
Checks only components which are centered with laser.
Vision centering compo.
Checks only components which are centered with the VCS (not
available to a KE-2030/KE-2010).
7 123
2) Bounds of meas. (measurement)
Check this check box if you want to check components whose number are
specified here among the components already selected with the setting
item "Component of meas." above. When you check this check box, you
can set the following items.
Start compo. No.:

Check this check box to specify the first component number in
Component data to be checked. Then, change the first component
number displayed in the edit box.
End compo. No.:
Check this check box to specify the last component number in
Component data to be checked. Then, change the last component
number displayed in the edit box.
Only placement compo:
Check this check box to check components specified in Component
data which are also specified in Placement data.
7 124
3) <INSP.> button (<START> button)
This button starts continuous check operation.
4) <BACK> button
This button returns you to the previous screen (ESC key).
5) Short-cut keys
On the "Continuation inspection" dialog box, the following short-cut keys
are provided:
Keyboard Operation panel key HOD key Action

START Starts continuous check.
6) Question
Immediately after the system starts continuous check, it displays the
dialog box which asks you how to handle a component whose size is 1
mm or less after check.
Figure 7.7.2.5.2.2 "Question - to return minimum component" dialog box
Throw away every time.

The system discards a component in the way you specified every
time.
Returns every time
The system returns a component onto its original position.
Inquiries every time
The system displays the "Question" dialog box every time it finishes
measuring a component whose size is 1 mm or less.
7 125
(2) Screen displayed during continuous check
While the system is checking laser height continuously, the following dialog
box appears on the screen. The description of a component being checked,
component pick-up position and the result of inspection are displayed on this
dialog box. In addition, the progress condition of the continuous check
appears also.
Figure 7.7.2.5.2.3 Laser height continuous check dialog box
After checking laser height, the results are displayed in this "Result of
inspection" column.
The "Short side" and the "Long side" indicate the data when the system
detects the minimum width of a component for the first time and second
time respectively.
The results are valid only if the status of both "Short side" and "Long side"
is "OK".
7 126
Status
OK: Centering is done successfully.
Number: Centering
(Each number indicates the error code number of the laser
status).
Outline
The component minimum width (dimensions) detected when it is
centered successfully is displayed here.
Angle
The angle when a component is centered is displayed here.
2) Progress situation
This slider bar indicates the progress situation of the current continuous
check operation.
To forcibly abort the check, press the <STOP> button. The following
dialog box appears on the screen. Select whether to abort the check or
not.
Figure 7.7.2.5.2.4 "Question - to interrupt process" dialog box
3) Check error
If a check error occurs, that is, the laser status is not "OK", the following
dialog box appears on the screen to allow you to enter Single check
mode.
Figure 7.7.2.5.2.5 Continuous check error dialog box
7 127
4) End of continuous check
When the system finishes checking all components which satisfy the
conditions you specified, the following dialog box appears on the screen.
Figure 7.7.2.5.2.6 "Information - end of continuous inspection" dialog box
7.7.2.5.3 Single inspection

When you click the <INSP.> button (F10 key), the system starts checking a
component. When it finishes checking the component, the result appears on
the screen.
When you click the <MEAS.> button (F10 key), the system starts measuring a
component. When it finishes measuring a component, the result appears on
the screen.
On the "Inspection" screen, you can manually enter the pick-up position or use
the teaching function to enter it. When you check the check box "The taught
result is reflected in the pick data.", the taught data is stored into Pick data.
On the "Laser position measurement" screen, pressing the NEXT or
PREVIOUS key of the HOD or the F5 or F6 key moves the component pick-up
position to the alternative component.
In Continuous check mode, pressing the <START> switch resumes the
continuous check.
7 128
(1) Setting check conditions
If you enter Single check mode when a continuous check error occurs, the
following "Inspection" dialog box appears on the screen.
Inspection dialog box
1) Component of insp. (inspection)

The description of a component to be inspected and its pick-up position
are displayed here.
2) Inspected value
The laser height of a component to be inspected ("LA Pos") and its height
(Compo. height) are displayed here.
7 129
3) <MEAS.> button
This button measures the laser height.
(See Section 7.7.2.5.4 "Measuring laser height".)
4) Pickup position
The pick-up position of a component is displayed here. You can change
the pick-up position to the previous alternative component or next one.
<FEED> button
This button knocks a feeder (other than a 32-mm paper tape feeder)
once to feed a component.
"The taught results reflected in the pick data."

Check this check box if you want to store the result taught by the
HOD device into Pick data. When unchecked, only the coordinates
of the current pick-up position are applied to Pick data.
After checking laser height, the result is displayed in this "Result of
inspection" column. The "Short side" and the "Log side" indicate the data
obtained when the system detects the minimum width of a component for
the first time and second time respectively. These values are effective
only when each status of the "Short side" and "Long side" is "OK".
Status
OK: Centering is done successfully.
Number: Centering failed. (Each number indicates the error code
number of the laser status.)
Outline
The width of a component which is detected with laser when the
component is centered successfully is displayed here.
Angle
The angle obtained when a component is centered is displayed here.
7 130
6) Short-cut keys
On the "Inspection" screen, the following short-cut keys are provided.
Keyboard Operation panel HOD key Action

F10 ENTER Performs a single check.
F9 Cancels an independent inspection.
F7 Measures the checked value.
F4 Knocks a feeder.
F5 PREVIOUS Previous alternative component.
F6 NEXT Next alternative component.
7.7.2.5.4 Measuring laser height

(1) Measuring laser height
When you select the <MEAS.> button on the Inspection screen, a screen
shown below appears:
Laser position measurement dialog box
7 131
(1) Laser position measurement value
The descriptions required to measure laser height are displayed here.
Values set before measurement are displayed in parentheses.
LA Pos (laser position)

You can change the laser height (position) as you like. The value
specified here is used as the current laser height when the system
starts judging if the laser height is within the appropriate range.
"The height of component is measured at the same time."
When checked, the system measures the height of a component
before measuring the laser height. It automatically calculates the
laser height also at the same time. In this case, the laser height
automatically calculated is used as the current laser height when the
system judges if it is within the appropriate range. Therefore, you
cannot specify the laser height.
"The measurement result is reflected in the component data."
Check this check box if you want to store the measured laser height
into Component data immediately.
2) Range of laser position measurement
Direction of movement
The system repetitively measures the laser height from the height
displayed in the "Laser position measurement value" column within
the range specified. When a component is centered with laser
successfully, the system finishes measuring the laser height.
Select one of the radio buttons below.

1) Alternation
2) Up
3) Down
7 132
Enter the distance to be moved in units of step and the up and down
range in each edit box.
range
Movement

Movement step
Side of a

component
Current laser
height
range
Movement
Figure 7.7.2.5.4 Laser height judgment range (current height)
Pick face of compo. face under compo.

face under compo. Pick face of compo.
The system measures the component height within the range
specified here in addition to a value displayed in the "Range of laser
position measurement". The start point can be on either the
picked-up side or bottom side of a component.
3) Screen displayed while the system is inspecting the laser height in Single
check mode
The following dialog box appears on the screen while the system is
inspecting the laser height in Single check mode. Data on a component
being inspected, pick-up position and laser height are displayed on this
dialog box to show the current inspection progress.
Figure 7.7.2.5.4.3 Executing inspection dialog box
7 133
The laser status value appears here if a component is centered with laser
successfully. The meaning of each item is the same as that for check
operation.
7 134
7.7.3 SOT Direction Check
7.7.3.1 Overview
The machine uses the OCC to check the 3-termianl SOT direction.
7.7.3.2 Checking function

The function of this 3-terminal SOT direction check is overviewed in Table 7.7.3.2.1.
Table 7.7.3.2.1 SOT direction check function
Check Description Check mode Remarks
3-terminal SOT Checks to see if the direction Independent inspection
direction check of a 3-terminal SOT Continuous inspection
component is correct.
7.7.3.3 Operations
The system automatically selects a head that is used to pick up a component.
The system selects and uses a nozzle already attached on a head rather than
one not attached so that the frequency of nozzle replacement can be reduced.
However, the system may use a different head every time it measures a
component depending on the nozzle attachment condition.
Applicable component size
The applicable SOT component size is 1608 to 4.0 mm x 4.0 mm. The width
and length of an electrode is 0.2 mm to 1.0 mm and 0.1 mm to 1.0 mm
respectively.
Returning a component after checking it
The system returns some checked components onto their original positions, or
discards other ones depending on their packaging style as shown in Table
below. The Question dialog box appears on the screen to prompt you to
select whether to discard a checked component. Where to discard a
component is determined according to the setting of Compo Reject to on the
Component data screen. When checking continuously, the system displays
the selection dialog box that asks you if it discards all components before start
of check, or displays the Question dialog box every time it checks a
component.
Table 7.7.3.3.1 Requirements for returning/discarding a component

Packaging Requirements When returning a When discarding
style component a component
Tape feeders other than the above *1
Bulk *1
Holder *1
MTC *1
MTS *1
Stick
*1 The system discards a checked component when the menu item Compo Reject
7 135
to is set to Trash conveyor or Protect.
Selecting a feeder used to pick a component
If two or more feeders are assigned to the same type of components on the
Pick data screen, the system starts picking up components from one whose
data was entered first of all by default. Only in Independent Inspection mode,
you can change the feeder used to pick up a component intentionally.
Changing the coordinates of a component pick-up position
When a component is not picked up properly, manually enter the coordinates or
use the HOD device to teach them to change the coordinates of a component
pick-up position.
If there is no Pick data created, you can manually attach a component to a
nozzle. However, in such a case, you cannot enter coordinates that indicate
the component pick-up position. You cannot operate a feeder either.
Check
The system places a picked-up component onto the SOT direction check stage
at a 0-degree angle, and uses the left OCC to judge if this angle is appropriate
or not.
7.7.3.4 Operation sequence
7.7.3.4.1 Independent inspection sequence

The SOT independent inspection function is described below.
Table 7.7.3.4.1 SOT direction independent inspection

Operation Remarks
Start of an 1. Check to see if an SOT direction inspection is available or not. Displays an error when
independent Checks to see if the specified feeder is available or not.. a check error occurs.
inspection
Checks to see if a production program is created completely or not
2. Initialization
Initializes a driver and other devices.
Selection of a 1. Selects a component to be checked. Displays a dialog box or
component an error if there is no
2. Displays the component information.
component to be
checked.
Execution of an 1. Displays the component information. Displays a dialog box.
inspection 2. Displays a component pick-up position.
3. Makes a trivial adjustment of a component pick-up position.
Makes a trivial adjustment of a component pick-up position by
teaching or manual input of data.
Checks to see if the adjusted value is stored onto Pick data or not.
4. Selects a component to be picked up.
Changes a feeder to the alternate feeder.
5. Controls a knocking operation of a feeder.
6. Displays a check result.
7. Checks the direction of an SOT component.
Check of the 1. Controls picking-up of a component.
SOT direction 2. Controls execution of the SOT direction inspection.
3. Controls returning of a component.
End of an 1. Quit process
independent
inspection Finishes operating a driver or other devices.
The independent inspection sequence is shown in Figure 7.7.3.4.1.

7 136
START
Select a component to
be checked
(on the dialog box).
Executes a check
Execution Check result
End
Displays a dialog box
indicating execution of
an inspection.
END
Figure 7.7.3.4.1 SOT direction independent inspection sequence
7 137
7.7.3.4.2 Continuous inspection sequence
The SOT continuous inspection function is described below.
Table 7.7.3.4.2 SOT direction continuous inspection function

Operation Remarks
Start of an 1. Check to see if an SOT direction inspection is available or not. Displays an error when
independent Checks to see if the specified feeder is available or not.. a check error occurs.
inspection
Checks to see if a production program is created completely or not
2. Initialization
Initializes a driver and other devices.
Selection of a 1. Selects a component to be checked. Displays a dialog box or
component an error if there is no
2. Displays the component information.
component to be
checked.
Execution of an 1. Displays the component information. Displays a dialog box.
inspection 2. Displays a component pick-up position.
3. Makes a trivial adjustment of a component pick-up position.
Makes a trivial adjustment of a component pick-up position by
teaching or manual input of data.
Checks to see if the adjusted value is stored onto Pick data or not.
4. Selects a component to be picked up.
Changes a feeder to the alternate feeder.
5. Controls a knocking operation of a feeder.
6. Displays a check result.
7. Checks the direction of an SOT component.
Check of the 1. Controls picking-up of a component.
SOT direction 2. Controls execution of the SOT direction inspection.
3. Controls returning of a component.
End of an 1. Quit process
independent
inspection Finishes operating a driver or other devices.
The continuous inspection sequence is shown in Figure 7.7.3.4.2.
7 138
START
Select a component to
be checked
No
Check the next component.
Check to see if there

is a component to be
checked.
Suspending of a check
Yes
End
Display a dialog box

during indicting execution
of inspection or the result.
END
Figure 7.7.3.4.2 SOT direction continuous inspection sequence
7 139
7.7.3.5 Operations
7.7.3.5.1 SOT direction independent inspection operation
7.7.3.5.2 SOT direction independent inspection component selecting dialog

box
When you select the [Tool] command from the menu bar, the [Check] command o
the Tool menu, and the [SOT direction independent inspection] command on the
Production menu, the following dialog box appears on the screen. In the No.:
Name combo box, 3-terminal SOT components are listed so that you can select
any one to be checked.
Figure 7.7.3.5.1 SOT direction independent inspection component selecting

dialog box
7.7.3.5.3 SOT direction independent inspection dialog box

When you click the <Insp.> button on the dialog box shown in Figure 7.7.3.5.1, the
7 140
Figure 7.7.3.5.2 SOT direction independent inspection dialog box
Component of inspection
Data on a component selected to be checked appears here.
Pickup position
Data on the component pick-up position appears here. You can change the
pick-up position to that of the previous alternate component or the next
alternate component also.
<Feed> button
When you click this button, the system knocks a feeder once to feed a
component (not available with a 32-mm paper tape).
Update pick data with new coordinates
Check this check box if you want to store the result of teaching operation
by the HOD device onto Pick data. Otherwise, the specified coordinates
are applied to the current pick-up position only.
Result of SOT direction inspection
After checking a component, the recognized component direction is displayed
as the check result, OK or NG. If the system failed to recognize the image of
a component, a check error is displayed here.
Shortcut keys
On the SOT independent inspection screen, the following shortcut keys are
available.
Table 7.7.3.5.1 Shortcut keys
Keyboard Operation panel HOD key Action
F10 ENTER Executes an independent inspection.
F4 Knocks a feeder.
F5 PREVIOUS Previous alternate component
F6 NEXT Next alternate component
7.7.3.5.4 Under the SOT direction independent inspection dialog box

When you click the <Insp.> button on the dialog box shown in Figure 7.7.3.5.4, the
Figure 7.7.3.5.4 Under the SOT direction independent inspection dialog box
Component of inspection
Displays the data on a component that the system is checking and the system
current operation here.
7 141
7.7.3.6 SOT direction continuous inspection
7.7.3.6.1 SOT direction continuous inspection dialog box

When you select the [Tool] command from the menu bar, the [Check] command o
the Tool menu, and the [SOT direction continuous inspection] command on the
Production menu, the following dialog box appears on the screen.
Figure 7.7.3.6.1 SOT direction continuous inspection dialog box
SOT inspection type

Specify whether to inspect only components that are satisfied with a certain
requirement from components stored in Component data.
All components
The system inspects all components stored in Component data.
Range specification
Check this radio button if you want to check the components whose
numbers are specified by you. When you check this radio button, you
can specify the following items:
Start compo. No.
Check this check box if you are to specify the number of a first
component to be checked. After checking this check box, enter the
first component number in the edit box.
End compo. No.
Check this check box if you are to specify the number of the last
component to be checked. After checking this check box, enter the
last component number in the edit box.
Only placement compo.
Check this check box to check components that is actually to be placed
and whose data is stored in Placement data only.
<Inspection> button
Starts an SOT direction inspection continuously.
7 142
<Exit (ESC)> button
Returns to the previous screen displayed before you invoke this dialog
box.
Shortcut keys
On this SOT direction continuous inspection result dialog box, the
following shortcut keys are available.
Table 7.7.3.6.1 Shortcut keys

Key of a Operation HOD key Operation
keyboard panel key
SRART Starts continuous SOT inspection.
7.7.3.6.2 Dialog box for returning a checked component

Immediately after starting the continuous inspection, the system displays the dialog
box that asks you how to handle a checked component.
Figure 7.7.3.6.2 Question dialog box that asks you how to return a checked
component
Throw away every time

The system discards a component according to the setting of Compo Reject
to on the Component data screen.
Return every time
The system returns a component to its original position.
Inquires every time
The system displays a dialog box that asks you how to handle a component
every time it finishes checking.
7 143
7.7.3.6.3 Under the SOT direction continuous inspection dialog box
During continuous inspection, the system displays the following dialog box on
which data on a component being checked, the inspection progress, and the
inspection result are displayed.
Figure 7.7.3.6.3 Under the SOT direction continuous inspection dialog box
Result of SOT direction inspection

After inspection, the result is displayed here, OK or NG.
7.7.3.6.4 Interruption dialog box

To interrupt the inspection being executed forcibly, press the <STOP> button.
The following dialog box appears on the screen. Select whether to stop the
inspection or not.
Figure 7.7.3.6.4 Question dialog box for interrupting the current inspection
7 144
7.7.3.6.5 Continuous inspection error dialog box
If the inspection result indicates NG, the following dialog box appears and it
allows you to enter the system to Single Inspection mode.
Figure 7.7.3.6.5 Continuous inspection error dialog box
7.7.3.6 End of continuous inspection

When the system finishes checking all components you specified, the following
dialog box appears that notifies you of end of continuous inspection.
Figure 7.7.3.7 End of inspection dialog box
7 145
CHAPTER 8 MACHINE SETUP
8.1 Overview
Table 8.1.1 shows the items to be set on the Machine Setup menu.
Table 8.1.1 Machine setup items

No. Machine setup group Description
1 ATC nozzle setup *1 Assigns nozzles to ATCs whose numbers are 1 to 24 (KE-2010).
*1 The ATC numbers *1 Assigns nozzles to ATCs whose numbers are 1 to 30 , and A ,B
may vary ( KE-2020).
depending on the
*1 Assigns nozzles to ATCs whose numbers are L1 to L21, and R1 to R21.
model you use.
(KE-2030)
*1 Assigns nozzles to ATCs whose numbers are 1 to 18, and A to C
(KE-2040).
Sets also the number and type of the nozzles to be assigned, the vacuum
value and the laser height for each nozzle when it is attached on the head.
2 Vacuum value without Vacuum value obtained when the nozzle is not mounted.
nozzle
3 Reference pin position Positions of the reference and follower pins from the origin.
4 Shape clamp position Position of the edge reference from the origin.
5 MTC shuttle pick position MTC shuttle pick position
(Not available for a
KE-2030)
6 MTS position offset MTS first mark position
(Not covered with the MTS second mark position
KE-2030)
7 Component scrap The position where IC components are discarded.
position The position where chip components are discarded.
8 IC conveyor belt position The position where the IC collection belt is installed.
(Not covered with the The position on the IC collection belt where the components are discarded.
KE-2030)
9 Head wait position Position on which the head pauses to protect a component
10 Device enable With this setup item, set to Not used a device unit (such as a head and
MTC) which cannot be used for producing PWBs due to malfunction.
If such a device unit is set as Not used, a production operation completes
normally even though the unit is indispensable to production of PWBs.
11 Multi-station line Defines whether the machine is connected to an HLC to incorporate it into
a multi-station line
If it is incorporated in the line, set the IP address.
12 PWB conveyor Sets delay for PWB conveyor sensor (the delay of the PWB conveyor
sensor for a cut out board or punch hole board), (units of delay (time [ms]
or length [mm]), whether to perform the automatic PWB width adjustment
function, back-up table board lower limit, acceleration, and stroke.
13 Vacuum table Sets the time of period while the vacuum table is to be operating.
14 Signal light Sets the signal light pattern for each operation phase.
15 Bad mark sensor Bad mark position
teaching
Non-bad mark position
81
8.1.1 Immediately after start-up
The machine setup initial screen, as shown in Figures 8.1.1.1 through Figure 8.1.1.8,
appears when [Set up], then [Machine Setup] is selected from the menu bar.
The machine setup initial screen shows the values defined currently for the
parameters to be set. To scroll the screen, move the scroll bar up and down using
the cursor keys or page up and down keys.
Current settings of the menu item "ATC nozzle setup"
Figure 8.1.1.1 Machine setup initial screen 1

Current settings of the menu items "Vacuum value without nozzle", "Reference pin
position", "Shape clamp position", "MTC shuttle pick position", "MTS position offset"
and "Component scrap position"
82
Current settings of the menu items "Option Device enable" and "Function Device
enable"
Current settings of the menu items , "Function Device enable", "VCS Device enable"
and "MTC/MTS Device enable"
83
Current settings of the menu items "Vacuum table" and "Signal light".
Current settings of the menu item "Signal light".
To change the setting of each item select [Setting Group] of the menu bar.
When you select an item on the Set up group menu, and set the appropriate
parameter, the Machine setup initial screen reappears.
84
8.2 Menu
8.2.1 File
See Sections 3.6 "File Operations" and 4.2 "File" for the basic operations.
8.2.1.1 Registered nzl. no table
When you select the [Registered nzl. no table] command from the [File] menu,
which is invoked from the menu, bar, the Registered nozzle no. table dialog box
appears (see Figure 8.2.1.1.2) on the screen.
The left list box of this dialog box lists the nozzle numbers registered in the nozzle
information.
If the customized nozzle is not registered, only the standard nozzles (whose number
is 500 to 508, or 510 to 517) are displayed on this dialog box.
Data corresponding to the nozzle number that is displayed on the Registered
nozzle no. table appears on the right-side nozzle information area.
The left side indicates the values designed for nozzles (Design), while the right side
indicates the mechanical parameter information (MechPara). Those data matches
each entry name stored in a file (NZL*.INI) loaded when the machine reads the
nozzle information from a floppy disk. <Version 1.12 or higher>
Figure 8.2.1.1.1 Registered nzl. no. table menu command

(Screen example when a KE-2020 is used)
Nozzle information window
Figure 8.2.1.1.2 Registered nozzle no. table dialog box
85
8.2.1.1.1 Nozzle information editing function
Caution Only a user whose level is service man or higher is allowed to use the
nozzle information editing function. (If you do not handle this function
correctly, it may cause a production error.)
<Contact your distributor or us directly for details.> <Version 1.12 or
higher>
Step 1.
Press the F3 or F4 key when the Nozzle information window is activated (its line
is highlighted). This allows you to edit Design data or MechPara data on
the highlighted line.
Double-clicking of the data column also allows you to edit data in the same way.
Note that you cannot edit the nozzle number (NzlNo) or data displayed on the
non-editable field (data column in which any data is not displayed).
Step 2.
When you press the <Return> key after editing data, the displayed data is
updated as you edited.
If a parameter error occurs when you press the <Return> key, the machine
displays the original data again.
If you click the nozzle information window or vertical scroll bar with a mouse
during editing, the current editing process is aborted.
Step 3.
When you edit any of data, the <Abort> button appears on the screen.
When you click the <Abort> button, all of your editing is canceled.
If an input range over error occurs when you click the <OK> button, all of your
editing is canceled too.
8.2.1.1.2 Special key operations

If you press the Ctrl key and down arrow key or the Ctrl key and up arrow key at the
same time when the nozzle information window is activated (its data line is
highlighted), it allows you to select another nozzle number on the nozzle number list.
The machine displays the corresponding data of the nozzle number newly selected
dynamically.
8.2.1.1.3 Saving the nozzle data

When you edit the nozzle information and click the <OK> button, the data you edited
is automatically saved although any saving data confirmation screen does not appear
when you quit the Machine Setup menu.
86
8.2.1.2 Read Nzl. data
When you select the [Read Nzl. data] command from the File menu that is invoked
form the menu bar, the Nzl. data file open dialog box (see Figure 8.2.1.2.2)
This function adds nozzle information on customized nozzles to the system.

Additional nozzle information is provided from a floppy disk.
The format of an additional nozzle information file is NZL*.INI, that is, an
INI file format, where * is a three-digit nozzle number.
When you select this menu command, insert the floppy disk on which additional
nozzle information is stored in advance.
Figure 8.2.1.2.1 Read Nzl. data menu command

Figure 8.2.1.2.2 Nzl. data file open dialog box
87
Select the desired file, then click the <Open> button.
You have registered additional nozzle information to the system at this point.
When you click the <Cancel> button, any data is not registered.
You can check the added nozzle number with the Registered nzl. no table menu
command, which is described under Section 8.2.1.1.
If the specified nozzle information is already registered, the dialog box that asks you
whether to overwrite the existing nozzle information (see Figure 8.2.1.2.3). When
you select Yes, the system updates the existing data with the specified nozzle
information that is stored on a floppy disk.
Figure 8.2.1.2.3 Nozzle information update confirmation dialog box
If no floppy disk is inserted into the drive or if any data is not read due to a failure of
the inserted floppy disk, the system displays the error dialog box (see Figure
8.2.1.2.4) on the screen. Check the floppy disk drive or contents of the floppy disk.
Figure 8.2.1.2.4 Floppy disk access error dialog box
88
8.2.1.3 Exit
Select [File] on the menu bar, then [Exiting Application], or click the close button (X)
at the upper right corner of the dialog box. The system quits the Machine Setup
menu.
8.2.1.3.1 Saving the settings

Although push buttons <OK>, and <Cancel> and <Apply> are available with each
setup group dialog box, pressing the <OK> or <Apply> button will not save the
data onto the hard disk.
When you change the setting(s) on each Setup group dialog box, a dialog box
appears asking you whether to save the setting(s) or not (see Figure 8.2.1.3.1.5).
When you click the <Yes> button, the setting(s) is (are) saved onto the hard disk.
Figure 8.2.1.3.1.5 Save confirmation screen
Table 8.2.1.3.1.1 Save confirmation buttons

No. Button Action
1 Yes Saves the setting data onto the hard disk.
2 No Cancels the setting data.
3 Cancel Cancels the Exiting Application command.
8.2.1.3.2 Setting the safe direction of each I/O

After you select the [Exiting Application] command, the dialog box shown in Figure
8.2.1.3.2.1 appears on the screen.
Figure 8.2.1.3.2.1 Reset I/O dialog box
Table 8.2.1.3.2.1 Buttons for setting the safe direction of each I/O
No. Button Action
1 Yes Sets each I/O safe direction, then quits the Machine Setup menu.
2 No Quits the Machine Setup menu without setting each I/O safe direction.
89
8.2.2 Setting group commands
When you select the [Setting Group] command on the menu bar, the commands
shown in Figure 8.2.2.1 appears on the screen.
Figure 8.2.2.1 Setting Group command items
Note: 1) You cannot select any dimmed menu item. (The displayed available
depending on the model you use)
2) If you have to drive any mechanical part at setup, see Section 8.3
"Mechanical Setup" to drive it.
8 10
8.2.2.1 ATC nozzle setup
When [ATC nozzle setup] is selected from the [Setting Group] menu, the dialog box
shown in Figure 8.2.2.1.1 ATC nozzle setup appears.
*1
Figure 8.2.2.1.1 ATC nozzle setup dialog box (Screen example when a KE-2020 is used)
(1) Setting items

1 Nozzle No. Nozzle number to be allocated to an ATC
*1 The displayed available ATC numbers vary depending on the model you
use (see No. 1 ATC nozzle setup of Table 8.1.1).
2 Noz. kind Nozzle type to be allocated to an ATC
3 Vacuum Vacuum value with the nozzle attached (for automatic operation only)
4 Noz. height Offset of length with respect to the reference nozzle (for automatic operation
only)
(2) How to set

Setting the Nozzle No.
A number is assigned to an ATC. Define a nozzle for each ATC by
using the nozzle number.
The nozzle number at which the input focus is located can be set. The
numbers entered are validated by the ENTER key or the field selection
key.
Example: (KE-2020)
1 501
2 502 The ATC number "2" can be set.
3 503
The nozzle number within the range shown in the table below can be
entered.
Table 8.2.2.1.1 Setting range of the nozzle number

No. Input item Setting range
1 Nozzle No. 500 to 999 and Space (for no assignment)
If a number entered is erased by the DELETE or ScrlL key, then that

action is validated by pressing the ENTER or field selection key, the
assigned number is canceled and all the setting values shown
8 11
disappear.
Noz. kind
Set the type of a nozzle to be mounted.
A nozzle type in the combo box at which the input focus is located can
be set. Select the type from the list displayed in the combo box, then
validate it with the ENTER key or field selection key.
Note that only the ATC numbers from R1 to R4 can be set when you
select VacUnit as the nozzle type (for the KE-2030).
When you do not enter the nozzle number, you cannot set any nozzle
type.
Click the <Auto> button to set each value, then change the nozzle type
automatically set.
To change the setting "VacUnit" of an ATC to one of "normal", "T-type"
and "Gripper", change it to "Reset" first. Then, set the desired one.
<Earlier than Version 1.12>
This item is set automatically with the machine only.

However, you have to set the setting item VacUnit on the Vacuum
CAL unit position dialog box as shown at below.
<Version 1.12 or higher>
Available nozzle types are shown in the table below:
Table 8.2.2.1.2 Available nozzle types

No. Setting item Description
1 normal Normal nozzle
2 T-type Cleaner type nozzle
3 Gripper Gripper nozzle
4 VacUnit Vacuum calibration unit
Setting the vacuum value: Vacuum

Set the vacuum value when a nozzle is mounted.
Only automatic setting is available.
Setting the nozzle height: Noz. height

Set the offset value of the mounted nozzle with respect to the reference
nozzle.
Only automatic setting is available.
Vacuum calibration unit position (VacUnit)

Set the vacuum calibration post position attached on the ATC.
When you click the button for setting the vacuum calibration position,
the Vacuum CAL unit position dialog box appears on the screen as
shown in Figure 8.2.2.1.1 (1).
The number displayed left to the button indicates the ATC number
currently set. If any number is not set, *** is displayed.
8 12
ATC number selection list box
Figure 8.2.2.1.1 (1) Vacuum CAL unit position dialog box
Check or uncheck the check box use to specify whether to use the
vacuum calibration unit or not. This check box is not checked as
default.
If this check box is not checked, you cannot select any ATC number.
If this check box is checked, select the ATC number on which the
vacuum calibration unit is attached from the ATC number selection list
box.
When this dialog box appears for the first time, the default number
unique to the model appears as the ATC number. If the vacuum
calibration unit cannot be attached at this default position, the machine
displays the smallest ATC number on which the unit can be attached.
You cannot select the ATC numbers shown below:

The table below indicates the ATC positions on which you cannot attach a
vacuum calibration unit physically. These unavailable positions vary
The ATC number selection list box does not display these positions.
Table 8.2.2.1.3 ATC numbers you cannot select

No. Model Unavailable positions
1 2010 4, 5, 11, 12, 16, 17, 23, 24
2 2020 1, 2, 10, 11, 16, 17 , 25, 26, A, B,
3 2030 L1 ~ L21, R5 ~ R21
4 2040 4, 5, 11, 12, B
5 2020S 1, 7, 8, 11, 17, 18, 21, 27, 28, B
You can select ATC numbers that are not validated although you
assigned a nozzle to them already. In the same manner, you cannot
select an ATC number whose nozzle assignment is canceled unless the
cancel operation is validated.
Even though you change the vacuum calibration unit position on the
dialog box above, it cannot be effective unless you click the <OK> or
<Apply> button on the dialog box above.
8 13
If nozzles are assigned to all ATC positions or if there is no ATC position
to which a vacuum calibration unit can be assigned, the button for
setting the position is dimmed and you cannot specify a vacuum
calibration unit.
In such as case, cancel nozzle assignment of an available ATC position.
To do so, erase the nozzle number already assigned to an ATC position
on the ATC nozzle setup dialog box, and cancel the nozzle assignment.
Then click the <APPLY> button to validate your cancel operation.
You cannot assign a vacuum calibration unit to an ATC position to which
a nozzle is already assigned and validated or an ATC position where a
vacuum calibration unit cannot be attached physically (this varies
depending on the model you use). (Note that these ATC positions are
not displayed on the list box.)
When you check the check box use and validate your setting, the ATC
number you set is dimmed on the ATC nozzle setup dialog box and
you cannot check it. (VacUnit is displayed as the nozzle type.)
To disable the vacuum calibration unit position, uncheck the check box
use. You can assign a nozzle to an ATC position to which you already
assigned a vacuum calibration unit on the ATC nozzle setup dialog
box.
Automatic setting
When the F3 key is pressed, the machine puts the nozzle on a head
whose ATC number is focused and sets the necessary values.
When the Auto button is selected and the ENTER key is pressed, the
Automatic ATC number selection dialog box shown in Figure 8.2.2.1.2
appears. By selecting OK button and pressing the ENTER key,
nozzles is automatically in order of the marked ATC numbers.
1) The height of the tip of the nozzle mounted is measured to obtain the
nozzle height.
2) The nozzle number is set according to the size of the nozzle mounted.
3) The vacuum value is obtained and set with the nozzle being mounted.
8 14
Notes: 1) When there are two or more ATCs to be set automatically, automatic
setting can be terminated by pressing the STOP switch.
When the STOP switch is pressed during automatic setting, the machine
asks you whether to terminate the operation. Selecting <Yes>
terminates the operation immediately. Selecting <No> continues the
operation.
Even though you click the Cancel button, you cannot terminate the
automatic setting operation.
2) When carrying out the automatic setting, the nozzle number is also set
automatically, so, you do not have to enter it.
If the nozzle number entered before automatic setting is different from
the one obtained by the automatic setting, the nozzle number
automatically set is preferred.
3) Since the nozzle type is automatically set when you perform the
automatic setting operation, you do not have to enter it.
4) When the size of a nozzle obtained automatically is different from that of
the standard nozzle, the number of a customized nozzle is set
automatically if the obtained size matches the size registered in the
customized nozzle information.
If the obtained size matches two or more sizes registered in the
customized nozzle information, the system displays the Registered
nozzle no. table dialog box as shown in Figure 8.2.2.1.2. Select the
appropriate one from this table. The selected nozzle number is set to
the corresponding ATC.
Even though you click the <CANCEL> button at this point, the nozzle
numbers already set will not change. If you have not set a nozzle to
any ATC position, no nozzle number is set here. Manually enter the
nozzle number.
5) If the obtained size does not match any one registered in the customized
nozzle information, or if no nozzle information is registered, the system
displays the nozzle information not-registered error dialog box as shown
in Figure 8.2.2.1.3. Register the appropriate nozzle information from a
floppy disk.
8 15
Figure 8.2.2.1.2 Figure 8.2.2.1.3
Registered nozzle no. table dialog box Nozzle information not-registered error
dialog box
When you click the F3 key, the head moves to allow you to
attach/detach a nozzle.
CAUTION
Before clicking the F3 key, check to see if there is no one who is
Before clicking the F3 key, check to see if there is no obstacle (tool or
jig) left or attached in the machine.
Figure 8.2.2.1.4 ATC select dialog box (Screen example when a KE-2020 is used)
Note : The displayed available ATC numbers vary depending on the model you use
(3) Purpose
The nozzle height offset is used to finely control the nozzle height for laser
measurement of the components. This value, used in combination with the
non-nozzle vacuum value, determines whether the nozzle or component in
question is available or not. Note that this setting value is a supplementary
information for the nozzle and component detection because it can be detected
using the laser.
8 16
8.2.2.2 Vacuum value without nozzle
A screen appears as shown in Figure 8.2.2.2.1 Vacuum value without nozzle dialog
box when [Vacuum value without nozzle] is selected from the [Setting Group]
menu.
Figure 8.2.2.2.1 Vacuum value without nozzle setting dialog box
(1) Setting items

1 Vacuum value without The vacuum value without the nozzle attached (for automatic operation only)
nozzle
(2) How to set

By the Head button
Using the field selection key, select the desired Head, and click the <DONE>
button to obtain the vacuum value. When a nozzle is mounted to the head,
the nozzle is returned first and then the vacuum value is obtained.
By Teaching
Using the device key of the HOD, enter Teaching mode. Check that the
head whose vacuum value to be obtained is set as the device and then
press the ENTER key of the HOD.
When the desired head is set as the device when teaching mode, the
vacuum of the head is turned ON.
Notes: 1) Before exiting from Teaching mode by pressing the ENTER key of
the HOD, be sure to check that the vacuum of the head is turned
ON.
2) When entered Teaching mode by selecting a device other than a
head, the vacuum is not turned ON automatically. In this case,
press the VAC key of the HOD to turn ON the vacuum.
8 17
When you click the <DONE> button, the head moves to allow you to
attach/detach a nozzle.
Before clicking the <DONE> button, check to see if there is no one who
CAUTION
is working in the machine.
Before clicking the <DONE> button, check to see if there is no one who
can be injured around the machine.
Before clicking the <DONE> button, check to see if there is no obstacle
(tool or jig) left or attached in the machine.
8.2.2.3 Reference pin position

A screen appears as shown in Figure 8.2.2.3.1 Reference pin position setting
dialog box when [Reference pin position] is selected from the [Setting Group]
menu.
Figure 8.2.2.3.1 Reference pin position setting dialog box
(1) Setting items

1 Reference pin (X, Y) Reference pin position
2 Follower pin (X, Y) Follower pin position
3 Ref. pin adjust Board filting angle calculated based on the positions of the reference pin and
the follower pin (for automatic operation only)
8 18
(2) How to set
Key in X and Y coordinate values directly from the keyboard.
Use the HOD to teach and enter the coordinates. In this case, both the X
and Y values are entered at the same time if either X or Y is in focus.
When the X or Y of the reference pin is in focus, the values will be used for
the reference pin. When t-he X or Y of the follower pin is in focus, the
values will be used for the follower pin.
Press the F9 key or click the right button of the track ball to start up the
Mechanical Setup window. Then, set the Support plate to ON.
Figure 8.2.2.3.2
During teaching, the following Question message appears on the screen.
Figure 8.2.2.3.3
When the support plate is raised, click the <Yes> button.
HOD.
CAUTION If you are to produce PWBs based on the reference pin, be sure to
check the setting of the item "Reference pin" above. If the reference
pin is not set before a PWB is fed, the "Reference pin error" is
8 19
8.2.2.4 Shape clamp position
A screen appears as shown in Figure 8.2.2.4.1 Shape clamp position setting dialog
box when [Shape clamp position] is selected from the [Setting Group] menu.
Figure 8.2.2.4.1 Shape clamp position setting dialog box
(1) Setting items

1 X Stopper pin position
2 Y Reference board transport rail position
(2) Setting the position

Key in X and Y coordinate value directly from the keyboard.
Use the HOD to teach and enter the coordinates for X and Y separately. In
this case, if X is in focus, only X is taught, then stored.
To teach Y, Y shall be in focus.
CAUTION move your face or head close to the machine during operation of the
HOD.
8 20
8.2.2.5 MTC shuttle pick position
When you select the [MTC shuttle pick position] command, the "MTC shuttle pick
position setting" dialog box appears on the screen as shown in Figure 8.2.2.5.1.
Figure 8.2.2.5.1 MTC shuttle pick position setting dialog box
(1) Setting items

1 MTC shuttle pick position (X, Y, Z) Component pick-up position on the MTC shuttle

- Key in X, Y and Z coordinate values directly from the keyboard.
- Use the HOD to teach and enter the coordinates. In this case, if the input
focus is located in any of the X, Y and Z fields, all of the values are taught,
then entered (when you select the automatic teaching operation by a
camera).
- To teach the Z coordinate, the input focus should be located in the Z field.
Even though the input focus is located in any of the Z fields, the values are
all taught, then entered to the Large, Small and Clamp items.
- When you select the device key of the HOD, the following message appears
on the screen. When you click the <Yes> button, a shuttle is pulled out
from an MTC.
8 21
HOD.
Notes:
* The same pick-up position, which is indicated with "X" and "Y" and obtained by
teaching, is entered to all of the menu items displayed: "Large", "Small", "Clamp
L" and "Clamp S".
* If you use a twin-shuttle, you have to enter the coordinates to both of the "Pad #1"
and "Pad #2".
8 22
8.2.2.6 MTS position offset
When you select the [MTS position offset] command, the "MTS position offset setting"
dialog box appears on the screen as shown in Figure 8.2.2.6.1.
Figure 8.2.2.6.1 MTS position offset setting dialog box
(1) Setting items

1 1'st mark (X,Y) First mark position of the MTS
2 2'nd mark (X, Y) Second mark position of the MTS

Key in X and Y coordinate values directly from the keyboard.
Use the HOD to teach and enter the coordinates. In this case, if either X or
Y is in focus, both values are taught, then entered.
When you select the device key of the HOD, the following message appears
on the screen. When you click the <Yes> button, the MTS bank mark is
found out.
8 23
8.2.2.7 Component scrap position
A screen appears as shown in Figure 8.2.2.7.1 Component scrap position setting
dialog box when [Component scrap position] is selected from the [Setting Group]
menu.
Figure 8.2.2.7.1 Component scrap position setting dialog box
(1) Setting items

1 Tray Components (X, Y, Z) The scrap position for IC components
2 Tape & Stick Components The scrap position for chip components
(X, Y, Z)
3 Large Connectors (X, Y, Z) The scrap position for large components

Key in X, Y, and Z coordinate values directly from the keyboard.
Z must be in focus to teach the Z coordinate.
HOD.
Note: The left head cannot be as the component scrap position on the right side.
The right head cannot be set to the component scrap position on the left side
either.
8 24
8.2.2.8 IC conveyor belt position
When you select the [IC collection belt position] command, the "IC collection belt
position setting" dialog box appears on the screen as shown in Figure 8.2.2.8.1.
Figure 8.2.2.8.1 IC collection belt position setting dialog box
(1) Setting items

1 Instl. Pos (Installation position) IC collection belt installation position
(Front/Rear, Feeder mounting
hole number)
2 Component scrap position Component scrap position on the IC collection belt
(X, Y and Z)

How to install the IC collection belt
Set the IC collection belt installation position.
When you click the <POS.SET UP> button, the "Instl. Pos." dialog box
appears on the screen as shown in Figure 8.2.2.8.2.
Use the "Front" or "Rear" radio button to set the side.
Enter the feeder mounting hole number in the "Feeder No." edit box.
Notes:
- The range of feeder mounting hole number should be within the area the right
head can move over.
- When you click the <OK> button to quit the dialog box shown in Figure 8.2.2.8.2,
the system automatically calculates the component scrap position. Perform
teaching to check this calculated scrap position.
- If you optimize a production program before you set the IC collection belt position,
the feeder and the IC collection belt may overlap one another.
Component scrap position
8 25
- Key in X, Y and Z coordinate value directly from the keyboard.
- Use the HOD to teach and enter the coordinates. In this case, if either
X or Y is in focus, both values are taught, then entered.
- Z must be in focus to teach the Z coordinate.
Figure 8.2.2.8.2 "Inst. Pos." (IC collection belt position setting) dialog box
HOD.
8 26
8.2.2.9 Head wait position
When you select the menu item Head wait position, the following Head Wait
Position dialog box appears on the screen as shown below.
Figure 8.2.2.9.1 Head Wait Position dialog box
(1) Setting items

1 X, Y, Z Position at which the head pauses to protect a component

Key in X, Y, and Z coordinate values directly from the keyboard.
Z must be in focus to teach the Z coordinate.
HOD.
8 27
8.2.2.10 Device enable
A screen appears as shown in Figure 8.2.2.10.1 Device enable setting dialog box
with tabs when [Device enable] is selected from the [Setting Group] menu.
Figure 8.2.2.10.1 Device enable setting dialog box with tabs

Note: Data displayed under the Trolley and IC belt menu items of the dialog box
above varies depending on the model you use (see Table 8.2.2.10.2).
When you click the corresponding tab, the "Std Device enable", "Option Device
enable", "Function Device enable", "VCS Device enable" or "MTC/MTS Device
enable" dialog box appears.
Note that a KE-2010 does not display the "VCS Device enable" tab.
8.2.2.10.1 Std Device enable

When you click the Std Device enable tab, a screen appears as shown in Figure
8.2.2.10.1 Std Device enable setting dialog box. The Std Device enable
dialog box is displayed as the initial screen immediately after you select the
[Device enable] menu item from the [Setting Group] pull-down menu.
(1) Setting items

1 Std Device enable Unit to be used/not used
If a system unit malfunctions that unit may be defined as a unit not used
using this menu item. This allows the pick-and-place sequence to be
executed without modifying the production program data.
Table 8.3.10.1 shows whether or not a pick-and-place sequence can be

completed if the production program requires the unit defined as to be used
before it can complete itself.
8 28
(2) Setting the unit
Specify the device unit to be used with the check box.
A device unit which is not installed as an option (displayed in dimmed
characters) cannot be checked.
Zeroing is required again when changing the head status from as not to be
used to as to be used.
(3) Production operation
Table 8.2.2.10.1 Placement when a unit is set as Unused

No. Unit Production operation
1 L-Head nozzle 1 Components to be placed by these heads are not placed.
nozzle 2 The Optimization utility does not assign any component to these
heads.
nozzle 3
nozzle 4
2 R-Head nozzle 1
3 Light The machine does not place a component that is recognized with the
VCS under the penetrative light.
4 L-OCC Placement of components is carried out without BOC mark or bank
mark recognition.
Placement of IC mark components is not carried out.
5 R-OCC Placement of components is carried out without bank mark
recognition.
6 Feeder float detector This function is disabled but placement of components is carried out.
(Front inside, front outside,
rear inside and rear outside)
7 Support plate stopper This function is disabled but placement of components is carried out.
8 29
8.2.2.10.2 Option Device Enable
When you select the tab Option Device enable, the Option Device enable
setting dialog box appears on the screen as shown in Figure 8.2.2.10.2.
Figure 8.2.2.10.2 Option Device enable setting dialog box

Note: Data displayed under the Trolley and IC belt menu items of the dialog box
above varies depending on the model you use (see Table 8.2.2.10.2).
(1) Setting items

1 Option Device enable Unit to be used/not used
When you specify a malfunctioning unit as a unit not used on this dialog
box, you can allow the machine to pick up and place a component without
modifying the production program data.
Table 8.2.2.10.2 shows whether a component is actually placed on a board or

not if the production program requires the unit defined as to be used in order
to complete component placement operation.

A device unit that is not installed as an option (dimmed on the dialog box)
cannot be checked.
Zeroing is required again when you change the head status from Not to be
used to To be used.
8 30
Table 8.2.2.10.2 Placement when a unit is set as Unused

1 Feeder positioning indicator This function is disabled but placement of components is carried out.
(front, rear)
2 Feeder trolley This function is disabled but placement of components is carried out.
(front, rear)
KE2010,2020,2040
(front L, front R, rear L, rear R)
KE2030
3 IC Conveyor belt This function is disabled but placement of components is carried out.
(front, rear) (Not available for a
KE-2030)
4 Bad mark sensor This function is disabled but placement of components is carried out.
5 Shape clamp Offset adjustment of the mark position when mark is used or of the
placement point when mark is not used is not carried out.
Offset adjustment is made by referring to the mark for placement
when mark is used.
6 Auto-width conveyor This function is disabled but placement of components is carried out.
7 Component verification The machine does not perform the component verification function
even though this function is designated.
8 Coplanarity Placement is carried out without performing coplanarity even when
component coplanarity is designated.
9 HMS This function is disabled but placement of components is carried out.
10 Mini signal light This function is disabled but placement of components is carried out.
11 Vacuum table This function is disabled but placement of components is carried out.
8 31
8.2.2.10.3 Function Device enable
A screen appears as shown in Figure 8.2.2.10.3 Function Device enable setting
dialog box appears when the [Function Device enable] tab is selected
When "MTS" is selected on the "MTC/MTS Device enable" dialog box, the menu
items are changed to "Bank mark Recognition [Rear (MTS)]".
Figure 8.2.2.10.3 Function Device enable setting dialog box
(1) Setting items

1 Function Device enable Function to be used/not used
If the production program requires the functions above to place components

on a board successfully, and you specify them as unused, see Table
8.2.2.10.3 which shows whether components are placed actually.
Limitations put on operations of the machine if you check any of check boxes
of the Optimization function group are described in Table 8.2.2.10.4.

Any unit without option setting being made as the MS parameter cannot be
checked.
Zeroing is necessary again when changing the head status from as not to be
used.
Back Master-Bank [Non-stop]
Specifies the position of the master bank during Non-stop operation.
You can specify this setting regardless of the PWB transport reference
side.
The setting of the check box Alternate on the Function enable tab
invoked from the Operation option dialog box is preferred.
8 32
Table 8.2.2.10.3 Placement when set to Unused
1 Stops by detected The XY speed becomes slower when the sensor detects feeder floating while
feeder float the XY axe are moving.
When the sensor detects feeder floating before the XY axes moves, the
machine asks the operator whether to retry the sensor detection operation.
When the operator selects Retry, the sensor reconfirms feeder floating.
When he or she selects Cancel, the production is terminated.
2 Bank mark Recognition The function is disabled but placement of components is carried out.
(front, rear)
3 SOT Inspect Stage You cannot specify the SOT direction check on the tracking menu.
4 Back Master-Bank Places the master bank on the front (Front means the front side of the main
[Non-stop] unit.).
5 Do not use sensor Does not use the setting of the Delay for PWB conveyor sensor of the
delay when Re-clamp PWB conveyor setup group on the Machine setup menu when the system
clamps a board again.
Table 8.2.2.10.4 Placement operation to be performed if you check any of the

check boxes of the Optimization function group
1 Disable feeder The Pick Data option displayed on the dialog box that appears when you
optimization execute the [Optimization] command on the Optimization menu of the
Program Editor utility is fixed to Auto assign all data. You cannot select
any other option.
2 Disable nozzle The Nozzle option displayed on the dialog box that appears when you
optimization execute the [Optimization] command on the Optimization menu of the
Program Editing utility is fixed to Use permanent nozzle setup from MSL
Setup. You cannot select any other option.
8 33
8.2.2.10.4 VCS Device enable
When you select the [VCS Device enable] tab, the VCS Device setting dialog box
Figure 8.2.2.10.4 VCS Device enable setting dialog box

(1) Setting items

1 VCS Enables or disables an VCS unit.
If a VCS unit malfunctions, disable it on this dialog box. It allows the
machine to pick up/place components on a board without modifying
the production program being used.
If the production program requires the unit above to complete component

placement, Table 8.2.2.10.4 shows whether production is to be performed
actually or not.

- Specify a VCS unit to be used with checking the corresponding check box.
- You cannot select a VCS unit which was not set as an option with the MS
parameter (it is dimmed on the dialog box).
Table 8.2.2.10.4 Placement when set to "Unused"

1 CAMERA A component that is to be recognized with a VCS is skipped.
2 LIGHT A component that is to be recognized with a VCS is skipped.
8 34
8.2.2.10.5 MTC/MTS Device enable
When you select the "MTC/MTS Device enable" tab, the "MTC/MTS Device enable
setting" dialog box appears on the screen as shown in Figure 8.2.2.10.5.
Figure 8.2.2.10.5 MTC/MTS Device enable setting dialog box
(1) Setting items

1 MTC/MTS Enables or disables an MTC/MTS unit.
Set the type of MTS, MTS or DTS to be used here.

placement, Table 8.2.2.10.4 shows whether production is to be performed
actually or not.

2 Tray Pick Sequence Sets the order tray components are picked up:
sets the direction on which components are to be picked up per
available unit.

placement, see Table 8.2.2.10.6 to check the production operation the system
actually performs.

- Specify the device to be used with the combo box.
- For a DTS, check the check box "use", then enter the feeder mounting hole
number to the "Feeder No." edit box.
- You cannot connect both the MTC and MTS to the machine at the same
time.
- You cannot connect both the MTS and DTS to the machine at the same
time.
8 35
- If you check the rear IC Conveyor belt on the "Option Device enable setting"
dialog box, you cannot set the MTS.
- Specify the menu item Tray Pick Sequence according to the following two
groups of units:
Tray, DTs and MTS
MTC
- Two types of orders in which tray components are to be picked are available:
click the corresponding radio button:
Pick dir. 1 (Standard)
Pick dir. 2 (X dir.)
Default: Pick dir. 1 (Standard)
- You can select either button regardless of the disable/enable setting of
the menu item MTC, MTS, or DTS.
- Even though the menu item MTC or the corresponding unit is set to
disable, you can set this menu item.
Table 8.2.2.10.5 Placement when set to "Unused"

1 MTC Components which are fed from the MTC are to be skipped.
2 MTS Components which are fed from the MTS are to be skipped.
3 DTS Components which are fed from the DTS are to be skipped.
Table 8.2.2.10.6 Placement when Pick dir. 2 (X dir.) is selected

1 Pick-up order Tray Starts picking up components from the start position (rear and far side)
toward the right direction when viewed from the front.
2 DTS Starts picking up components from the start position (rear and far side)
3 MTS Starts picking up components from the start position (rear and far side)
MTC Starts picking up components from the start position (rear and far side)
8 36
8.2.2.11 Multi-station line
A screen appears as shown in Figure 8.2.2.11.1 Multi-station line setting dialog
box when [Multi-station line] is selected from the [Setting Group] menu.
Figure 8.2.2.11.1 Multi-station line setting dialog box
(1) Setting items

1 HLC connection This command is used to define whether or not this machine is connected to
an HLC in a multi-station line where two or more general purpose placers,
chip placers and bonding machines are connected to the HLC.
2 IP address Since the HLC and each station are to be communicated with each another
via the network, an IP address needs to be defined for each station.
(2) Setting the Multi-station line

Connection to the HLC
Using the radio button, define whether or not the machine is to be
connected to the HLC. (Default setting: Not connected)
Connecting method (IP address)

Each field of an IP address can be any number from 0 to 255. Two or
more stations cannot have the same IP address. Note that you cannot
set all fields to 0.
An IP address is a fixed number for the HLC.
When Connected is selected with the HLC connection radio button,
set each field of an IP address to a value from 0 to 255. This dialog
cannot be closed when a number out of that range is set.
8 37
8.2.2.12 PWB conveyor
A screen appears as shown in Figure 8.2.2.12.1 PWB conveyor setting dialog box
when [PWB conveyor] is selected from the [Setting Group] menu.
Figure 8.2.2.12.1 PWB conveyor setting dialog box
(1) Setting items

1 PWB Delay for conveyor Sets the delay time or distance of the board conveyor sensor
Conveyor sensor for a cut out board or punch hole board.
2 Units of delay Sets the unit used for the delay of the board conveyor sensor
specified with the item Delay for PWB conveyor sensor.
3 Back Up Under Limit for Sets the PWB position lower limit on the backup table.
Table conveyor
4 Down Acceleration Sets the acceleration of the backup table.
5 Press In Sets the stroke pressure of the backup table.
(2) How to set

Delay for conveyor sensor
This can be set in the range from 0 to 1000.
As a guide, set "60 ms" for a cut out board.
Units of delay
With using the radio button, select the unit for delay.
When you select time, the value you selected with the item Delay for
conveyor sensor is handled as the delay time in the unit of ms.
When you select length, the value you selected with the item Delay
for conveyor sensor is handled as the delay distance in the unit of
mm.
8 38
Note: When you change the setting of this "Units of delay", the setting of the item
"Delay for conveyor sensor" is cleared.
Under Limit for conveyor
Specify the value in the range from 5 to 30 (Unit is fixed to mm.).
Down Acceleration
With using the radio button, set one of three steps: Low, Medium, and
High (default setting: High).
Press In
Specify the value in the range from 0.00 to 5.00.
8 39
8.2.2.13 Vacuum table
When you select [Vacuum table] from the [Setting Group] menu, the Vacuum table
dialog box appears as shown in Figure 8.2.2.13.1.
Figure 8.2.2.13.1 Vacuum table dialog box
(1) Setting items

1 Delay time of vacuum ON Sets the time of period since the STOP sensor is activated until
vacuum is turned on when a board is clamped.
2 Delay time of table UP Sets the time of period since vacuum is turned on until the support
plate starts moving up when a board is clamped.
3 Delay time for production Sets the time of period required to detect the ON status of the vacuum
sensor when a board is clamped.
4 Time of blow ON Sets the time of period while the blow function is set to ON when the
clamped board is released.
5 Delay time of table DOWN Sets the time of period since the system detects the vacuum sensor
OFF status until the support plate starts moving down when the
clamped board is released.
(2) How to set

Enter a value directly form a keyboard.
The input range is from 0 to 1000.
The unit is fixed to ms.
The defaults of all the items are 0 ms.
When the Vacuum table is set to disable on the Option Device enable
tab, these menu items are dimmed.
8 40
8.2.2.14 Signal light
A screen as shown in Figure 8.2.2.14.1 Signal light setting dialog box appears
when [Signal light] is selected on the [Setting Group] menu.
Figure 8.2.2.14.1 Signal light setting dialog box
(1) Setting items

1 Signal light pattern Sets the light pattern of the signal light in each operation phase.
(Red, Yellow, Green)
2 Signal light pattern (Buzzer) Sets ON/OFF of the buzzer in each operation phase.
3 System setting/User setting Sets the data used for a user signal pattern.
4 System Default Copies the system setting data to the user setting data.
(2) How to set

Signal light (Red, Yellow, Green)
Using the radio button, set on, off, or blink.
Buzzer
Using the radio button, set off or on.
System Setting/User Setting

Select the data to be used with either of these radio buttons.
Selection of the System Setting radio button allows you to see the
settings of the system initial values only. You cannot change them.
8 41
(3) Default values
Signal light pattern

No. Phase Remarks
Red Yellow Green Buzzer
1 Initial state (Power on) All colors of lamps light. OFF
2 Menu The yellow lamp lights. OFF
3 Data input The yellow lamp lights. OFF
4 Machine setup The yellow lamp lights. OFF
5 Manual control The yellow lamp lights. OFF
6 Idle mode The yellow lamp lights. OFF
7 File operation The yellow lamp lights. OFF
8 Print The yellow lamp lights. OFF
9 Warm up The yellow lamp lights. OFF
10 Error (except production) The red lamp lights. OFF
11 Waiting prod/Normal end All colors of lamps light. OFF
12 Producing The green lamp lights. OFF
13 Error (production) The red lamp lights. OFF
14 Pause The yellow lamp lights. OFF
Production
15 Compo. run out (producing) The green lamp lights and OFF
yellow lamp flashes.
16 Compo. run out (stop) The red lamp lights and OFF
17 Waiting for conveyor The green lamp flashes. OFF
18 Compo. run out (error) The red lamp lights and OFF
19 Emergency stop The red lamp lights. OFF
20 Returning to the origin (home position) The yellow lamp lights. OFF
21 Self diagnostics The yellow lamp lights. OFF
22 Trouble analysis The yellow lamp lights. OFF
23 Self calibration The yellow lamp lights. OFF
24 Settings changing The yellow lamp lights. OFF
25 Producing at one station and waiting a The green lamp flashes. OFF For a KE-2030
board to be transported at another station
26 Others All colors of lamps light. OFF
: ON
: Flashes
: OFF
* The initial status of the machine means the duration before it is set ready to be
operated after power is turned on. The desktop is the initial display of the
screen after the machine quits the initial status.
(4) Signal Light Buzzer

A signal light buzzer is optional, so be sure to set the Buzzer radio button of the
signal light pattern to OFF when you use a signal light not equipped with a
buzzer.
The buzzer sounds when the machine enters each status described in Table
above only if the Buzzer radio button of the signal light pattern is set to ON. To
stop the buzzer, press any key on the front panel such as the <START> key
and <STOP> key. In this case, the key you pressed just stops the buzzer, and
does not perform its own function.
8 42
8.2.2.15 Bad mark sensor teaching
When you select the setting item "Bad mark sensor teaching", the "Bad mark
sensor teaching" dialog box appears on the screen as shown in Figure 8.2.2.15.1.
Figure 8.2.2.15.1 "Bad mark sensor teaching" dialog box
(1) Setting items

1 Snsr. ON Position Sets the sensor turning ON position.
2 Snsr. OFF Position Sets the sensor turning OFF position.
(2) How to set

Enter the X- and Y-coordinates separately directly from a keyboard.
Use the HOD to teach the coordinates with a camera.
In this case, both X and Y values are loaded at the same time regardless of
the input focus position.
8 43
(3) Actions taken after you click the <DONE> button
When you click the <DONE> button, the "Threshold - Initialize" dialog box
appears on the screen, then the system initializes the bad mark sensor.
Next, the "Threshold - Execution" dialog box appears on the screen which
indicates the system automatically performs the teaching operation.
Figure 8.2.2.15.2 "Threshold - Initialize" dialog box
Figure 8.2.2.15.3 "Threshold - Execution" dialog box
8.2.3 Disp (Display)

This command allows you to select whether to display the tool bar/status bar on the
screen or not.
8 44
8.3 Mechanical Setup
If you have to drive a mechanical device while setting the menu items on the Machine
Setup menu, display the pop-up menu for mechanical devices. Press the right button
of the trackball, or press the F10 key while holding the Shift key. A pop-up menu
shown in Figure 8.3.1 starts up.
Figure 8.3.1 Machine setup pop-up menu
When you select each menu item on the pop-up menu above, the corresponding
extended menu appears as shown below. Select a desired item on this extended
menu with a trackball, or select it with the cursor keys, then press the ENTER key to
drive the corresponding mechanical device.
* ATC slide plate
* Stopper pin
8 45
* Support plate
* Shape clamp
* MTC shuttle
When you do not set the MTC on the "MTC/MTS
Device enable setting" dialog box, this menu item
is dimmed and you can not select it.
* MTS tray
When you do not set the MTS on the "MTC/MTS
Device enable setting" dialog box, this menu item
is dimmed and you can not select it.
* Tray control dialog box

When you select the [Extend] command on the
MTS tray menu above, this Tray control dialog
Enter the position of a tray you want to pull out,
and click the <EXTEND> button. The system
pulls out the tray whose position you specified
from the MTS.
8 46
* Control of Conveyor
When you select the menu item "Control of
Conveyor", no extended menu appears on the
screen and the dialog box appears instead as
shown in the figure below.
If you select the menu item [Control of Conveyor], specify the desired control
item with the corresponding radio button, then click the <Done> button or press
the F3 key.
8 47
CHAPTER 9 MANUAL CONTROL
9.1 Overview
The following table shows the manual control items.
Table 9.1.1 Manual control items

Main menu Sub menu Description
1 Head 1 Head control XY axes movement control and display in X and Y
coordinates relative to each head.
Z and axes movement control and coordinate display of
each head Vacuum control, blow control, and pressure
value display of each head.
2 Head device XY axes movement control and display in X and Y
control coordinates of each head device (OCC, bad mark sensor,
HMS).
Control of each head device and display of sensor status
3 Laser control Vacuum control of each head, and vacuum ON/OFF display
Z axis movement control and coordinate display of each
head algorithm change
Measurement and result display
Image display
Edge check and Edge check display
2 Conveyor 1 Independent Stopper control, edge reference cylinder control, support
control of table control, ready out control, board available out control,
conveyor transport motor control, each sensor of transport system,
signal status display, support table stopper sensor control,
and Entrance (IN)/Exit (OUT) shutter control
2 Automatic control Automatic transport control, each sensor of transport
of conveyor system, signal status display, and movement control
between the PWB stations
3 Auto width Automatic PWB width alignment operation control, display
conveyor control of the PWB transport width
Status display of each conveyor sensor
4 Movable station Control of the cylinder which checks if there is a PWB,
control *1 display of the cylinder and sensor status, control of the Y
axis movable station and display of coordinates
5 Vacuum Table Control of vacuum of the vacuum table, control of the blow
function, and control of the support table.
3 Vision 1 VCS control Control of the light and state display
Control of the side light board up/down cylinder and state
display
4 Feeder 1 MTC control Shuttle control, tray control, pick control, and status display
Control of the PWB transport width adjustment operation
and display of the PWB transport width
2 Knock pin control Control of the feeder knock pin and control of the feeder
position indicator
3 DTS control Tray control and state display
4 MTS control Tray control and state display
5 Others 1 ATC control ATC slide plate control, sensor status display, and nozzle
suction control
2 Signal light control Signal light control, buzzer control, and status display
3 Component Probe control, component measurement, and status display
verification
4 SOT inspect unit Vacuum control and state display
5 Calibration block LED control, vacuum control and state display
control
6 Other sensors Status display of IC component discarding conveyor stop
sensor, etc.
7 Driver state Status display of the X, Y, Z, and theta axes drivers
*1 Supported by a KE-2030.
91
(1) Immediately after starting
The Manual control initial screen shown below appears when selecting the
[Manual Operation] command on the [Setup] menu invoked from the menu bar.
Figure 9.1.1 Manual control initial screen
(2) Commands
No summary of a command appears on the message line while you are selecting
a command on the "Manual control" menu.
1) File
When you select the [Exiting Application] command, the dialog box shown in
Figure 9.1.2a, which asks you whether to set each I/O device safety
direction, appears on the screen.
When you click the <OK> button on this dialog box, the system sets the
each I/O device safety direction, then quits this application.
When you click the <Cancel> button, the system cancels the [Exiting
Application] command.
Figure 9.1.2a "Question - to reset I/O" dialog box
92
2) Ctrl
Head
Figure 9.1.2 Head pull-down menu
Conveyor
Figure 9.1.3 Conveyor pull-down menu
Vision
Figure 9.1.4 Vision pull-down menu
Feeder
Figure 9.1.5 Feeder pull-down menu
93
Others
Figure 9.1.6 Others pull-down menu
During selection of a manual control command, the command summary is not

displayed on the message line.
Selection of each command opens the corresponding dialog box.

Select or set the parameters on each dialog box as necessary and execute the
command.
The unit without a check mark for Option setting of MS parameters (not installed)
cannot be selected.
This setting does not affect the Device enable setting on the Machine Setup menu.
(This means that the units without a check mark can be selected.)
Note: For an MTC or MTS, any unit which is not checked (not installed) on the
Device enable menu invoked from the Machine Setup menu cannot be
selected.
Help
See Section 3.3 Basic Operations for the basic help operations.
94
(3) Head control menu
How to start
When you click the right button of a trackball or the F9 key, the pop-up menu
appears. Select the desired item from the menu.
The unit which is not checked (not installed) at the Option setting of MS
parameters does not have any corresponding menu to be displayed.
This setting does not affect that of the Device enable menu invoked from
the Machine Setup menu: that is, not-checked (not used) units are
displayed also.
Note: 1) Any MTC, MTS or IC conveyor belt is not displayed on the menu if its model
name is set (installed) on the Device enable menu invoked from the
Machine Setup menu.
2) While the pop-up menu is being displayed, the HOD keys operation is
invalid.
3) When the selected unit to be controlled is positioned where it cannot
move, you cannot select it (the unit is dimmed on the screen.)
Menus
*1
*2
*2
Notes: *1 The menu actually displayed varies depending on the model you use.
(See Figure 9.1.7.1 List of the units that can be controlled by each model on
the next page.)
*2 The menu actually displayed varies depending on the units installed at the
factory or setting of the Machine Setup menu.
95
1) XY move
Moves the selected head to the selected position along the XY, axes based on
the selection unit reference position.
You cannot select a menu item to which the selected head cannot move by
referring to the selected unit position.
You can move the head to the standard position by referring to the selected
control unit position or to the desired coordinates.
As the standard position, you can move the head to: the origin, CAL block first
mark position, waiting position (default, when a nozzle is removed, or
user-designated), reference pin position, follower pin position, MTC shuttle
pick-up position, component discarding position (IC, chip, large component),
VCS position, CVS position, bank mark position, vacuum calibration position and
so on.
When you select the position to which you want to move the head on the pop-up
menu, the head moves there by referring to the selected control unit position.
When you select to move the head to the desired coordinates, the A given XY
coordinate move dialog box appears on the screen as shown in Figure 9.1.7.
Figure 9.1.7 A given XY coordinate move dialog box
Select the unit to be controlled in the combo box.

You cannot select any unit which is not checked (not installed) at the Option
setting of the MS parameters.
This setting does not affect the setting of the Device enable menu invoked from
the Machine Setup menu (you can select a not-checked (not used) unit).
When you press the ALT key while holding the down arrow key, one of the
following list appears on the screen depending on the model you use.
96
Figure 9.1.7.1 List of the units that can be controlled by each model
When you enter the coordinates to which you want the head to move, then select
the <EXEC> button or press the F3 key, the head moves by referring to the
selected control unit position.
The range of coordinates to be entered varies depending on the unit you
selected.
2) Z move
Moves the selected head to the selected position.
You can move the selected head to the standard position or the desired
coordinates.
As the standard position, you can move the head to one of: laser height,
waiting position, XY axes movable height, VCS height, CVS height, and vacuum
calibration position.
When you select the destination position on the displayed pop-up menu, the
selected head moves to that position.
When you select to move the head to the desired coordinates, the A given Z
coordinate move dialog box appears on the screen.
97
Figure 9.1.8 A given Z coordinate move dialog box
Select the unit to be controlled from the combo box.

This selection does not modify the settings on the Device enable menu invoked
from the Machine Setup menu: you can select a not-checked (not used) unit.
When you press the ALT key while holding the down arrow key, the following list
When you enter the coordinates to which you want the head to move, then select
the <EXEC> button or press the F3 key, the head moves by referring to the
selected control unit position.
The range of coordinates to be entered varies depending on the unit you
selected.
Note: Before moving the head, check to see if there is no substance which interferes
with the head at the coordinates you entered in the Moving field
3) Theta move
Moves the selected head to the selected position.
4) Vacuum cont.
Sets the vacuum of the selected head to ON or OFF.
98
5) Blow cont.
Sets the blow of the selected head to ON or OFF.
6) Lighting cont.
Turns ON and OFF the light of the OCC.
7) Polarity cont.
Sets the polarity of the OCC to positive (+) or negative (-).
8) Sensor cont.
Sets the selector sensor to ON or OFF.
99
9.2 Head-Related Control
9.2.1 Head control

When you select the [Head] command on the [Ctrl] menu, then the [Head control]
command, the following Head control dialog box appears on the screen.
Figure 9.2.1 Head control dialog box
(1) Control unit

This setting does not affect the setting of the Device enable menu invoked
from the Machine Setup menu. (This means that the units without check mark,
that is not to be used, can be selected.)
The following list appears when you press the ALT key and key at the
same time.
9 10
(2) Control item
Select the control item with a radio button.
(3) Control button

Each control item can be executed with the corresponding control button.
The display of the control buttons differs depending on the control item
selected.
1) Moving the X- and Y- axes

When the control item XY move is checked, enter the destination
coordinates, then click the <EXEC> button or press the F3 key. The head
starts moving by referring to the selected control unit position.
The display of the coordinates is updated when the movement has been
completed.
2) Moving the Z axis

When the control item Z move is checked, enter the destination
coordinates, then click the <EXEC> button or press the F3 key. The head
starts moving by referring to the selected control unit position.
completed.
3) Moving the axis

When the control item Theta move is checked, enter the destination
coordinates, then click the <EXEC> button or press the F3 key. The theta
axis starts moving by referring to the selected control unit position.
completed.
4) Controlling the vacuum

When the control item Vac. cont. is checked, click one of the <ON>,
<OFF)> and <ON/OFF> buttons, or press one of the F3, F4 and F5 keys.
The display of the vacuum level is updated when the control has been
completed.
9 11
5) Controlling the blow
This item turns on and off of the blow of the head selected.
When the control item Blow cont. is checked, click one of the <ON)>,
<OFF> and <ON/OFF> buttons, or press one of the F3, F4 and F5 keys.
completed.
(4) State display

X and Y coordinates, Z coordinate, coordinate, and pressure value are
displayed when the control has been completed.
The pressure value is always displayed during monitoring.
9 12
9.2.2 Head device control
When you select the [Head] command on the [Ctrl] menu, then the [Head device
control] command, the following Head device control dialog box appears on the
screen.
Figure 9.2.2 Head device control dialog box
(1) Control unit

You cannot select any unit which is not checked (not installed) at the Option
setting of the MS parameters.
This selection does not affect the setting of the Device enable menu invoked
from the Machine Setup menu. (This means that the units not checked (not
used) can be used.)
The following list appears when you press the ALT key and the down arrow key
at the same time.
9 13
(2) Control item
Select the control item with the corresponding radio button.
The available radio buttons used for selecting control items vary depending on
the control unit you selected.
OCC
Bad mark sensor
HMS
(3) Control button

The display of the control button varies depending on the selected control item.
Operation when you select OCC as the control unit

1) XY move
Operate the XY axes in the same manner as described under the
section Head control.
9 14
2) Light cont.
The control item Light cont. turns on and /or off the OCC light.
When the control item Light cont. is checked, click one of the <ON>,
<OFF> and <ON/OFF> buttons, or press one of the F3, F4 and F5
keys.
When the control item Light cont. is checked and you click the
<SET> button or press the F6 key, the Light setting dialog box appears
on the screen.
Figure 9.2.3 Light setting dialog box
3) Bright.
Move the slide bar to set the amount of light.
With the arrow keys, PgUp key, or PgDn key, you can move the slide
bar.
When you click the <OK> button, the light of the amount specified
turns on the next time.
When you click the <CANCEL> button, your setting becomes invalid.
The light state display is updated when the light is controlled
completely.
4) Polarity control
The control item Port. cont. controls positive and negative of the
polarity of the OCC.
When the control item Port. cont. is checked, click one of the
<Positive>, <Negative>, and <Positive/Negative> buttons, or press one
of the F3, F4 and F5 keys.
9 15
Operation you select Bad mark sensor as the control unit
(1) XY move
Operate in the same manner as described under the section Head
control.
(2) Sensor con.
The control item Sensor cont. turns on and / or off the bad mark
sensor.
When the control item Sensor cont. is checked, click one of the
<ON>, <OFF>, and <ON/OFF> buttons, press one of the F3, F4 and
F5 keys.
The display of the sensor status is updated when the sensor is
controlled completely.
Operation when you select HMS as the control unit
(1) XY move
Operate in the same manner as described under the section Head
control.
(2) Measurement
Height measurement device
When the control item Measurement is checked, click the <EXEC>
button or press the F3 key.
The display of the measurement result is updated when the HMS is

9 16
(4) State display
Figure 9.2.3.1 State display dialog box
OCC
The X and Y coordinates and ON and OFF setting of the light are displayed
when the OCC is controlled completely.
Bad mark sensor

The X and Y coordinates and ON and OFF setting of the sensor are
displayed when the bad mark sensor is controlled completely.
The sensor setting is always displayed.
HMS
The X and Y coordinates and Z coordinate are displayed when the HMS is
9 17
9.2.3 Laser control
When you select the [Head] command on the [Ctrl] menu, then the [Laser control]
command, the following Laser control dialog box appears on the screen.
Figure 9.2.4 Laser control dialog box
(1) Control unit

Select the unit head to be controlled from the combo box.
from the Machine Setup menu. (This means that the not checked units can be
selected.)
The following list appears when you press the ALT key and the down arrow key
at the same time.
9 18
(2) Algorithm
Select the algorithm of the laser control for execution of measurement
(SWEEP), from the combo box.
If you do not select Meas. (SWEEP) as the control unit, you cannot set the
algorithm here.
The following list appears when you press the ALT key and key at the same
time.
The number displayed left to the coordinates indicates the algorithm, and the
alphabet displayed on the right side indicates the theta rotation speed when
SWEEP is selected.
Algorithm 1 (14, -14) The machine finds out the position (first time) on which the
component shadow width can be the smallest with rotating
the theta axis from the current position by the pre-load
angle oppositely. Then, it rotates the theta axis 90
degrees from the position where it detected the smallest
shadow width to find out the second smallest shadow width
(second time).
This algorithm is equivalent with the algorithm 1 of the laser
recognition algorithm specified in Component data.
2 (14, 14) The machine finds out the position (first time) on which the
component shadow width can be the smallest with rotating
the theta axis from the current position by the pre-load
angle oppositely. Then, it rotates the theta axis from the
position where it detected the smallest shadow width to find
out the second smallest shadow width (second time).
3 (-14, -14) The system detects the shadow of a component at the
current position without rotating the theta axis (first time).
Then, it detects another shadow with rotating the theta axis
(second time).
Speed H: High M: Medium L: Low
9 19
(3) Control item
Select the control item with a radio button.
(4) Window type

Select the window type which is to be used during measurement with the
corresponding radio button.
If you do not select Meas. (ONCE) or Meas. (SWEEP) as the control item,
you cannot set the window type here.
Note: You can set the window type only for the MNLA head.
(5) Control button

The display of the control button differs among the control items.
1) Vacuum
The control item vacuum turns on and / off of the vacuum of the head
selected.
When Vacuum of the control items is checked, select the <ON>, <OFF>,
or <ON/OFF> button or press the F3, F4 or F5 key to control the vacuum
level.
completed.
9 20
2) Z adjustment
The control item Z adjustment controls the Z coordinate of the head
selected.
This control is necessary to pick up components using the nozzle.
When Z adjustment of the control items is checked, select the <UP>,
<DOWN>, <UP/DOWN> button or press the F3, F4 or F5 key to control
the Z-axis.
completed.
3) Z fine adjustment
The control item Z fine adjustment controls finely the Z coordinate of the
head selected.
This control is necessary to move the picked component to the laser
measurement height.
When the control items Z fine adjustment is checked, select <UP>,
<DOWN>, <LA control> button or press the F3, F4 or F5 key to control
finely the Z axis.
The display of the coordinates is updated when the control has been
completed.
4) Laser initial
This item initializes the laser sensor of the head selected.
When the control item Laser initialization is checked, select the <EXEC>
button, or press the F3 key to control the laser initialization.
5) Meas. (ONCE)
This item executes the laser measurement (ONCE) of the head selected.
The laser measurement (ONCE) is the function for obtaining the
information on the shadow shot with the sensor currently. The
measurement result is displayed in the First field of the item
Measurement result on the Laser control dialog box. (See Figure 9-2-4)
When the control item Measurement (ONCE) is checked, select the
<EXEC>, <LA control> button or press the F3 key or F5 key to control the
measurement.
The display of the measurement result is updated when the control has
been completed.
9 21
6) Meas. (SWEEP)
This item executes the laser measurement (SWEEP) of the head selected.
The laser measurement (SWEEP) is the function for detecting the smallest
shadow of a component according to the specified algorithm by rotating the
target component within the detection area. The minimum shadow width
detected for the first time is displayed in the First field of the item
Measurement result, and that for the second time is displayed in the
Second field. (See Figure 9-2-4)
When the control item Measurement (SWEEP) is checked, select the
<EXEC>, <LA control> button or press the F3 key or F5 key to control the
measurement.
The measurement result status is updated when the machine finishes
measuring.
7) Image display
This item displays the image data from the laser sensor of the selected
head.
When the control item Image display is checked, click the <EXEC> button
or press the F3 key.
The following shows an example screen displayed when the Image display
command is executed.
Figure 9.2.5 Image display dialog box
9 22
8) Edge Check
This item checks to see if the laser sensor edge of the selected head gets
dirty or dusty.
Move the head or nozzle above the laser surface, then execute this check.
To execute this check, click the <ON> button or press the F3 key when the
control item "Edge Check" is checked.
9) Edge check dsp (display)

This item checks to see if the entire laser sensor edge of the selected head
gets dirty or dusty, then displays the check result data.
To execute this operation, select the <ON> button or press the F3 key
when the control item "Edge Check dsp" is checked.
The following shows an example screen displayed when the "Edge Check
dsp" command is executed.
Figure 9.2.6 Edge check data display dialog box
(6) State display

The ON/OFF status of the vacuum of the control head, Z axis coordinate, and
measured results by the laser are displayed when the control has been
completed.
9 23
Shown below is the list of status which is returned from laser when the result of the Control
item "Meas. (ONCE)" or "Meas. (SWEEP) is obtained.
Laser status list (1/2)

Status Description
1 Indicates that the selected command is executed successfully.
5 Connection error
This error may be caused due to disconnection or inferior connection of the * cable.
7 This action is required although you do not specify any algorithm. The result is invalid.
8 The sensor is not connected or a hardware error occurs.
10 Sensor error
An unknown hardware error occurs at connection of the coaxial cable of the sensor.
12 Illegal EEPROM version
The software could not check the version of the sensor control module (SCM) EEPROM.
Upgrade the software.
13 Inferior EEPROM data
The SCM EEPROM indicated a data error.
Turn off the power, then restart the system.
14 EEPROM synchronize error
Turn off the power, then restart the system.
15 The input power for operating the machine normally is reduced.
17 The input current is lowered or the output current exceeds the limitation.
60 The length of data set in the communication buffer is shorter than the specified length.
61 The length of data set in the communication buffer is longer than the specified length.
62 The specified length is shorter that the length of the issued command.
63 The specified length is longer that the length of the issued command.
64 A component could not be detected.
65 The frame rate cannot be maintained.
The LA could not recognize input data at the speed required for recognition.
This error occurs when the shade of a component changes frequently or when a component is not
positioned correctly.
67 Interrupt of measurement
Before detecting the minimum width, the LA received a command, so measurement was
interrupted.
70 Algorithm error
The firmware detected the condition which was not assumed to be caused.
75 When an error occurs at the first, second, or third measurement during SWEEP_CMD, the system
stops the process for the second, third or fourth measurement respectively.
This error is notified only when the result of the second, third or fourth measurement is
announced.
77 The contrast of the edge shade obtained with the sensor is not enough to find the edge of a
component correctly.
This error occurs when the shade of a component is not sufficient (when a component does not
cut off laser beam completely).
78 The window parameter which determines a window is below "2000 micron".
79 The entire window is obstructed.
Check to see if there is no foreign substance on the sensor.
80 The left side of the window is obstructed.
Check the component position.
81 The right side of the window is obstructed.
82 Both sides of the window are obstructed.
9 24
9 25
Laser status list (2/2)
Status Description
83 Illegal checksum
The software detects an error while it is reading the EEPROM.
Initialize laser.
84 Double start-up
Initialize laser.
85 There is no EEPROM start-up data.
Initialize laser.
86 Illegal parameter
An invalid parameter is specified for a command.
Check to see if a correct parameter was entered.
87 Illegal data
Invalid data was detected.
90 An error occurred during calculation of the angle.
93 The width-angle curve is too flat.
This error occurs when a small component is rotated at very slow speed.
98 Before detecting the minimum width, the angle exceeds the specified limit.
99 The first process (REPORTW_CMD) did not finish before the next minimum width detecting
process (specified with the hold-off angle) started.
100 The required initialization operation was not performed before the information necessary for
initialization was required.
102 The algorithm specified for measurement is invalid.
103 The luminance of laser beam is too low during image check.
104 Illegal image check area
The border of the image check area is not set correctly.
105 Image check failure
The image check function failed to compare parameters.
106 An error which is not defined with any of the currently specified error levels occurred. Change the
error level.
The results of the error check are shown below:
Min: indicates the lowest luminance of the sensor

Max: indicates the highest luminance of the sensor
Edge: indicates the highest edge check value and the corresponding position
obtained when you performed the edge check.
For the MNLA sensor, "0.045" is a guideline of dirtiness. If a value higher
than 0.045 is displayed here, clean the sensor.
Note: The edge check value indicates a substituted characteristic value which
shows a laser centering error. The larger the edge check value becomes, the
more the centering error increases: this is normally caused by the soiled
window.
9 26
9.3 Transport System
9.3.1 Transport system individual control

When you select the [Conveyor] command from the [Ctrl] menu, then the
[Independent control of conveyor] command, the following Independent control of
conveyor dialog box appears on the screen.
*1
*1 IN station OUT station
Figure 9.3.1 Independent control of conveyor dialog box

Note: *1 displayed with a KE-2030 only.
(1) Control item

Select a control item with the corresponding radio button.
9 27
(2) Control position
With the combo box, select the position when the conveyor is automatically
controlled.
You cannot select the control position if the control item, Ready out, Board
available out, Conveyor in-motor or Conveyor out-motor is selected.
Note: You cannot select this menu item for models other than a KE-2030.
(3) Control button

Execute the selected control item with the control buttons.
The displayed control buttons vary depending on the control item you selected.
1) Stopper
This item turns on and/ off the stopper .
When the control item Stopper is checked, select the <ON>, <OFF> or
<ON/OFF> button or press the F3, F4 or F5 key to control the stopper
pin.
The status display is updated when the control is completed.
2) Side clamp
This item turns on and/ or off the side clamp cylinder.
The control item Side clamp is checked, click the <ON>, <OFF> or
<ON/OFF> button, or press the F3, F4 or F5 key.
The state display is updated when the side clamp cylinder is controlled
completely.
3) Support plate
This item moves up and/or down the support plate.
The control item Support plate is checked, click the <UP>, <DOWN>
or <UP/DOWN> button or press the F3, F4 or F5 key.
The state display is updated when the support plate is controlled
completely.
9 28
4) Ready out
This item turns on and/ or off the ready OUT signal.
When the control item Ready out is checked, select the <ON>, <OFF>
or <ON/OFF> button or press the F3, F4 or F5 key to control the ready
OUT signal.
5) Board available out

This item turns on and/ or off the board available OUT signal.
When the control item Board available out is checked, select the <ON>,
<OFF> or <ON/OFF> button or press the F3, F4 or F5 key to control
the board available OUT signal.
6) Conveyor in-motor
This item turns on and/or off the transport motor (IN buffer).
When the control item Conveyor in-motor is selected, click the <ON>,
<OFF> or <ON/OFF> button or press the F3, F4 or F5 key.
The state display is updated when the transport motor (IN buffer) is
7) Conveyor center-motor
This item turns on and/ or off the transport motor (Center buffer).
When the control item Conveyor center-motor is selected, click the

<ON>, <OFF> or <ON/OFF> button or press the F3, F4 or F5 key.
The state display is updated when the transport motor (center buffer) is
8) Conveyor out-motor
This item turns on and/ or off the transport motor (OUT buffer).
When the control item Conveyor out-motor is selected, click the <ON>,
<OFF> or <ON/OFF> button or press the F3, F4 or F5 key.
The state display is updated when the transport motor (OUT buffer) is
9 29
9) Support tbl. stp. snsr. (Support table stop sensor)
This item turns on and/or off the support table stopper.
When the control item Support tbl. stp. snsr. is selected, click the
<ON>, <OFF> or <ON/OFF> button or press the F3, F4 or F5 key.
The state display is updated when the support table stopper is controlled
completely.
10) Entrance shutter

This item opens/closes the entrance shutter cylinder.
When the control item Entrance shutter is selected, click the <OPEN>,
<CLOSE> or <OPEN/CLOSE> button or press the F3, F4 or F5 key.
The state display is updated when the entrance shutter cylinder is
11) Exit shutter

This item opens/closes the exit shutter cylinder.
When the control item Exit shutter is selected, click the <OPEN>,
<CLOSE> or <OPEN/CLOSE> button or press the F3, F4 or F5 key.
The state display is updated when the exit shutter cylinder is controlled
completely.
(3) State display

The state of each sensor and each unit is displayed when the sensor and unit
are controlled completely.
The state of each sensor, signal, and unit is always displayed.
9 30
9.3.2 Transport system automatic control
When you select the [Conveyor] command on the [Ctrl] menu, then the [Automatic
control of conveyor] command, the following Automatic control of conveyor dialog
*1
*1
*1
*1
Figure 9.3.2 Automatic control of conveyor dialog box

(screen example when a KE-2030 is used)
Note: *1 The Control item PWB move and clamp and the menu items
Between PWB Station moving and Control position are
displayed with a KE-2030 only.
9 31
(1) Control item

With the radio button select the position when the conveyor is automatically
controlled.
You cannot select the control position if the control item, Initialization, PWB
ejection, PWB release or PWB check at WAIT/OUT snsr. is selected.
(3) Between PWB Station moving

Select either of the two radio buttons: whether to move the conveyor between
the PWB stations or not.
You cannot select this menu item if the control item Initialization, PWB
ejection or PWB release is selected.
Note: You cannot select this menu item for models other than a KE-2030.
9 32
With the corresponding radio button, select the position to be used when the
transport system is automatically controlled.
This item is not available when you select Initialization as the control item.
Note: "2 station" cannot be set with a model other than a KE-2030.
(5) Control button

Each control button executes the associated control item.
1) Initialization
This item initializes the PWB transport operation operation.
When the control item Initialization is checked, select the <EXEC> button,
or press the F3 key to control the initialization.
2) PWB load
This item loads a PWB according to the setting of "Positioning method".
When the control item PWB load (hole ref.) is checked, select the
<EXEC> button, or press the F3 key to control the PWB loading.
3) PWB ejection
This item ejects a PWB.
When the control item PWB ejection is checked, select the <EXEC>
button, or press the F3 key to control the PWB ejection.
4) PWB release
This item releases a clamped PWB.
When the control item PWB release is checked, select the <EXEC>
button, or press the F3 key to control the PWB release.
5) PWB re-clamp
This item re-clamps a board located on the PWB transport path according
to the Positioning method selected.
When the control item PWB re-clamp is checked, select the <EXEC>
button or press the F3 key to control the PWB re-clamping function.
9 33
6) PWB check at WAIT/OUT snsr.
This item moves a board that is located between the IN sensor and WAIT
sensor of the IN buffer to a position where the WAIT sensor is activated.
Or, it moves a board that is located so that it cannot activate the OUT
sensor of the OUT buffer to a position where the OUT sensor is activated.
When the control item PWB check at WAIT/OUT snsr. is checked,
select the <EXEC> button or press the F3 key to move a board to the
regulated position.
7) PWB move and clamp

This item moves a board located on the IN station to the OUT station, then
clamps it according to the method specified with the menu item Positioning
method.
When the control item PWB move and clamp is checked, select the
<EXEC> button or press the F3 key to move and clamp a board.
Note: This menu item is available only when you use a KE-2030.
(6) State display

The state items to be always monitored are that of:
Machine operation
Each sensor
Each signal
Each unit
9 34
Description of the machine status indicated when the conveyor moves between the
PWB stations
- How a PWB is loaded (hole reference or shape reference) varies depending on
the status of the machine before a PWB is loaded.
A PWB is loaded in various ways according to the machine (whose version
number is 1.12 or later) status as shown below.
Note: You cannot set this menu item for models other than a KE-2030.
Between Control Status of the PWB Conveyor moving PWB Remarks

PWB position machine before ejection between the PWB loading
Station loading a PWB stations
moving (IN station/OUT
station)
Dont 2 station 1 (None/ None) None The conveyor does not C (Both stations)
Move move.
2 (Existing/None) I (IN station) C (Both stations)
3 (None /Existing) II (OUT station) C (Both stations)
4 (Existing/Existing) III (Both C (Both stations)
stations)
IN station 1 (None/ None) None A (IN station)
2 (Existing/None) I (IN station) A (IN station)
3 (None /Existing) None A (IN station) (Note 3)
4 (Existing/Existing) III (Both A (IN station)
stations)
OUT station 1 (None/ None) None B (OUT station)
2 (Existing/None) I (IN station) B (OUT station)
3 (None /Existing) II (OUT station) B (OUT station)
4 (Existing/Existing) III (Both B (OUT station)
stations)
Move 2 station 1 (None/ None) None The conveyor does not A (IN station) (Note 4)
move.
2 (Existing/None) None The conveyor moves. A (IN station) (Note 1)

3 (None /Existing) II (OUT station) The conveyor does not A (IN station)
move.
4 (Existing/Existing) II (OUT station) The conveyor moves. A (IN station) (Note 2)

IN station 1 (None/ None) None The conveyor does not A (IN station)
move.
2 (Existing/None) None The conveyor moves. A (IN station) (Note 1)

3 (None /Existing) None The conveyor does not A (IN station) (Note 3)
move.
4 (Existing/Existing) II (OUT station) The conveyor moves. A (IN station) (Note 2)

OUT station 1 (None/ None) None The conveyor does not B (OUT station)
move.
2 (Existing/None) None The conveyor moves. None

3 (None /Existing) II (OUT station) The conveyor does not B (OUT station)
move.
4 (Existing/Existing) II (OUT station) The conveyor moves. None
Existing: There is a PWB on the station. 1 to 4: Status of the machine before

None: There is not any PWB on the station. loading a PWB (see the next page)
I to III: PWB ejection (see the next page)
A to C: PWB loading (see the next page)
Note 1: A PWB located on the IN (entrance) station is moved onto the OUT (exit) station (see
9 35
3 on the next page) at the same time a PWB is loaded onto the IN station (see 4-A
on the next page).
Note 2: All operations are performed at the same time.
Note 3: A PWB is not ejected from the OUT station.
Note 4: A PWB is not loaded onto the OUT station.
The following four kinds of station status are assumed when the machine transports a
board from left to right.
1. There is no board on both the IN station and 2. A board is loaded onto the IN station.
OUT station.
IN station OUT station IN station OUT station
3. A board is loaded onto the OUT station. 4. Boards are loaded onto both the IN station
and OUT station.
A board is ejected in the following three ways when the machine transports a board from
left to right.
I. A board is ejected from the IN station. II. A board is ejected from the OUT station.
III. Boards are ejected from both the IN station

and OUT station.
IN station OUT station
A board is transported between two stations as shown below (from left to right):

A board is transported from the IN station to the
OUT station.
A board is sent into the machine in the following three ways when the machine
transports it from left to right:
A. A board is loaded onto the IN station. B. A board is loaded onto the OUT station.
C. Boards are loaded onto both the IN station

and OUT station.
9 36
9 37
9.3.3 Automatic PWB width adjustment control
When you select the [Conveyor] command on the [Ctrl] menu, then the [Auto width
conveyor control], the following AWC control dialog box appears on the screen.
Figure 9.3.3 AWC control dialog box
(1) Control item

(2) Control button

With the control button, execute the control item you selected.
1) Origin
This item returns the automatic PWB width adjustment unit to its home
position.
When the control item Origin is checked, click the <EXEC> button or
press the F3 key.
2) Change width
This item changes the PWB transport width
When the control item Change width is checked, click the <EXEC> button
or press the F3 key.
(3) State display
The state of each sensor and each unit is always displayed on the screen.
9 38
9.3.4 Movable station control (Supported by a KE-2030)
When you select the [Conveyor] command on the [Ctrl] menu, then the [Movable
station control] command, the following Movable station control dialog box appears
on the screen.
Figure 9.3.4 Movable station control dialog box
(1) Control item

(2) Control button

The control buttons displayed vary depending on the control item you selected.
1) PWB detect pin

This item turns on and/or off the PWB detecting cylinder valve.
When the control item PWB detect pin is checked, click the <ON>, <ON>
or <ON/OFF> button, or press the F3, F4 or F5 key.
The state display is updated when the cylinder is controlled completely.
9 39
2) Origin
This item returns the movable station to its home position.
When the control item Origin is checked, click the <EXEC> button or
press the F3 key.
3) Moving
This item moves the movable station.
When the control item Moving is checked, click the <EXEC> button or
press the F3 key.
(3) State display

Each unit state is displayed when the unit is controlled completely.
9 40
9.3.5 Vacuum Table Control
When you select the [Ctrl] command on the Manual control menu, the [Conveyor]
command on the displayed menu, and then the [Vacuum table control] command, the
following Vacuum table control dialog box appears on the screen.
Figure 9.3.5 Vacuum table control dialog box (screen example when a KE-2020 is used)
(1) Control items

Select which item is to be controlled with checking the corresponding radio
button.
(2) Control buttons

By clicking each control button, you can control the selected control item.
The actually displayed control buttons vary depending on the control item you
selected.
9 41
1) Vacuum
When the radio button Vacuum is checked, you can turn on/off vacuum of
the vacuum table.
When the radio button Vacuum is checked, click the <ON>, <OFF> or
<ON/OFF> button or press the F3, F4 or F5 button.
The State display is updated when the selected vacuum function is
2) Blow cont
When the radio button Blow cont is checked, you can turn on/off the blow
function of the vacuum table.
When the radio button Blow cont is checked, click the <ON>, <OFF>, or
<ON/OFF> button, or press the F3, F4 or F5] key.
The state display is updated when the selected blow function is controlled
completely.
3) Support table
When the radio button Support table is checked, you can move up or
down the support table.
When the radio button Support table is checked, click the <UP>,
<DOWN> or <UP/DOWN> button, or press the F3, F4 or F5] key.
(3) State
This column shows the condition of each unit when controlled completely.
9 42
9.4 Vision
9.4.1 VCS control

When you select the [Vision] command on the [Ctrl] menu, then the [Vision control]
command, the following "VCS control" dialog box appears on the screen.
Figure 9.4.1 VCS control dialog box
(1) Control unit

Select a unit to be controlled from the combo box.
Note that you cannot select a unit whose view type is not set (that is, not
installed) with the "Option" menu of the MS parameters.
This selection will not affect the setting of the "Device enable" dialog box invoked
from the Machine setup menu (you can select a unit not checked (that is, not
enabled)).
When you press the down arrow key while holding down the Alt key, the
following list appears on the screen.
(KE-2020) (KE-2040)
9 43
(2) Control head
Select a head to be controlled from the combo box.
This selection will not affect the setting of the "Device enable" dialog box invoked
from the Machine setup menu (you can select a unit not checked (that is, not
enabled)).
Note: You can select the FMLA head only.
When you press the down arrow key while holding down the Alt key, the
(KE-2020) (KE-2040)
(3) Control item

(4) Control button

1) Back light
This control item turns on and/or off the back light.
- When the control item "Back light" is checked, click the <ON>, <OFF> or
<ON/OFF> button or press the F3, F4 or F5 key to control the back light.
- If you click the <Setting> button or press the F6 key when the control item
"Back light" is checked, the "Light setting" dialog box appears on the
screen.
The state of the back light is updated when the back light is controlled
completely.
9 44
2) Side light
This control item turns on and/or off the side light.
- When the control item "Side light" is checked, click the <ON>, <OFF> or
<ON/OFF> button or press the F3, F4, or F5 key to control the side
light.
"Side light" is checked, the "Light setting" dialog box appears on the
screen.
The state of the side light is updated when the side light is controlled
completely.
3) Bottom light
This control item turns on and/or off the bottom light.
- When the control item "Bottom light" is checked, click the <ON>, <OFF>
or <ON/OFF> button or press the F3, F4, or F5 key to control the bottom
light.
"Bottom light" is checked, the "Light setting" dialog box appears on the
screen.
The state of the bottom light is updated when the bottom light is controlled
completely.
4) Front light
This control item turns on and/or off the front light.
- When the control item "Front light" is checked, click the <ON>, <OFF> or
<ON/OFF> button or press the F3, F4, or F5 key to control the front light.
"Front light" is checked, the "Light setting" dialog box appears on the
screen.
completely.
The state of the front light is updated when the front light is controlled
5) All light
This control item turns on and/or off the all lights.
- When the control item "All light" is checked, click the <ON>, <OFF> or
<ON/OFF> button or press the F3, F4 or F5 key to control the all lights.
"All light" is checked, the "Light setting" dialog box appears on the screen.
The state of the all lights is updated when the all lights are controlled
completely.
9 45
Figure 9.4.2 Light setting dialog box
- Bright
Move the slide bar to set the brightness.
To move the slide bar, press any of arrow keys, PgUp key or PgDn key.
- Back light
Select which light is to be controlled with checking the corresponding
check box.
- Side light
check box.
Select the color with the corresponding radio button.
- Bottom light
check box.
When you click the <OK> button, the lights are turned on under the
conditions you set here.
When you click the <CANCEL> button, your settings are canceled.
6) Polarity
This control item controls the polarity: negative or positive.
When the control item "Polarity" is checked, click the <Positive>, <Negative>
or <Positive/Negative> button, or press the F3, F4, or F5 key.
7) Side light cylinder

This control item turns on and/or off the side light cylinder.
When the control item "Side light cylinder" is checked, click the <ON>,
<OFF> or <ON/OFF> button or press the F3, F4, or F5 key to control the
side light cylinder.
The state of the side light cylinder is displayed when it is controlled
completely.
(5) State display
9 46
The state of each unit is displayed when it is controlled completely.
9.5 Feeder
9.5.1 MTC control

When you select the [Feeder] command on the [Ctrl] menu, then [MTC control]
command, the following "MTC control" dialog box appears on the screen.
Figure 9.5.1 MTC control dialog box
(1) Control item

Note: If you use a station not equipped with a transport conveyor, you cannot select
"Zero the conveyor" or "Change of transport width".
9 47
Select the position when the MTC is controlled with the corresponding radio
button.
This item is available only when you select "Shuttle vacuum" as the control item.
Note: This item is available for a TR-6S or TR-6D only.
(3) Control button

1) Tray
This item extends and/or stores a tray.
When the control item "Tray" is checked, click the <EXTEND>, <STORE> or
<EX./ST.> button or press the F3, F4, or F5 key to control a tray.
The state of a tray is updated when it is controlled completely.

2) Shuttle
This item extends and/or stores the shuttle.
When the control item "Shuttle" is checked, click the <EXTEND>, <STORE>
or <EX./ST.> button or press the F3, F4, or F5 key to control a shuttle.
The state of the shuttle is updated when it is controlled completely.

3) Shuttle vacuum
This item controls vacuuming of the shuttle.
When the control item "Shuttle vacuum" is checked, click the <ON>, <OFF>
or <ON/OFF> button or press the F3, F4, or F5 key to vacuum the shuttle.
completely.
The shuttle vacuuming state is updated when the shuttle is vacuumed
(4) State display

Each unit state is displayed when it is controlled completely.
The online state, door open/close condition and cover open/close condition are
always displayed on the screen.
9 48
9.5.2 Feeder Knock Pin Control
When you select the [Feeder] command on the [Ctrl] menu, then the [Feeder knock
pin control] command, the following Feeder knock pin control dialog box appears.
Figure 9.5.2.1 Feeder knock pin control dialog box
(1) Control item

You can select the control item on the FPI control only when the Feeder position
indicator is checked (installed) on the Option menu of the MS parameter.
from the Machine Setup menu (this means that you can select a not-checked
unit).

When selecting Tape feeding action as the control item, select the position of
the pin to be controlled from the control side (using the radio button) and the
number (using the edition box).
When selecting Direct knock action in the control items, select the position of
the pin to be controlled from the control side (using the radio button).
9 49
(3) Kind of feeder
When selecting Tape feeding action as the control item, select the tape width
and feed pitch from the combo box.
This item cannot be set when the control item Direct knock action is selected.
The following list appears when you press the ALT key and key at the
same time.
Tape width
Feed pitch
The available feed pitches vary depending on the tape width you selected.
9 50
(4) Control button
Each control item can be executed with the control button.
The display of the control buttons varies depending on the control item you
selected.
1) Tape feeding action

This item feeds a tape.
When the control item Tape feeding action is checked, select the< EXEC>
button, or press the F3 key to control the tape feed.
2) Direct knock action

This item executes knock operation per feeder bank.
When the control item Direct knock action is checked, select the< EXEC>
button, or press the F3 or F4 key to control the direct knock.
3) FPI cont. (Independent)

This item turns on and/ or off the feeder position indicator.
When the control item FPI cont. is checked, select the <ON>, <OFF>,
<ON/OFF> or <BLINK> button, or press the F3, F4, F5 or F6 key.
4) FPI cont. (All)

This item turns on and/ or off the feeder position indicators on the front
feeder bank or rear feeder bank.
When the control item FPI cont. is checked, select the <ON>, <OFF>,
<ON/OFF)> or <BLINK> button, or press the F3, F4, F5 or F6 key.
9 51
9.5.3 DTS control
When you select the [Feeder] command on the [Ctrl] menu, then [DTS control]
command, the following "DTS control" dialog box appears on the screen.
Figure 9.5.3 DTS control dialog box
(1) Control item

(2) Speed
Select the speed to be controlled with the corresponding radio button.
9 52
(3) Control button
1) Tray
- When the control item "Tray" is checked, click the <TrayA>, <TrayB> or
<A/B> button or press the F3, F4 or F5 key to control a tray.

(4) State display
9 53
9.5.4 MTS control
When you select the [Feeder] command on the [Ctrl] menu, then [MTS control]
command, the following "MTS control" dialog box appears on the screen.
Figure 9.5.4 MTS control dialog box
(1) Control item

(2) Control button

1) Tray
- When the control item "Tray" is checked, click the <EXTEND>, <STORE>
or <EX./ST.> button or press the F3, F4 or F5 key to control a tray.

(3) State display
9 54
9.6 Others
9.6.1 ATC control

When you select the [Others] command from the [Ctrl] menu, then the [ATC control]
command, the following ATC control dialog box appears on the screen.
Figure 9.6.1.1 ATC control screen
(1) Control unit

When you press the ALT key and down arrow key at the same time, the
Note: You can select R-ATC only when you use a KE-2030.
9 55
(2) Control head
Select the head to be controlled from the combo box.
This selection does not affect the settings of the Device enable menu invoked
from the Machine Setup menu: this means that a not-checked (not used) unit
can be selected.
When you press the ALT key and down arrow key at the same time, the
Note: You can select only a head located on the selected ATC side for a KE-2030.
(3) Control item

(4) Control button

selected.
1) Slide plate cont.

This item controls open/close the ATC slide plate.
- When the control item Slide plate cont. is checked, select the <OPEN>,
<CLOSE> or <OPEN/CL> button, or press the F3, F4 or F5 key to
control the slide plate.
The state display of the sensor is updated when the control is completed.
9 56
2) Nozzle change
This item changes the nozzle.
- When the control item Nozzle change is checked, select the <EXEC>
button, or press the F3 key to control the nozzle change.
- <EXEC> button, F3 key:
Returns the nozzle, if it is attached to the specified head, to the ATC.
Fetches the nozzle from the specified ATC.
The ATC select dialog box appears as shown in Figure 9.6.1.2 when
Nozzle change is selected.
- When you click the <All select> button, all available ATCs are selected.
- When you click the <All delete> button, all selected ATCs are canceled.
- When you use the radio button to select the ATC number whose nozzle
is to be replaced, then click the <OK> button, the nozzle of the selected
ATC is replaced with a new one.
Figure 9.6.1.2 ATC No. select screen
When a nozzle is installed successfully, the head mark (L1 to L4,

R1 to R4) is appended to the ATC number of the state display.
- The nozzle number appears below the ATC number.
- The state display is updated when the nozzle is controlled completely.
- When you press the <STOP> switch while a nozzle is being replaced
with a new one, the confirmation dialog box appears on the screen.
When you select the <Yes> button, the machine terminates the nozzle
replacement operation. When you select the <No> button, the
machine continues replacing a nozzle.
9 57
3) Nozzle remove
This item returns the nozzle to the ATC.
When the control item Nozzle return is checked, select the <EXEC>
button, or press the F3 key to control the nozzle return operation.
- When the nozzle has been returned successfully, the head mark
displayed with the ATC number of the status display disappears.
- The state display is updated when the control is completed.
(5) State display

The state of each unit is displayed when the unit is controlled completely.
9 58
9.6.2 Signal light control
When you select the [Others] command on the [Ctrl] menu, then the [Signal light
control] command, the following Signal light control dialog box appears on the
screen.
Figure 9.6.2 Signal light control screen
(1) Control item

(2) Control button

The display of the control buttons varies depending on the control items you
selected.
9 59
1) Red
This item turns on/off or flashes the red signal light.
- When the control item Red is checked, select the <ON>, <OFF>,
<ON/OFF> or <BLINK> button, or press the F3, F4, F5 or F6 key or
ALT + 4 keys to control the red signal light.
The state display is updated when the red signal is controlled
completely.
2) Yellow
This item turns on/ off or flashes the yellow signal light.
- When the control item Yellow is checked, select the <ON>, <OFF>,
ALT + 4 keys to control the yellow signal light.
The state display is updated when the yellow signal light is controlled
completely.
3) Green
This item turns on/off or flashes the green signal light.
- When the control item Green is checked, select the <ON>, <OFF>,
ALT + 4 keys to control the green signal light.
The state display is updated when the green light is controlled completely.

4) Buzzer
This item turns on and/or off the buzzer.
- When the control item Buzzer is indicated with a check mark, select
the <ON>, <OFF> or <ON/OFF> button or press the F3, F4or F5 key to
control the buzzer.
The state display is updated when the buzzer is controlled completely.

5) Mini signal light (Front)
This item turns on and/or off the front mini signal light.
- When the control item Mini signal light (Front) is checked, select the
<ON>, <OFF> or <ON/OFF> button or press the F3, F4or F5 key to
control the front mini signal light.
controlled
The State display is updated when the front mini signal light is
completely.
6) Mini signal light (Rear)

This item turns on and/or off the rear mini signal light.
- When the control item Mini signal light (Rear) is checked, select the
<ON>, <OFF> or <ON/OFF> button or press the F3, F4or F5 key to
control the rear mini signal light.
The State display is updated when the rear mini signal light is
(3) State display
9 60
The state display of each unit is updated when the unit is controlled completely.
9 61
9.6.3 Component verification
When you select the [Others] command on the [Ctrl] menu, then the [CVS control]
command, the following CVS control dialog box appears on the screen.
Figure 9.6.3 CVS control dialog box
(1) Control item

(2) Control button

Execute the selected control item with its control button.
selected.
9 62
1) Probe
This item turns on and/or off the probe.
- When the control item Probe is checked, click the <ON>, <OFF>, or
<ON/OFF> button or press the F3, F4or F5 key to control the probe.
The state display is updated when the probe is controlled completely.

2) Meas. of capacitor
This item measures the capacity of a capacitor component.
- When the control item Meas. of capacitor is checked, click the
<Measurement> or <Mode> button, or press F3 or F4 key to control
measurement of a capacitor.
The state display is updated at end of control.

3) Meas. of diode
This item measures the capacity of a diode component.
- When the control item Meas. of diode is checked, click the
<Measurement> or <Mode> button, or press F3 or F4 key to control
measurement of a capacitor.
The state display is updated at end of control.

4) Meas. of resistor
This item measures the capacity of a resistor component.
- When the control item Resistor measurement is checked, click the
<Measurement> or <Mode> button, or press the F3 or F4 key to control
measurement of a resistor.
The state display is updated when the capacity of a resistor is
measured.
(3) State display

9 63
9.6.4 SOT direction check table
When you select the [Control], [Others] and [SOT inspect unit] commands in this
order, the following SOT inspect unit dialog box appears on the screen.
Figure 9.6.4 SOT inspect unit dialog box
(1) Control item

Check the radio button.
(2) Control buttons

Click the corresponding control button to execute the displayed function.
1) Vacuum cont
This function turns on/off the vacuum unit.
- Click the <ON>, <OFF> or <ON/OFF> button, or press the F3, F4 or F5
key when the radio button for the control item Vacuum cont is checked.
The State display is updated when the corresponding unit is controlled
completely.
(3) State display

This displays the condition of each unit when the unit is controlled completely.
9 64
9.6.5 Calibration block control
When you select the [Others] command on the [Ctrl] menu, then the [Calibration
block control] command, the following Calibration block control dialog box appears
on the screen.
Figure 9.6.5 Calibration block control dialog box
(1) Control item

(2) Control button

Execute the selected control item with the corresponding radio button.
selected.
1) LED cont.
This item turns on and/ or off the LED
- When the control item LED cont. is checked, click the <ON>, <OFF>
or <ON/OFF> button, or press the F3, F4 or F5 key.
The state display is updated when the LED is controlled completely.
9 65
2) Vacuum cont.
This item turns on and/or off the vacuum.
- When the control item Vacuum cont. is checked, click the <ON>,
<OFF> or <ON/OFF> button, or press the F3, F4 or F5 key.
The state display is updated when vacuum is controlled completely.

(3) State display
9 66
9.6.6 Other sensors
When you select the [Others] command on the [Ctrl] menu, then the [Other sensors]
command, the following Other sensors dialog box appears on the screen.
Front
Rear
Upper (X-axis)
Upper (VCS*)
available with a
KE-2020/2040 only.
Figure 9.6.6 Other sensors dialog box
(1) State display

This displays the status of each sensor.
- This function does not affect the setting of the Device enable menu invoked
from the Machine Setup menu: this means that you can display the state of
a not-checked (not used) unit.
The state display of the sensors will be performed by continually reading and
displaying the status.
9 67
9.6.7 Driver state
When you select the [Driver state] command on the Others menu that is invoked
from the [Ctrl] command, the following Driver state dialog box appears on the
screen.
Figure 9.6.7 Driver state dialog box (displayed with a KE-2010)
(1) State display

This section displays the status of each axis.
The system displays *** in the column for an axis that is set to Not used on
the Device enable screen that is invoked from the Machine Setup menu.
The system displays one of the following types of status for each axis: Normal,
Over current, Over load, Voltage limit over, EEPROM Err, Over heating, Encoder
Err and CPU Err.
When you click the <REFLESH> button, the system obtains the status of each
axis again, and then updates the corresponding status.
If the system detects one of the errors: Voltage limit over, EEPROM Err, Over
heating and CPU Err, it cannot judge which axis generates the corresponding
error. Therefore, the axes described below are put in the same status.
Table 9.7.1 Combination of axes sharing the CPU
Model X and Y axes Z and T axes
XL, XR, Z and T axes of the Z and T axes of the
KE-2010
YL, YR heads L1 and L2 heads L3 and L4
XL, XR, Z and T axes of the Z and T axes of the Z and T axes of the
KE-2020
YL, YR heads L1 and L2 heads L3 and L4 R1 head
XL, XR, Z and T axes of the Z and T axes of the Z and T axes of the Z and T axes of the
KE-2030 Yc
YL, YR heads L1 and L2 heads L3 and L4 heads R1 and R2 heads R3 and R4
XL, XR, Z and T axes of the Z and T axes of the
KE-2040
YL, YR heads L1 heads R1
Each displayed status, its description and cause are shown in the table below.
9 68
Table 9.7.2 Description and cause of each status
Displayed Description Cause

status
Normal The corresponding axes function normally.
The system found that the current supplied to the motor - Short circuit in the motor
Over current exceeded the regulated value.
- Motor rare short
The system found that the average current supplied to the Axis locked
motor exceeded the regulated value.
Motor cable is broken.
Over load
Overload operation
Break failure
The system found that the number of motor rotations Encoder error
exceeded the set value.
The system found that excess voltage was placed on the Regeneration error
Voltage limit power supply that drove the motor.
over Excessive input voltage
The system found that the servo ON signal was input and Input voltage error
the current driving the motor decreased below the
A break in the power supply
regulated value.
EEPROM Err The system found that the EEPROM malfunctioned. Driver error
The system found that the temperature of the heat sink Overload
Over heating was raised abnormally.
Ambient temperature rise
The system detected that the line driver output of the motor Break in the encoder
encoder was not connected to the system.
Encoder Err The system detected the commutation signal error of the Encoder error
motor encoder.
The system detected the encoder output error at power-on. Wiring failure
CPU Err The system found that the CPU malfunctioned. CPU error
9 69
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE MODE
10.1 Overview
The setting items provided on the Maintenance menu are shown in Table below.
No. Maintenance command Description

1 Warming up Sets the time or number of times.
2 Idle Conveyor Sets when to use the machine as a PWB transportation buffer.
3 Machine Management Displays the entire machine operation information.
information
4 Self-Calibration See Chapter 11 "SELF CALIBRATION".
After selecting the[Maintenance] command on the menu bar displayed on the

Main screen, invoke each screen.
Figure 10.1 Main screen
10 1
10.2 Warming up
10.2.1 Warm-up initial screen

When you select the [Warming Up] command on the [Maintenance] menu invoked
from the menu bar of the main menu, the following Warm-up initial screen appears.
Figure 10.2.1.1 Warm-up dialog box
- When you press the <START> switch, the warm-up operation starts.
10.2.2 Setting the conditions for warming-up operation

When you click the <SET> button, the following "Setting" dialog box appears on the
screen.
Figure 10.2.2.1 Setting dialog box
(1) Device to be warmed up

- Select the device to be warmed up: Axis, Conveyor and/or MTC.
- If the MTC is not checked on the "Device enable" menu invoked from the
Machine Setup menu, the item "MTC" is disabled, and you cannot select it.
- Any of these devices is not selected, the <OK> button is disabled.
Initial setting: Axis
10 2
(2) Setting the pause time and number of times
- Set the time spent for stopping warming-up operation and the number of times
you are to perform warming-up operations.
- The available values vary depending on the warming-up operation terminating
conditions.
- Time: 0 to 9999 (minutes)
Note: When "0" is set, warming-up operation will not finish until you suspend it.
- Number: 1 to 999999
Initial value: 0
(3) Setting the condition for terminating warming-up operation

- Select the condition for terminating warming-up operation: Time or Number.
Initial setting: Time
(4) Setting the speed

- Set the speed of an axis.
- You can select high speed (High) or middle speed (Middle).
Initial setting: Middle
Note: The axis speed is fixed to Middle for the standard specifications
(see Figure 10.2.2.1.)
Contact us or your dealer for the details on the speed setting (variable).
10 3
10.2.3 Warming-up operation
During warming-up, a screen shown below appears.
Figure 10.2.3.1 "Under warm-up" dialog box
(1) Axis
The X, Y Z and theta axes motors and the ATC slide plate operate.
Note that warming-up operation finishes when the ATC slide plate opens and
closes ten times.
(2) Conveyor
The PWB transfer motor, back-up table, stopper pin, edge reference cylinder
(option), and PWB check cylinder (only for a KE-2030) operate.
Note that warm-up operation finishes when each of the stopper pin, edge
reference cylinder and PWB check cylinder turns on, then off four times.
(3) MTC
The shuttle operates.
When you press the <STOP> switch or click the <STOP> button displayed on
the dialog box above, the confirmation dialog box appears on the screen.
When you click the <Yes> button, warming-up operation terminates.
When you click the <No> button, warming-up operation restarts.
10 4
10.3 Idle Conveyor
Use this command when you transport a PWB through this machine as a PWB
transportation buffer.
When you select the [Idle Conveyor] command on the [Maintenance] menu invoked
from the menu bar of the main menu, the following "IDLE MODE" initial screen
appears.
Figure 10.3.1 Initial screen
- When you click the <OK> button, the machine starts operating as a PWB
transportation buffer and the following screen appears.
Figure 10.3.2 "IDLE MODE-to act for PWB transport" dialog box
- When you click the <STOP> button, the machine stops acting as a PWB
transportation buffer.
If the system has not returned to the home position yet at start-up, the following
confirmation message appears on the screen.
Figure 10.3.3 Not returned to home position confirmation message
If the message above appears on the screen, manually move the head to outside the
PWB transport path, and push down the support table. Check to see if a PWB can
be transported.
10 5
10.4 Machine Management Information
When you select the [Maintenance] command on the menu bar, then the [Device
Management Information] command on the Maintenance menu, it allows you to select
any of the following operation information items.
10.4.1 Machine operation information

When you select the [Window] command on the menu bar, then the [Machine
Operation Information] command on the displayed menu, a screen shown in Figure
10.4.1.1 or 10.4.1.2 appears.

1 Number of produced Total number of PWBs produced after the machine starts collecting data.
PWBs This number is counted independently of a production program.
2 Production number Total number of PWBs produced after the machine starts collecting data.
(circuit) This number is updated when one PWB is produced completely, and does not
include the number of circuits on which a bad mark was detected (does not
include PWBs whose production was interrupted halfway either).
3 Ratio of Pick-up Component picking ratio (%)
([Number of picked components] / [Number of picked components] + [Number
of Pick-up errors]) x 100 (%)
4 Ratio of Placement Machine placing ratio (%)
([Number of picked components] / [Number of picked components] + [Number
of Pick-up errors]) x 100 (%)
5 Ratio of Operation Machine operating ratio (%)
[Operation time] / [Number of picked components] + [Number of Pick-up
errors]) x 100 (%)
6 Ratio of Retry 100 - (Ratio of Pick-up)
7 Power supply ON time Total time passed since power-on or the machine starts collecting data
8 Operation time Total time spent in producing PWBs since the machine starts collecting data
This time represents the time spent in picking and placing components (and
also discarding them).
9 Preparation time to drive Total time for which the machine does not produce any PWB such as time
spent in editing data.
[Power supply ON time] - [Operation time]
[Conveyor waiting time]
[Stop time caused by Out-of-Component]
[Maintenance stop time]
[Stop time caused by trouble]
10 Conveyor waiting time Total of the time durations from when the system started transporting a PWB
to when it finished transporting it.
11 Carry in waiting time Total of the time durations from when the system became able to send in a
PWB to when the next PWB was clamped.
12 Carry out waiting time Total of the time durations from when the clamped PWB was released to
when the PWB was stored onto the OUT buffer. However, it does not include
the time duration spent for an operation performed to eject a PWB only.
13 Maintenance stop time Total time for which the machine pauses in response to user request
14 Stop time caused by Total time for which the machine pauses due to an error.
trouble
15 Stop time caused by Total time for which the machine stops because the stocked components run
Out-of-Component out.
16 Number of picked Total number of times the machine picked components successfully (This
components number is counted independently of a production program/component supply
device.)
17 Number of placed Total number of times the machine placed components successfully (This
components number is counted independently of a production program/component supply
device.)
10 6
18 Number of Pick-up Total number of times a picking error occurred (This number is counted
errors independently of a production program/component supply device.)
A chip rise error or recognition error is not counted.
19 Number of STOP Total number of times the machine paused because the stocked components
caused by out of run out.
components When the menu item <Pause due to run-out> is not enabled, this number is
not counted.
20 Number of Tombstone Total number of component rise errors detected
check errors When the menu item <Tombstone detection> is not enabled, this number is
not counted.
21 Number of Dimension Total number of times an odd-shaped component error occurred
errors
22 Number of LA Total number of times an LA recognition error occurred
recognition error
23 Number of Component Total number of times a placement posture check error occurred
posture errors before
placement
24 Number of conveyor Total number of errors which occurred during PWB transportation
errors This number does not include any interruption of PWB transportation.
25 Number of Maintenance Total number of times the machine paused in response to user request
stop
26 Number of Trouble stop Total number of times the machine paused due to an error
27 Number of Verify Total number of times a verify error occurred
detection errors
28 Number of Coplanarity Total number of times a coplanarity error occurred
detection errors
29 Number of BOC mark Total number of BOC mark recognition errors
recognition errors
30 Number of IC mark Total number of an IC mark recognition error occurred
recognition errors
31 Number of Bank mark Total number of times a bank mark error occurred
recognition errors
10 7
Figure 10.4.1.1 Machine Operation Information (1/2)
Figure 10.4.1.2 Machine Operation Information (2/2)
10 8
When you select the [Tool] command on the menu bar, then the [Reset] command on
the Tool menu while the window above is being displayed on the screen, the following
Figure 10.4.1.3 "Operation Information of the desired unit

is reset" Question dialog box
When you click the <OK> button on the dialog box above, the system resets all of
the machine operation information data.
When you click the <Cancel> button, the system continues displaying the current
data without resetting it.
10 9
10.4.2 Nozzle operation information
10.4.2.1 Operation Information of each nozzle

When you select the [Windows] command on the menu bar, then the [Operation
Information of each nozzle] command on the displayed menu, the screen appears as
shown in Figure 10.4.2.1.1.

1 NZL Change Counts how many times the nozzle (specified with the ATC number) was
replaced.
2 Pick Counts how many times the nozzle (specified with the ATC number) picked a
component totally.
3 Place Counts how many times the nozzle (specified with the ATC number) placed a
component totally.
4 Exch. Err. Counts how many times a replacement error occurred per a nozzle (specified
with the ATC number).
5 Pick Err. Counts how many times a pick-up error occurred per a nozzle (specified with
the ATC number).
6 Retry Counts how many times the nozzle (specified with the ATC number) performed
a retry.
7 LA Recog Counts how many times an LA recognition error occurred at the nozzle
(specified with the ATC number).
8 V. Recog Counts how many times a vision recognition error occurred at the nozzle
9 Chip Counts how many times a chip rise error occurred at the nozzle (specified with
the ATC number).
10 Dimension Counts how many times an odd-shaped component error occurred at the nozzle
11 Vrfy Counts how many times a verify error occurred at the nozzle (specified with the
ATC number).
12 Cpla Counts how many times a coplanarity error occurred at the nozzle (specified
with the ATC number).
Figure 10.4.2.1.1. Nozzle Operation Information
10 10
10.4.2.2 Setting up each item of Nozzle Operation Information
When you select the [Tool] command on the menu bar, the [Exchange frequency
setup] command on the displayed menu, then the [Each nozzle] command, the screen
appears as shown in Figure 10.4.2.2.1.
If you manually change the ATC nozzle assignment, you can change data on each
nozzle.
Figure 10.4.2.2.1 Exchange frequency setup dialog box
10 11
The "Exchange frequency setup dialog box" above allows you to select data to be
reset with a keyboard or mouse, then select the [Reset] on the pop-up menu
which is displayed by your clicking the right button to reset the selected data.
- When you click the <Reset> button displayed on the bottom of the dialog box
above, the system allows you to reset data also, then the following dialog box
Figure 10.4.2.2.3 Frequency resetting confirmation dialog box
- When you click the <OK> button, the selected data is reset. When you click the
<Cancel> button, the system does not reset the selected data.
When you click the [All Reset] on the pop-up menu shown in Figure 10.4.2.2.2, the
Figure 10.4.2.2.4 All frequency data resetting confirmation dialog box
- When you click the <OK> button on the dialog box above, the system resets all of
the operation information of each nozzle. When you click the <Cancel> button,
the system does not reset any data.
10 12
10.4.2.3 Setting the warning level
When you select the [Tool] command on the menu bar, the [The Warning level is set]
command on the displayed menu, then the [Each nozzle] Command the screen
Figure 10.4.2.3.1 <Warning level is set> dialog box
If the number of times components were picked up actually exceeds the warning
level you set here, the nozzle is displayed in yellow on the "Operation Information
of each nozzle" screen shown in Figure 10.4.2.1.1.
The signal lights lighting condition remains unchanged.
10 13
10.4.2.4 Setting the error level
When you select the [Tool] command on the menu bar, the [The Error level is set]
command on the displayed menu, then the [Each nozzle] command, the screen
This screen allows you to set the error level.
Figure 10.4.2.4.1 "The error level is set" dialog box
If the number of times components were picked up actually exceeds the error
level you set here, the nozzle is displayed in red on the "Operation Information of
each nozzle" screen shown in Figure 10.4.2.1.1.
The signal lights lighting condition remains unchanged.
10 14
10.4.3 Head operating information
10.4.3.1 Operation information of each head

When you select the [Windows] command on the menu bar, then the [Operation
Information of each head] command on the displayed menu, the screen appears as
shown in Figure 10.4.3.1

1 Nozzle replacement count (Nozzle L1) Displays how many times the nozzle L1 was replaced.
5 Nozzle replacement count (Nozzle Displays how many times the nozzle R1 was replaced.
R1)
6 Nozzle replacement count Displays how many times the nozzle was replaced per
a cylinder.
7 Slide plate open/shut count Displays how many times the slide plate was
opened/closed.
Figure 10.4.3.1 Operation Information of each head
10 15
10.4.3.2 Setting the number of times for replacing a head
When you select the [Tool] command on the menu bar, the [Exchange frequency
setup] command on the displayed menu, then the [Each head] command the screen
When you replace the head nozzle with another one, set this number to <0> to
initialize the number.
10.4.3.3 Setting the warning level

When you select the [Tool] command on the menu bar, the [The Warning level is set]
command on the displayed menu, then the [Each head] command, the screen
Figure 10.4.3.3.1 "The warning level is set" dialog box
10.4.3.4 Setting the error level

When you select the [Tool] command on the menu bar, the [The error level is set]
command on the displayed menu, then the [Each head] command, the screen
Figure 10.4.3.4.1 "The error level is set" dialog box
10 16
10.4.4 Light operation information
When you select the [Windows] command on the menu bar, then the [Light Operation
Information] command on the displayed menu, the screen appears as shown in Figure
10.4.4.1.

1 HMS Using count Displays how many times the HMS was used.
2 HMS Using time Displays the time spent in using the HMS.
3 OCC Using count Displays how many times the OCC was used.
4 OCC Using time Displays the time spent in using the OCC.
5 Light-on time Displays the total time each signal light (red, yellow and blue) lit.
6 Blink time Displays the total time each signal light (red, yellow and blue) flashed.
7 Total Light on/Blink Displays the total time the signal light lit or flashed.
time
8 Total Light on/Blink Displays how many times the signal light lit or flashed.
count
Figure 10.4.4.1 Light Operation Information
10 17
10.4.5 Driver operation information
When you select the [Window] command on the menu bar, then the [Driver Operation
Information] command on the displayed menu, the screen appears as shown in Figure
10.4.5.1.
No. Classification Item Description

1 Auto PWB Width driving Displays how many times the automatic PWB
count adjustment was performed since this information
was cleared the last time.
2 Backup plate driving Displays how many times the backup plate was
count driven.
3 Conveyor Stopper pin driving count Displays how many times the stopper pin was
driven.
4 Shape Ref. driving count Displays how many times the machine has
produced PWBs by referring to the shape of
PWBs since this information was cleared the last
time.
Figure 10.4.5.1 Driver Operation Information
10 18
10.4.6 VCS operation information
10.4.6.1 VCS operation information

When you select the [Tool] command on the menu bar, then the [Reset] command
while the "Driver Operation Information" screen is being displayed, the dialog box

1 Using count Displays how many times the VCS was used.
2 Using time Displays how long the VCS was used.
3 Reflective Illumination Displays how many times the reflective light was used.
Operation counts
4 Reflective Illumination Displays how long the reflective light was used.
Operation time
5 Penetrative Illumination Displays how many times the penetrative light was used.
Operation counts
6 Penetrative Illumination Displays how long the penetrative light was used.
Operation time
7 Side Illumination Displays how many times the side light was used.
Operation counts
8 Side Illumination Displays how long the side light was used.
Operation time
Figure 10.4.6.1.1 Driver operation information reset dialog box
10 19
10.4.7 Resetting the operation information data
10.4.7.1 Resetting each screen of the operation information

the Tool menu while the "Driver Operation Information" window is being displayed on
the screen, or when you click the <RST> button on the tool bar, the following dialog
Figure 10.4.7.1.1 "Reset [Driver Operation Information] dialog box
the Tool menu while the "Light Operation Information" window is being displayed on
the screen, or when you click the <RST> button on the tool bar, the following dialog
Figure 10.4.7.1.2 "Reset [Light Operation Information] dialog box
10 20
the Tool menu while the "Operation Information of each head" window is being
displayed on the screen, or when you click the <RST> button on the tool bar, the
Figure 10.4.7.1.3 "Reset [Operation Information of each head] dialog box
the Tool menu while the "Operation Information of each nozzle" window is being
displayed on the screen, or when you click the <RST> button on the tool bar,the
Figure 10.4.7.1.4 "Reset [Operation Information of each nozzle] dialog box
10 21
When you select the [Tool] command on the menu bar, then the [Reset] command or
click the <RST> button displayed on the menu bar while the "VCS Operation
information" screen is being displayed, the dialog box appears on the screen as
shown below.
Figure 10.4.7.1.5 Reset [VCS Operation information] dialog box
- When you click the <All select> button on the Reset dialog box above, all of the
check boxes are selected.
- When you click the <CANCEL> button, the machine will not reset any data. If you
clicked the <OK> button before you clicked the <CANCEL> button on the Reset
dialog box, this Reset dialog box will be closed.
- When you click the <APPLY> button, the Reset dialog box remains on the screen.
On each dialog box above, a check box is displayed next to the data items
respectively. Select the check box of the item to be reset, then click the <OK>
button or <APPLY> button. The following dialog box appears on the screen.
Figure 10.4.7.1.6 Driver operation information resetting confirmation dialog box
- When you click the <OK> button on the dialog box above, data of the item whose
check box is checked on the Reset dialog box is reset.
- When you click the <CANCEL> button, the system does not reset any data: if you
selected the <OK> button on the Reset dialog box, this Reset dialog box closes.
10 22
10.5 Operation to Be Performed When a Nozzle Attachment Error
Occurs
If a nozzle is attached on a head at power-on, or if an error occurs is stained when a

nozzle is replaced with another one, information on the nozzle of the head (stored in
the main unit internal memory) may not indicate the nozzle actually attached on the
head. In this case, follow the procedure below.
10.5.1 Semi-automatically returning a nozzle

Press the <ORIGIN> switch on the operation panel to move all axes to their home
positions respectively. After that, the message Checking Nozzle on Head (see
Figure 10.5.1.1) appears on the Originating screen.
The machine performs this axes operation if the nozzle arrangement for each
head stored in the machine internal memory does not match the the actual
nozzle arrangement.
Normally, the machine does not perform this operation.

If you set the main circuit breaker to off without returning a nozzle to the ATC
and turn on the machine again, or if a nozzle is replaced with another one
although a laser head is stained to cause a nozzle replacement error, the
machine performs this operation.
Figure 10.5.1.1 Checking Nozzle on Head message displayed on the screen

(Originating)
Detecting if a nozzle is attached on a head

If the nozzle arrangement for each head stored in the machine internal memory
does not match the the actual nozzle arrangement, the following screen (see
Figure 10.5.1.2) appears.
10 23
Return the nozzle attached on the head to the ATC on this screen.
Figure 10.5.1.2 Nozzle On Head Information screen
There are two ways for returning a nozzle to the ATC: Semi-Auto Nozzle
Returning and Manual Nozzle Returning.
Semi-Auto Nozzle Returning: Press the <Semi-Auto> button.
Manual Nozzle Returning: Press the <XY Move>, <Z Move>, <ATC
Open> and/or <ATC Close> buttons to move
a nozzle where you can remove it with your
hands, remove the nozzle from the head, and
then return it to the ATC.
10.5.1.1 Semi-Auto nozzle returning

When no stained laser head information appears on the screen, you can return a
nozzle semi-automatically in safety.
Step 1. Click the <Semi-Auto> button on the screen shown in Figure 10.5.1.2.
Step 2. The screen that asks you whether to return a nozzle semi-automatically
appears (see Figure 10.5.1.1.1).
Step 3. Click the <Exec> button to start returning a nozzle semi-automatically.
Figure 10.5.1.1.1 Nozzle Return screen
10 24
The machine operation varies depending on whether the HMS option is installed
on the machine or not:
If the HMS is installed on the machine, the machine uses the HMS to detect
whether a nozzle is located on the ATC.
Otherwise, the machine uses the head on which any nozzle is not attached to
detect every nozzle of the ATC.
If the HMS option is installed on the machine, a nozzle is automatically

returned to the original position.
Otherwise, a not-occupied head on which any nozzle is not attached is
required.
Therefore, if nozzles are attached on all of the heads the machines asks you
whether to return only a nozzle attached on one head to the ATC before returning
nozzles automatically. Specify the position of the ATC on which no nozzle is set.
Figure 10.5.1.1.2 Nozzle Return ATC Position screen
CAUTION When you click the <OK> button, a camera moves to the ATC
position to which a nozzle is returned, and the nozzle is
displayed on the VCS monitor.
When HLC performs the operation described above, it
displays the confirmation dialog box on the screen.
Operations of this dialog box are described below.
If a circular image is displayed on the monitor, it indicates that
a nozzle is located on the ATC. Therefore, the nozzle cannot
be returned to the ATC. Be sure to click the <CANCEL>
button.
If you happen to specify the ATC position on which a nozzle is
already set, a nozzle attached on the head crashes into the
nozzle set on the specified ATC position, and a Z-axis
overload error occurs to unlock the servo
Click the <OK> button. The machine returns a nozzle to the
specified ATC position. After the machine returns one nozzle,
it returns all of the remaining nozzles to the ATC automatically.
(However, since there are two heads on the left and right
sides of a KE-2030, the machine asks you whether to return a
nozzle per head.)
L Information on each nozzle such as the length and vacuum level is

automatically stored on the Setup data.
10 25
10.5.1.2 Manual nozzle returning
If the laser head is stained, manually return nozzles.
To return nozzles manually, as described before, move a head manually where you
can remove a nozzle from it, and then remove the nozzle actually to return it onto the
ATC.
Step 1. Click the corresponding button for moving a head or opening/closing the
ATC.
1. When you click the <XY Move> button on the screen shown in Figure 10.5.1.2,
the following screen appears. The origin of the XY-coordinates (0, 0) is the
left edge of the front side on which the operation panel is located.
Figure 10.5.1.2.1 A given XY coordinate move screen
2. When you click the <Z Move> button on the screen shown in Figure 10.5.1.2,
the following screen appears. The origin of the Z-axis (0, 0) is the PWB height,
and the top side is regarded as the positive direction while the bottom side is
as the negative direction.
Figure 10.5.1.2.2 A given Z coordinate move screen
10 26
Step 2. When you click the <ATC Open>/<ATC Close> button on the screen shown
in Figure 10.5.1.2, the following confirmation dialog box appears on the
screen.
Figure 10.5.1.2.3 <ATC Open> confirmation screen
Figure 10.5.1.2.4 <ATC Close> confirmation screen
10.5.1.3 Checking to see if the laser alignment sensor window is stained

When the laser sensor window is stained, be sure to clean it.
Step 1. Clean the laser alignment sensor window.

See Section 14.3.3Laser Alignment Sensor of Chapter 14
MAINTENANCE for how to clean the laser alignment sensor window.
Step 2. Check to see if the laser alignment sensor window is not stained after
cleaning it.
Press the <Edge Disp> button on the Nozzle On Head Information dialog
box shown in Figure 10.5.1.
Clean the laser alignment sensor window until the displayed value gets
below the threshold displayed in red.
The Manual Control utility allows you to check the more detailed
information.
(See Section 9.2.3 Laser Control of Chapter 9.)
10 27
(Referene)
A Trouble that occurs if you do not clean the stained laser alignment
sensor window
Inappropriate placement precision (A recognition error occurs if stains are
located over the shadow of a component. Therefore, the machine may
not realize the regulated placement precision randomly.)
Incensement of the number of discarded components (due to a
tombstone error, component dimension error and component orientation
error as well as laser error)
Lowered cycle time (because a laser recognition retry operation should
be performed)
Nozzle replacement error (because a nozzle is recognized with laser)
B Reason why the laser alignment sensor window is stained

The laser alignment sensor window may be stained due to dust, oil (oil of the
compressor and grease applied to the head are scattered), or dried-up
dust-like solder paste.
Oil of the compressor:
See Section 14.2.1 Air pressure of Chapter 14 MAINTENANCE.
If oil or water is stored in the drain, remove it.
Cleaning a nozzle:
See Section 14.3.4 Nozzle of Chapter 14 MAINTENANCE for how to
clean a nozzle.
Checkpoint

Check to see if the Z-slide shaft section is greased too much.
Check to see if any solder paste is stuck to a tip of a nozzle. If you judge
that a nozzle is not in contact with any solder paste on a board, solder
paste sprayed with air may piles at the tip of a nozzle little by little.
In such a case, check to see if:
The pitch of a feeder is shifted, or
The used nozzle is too large for a component.
10 28
10.5.2 Event View buttons
The following screen appears if you open the safety cover, if you press the
Emergency Stop button, or if the machine detects an alarm of each axis servo driver.
The message If See Another Events Click Right Button may appears on the
screen. This message appears if two or more events occur at the same time,
and the machine can display the event whose priority is higher only on the screen.
Figure 10.5.2.1 ERROR screen
When you click the <OK> button, events are displayed in the hierarchical view.
A check mark is displayed next to the events that actually occurred.
Figure 10.5.2.2 Hierarchical display of events

You do not have to check the events on the hierarchical display above normally.
However, if a driver error occurs and you judges the machine malfunctions, check this
display.
If a driver alarm error appears on the screen, check to see if an event that turns off
the servo power supply (such as Emergency Stop, area sensor activation, feeder float
and so on) occurs. If an event that turns off the servo power supply occurs even
though a driver alarm error appears on the screen, a driver may not malfunction in
many cases.
10 29
CHAPTER 11 SELF CALIBRATION
11.1 Overview
The items set for self-calibration are shown in Table below:
Note that a person who can set the following items is restricted as described under
Section 11.2 "User Group Setting".
Before you register the user group, be sure to contact our Technical Service
department.
Table 11.1.1 Self-calibration Items
No. Self-calibration group Description

1 Correct coefficient of XY axis Correction parameter for the XY axes stop accuracy
2 Laser sensor height Height of the laser sensor viewed from the top of a board
3 Rotation center of noz. Center of the nozzle rotation detected with the laser sensor
4 Head offset Assembling position of each head relative to the OCC
Assembling angle of the laser alignment unit relative to the main
unit
5 VCS offset VCS camera assembling position
6 VCS binary-coded threshold Binary-coded threshold when recognized by the VCS (threshold
level level)
7 Vacuum calibration Vacuum calibration value
(1) Screen displayed immediately after start-up

When you select the [Self-calibration] command on the [Setup] menu, the
following Self calibration initial screen appears.
Figure 11.1.1 Self calibration initial screen

11 1
(2) Commands
When you select one of the items displayed above, the corresponding dialog box
Set-up group
If a unit is not checked on the "Option" menu provided by the MS parameters
(that is, not installed), you cannot select it.
Figure 11.1.2 Set-up group items
(3) Saving the settings

The <OK> button and the <CANCEL> button are provided on each dialog box.
Even though you click the <OK> button, your setting is not at this point.
When you select the [File] command on the menu bar, then the [Exiting
Application] command on the File menu, the Save confirmation dialog box
appears on the screen. When you click the <Yes> button on this dialog box,
your setting is saved.
No. Button you can click Action

1 Yes Saves the settings, then exits from Self-calibration mode.
2 No Cancels your settings, then exits from Self-calibration mode.
3 Cancel Cancels the [Exiting Application] command.
11 2
11.2 XY Axis Correction Coefficients
When you select the [Set-up group] on the menu bar, then the [Correct coefficient of
XY axis] on the displayed menu, the following Correct coefficient of XY axis dialog
box appears.
(Corrective coefficient
already set)
(Corrective coefficient
measured)
* Displayed with a
KE-2030 only.
(Xr, Yc)
Figure 11.2.1 Correct coefficient of XY axis dialog box

(1) Setting items

1 Correct coefficient of XY axis Sets the XY stop accuracy correction parameter
(2) How to set

Set each parameter with following the instructions displayed on the dialog box
above.
When you click the <OK> button, your settings become valid (but, are not
saved at this point).
When you click the <CANCEL> button, your settings become invalid.
11 3
How to operate
When you follow the instructions displayed on the dialog box, the appropriate
values are automatically obtained.
Click the <Exec.> button.

When you click the <Exec.> button, the XY axes stop accuracy correction
parameters are automatically obtained.
Measurement
The machine obtains the temperature of the XY axes base frame, then
calculates the correction parameters.
When calculation is done, the message above appears on the screen.

To repeat this calculation, click the <Exec.> button.
When you click the <Exec.> button, the previous screen reappears.
To exit from this dialog box, click the <OK> button.
Note: If you change the XY axes stop accuracy correction parameters, you have
to zero the XY axes.
11 4
11.3 Laser Sensor Height
When you select the [Set-up group] command on the menu bar, then select the
[Laser sensor height] command on the displayed menu, the following Laser sensor
height dialog box appears on the screen.
(Height already set)

(Height measured)
(When the left 1

head is selected)
Figure 11.3.1 Laser sensor height screen
Select Head
Using this combo box, select the head to be set.
The units which are not checked on the Device enable menu invoked from the
Machine Setup menu (that is, checked as Not used) cannot be selected
When you press the ALT key and the down arrow key at the same time, the
11 5
(1) Setting items

1 Sensor height of LA Height of the laser sensor viewed from the top of a board
(2) How to set

For the head selected in the Select Head combo box, set the various values by
followings the instructions displayed on the dialog box.
When you click the <OK> button, your setting becomes valid (but not be
Operation
By following the instructions displayed, the appropriate value is automatically
obtained.
(When the left 1 head is selected)
The head selected in the Select Head combo box is to be set.

Select the <Exec.> button.
When you select the <Exec.> button, the nozzle (No. 500, 501 or 502) is
attached onto the head, and the laser sensor height is automatically
measured.
Measurement operation
The nozzle (No. 500, 501 or 502) is attached on the selected head.
An error occurs if the nozzle is not set for the ATC. In this case, assign
the nozzle on the ATC nozzle setup menu which is invoked from the
Machine Setup menu.
11 6
Using the laser alignment unit, measure the laser sensor height.
The machine has finished measuring the selected head.

To repeat the measurement operation, click the <Exec.> button.
When you click the <Exec.> button, the previous screen reappears.
To measure another head, select the desired head in the Head combo
box.
When you change the head in the Select Head combo box, the initial
screen appears.
To quit Self calibration mode, click the <OK> button.
11 7
11.4 Rotation Center of the Nozzle
When you select the [Set-up group] command on the menu bar, then the [Rotation
center of noz] command on the displayed menu, the following Rotation center of
noz. dialog box appears on the screen.
(Rotation center of the

nozzle already set)
(Rotation center of the
nozzle measured)
(When the left 1

head is selected)
Figure 11.4.1 Rotation center of noz. screen
Select Head
Using the Select Head combo box, select the head to be set.
You cannot select the head which is not checked on the Device enable menu
invoked from the Machine Setup menu.
When you press the Alt key and the down arrow key at the same time, the
11 8
(1) Setting items

1 Rotation center of noz Rotation center of the nozzle detected with the laser
(2) How to set

Follow the instructions displayed on the screen to set the head selected in the
Select Head combo box.
Operation
Follow the instructions displayed to obtain the appropriate value automatically.
The head selected in the Select Head combo box is to be set.

When you click the <Exec.> button, the selected head moves along the theta
axis in from 0 to 15-degree units 24 times repeatedly to obtain the average
value.
11 9
The system measures the nozzle rotation center with laser.
The machine has finished measurement operation.

To repeat the measurement operation, select the <Exec.> button.
When you select the <Exec.> button, the previous screen reappears.
To measure another head, select the head in the Select Head combo box.
When you change the selected head in the combo box, the initial screen
appears.
To quit this operation, select the <OK> button.
11 10
11.5 Head Offset
When you select the [Set-up group] command on the menu bar, then the [Head
offset] command on the displayed menu, the following the Head offset dialog box
(Assembling angle
already set)
(Assembling angle
measured)
Figure 11.5.1 Head offset screen
Select Head
Using this combo box, select the head to be set.
The heads which are not checked on the Device enable menu invoked from the
Machine Setup menu (that is, checked as Not used) cannot be selected.
11 11
(1) Setting items

1 Assembling position of head Mounting position of each head viewed from the OCC
2 Assembling angle of LA Mounting angle of the laser alignment onto the main unit (relative to
the main unit) ( )
(2) How to set

For the head selected in the Select Head combo box, follow the instructions
displayed on the dialog box to set the selected head.
Operation
Follow the displayed instructions to obtain the appropriate value automatically.
The machine sets up the head selected with the combo box.
When you click the <Exec.> button, the machine starts measurement.
Attach the No. 508 nozzle onto the selected head.
An error occurs if no nozzle is set for the ATC. In this case, assign the
nozzle on the ATC nozzle setup menu invoked from the Machine Setup
menu.
Move the jig from the jig station to the calibration block if there is no jig on
the calibration block.
An error occurs if the jig cannot be picked up. In this case, remount the
jig.
11 12
Set the vacuum of the calibration block to ON to pick the jig.
Using the OCC, check the position of the jig, and measure the center
position and the inclination of the jig.
An error occurs if two holes of the jig cannot be recognized. In this case,
remount the jig.
Pick the jig with the selected head, then set the vacuum of the calibration
block to OFF.
Recognize the jig with the laser alignment unit.
Calculate the laser alignment unit mounting angle and the head mounting
position based from the inclination of the jig obtained at Step 4 and the
recognition results at Step 6.
Using the OCC, recognize the calibration block position to calculate its
center position and inclination.
Mount the jig at the center of the calibration block, then set the vacuum of
the calibration block to ON to pick the jig.
To mount the jig, the machine corrects the inclination of the jig calculated
at Step 4, the laser alignment unit mounting angle and the head mounting
position calculated at Step 7, and the inclination of the calibration block
calculated at Step 8.
Using the OCC, recognize the position of the jig.
An error occurs if the distance from the jig to the calibration block is 1 mm
or longer (absolute value). In this case, you may have to set the MS
parameters again.
Repeat steps 4 to 10.

When you select the <Exec.>button, the previous screen reappears.
To measure another head, select the desired head in the Select Head
combo box.
When you change the selected head in the Select Head combo box, the
initial screen appears.
To quit Self-calibration mode, click the <OK> button.
11 13
11.6 VCS Offset
When you select the [Set-up group] command on the menu bar, then the [VCS offset]
command on the displayed menu, the following VCS camera offset dialog box
(Assembling position
already set)
(Assembling position
measured)
Figure 11.6.1 VCS camera offset dialog box
VCS setting
Select the VCS to be set in the Select VCS combo box.
You cannot select any unit which is not checked (that is, not used) on the Device
enable menu invoked from the Machine Setup menu.
(1) Setting items

1 Assembling position of VCS Each VCS assembling position
11 14
(2) How to set
Follow the instructions displayed on the dialog box above to set the VCS
selected in the Select VCS combo box.
When you click the <OK> button, your settings become valid (but not be
When you click the <CANCEL> button, your settings become invalid.
How to operate
Follow the instructions displayed on the screen. The appropriate value is
automatically obtained.
(When the right standard VCS is selected)
The machine sets up the VCS selected in the Select VCS combo box.
When you select the <Exec.> button, the machine moves the selected head
along the theta axis in from 0 to 15-degree units 24 times repeatedly to obtain
the average value.
Attach the No. 508 nozzle onto the FMLA head.
An error occurs if the nozzle is set for the ATC. In this case, assign the
menu.
The FMLA head picks up the jig from the jig station.
Move the FMLA head to the position where the selected VCS camera
recognizes.
The machine recognizes the jig position with the VCS to measure the
center position of the jig.
11 15

When you select the <Exec.> button, the previous screen appears.
To measure another VCS, select the desired VCS in the Select VCS
combo box.
When you change the VCS to be set in the Select VCS combo box, the
To quit Self-calibration mode, select the <OK> button.
11 16
11.7 VCS Binary-Coded Threshold
When you select the [Binary threshold for VCS] command on the Set-up group
command menu, the following Binary threshold for VCS dialog box appears on the
screen.
(Threshold already set)
(Threshold measured)
Figure 11.7.1 Binary threshold for VCS dialog box
Select VCS
Using this combo box, select the VCS to be set.
You cannot select any unit which is not checked on the Device enable menu
invoked from the Machine Setup menu (that is, checked as Not used).
(1) Setting item

1 Binary threshold Binary-coded threshold (threshold level) when recognized by the VCS
11 17
(2) How to set
Follow the instructions displayed to set the VCS selected in the Select VCS
combo box.
When you click the <OK> button, your setting becomes valid (but not saved at
this point).
When you click the <CANCEL> button, you setting becomes invalid.
How to operation
Follow the instructions displayed to obtain the appropriate value automatically.
The machine sets up the VCS selected in the Select VCS combo box.
When you select the <Exec.> button, the machine measures a binary-coded
threshold after mounting the No. 508 nozzle to move it on the selected VCS
camera.
Attach the No. 508 nozzle onto the FMLA head.
An error occurs if the nozzle is set for the ATC. In this case, assign the
menu.
Move the FMLA head to the position where the selected VCS camera
recognizes.
The machine uses the selected VCS to measure a binary-coded
threshold.
11 18

When you select the <Exec.> button, the previous screen reappears.
To measure another VCS, select the desired VCS in the Select VCS
combo box.
When you change the VCS to be set in the Select VCS combo box, the
To quit Self-calibration mode, select the <OK> button.
11 19
11.8 Vacuum Calibration
When you select the [Vacuum calibration] command on the "Set-up group" command
menu, the following "Calibration of vacuum" dialog box appears on the screen.
Figure 11.8 Calibration of vacuum dialog box
Select Head
Select the head to be set from the combo box.
You cannot a unit which was not checked (not used) on the "Device enable" dialog
box invoked from the Machine Setup menu.
When you press the down arrow key while holding down the Alt key, the following
list appears on the screen.
11 20
(1) Setting items
1 Available vacuum Shows the maximum available vacuum level detected with
the pressure sensors located on the head and the vacuum
calibration unit respectively.
2 Vacuum attainment time Shows the time required to enter the vacuum condition
detected with the pressure sensors located on the head and
the vacuum calibration unit respectively.
3 Vacuum starting time Shows the time the machine started vacuuming, detected
with the pressure sensors located on the head and vacuum
calibration unit respectively
4 Time when starting Shows the time spent since the vacuum electromagnetic
valve was turned off until the vacuum value reached the
component pick-up vacuum lower limit, detected with the
pressure sensors located on the head and the vacuum
calibration unit respectively
5 Natural breading time Shows the time spent since the vacuum electromagnetic
valve was turned off until the vacuum value reached the
component pick-up vacuum limit, detected with the pressure
sensors located on the head and vacuum calibration unit
respectively
6 Positive pressure Shows the time spent since the blow electromagnetic valve
was turned off until the vacuum value became beyond the
atmospheric pressure, then reached the positive value.
(2) How to set

- Follow the instructions displayed on the "Operation" dialog box according to
the head you selected from the "Select Head" combo box.
- When you click the <OK> button, your settings become effective (at this point,
these settings are not saved into the database yet).
- When you click the <CANCEL> button, your settings become invalid.
How to operate
When you follow the instructions displayed on the dialog box, each value is
automatically obtained.
Set the head you selected from the "Select Head" combo box
- Click the <Exec.> button.
- When you click the <Exec.> button, the machine automatically calculates the
time required to enter the vacuum condition.
11 21
Measurement
The head you selected moves over the vacuum calibration unit, then
measures the vacuum condition three times.
The machine takes an average of the values measured for the second time
and third time, then displays it.
After measurement, the machine displays a graph of the pressure values
obtained by the third measurement performed for the third time.
Set the head selected from the "Select Head" combo box.
- When you click the <Exec.> button, the machine automatically calculates the
natural vacuum breaking condition.
11 22
Measurement
measures the natural vacuum breaking condition three times.
- The machine takes an average of the values measured for the second time
- After measurement, the machine displays a graph of the pressure values
obtained by the measurement performed for the third time.
Set the head you selected from the "Select Head" combo box.
- When you click the <Exec.> button, the machine automatically measures the
pressurization breaking condition.
11 23
Measurement
measures the pressurization breaking condition three times.
- The machine takes an average of the values measured for the second time
- After measurement, the machine displays a graph of the pressure values
obtained by the measurement performed for the third time.
Set the head you selected from the "Select Head" combo box.
- When you click the <Exec.> button, the machine executes the malfunction
analysis.
11 24
The machine finished measuring the vacuum condition of the selected head
at this point.
- To repeat measurement, click the <Exec.> button.
- When you click the <Exec.> button, the initial screen reappears.
- To measure another head vacuum condition, select the desired head from
the "Select Head" combo box.
- When you change the selected head, the initial screen reappears.
To quit the vacuum condition measurement operation, click the <OK> button.
11 25
CHAPTER 12 OPTIONS
12.1 Overview
The items to be set as options are shown in Table below.
Table 12.1.1 Options menu items

NO. Option group Description
1 Changing the user Allows you to change the user group.
group When you enter the user group, the functions available to
the entered user group are determined.
2 Setting the user Allows you to change each password and set the default
group user group.
3 Option Setting Allows you to set operational options.
12.2 Changing the User Group
How to change the user group:

Select the [Options] command on the menu bar of the main menu, then the [User
Group Setting] command. Next, enter the user group and password, then click the
<OK> button.
When the check box "Restore to the default after the reboot" is checked at restart of
the system, the user group you set with this command functions until you quit the
system. At restart of the system, the system starts up as the default user.
When unchecked, the user group remains the same even after you restart up the
system.
If the password you entered is wrong, the user group is restored to the default setting.
User Group:
The user group is provided as one method for protecting the machine from
malfunctioning due to wrong operation of the machine, and restricts the available
operations according to an operator's knowledge and operating skill of the machine.
Figure 12.2 "Register User Group" dialog box
When you enter the user group, the available functions (such as menu items and
buttons you can select) are determined.
12 1
12.3 Setting the User Group
How to set the user group:

Select the [Options] command on the menu bar of the main menu, then the [Listing
User Group Passwords] command.
The following dialog box allows you to change each password and set the default user group.
Note that you cannot see nor change the password(s) of the user group(s) which is (are)
higher than the current user level.
You cannot change the default user group to any user group whose level is higher than the
current user group level either.
Figure 12.3 "User Group Settings" dialog box
All of the passwords for the current user level or lower are displayed in a list.
User level list

Operator: The basic operation for producing PWBs is available.
Production program editing or various setting are not available.
Programme Operations such as production, editing of a production program, and setting of
r: the operation options are available.
Some mechanical operations of the machine are prohibited.
Manager: All operations such as production, editing of a production program, setting of the
operation options, setup for feeder changeover and manual control are available.
Note that operation such as repairs and re-adjustment of the machine is prohibited.
Any features for ordinary operations are available with this level.
Although you cannot repair/adjust the machine, maintenance work like
Maintenance installation of main unit software are allowed.
level:
Service Tasks such as re-adjustment of the machine, change of the setting required to
Engineer: replace components, repairs of the machine, replacement of a main component
and change of an optional unit as well as all operations of the machine are
available.
This level is provided to limit the operation that may cause extreme danger
without sufficient knowledge of the machine.
12 2
Table 12.3 Functions available to each user level
Menu and Function Operator Programmer Manager Maintenance Service
button Engineer
Command New (Editor)
Button
Editor
Production
Warm
Setup
Manual
Exit
Tool Button New
Open
Save
Vision
File Menu New
Open
Save
Save as
File Management
Default Folder
Print
Control Data Management

(Save on a floppy disk)
Control Data Management

(Recovery)
Data Manager
Exit
Program Program Editor
Editing Menu
Database Editor
Production Pwb Production
Menu
Trial Run
Dry Run
Setup Menu Machine Set up
Manual Operation
Maintenance Warming Up
Menu
Idle mode
Self-Calibration
Machine Management

Information
Mech-Parameter Setting
MS-Parameter Setting
Option Menu Change User Group
User Group Environmental
Settings
Option Setting
Environment Setting
Help Menu About Programs
12 3
12.4 Operation Option
The items to be set as the operation options are shown in Table 4.2
Table 12.4.1 Operation Option Items
N Operation option Option items

o. group
1 Teaching Align the placement point to BOC.
Auto-correct reference pin.
2 Production (Display) Show the number of boards produced in large chatacters.
Count down the number of boards produced.
Accumulate planned number of boards produced.
Changes to the production screen when start selected HLC only.
Do not inquire for save on exit.
Set resume production default to Produce newly.
Set resume production default to Re-clamp current board.
3 Production (Function) Auto-correct pick position.
Check release of component after placing Z up.
Begin production after conveyor.
Simultaneous Nozzle Change.
Check fiducials before bad circuit marks.
Resume the production on suspend.
End system on all circuit bad mark.
Measure direction while installing nozzles.
Sequential start on arrival (for a KE-2030 only)
4 Production (Function2) Do not carry out the PWB on cycle-stop
Check dirty of Laser sensor.
SOT direction inspect checked.
Verify inspect checked.
Do not IN/OUT PWB sensor auto checked.
5 Production (Pause) Stop system on components run out.
Stop system on any error.
Re-measure component height when components run out.
The verification inspection is done on restart component run out.
Display Supply button in the pause dialog.
Run pick tracking when components run out.
6 Production (Check) Properties checked
Information of Coplanarity
When Copla check fails. (Available with a KE-2020/2040 only)
7 Use Unit Tombstone detection
Component dimension check
Component crientation check
Stop when feeder pitch shift is detected.
Non-stop operation
Non-stop operation (MTC) [Not available for a KE-2030]
Non-stop operation (MTS) [Not available for a KE-2030]
Non-stop operation (DTS) [Not available for a KE-2030]
Enable Auto Compo. presence check of MTC [Not available for a
KE-2030]
12 4
12.4.1 Setting the teaching option
When you select the [Options] command on the menu bar, then the [Option Setting]
command on the Options menu, the Operation options settings dialog box appears on
the screen.
When you select the <Teaching> tag, the Teaching option setting screen appears as
shown in Figure 12.4.1.
Figure 12.4.1 Teaching options setting dialog box
(1) How to set each item

Align placement position to BOC.
Set whetter to align the placement position with a BOC or not with
cheching the check box to perform teaching of a placement point for
editing, etc.
When the check box of this option is checked, the placement point is
changed to the coordinates corrected with the BOC mark during teaching
of the placement point, while the placement point is corrected reversely
when it is loaded to the system. Therefore, the system can teach the
coordinates of the correct placement point on a board.
Notes: This alignment cannot be performed if the mark data of the PWB
data is incomplete.
This alignment cannot be performed when the OCC is not set to be
used on the Machine setup menu.
For the value of alignment, the latest result of mark recognition is
used. If BOC alignment is readjusted during data creation, the
result may be slightly different from the previous one.
12 5
Auto-correct reference pin.
Set whether to correct the placement point from the inclination difference
between the reference pin and the follower pin with this check box.
When the check box of this option is checked, the placement point is
corrected based on inclination between the reference pin and the follower
pin if the "Hole Reference" is selected as "Reference" in PWB data.
Notes: Correct alignment cannot be made if the correct coordinates of the

reference pin and the follower pin have not been entered on the
Machine setup menu.
If the setting of this option differs between when data creating and
when PWB production, the correct placement cannot be achieved.
When you validate the selected item(s), click the <OK> button.
want to set any option, click the <CANCEL> button.
If you do not
12 6
12.4.2 Setting the Production (Display) option
When you select the [Options] command on the menu bar, then [Option Setting]
command on the Options menu, the Operation option setting dialog box appears on
the screen.
When you select the <Production (Display)> tag, the <Production (Display) > option
setting dialog box appears on the screen as shown in Figure 12.4.2.
Figure 12.4.2 <Production (Display)> option setting dialog box
(1) How to set the item

Show the number of boards produced in large characters.
Using the check box, set the display mode of the number of boards
produced.
When this option is checked, the number of boards produced during a
production run is shown in the upper case.
Count down the number of boards produced.

Using the check box, display the number of boards produced or to be
produced.
When this option is checked, the number of remaining boards to be
produced is shown.
When it is not checked, the number of boards already produced is shown.
Accumulate planned number of boards produced.

Using the check box, set how to update the number of boards produced.
When this option is checked, the number of boards adds up and is
accumulated until the production management information is cleared (the
total number is shown).
12 7
When this option is not checked, the number of boards produced is cleared
to "0" when the <START> key is pressed.
Change to the production screen when start selected (HLC only)

Using the check box, execute the automatic change of the screen to the
production start screen with HLC.
When this option is checked, and you use the HLC to start PWB production
in the initial (Main menu) state, the screen automatically changes to the
production condition (PWB production) screen after the production
program data is downloaded from HLC has been completed.
Notes: This option is effective only when "HLC connection" of the

multistation line setting on the Machine setup is set to "Connect".
The screen will not change if there is something wrong in the
production program data which has been downloaded from the
HLC.
Do not inquire for save on.

Using the check box, display the message which asks whether to save the
production program when quitting the production condition screen.
When this option is turned ON, the Exit dialog box does not appear when
quitting the production condition screen.
Set resume production default to 'Produce newly'.

Using this check box, specify which radio button is checked by default,
Continue the production or Produce newly on the Processing before
production begins dialog box (if there is a continuous production file) that
appears when you press the <START> switch.
When you check this check box, the radio button Produce newly is
checked by default on the Processing before production begins dialog
box (if there is a continuous production file).
When you do not check this check box, the radio button Continue the
production is checked by default on the Processing before production
begins dialog box.
Set resume production default to 'Re-clamp current board'.

Set the default for production operation if there is a continuous production
file when the Before start production dialog box appears on the screen
and you can select the initial production (by checking the radio button
Produce after PWB enter. or Produce after PWB re-clamp.).
When you check this check box, the radio button Produce after PWB
re-clamp. is selected.
When you do not check this check box, the radio button Produce after
PWB re-clamp. is selected.
set any option, click the <CANCEL> button.
If you do not want to
12 8
12.4.3 Setting the Production (Function) options
the screen.
When you select the <Production (Function)> tag, the <Production (Function)> option
setting screen appears as shown in Figure 12.4.3.
Figure 12.4.3 Production (Function) option setting screen


Auto-correct pick position.
Using the check box, perform the pick up position correction.
When this option is checked, the pick point is corrected based on the
centered position.
When this option is not checked, the "pick up position correction" setting of
the "Component Data" is ignored, then the correction is not performed.
Check release of component after placing completion.

Using the check box, check to see if a component is apart from the nozzle
when it is placed.
When this option is checked, using the laser, the system checks if there is
no component on the nozzle when the Z axis moves up after a component
is placed.
When this option is not checked, the setting "Component release check" of
"Component Data" is ignored, then the system does not check whether a
component is released.
12 9
Begin production after conveyor.
Using the check box, allow the system to start production only after a
board is transferred.
When this option is checked, production does not start until a board is
clamped completely.
When this option is not checked, production starts before a board is
clamped completely.
Simultaneous Nozzle Change.

Using the check box, allow the nozzles to be replaced simultaneously.
When this option is checked, the nozzles are replaced simultaneously.
When this option is not checked, the nozzles are not replaced
simultaneously.
Check fiducials before bad circuit marks.

Using the check box, specify whether to recognize a BOC mark prior to a
bad mark.
When you check the check box of this item, the machine recognizes a
BOC mark prior to a bad mark.
When production interrupts, resume mode.

- When the current production is aborted due to an asynchronous event (an
asynchronous event occurs or production error occurs), the system always
creates a continuous production file.
- When you check this check box, the system creates a continuous
production file when the current production is interrupted.
- See Section 6.4.9 (for a KE-2010), 6.4.10 (for a KE-2030) or 7.4.10 (for a
KE-2020/2040) Continuous Production for the procedure for resuming the
suspended production.
Measure direction while installing nozzles

Check the Measure direction while installing nozzles check box to
measure the nozzle direction when it is attached on a head.
When you check this check box, the system measures the nozzle
attachment direction when you attaches a nozzle to a head, then corrects
the component angle by the measured angle when the system picks up,
recognizes or places a component.
Sequential start on arrival [displayed on a KE-2030 only]

Check the check box Sequential start on arrival.
When you check this check box, the system places components in order
they are sent in the system to produce a PWB.
12 10
Stop production when all circuits are bad.
- When you check this option, the machine aborts production although it
has not produced the preset number of PWBs possibly because an error
occurs: the wrong bad mark information, sensor adjustment failure or
malfunction and so on.
Place sequence of multiple circuit

- Select the component placement order in the combo box.
a. Build panel by circuit : Places a component on each circuit of a matrix or

non-matrix board one by one to complete a board.
b. Build circuit by component ID.: Places the first component on

each circuit in Placement data order, then the second component on each
circuit. In this way, components are placed on each circuit in Placement
data order.
c. Build circuit by pick group : Picks up a pair of components (according to

the number of nozzles installed) which can be picked up simultaneously,
then places them on each circuit sequentially.
12 11
12.4.4 Setting the Production (Function2) option
When you select the [Options] command on the menu bar, then the [Option Setting]
the screen.
When you click the <Production (Function2)> tab, the Production (Function2) option
setting screen appears as shown in Figure 12.4.4.
Figure 12.4.4 Production (Fucntion2) option setting screen.

Do not eject PWB on cycle-stop
Using the check box, select whether the system should eject a PWB at
cycle-stop.
When you check this check box, the system enters Cycle-Stop mode.
When you press the <Stop> key, the system finishes the current
production after releasing a clamped PWB.
When you press the <Start> key, the system restarts the current
production.
When you do not check this check box, the system finishes production
after ejecting a PWB to the post-production process.
12 12
Check Laser condition.
Using the check box, select whether the system should check to see if
laser head(s) is (are) stained when a board is sent into the machine.
When you check this check box, the system checks to see if laser head(s)
is (are) stained after the head(s) move(s) to the waiting position when a
board is sent into the machine.
If any laser head is stained, the system pauses. When the system
restarts, it checks the laser heads again. If any laser head is still stained,
the dialog box appears on the screen that prompts you to select if the
system should check the laser heads again or the system continues
production forcibly.
When you do not check this check box, the system does not check any
laser head.
SOT direction checked.

Using this check box, select whether to check the direction of an SOT
component equipped with three terminals with the component picking-up
and tracking operation.
When you check this check box, the system checks the direction of an
SOT component equipped with three terminals when it performs the
component picking-up and tracking operation.
When you do not check this check box, the system does not check the
direction of an SOP component.
Auto verification after restart.

Using this check box, select whether to execute the verification check with
the component picking-up and tracking operation.
When you check this check box, the system executes the verification
check when it performs the component picking-up and tracking operation.
When you do not check this check box, the system does not execute the
verification check.
Do not IN/OUT PWB sensor auto checked.

Using this check box, select whether to check to see if there is a board on
the IN and OUT buffers at start of production after an error occurs while the
system is transporting a board between the IN and OUT buffers.
When you check this check box, the system does not check a board at
start of production.
When you do not check this check box, the system automatically sets a
board on the sensor if it remains between the IN and OUT buffer sensors
at start of production.
When you validate the settings of these two items, click the <OK> button.
not want to make any setting of these items, click the <CANCEL> button.
If you do
12 13
12.4.5 Setting the Production (Pause) option
the screen.
When you click the <Production (Pause)> tag, the Production (Pause) option setting
screen appears as shown in Figure 12.4.5.
Figure 12.4.5 Production (Pause) option setting screen

Stop system on components run out.
Using the check box, set the operation mode when components run out.
When this option is checked, the machine temporarily stops production
when components runs out.
When this option is not checked, the machine continues placing
components as long as it has components which can be placed, even
when a type of components run out during production.

Using the check box, set the operation mode to be entered when an error
occurs.
When this option is checked, the machine temporarily stops production
when a productional error (including the component run-out error) occurs.
When this option is not checked, the machine continues placing
components as long as it has components which can be placed, even
when a productional error occurs.
12 14
Re-measure components height when components run out.
Using this check box, select whether to measure the height of a
component at restart of production after components run out..
When you check this item, the system measures the height of a
component on restart after components run out.
When you do not check this item, the system does not measure the height
of a component on restart after components run out.

Using this check box, specify whether to perform a verify check at start of
production after the stocked components run out.
When you check this check box, the system performs a verify check at
start of production after the stocked components run out.
When you do not check this check box, the system does not perform a
verify check at start of production after the stocked components run out.
Display 'Supply' button in the pause dialog.

Use the check box to set the function for supplying components while the
system temporarily stops a production operation because components run
out.
When you check this option, the <Supply> button is applied to the "Pause"
dialog box. This <Supply> button is not displayed on the Pause dialog box
which appears when components run out or when a mark recognition error
occurs
When you click this <Supply> button, the system replenishes a feeder
(tape, stick or bulk feeder) with components when its stocked components
run out.
When you do not check this option, the <Supply> button is not displayed
on the Pause dialog box.
Run pick tracking when components run out.

Using this check box, you can select whether to perform a component
picking-up and tracking operation before retry operation if you select the
retry operation and press the <START> switch when the system pauses
due to a component run-out error or laser retry over error.
When you check this check box, the system performs the component
picking-up and tracking operation before retry operation. At the same
time, the combo box for the feeder to be used for picking up and tracking a
component becomes active, and you can select one of the following
choices (a. is selected as the default):
a. Only feeders that ran out of components
b. All feeders that ran out or had errors.
c. All feeders on which the same type of components are set as
those of the error feeder
12 15
When you check this check box, the system performs the component
picking-up and tracking operation before retry operation. At the same
time, the combo box for the feeder to be used for picking up and tracking a
component becomes active, and you can select one of the following
choices (a. is selected as the default):
Notes:
- When you enable the Non-stop operation on the Use Unit tab, the
following items are automatically disabled, and you cannot select them:
Stop system when components run out.
Re-measure pick height when components run out.
- When you disable the Non-stop operation again, all of the settings on
this dialog box are returned to the original settings again.
12 16
12.4.6 Setting the Production (Check) option
the screen.
When you select the <Production (Check)> tag, the Production (Check) option setting
screen appears as shown in Figure 12.4.6.
(You can select this tag only when using a KE-2020/2040.)
Figure 12.4.6 Production (Check) option setting screen

(Display example: KE-2020 screen)

Properties checked
Only Colinearity checked
Colinearity and Coplanarity checked
Check the corresponding radio button to perform the desired check.
When Copla check fails

Pause: the system pauses.
Place without checking: the system places a component on a board
without checking it.
Put into trash box: the system discards a component into a trash box.
Check the corresponding radio button to select the operation to be
performed when the system cannot perform the selected check.
L Only when you check the radio button Pause, it allows you to set
the menu item Information of Coplanarity.
12 17
No output
Only error electrode information
All electrode information
Check the corresponding radio button to output the desired information.
When you validate the selected item(S), click the <OK> button.
12 18
12.4.7 Setting the Use Unit option
command, the Operation option setting dialog box appears on the screen.
When you select the <Use Unit> tag, the Use Unit option setting screen appears as
shown in Figure 12.4.7.
Figure 12.4.7 Use Unit option setting screen

(Display example: KE-2020 screen)

Tombstone detection
Using the check box, set whether to detect a tombstone error.
When you check the check box of this option, the "Tombstone det." setting
of Component data becomes effective.
Component different check

Using the check box, set whether to check a component whose size is
different from the regular ones.
When you check the check box of this option, the "Acceptable width
(length, and height)" setting of Component data becomes effective.
Component orientation check

Using this check box, set whether to check a component posture.
When you check this check box, the system compares the ratio of the
shorter side to the longer side specified in Component data and the ratio
measured. If the difference between the ratio in Component data and the
measured ratio is not within a certain range, it is regarded as a component
posture error.
12 19
Stop when feeder pitch shift is detected.
Using the check box, set whether to check to see if a feeder component
pick-up position is shifted from the regulated position.
When you check the check box of this option, the radio button XXX is
enabled on the Component data screen.
Non-stop operation
Using this check box, set whether to perform the Non-stop operation or
not.
When you check the check box of this option, the non-stop operation
function is enabled.
When feeders are assigned to the front and rear sides symmetrically with
the Program Editing utility, the non-stop operation gets executable.
When you check the check box of this option, the system performs the
non-stop operation.
Alternate
When you enable the Non-stop operation function, this check box is
enabled. When enabled, check this check box to execute the alternate
production mode function in Non-stop operation mode.
When you check this check box, Alternate Production mode is enabled.
The status of this check box, checked or not checked, is not affected by
the setting of the Non-stop operation, enabled or disabled.
Non-stop operation (MTC) (Not available for a KE-2030)

Using this check box, set whether to perform the Non-stop operation
(MTC) or not.
This item is enabled only if TR6D is selected as an MTC on the Device
enable menu invoked form the Machine Setup menu.
Alternate (MTC) [Not available for a KE-2030]

When you enable the Non-stop operation [MTC] function, this check box
is enabled. When enabled, check this check box to execute the alternate
production mode function in MTC Non-stop operation mode.
When you check this check box, MTC Alternate Production mode is enabled.
the setting of the Non-stop operation [MTC], enabled or disabled.
Non-stop operation (MTS) (Not available for a KE-2030)

Using this check box, set whether to perform the Non-stop operation (MTS)
or not.
This item is enabled only if TR5D is selected as an MTS on the Device
enable menu invoked form the Machine Setup menu.
12 20
Alternate (MTS) [Not available for a KE-2030]
When you enable the Non-stop operation [MTS] function, this check box
is enabled. When enabled, check this check box to execute the alternate
production mode function in MTS Non-stop operation mode.
When you check this check box, MTS Alternate Production mode is
enabled.
the setting of the Non-stop operation [MTS], enabled or disabled.
Non-stop operation (DTS) (Not available for a KE-2030)

Using this check box, set whether to perform the Non-stop operation (DTS)
or not.
Automatically setting the number of DTS components when replenished
If you press the <SUPPLY> switch to replenish components, then press
the <SUPPLY> switch again to release Component Supplying mode while
the system is producing a PWB in Non-stop mode, this function
automatically sets the number of components that are located on the level
you replenished so that it can indicate the level is fully replenished.
This item is enabled only if DTS is enabled on the Device enable menu
invoked form the Machine Setup menu.
Enable Auto Compo. presence check of MTC (Not available for a KE-2030)
Using the combo box, select the check operation of MTC components
when picked up (a. is selected as the default).
a. Do not check: the system does not check any component.
b. Read file the system checks components when a production
program file is changed.
c. Supply component: the system checks components when components
finish being replenished by your pressing the
Supply key of an MTC.
When you select Read file or Supply component, the system checks to
see if there is any component on a tray with the HMS located inside an
MTC when it picks up a component from a tray of the MTC that is
replenished fully. Then, the system starts picking up a component from
where a component is actually located.
When you select Do not check, the system always starts picking up
components from the first component of a tray when the tray is replenished
fully.
This item is enabled only if TR6D is selected as an MTC on the Device
12 21
CHAPTER 13 HANDLING THE FEEDERS AND
OPTIONS
13.1 Replacement of the Tape Feeder
13.1.1 Replacement of the tape feeder (8 mm, 12 mm, 16 mm, 24 mm, and 32 mm)
Do not replace the tape feeder with another one while the X- or Y-axis, or
head is operating. It may cause a serious injury to the operator or damage
the machine itself since the tape feeder touches the operating parts.
Do not dismount the tape feeder while the X- or Y-axis or head is operating.
After you mount the feeders required for producing boards at the position
CAUTION specified with a production program, mount feeders, which are not used for
production, such as 8-mm tape feeders where no feeders are mounted to
prevent any gap from being generated between the already mounted
feeders. This operation secures your safety since it prevents your finger
or hand from accidentally being slid into such a gap.
Mounting
1) Place the bottom of the tape feeder on the feeder bank
2) Slide the tape feeder toward the positioning hole of the fixing plate , and align the
guide pin located on the bottom of the tape feeder with the fixing plate B7 as a guide.
Fit the positioning pin on the front of the tape feeder into the positioning hole of the
fixing plate . To do so, while pulling the lock release lever gently, align the lock
holder with the V-shaped groove of the lock shaft , then push the front of the tape
feeder against the fixing plate. Release the lock release lever to clamp the lock shaft
with the lock holder and fix the tape feeder.
In this case, the number of the position label pasted just above the hole into which
the positioning pin on the front of the tape feeder is fit indicates the position at which the
tape feeder is mounted.
Note: Check to see if the tape feeder is off the feeder bank or not upright.
Dismounting
1) Hold the tape feeder and pull it back to you while pulling the lock release lever .
Figure 13.1.1.1
Note: When the used paper tape (which is ejected

from a tape feeder after a component is supplied
from the tape) warps upward, it may catch in the
support section or other part, then it may cause
a tape feeder feeding error. Check to see if the
used tape is ejected properly.
13 1
13.1.2 Replacement of 32-mm adhesive tape feeder
Do not replace the tape feeder with another one while the X- or Y-axis, or
the machine itself since the tape feeder touches the operating parts.
Do not dismount the tape feeder while the X- or Y-axis or head is operating.
specified with a production program, mount feeders, which are not used for
CAUTION production, such as 8-mm tape feeders where no feeders are mounted to
Mounting
1) Place the bottom of the tape feeder on the feeder bank Figure . 13.1.1.1
2) Slide the tape feeder toward the positioning hole of the fixing plate , and
align the guide pin located on the
Note: bottom
When of thepaper
the used tapetape
feeder withis the
(which fixing
ejected plate
from a tape
B7 as a guide. Fit the positioning pin after
feeder on the front of the
a component is tape feeder
supplied frominto the
the tape)
positioning hole of the fixing plate . upward,
warps To do itso,maywhile
catchpulling the locksection
in the support releaseor
lever gently, align the lock holder with
other part, then the V-shaped
it may groove
cause a tape of the
feeder lock
feeding
error.
shaft , then push the front of the tapeCheck
feederto see if thethe
against used tape plate.
fixing is ejected Release
properly.
the lock release lever to clamp the lock shaft with the lock holder and fix the tape
feeder.
In this case, the number of the position label pasted just above the hole into
which the positioning pin on the front of the tape feeder is fit indicates the position
at which the tape feeder is mounted.
3) Match the index of the power cord connector with the power supply part of
the connector bracket (place the white dot to the right), and insert the
connector until you hear a click sound of the click stop.
4) Insert the air coupler into the female union until you hear a click sound of
the click stop.
5) Set the feeder float sensor that is located on the side a 32-mm adhesive tape
feeder (NF3SN) is installed so that it cannot be used: you uncheck the check
box Front feeder float detection or Rear feeder float detection on the Std
Device enable menu invoked from the Machine Setup menu.
Dismounting
1) Push forward the slide part of the female union , to detach the air coupler .
2) Pull the slide part of the power cord connector toward your side, and
disconnect the connector.
3) With pulling the lock release lever , pull back the tape feeder to remove it
5
2 3
4
10
6 9
7 11
8 14
12 13 15
13 2
Figure 13.1.2.1
13.2 Replacement of the Bulk Feeder
Do not replace the bulk feeder with another one while the X- or Y-axis, or
the machine itself since the bulk feeder touches the operating parts.
Do not dismount the bulk feeder while the X- or Y-axis or head is operating.
Mounting
1) Place the bottom of the bulk feeder on the feeder bank .
2) Slide the bulk feeder toward the positioning hole of the fixing plate , and
align the guide pin located on the bottom of the bulk feeder with the fixing plate B
as a guide. Fit the positioning pin on the front of the bulk feeder into the
positioning hole of the fixing plate . To do so, while pulling the lock release
lever 10 to release the toggle clamp to align the lock holder with the V-shaped
groove of the lock shaft , push the front of the bulk feeder against the fixing
plate. Use the lock release lever to clamp the lock holder and lock shaft by the
toggle clamping method and fix the bulk feeder.
which the positioning pin on the front of the bulk feeder is fit indicates the position
at which the bulk feeder is mounted.
Note: 1) Check to see if the bulk feeder is off the feeder bank or not upright.
2) Be sure to fix the case holder on the rear side.
3) Do not mount a bulk feeder on the rear side bank without removing the EIAJ
case .
Dismounting
1) Use the lock release lever to release the toggle clamp, then pull back the bulk
feeder to remove it.
3 5
2
4
10 11
7
8 9
1
Figure 13.2.1
13 3
13.3 Replacement of the Stick Feeder
Do not replace the stick feeder with another one while the X- or Y-axis, or
the machine itself since the stick feeder touches the operating parts.
Do not dismount the stick feeder while the X- or Y-axis or head is operating.
Mounting
1) Place the bottom of the stick feeder on the feeder bank .
2) Slide the stick feeder toward the positioning hole of the fixing plate , and
align the guide pin located on the bottom of the stick feeder with the fixing plate B
as a guide. Fit the positioning pin on the front of the stick feeder into the
positioning hole of the fixing plate . To do so, with releasing the toggle clamp
to align the lock holder with the V-shaped groove of the lock shaft ,
push the front of the stick feeder against the fixing plate. Fix the stick feeder
with the toggle clamp .
which the positioning pin on the front of the stick feeder is fit indicates the position
at which the stick feeder is mounted.
3) Face the power cord plug toward the power supply unit of the connector
bracket (the white dot should be located on the right side), then insert the
plug into the power supply unit until it clicks.
Dismounting
1) Pull the sliding section of the power cord plug toward yourself to disconnect the plug.
2) Release the toggle clamp, then pull back the stick feeder straight to remove it.
Note: Be sure to hold the bottom of the stick feeder main unit.
If you hold the upper part of the feeder only, it may damage the spring plate.
5
4
1
Fix.
10 Release. 11
3
9
8
7
For detachment
For installation
Figure 13.3.1
13 4
13.4 Procedure for Mounting the Matrix Tray Holder on the Feeder
Bank (See Figure 13.4.1.)
To avoid any accident caused by sudden activation of the machine,

CAUTION
turn off the power.
1) Grip the side plate and lock lever to open the lock holder .
2) Insert the front pin into the fixing plate of the rear bank.
3) Release the side plate and lock lever when the front plate into which
the pin is inserted is in contact with the fixing plate, then lock these plates with
the lock holder .
4) To detach the matrix tray holder, follow this procedure in the reverse order.
Reference pin
Fixing plate
Side plate
Tray lock lever
Lock holder
Pin
Front plate
Figure 13.4.1
To prevent your body from injury and to avoid damage to the machine,
mount a tray on the matrix tray holder only after you remove the matrix
tray holder from the feeder bank or after you check to see if the main
unit completely stops.
CAUTION If you mount a tray on the matrix tray holder although the matrix tray
holder is being installed on the feeder bank, be sure to check your
environment before mounting a tray so that the machine cannot start
unexpectedly when another operator operates the machine by mistake.
13 5
13.5 Installing the Matrix Tray Changer (MTC)

CAUTION
turn off the power.
MTC guide cover

Cover RUR
A MTC shuttle section
MTC main unit

Front plate
Figure 13.5.1
1) Move the MTC main unit 4 from the rear Note: Refer to the supplied Instruction
so that the MTC shuttle section 3 can be Manual for how to operate an MTC.
inserted under the MTC guide cover 1
which is located on the right far side with
viewed from the front of the main unit.
2) Slide the MTC main unit 4 toward the
cover RUR 2 as close as possible, then RE
AR
install the MTC. 79
3) Adjust the adjuster foot of the MTC main

unit so that the shuttle tip cut-out can
be located at a height of the top side of
the fixing plate.
Figure 13.5.2 A arrow-view figure
13 6
4) Connect the MTC power plug and signal connector to the corresponding
jack/connector and the air tube to the MTC air fitting of the interface panel located
on the right side of the main unit.
Note: Be sure to use the cable and air tube supplied with the MTC.
Figure 13.5.3
MTC power jack

MTC interface connector
MTC 6 tube inlet
13 7
13.5.1 Installing the Matrix Tray Changer (MTC)
13.5.1.1 TR-4SN install start position
Figure 13.5.1.1 Appearance of TR-4SN to be installed

CAUTION
turn off the power.
13 8
13.5.1.2 TR-6SN/TR-6DN install start position
Figure 13.5.1.2 Appearance of TR-6SN/TR-6DN to be installed

CAUTION
turn off the power.
13 9
13.6 Handling the Feeder Position Indicator (FPI)
The FPI is located at the front of the number label (indicating the feeder mounting
position) for the feeder bank, and equipped with LEDs which correspond to the
number of each number label. These LEDs indicate the feeder mounting position or
component supply condition by lighting or flashing as follows:
Table 13.6.1
Machine condition LED status Function

Preparation Flashing Indicates the hole (number) into which the
positioning pin is inserted to position the feeder
specified with the production program
Lighting Indicates the range of the feeder bank which the
mounted feeder occupies.
Board production Flashing If the number of the components remaining at a
feeder gets less than the warning level which is
specified as the number of components in the
production program ( this value is set to notify an
operator that the number of the remaining
components is insufficient), the LED
corresponding to the position at which the feeder
is mounted flashes to indicate that the number of
the remaining components is not enough at the
feeder.
Components run-out Lighting If the number of the components remaining at a
feeder which is obtained based on the initial value
specified as the number of components in the
production program reaches "0" during production,
the LED corresponding to the position at which the
feeder is mounted lights to indicate that
components run out at the feeder.
Manually controlled When the feeder If you use the feeder knock pin control function
knock pin is set to which is provided on the Manual control menu to
ON: Lighting feed tape or perform the direct knock action, the
OFF: Not light LED located at each controlled feeder positioning
pin flashes according to the feeder knock pin
action to indicate which knock pin is controlled.
Note: Unless you enter the number of components to be fed to the feeder or
equivalent correctly at the menu item [Component no. setup] displayed on the
[Change] menu which is invoked from the menu command [Pwb Production],
the number of the remaining components is not displayed correctly and the
indication for component run-out is not displayed properly.
13 10
13.7 Handling Bad Mark Sensor
1) Color and size of a bad mark
a) A bad mark on a PC board to which green resist is applied shall be a glossy
white mark of 2.5 mm in diameter or greater.
b) A bad mark on a white ceramic PC board shall be a black mark of 2.5 mm in
diameter or greater.
c) The bad-mark reader cannot recognize the smaller or faded marks. The
bad marks shall be clear and legible.
2) Figures 13.7.1 and 13.7.2 show the bad-mark sensor appearance. For details of
installation, see the explanation of the head section.
Figure 13.7.2 Figure 13.7.1
Light receiving level indicator SET button

Input light indicator Output timer switch
Spareness indicator Output mode switch
SET indicator Mode switch
3) Adjusting the sensitivity of the bad-mark sensor
Note 1: The software automatically adjusts the sensitivity of the bad mark sensor
(see Section 8.2.2.14 "Bad mark sensor teaching").
The sensitivity adjustment shall be performed only by the authorized

technician who received training for the operation of this machine.
CAUTION
Take care that any person other than the operator does not operate the
machine to prevent accidental activation of the machine.
13 11
13.8 Handling HMS
The HMS (Height Measurement System) is an optional device used to detect the
height of a component such as a feeder pick position.
This optional device consists of two parts: the height sensor which is composed of
the sensor and amplifier, and the HMS board which controls the height sensor. To
use this optional device, install it on the head unit.
The amplifier of the height sensor and the controls and switches located on the HMS
board are all already set at the factory. Do not change their settings.
Sensor part Amplifier part
Range indicator
(NEAR indicator) (FAR indicator)
Connector
(NEAR indicator)
Laser emission mark STABILITY indicator (FAR indicator)
OFFSET adjustment control Range indicator
SPAN adjustment control
Photo-transmitting section
SENSITIVITY switch
(laser emitting section)
Photo-receiving section RESPONSE speed switch
Connector
Figure 13.8.1
The HMS conforms to Class 3B Laser Safety Standard of JIS C6802.

It can be used safely when following the instructions described in this manual.
The laser beam used for the high sensor is invisible. Be careful not to
CAUTION
expose you to the beam or do not try to view the beam.
13 12
13.9 Replacing Overall feeder exchange trolley
8
6
7 13
2
15
11
12
14
3
Figure 13.9.1 Overall feeder exchange trolley
Lock pedal
Lock release pedal
Figure 13.9.2 Trolley stopper t
13 13
Mounting
1) Install each feeder in the feeder bank .
2) Check that the selector is set to OFF, and the bank lifter u is set below the
bank stopper .
3) Insert the overall feeder exchange trolley into the chip shooter main unit until
the trolley stopper plate touches the bank stopper .
4) Lock the trolley stoppers at the left and right.
5) Set the selector to ON. The feeder bank goes up and is installed in the
chip shooter main unit.

CAUTION turn off the power, close the air cock, and release the remaining air
before starting installation.
6) Insert the feeder connector into the power supply of the cover of the chip
shooter main unit. Then, insert the air coupler into the female union of
the cover of the chip shooter main unit.
Note: If you operate the machine even though either one of the front and rear
stations of the overall feeder exchange trolley descends, the X and Y
axes move at the lower speed as if the cover is open.
Dismounting
1) Detach the air coupler and the feeder connector from the chip shooter main unit.
2) Set the selector to OFF.
The feeder bank goes down, and it comes off from the chip shooter main unit.
To prevent your body from injury and to avoid damage to the machine,
install the overall feeder exchange trolley only after the machine is
stopped completely.
Do not place your hand in the machine, nor move your face or head
CAUTION
close to the machine when operating the selector.
When operating the selector, be sure to check the selector so that you
cannot operate other switches, especially main power switch by
mistake.
3) Release the lock of the trolley stoppers at the left and right.
Note: If you use the overall feeder exchange trolley to attach the feeder bank
on the main unit of the machine, do not touch the grip of the overall
feeder exchange trolley or do not impose any load on it while the
system is teaching the component pick-up position on each feeder or
while it is producing a PWB.
13 14
13.10 Handling the IC Collection Belt
1. Specifications
(1) Applicable components
Component type: QFP, SOP, PLCC and so on
(components recognized with the VCS)
Component size: 10 mm x 10 mm to 50 mm x 50 mm, 1.0 mm to 6.0 mm
(2) Number of ICs to be collected

5 to 19 (this number varies depending on the size of an IC)
(3) How much the belt is to be fed

15 mm to 55 mm (in increments of 5 mm): manually set the rotary switch
according to the size of an IC to be collected.
(4) Belt
Anti-static belt: width 5 mm
2. Configuration and parts identification of the IC collection belt

Component sensor
Stop sensor
IC size setting rotary switch
Reset switch
Power plug
ALARM signal connector

Figure 13.10.1 Parts identification of the IC collection belt
13 15
This unit allows the machine to collect components which are not placed on a board for
some reason without damaging them after the components are recognized with the
VCS.
Components which are placed on the component sensor from the head are fed
sequentially at the pitch selected with the rotary switch .
When the belt is full of components and the Stop sensor detects a component, the
main unit pauses and displays the message on the screen.
To avoid a risk of injury and prevent the machine from being damaged,
be sure to collect components only after detaching the IC collection belt
from the feeder bank or after you check to see if the machine stops
CAUTION completely.
If you are to collect components from the IC collection belt being fixed
on the feeder bank, be sure to check to see if there is no person who
may start the machine unexpectedly.
3 Attaching and detaching the IC collection belt

(1) Place the bottom of the IC collection belt on the feeder bank .
(2) Slide the IC collection belt to align the front positioning pin of the IC collection
belt with the fixing hole of the fixing plate . Align the lock holder with the
V-shaped groove of the lock shaft , then push the lock holder until it becomes
in contact with the fixing plate . Connect the power plug of the IC
collection belt to the jack of the main unit, and the ALARM signal connector
to the relay cable.
Note: Check to see if the IC collection does not float nor be tilted.

(3) To detach the IC collection belt,
pull the IC collection belt
toward the rear while pulling the
lever of the lock holder to
detach it.
Note: Attach or detach the IC

collection belt on/from the
main unit only after the
machine stops because it
is very dangerous to attach
or detach it in Production

mode or while the X-Y axes
are moving.
Figure 12.10.2 Attaching/detaching the IC collection belt

CAUTION
turn off the power.
13 16
4. Operation
(1) Teaching
Fix the IC collection belt on the feeder bank, and teach the coordinates of the IC
collection belt position which is selected on the Machine setup menu.
Teaching position
Teach the center of the

Optical axis belt on the component
sensor optical axis.
Figure 13.10.3 Teaching operation
HOD.
(2) Basic operation

The head of the main unit places an IC on the belt, and the component sensor
detects it. After 0.5 seconds, the IC is fed over the belt at the pitch you set. If
the belt gets full of ICs and stops, press the Reset switch to restart the machine
after removing ICs from the belt.
To avoid a risk of injury and prevent the machine from being damaged,
be sure to collect components only after detaching the IC collection belt
from the feeder bank or after you check to see if the machine stops
CAUTION completely.
If you are to collect components from the IC collection belt being fixed
on the feeder bank, be sure to check to see if there is no person who
may start the machine unexpectedly.
Table 13.10.1 Number of ICs which can be collected

and the feeding pitch set with the rotary switch No.
Switch No. to be set 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
IC size (mm) Equal or 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
less than
Over 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
Belt feeding pitch (mm) 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55
Maximum number of ICs 19 14 11 9 8 7 6 6 5
13 17
13.11 Handling a Gripper Nozzle
This nozzle is designed exclusively for the KE-2000 series of products to pick up
and/or place on a board a component whose top has no picked-up area, and it is
available to laser and vision recognition.
1. Features
The gripper nozzle uses its fixed arm and swing arm together exclusively to
pick up and/or place a component whose topside has no picked-up area. Its grip
strength is appropriate enough to pick up/place a component stably.
Length of a lug
Component
Position against a
component is pushed
Fixed arm
Swing arm
Figure 13.11.1 Name of each part of a nozzle
13 18
2. Specifications
(1) Required components and software
A floppy disk on which a nozzle information file is stored is supplied with a
nozzle. This disk is required to use a gripper nozzle.
The software version of the main unit that supports control over a gripper
nozzle is 1.11 or higher.
The dimensions of a gripper nozzle arm should match a shape and size of
each component and a shape of a feeder such as a tape and tray.
[See (5) Applicable components and packaging style.]
(2) Method
Centering method: Laser and vision
(3) Component placement precision
Component placement precision : 0.3 mm or less (3 )
Note that the attained precision may vary depending on the shape of a
component.
When the system places a component whose portion to be aligned with laser
has an edge, whose molded part has a burr, or whose portion to be inspected
with the system cannot be fixed to a pick-up device, the precision described
above cannot be attained.
(4) Limited adjacent components

When the system places a component, a gripper swing arm opens, so it may
be in contact with an adjacent component.
Therefore, there are the following two restraints on operations of a gripper
nozzle:
The height of a component to be placed with a gripper nozzle should be 3
mm or more higher than that of adjacent components.
The side of a component to be held with the swing arm of the gripper
nozzle should be far from adjacent components by 4 mm or more.
(See the figure below.)
Component A
Component B
Board Note: Components A and B

should another by at
least 4mm.
13 19
(5) Applicable components and packaging style
Applicable components: Connectors (the top side cannot be picked up
with a standard nozzle)
Lead pitch (1 mm or wider)
Weight: 5 kg or less (This value is subject to
change depending on the shape of a
component.)
There should be a flat area on the top of a
component against which the fixed arm can be
pushed. (to prevent a component from inclining
when the X-Y axes moves)
Packaging style: Taping and tray
Applicable component and applicable package size
No. 800 nozzle No. 801 nozzle No. 802 nozzle No. 803 nozzle
0.01
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
24
-0.5 0.5 1.5 2.5

4.7 5.7 6.7 7.7
2.8 3.8 4.8 5.8
Figure 13.11.2 Dimensions of nozzles
Table 13.11.1 Applicable components and packaging style

Nozzle Packaging style (Dimensions of an embossed part)
number Applicable components
Fixed arm side Swing arm side
800 6 0.82.2 5 1.5 5.6 4 3 5.6 2.5
801 6 1.83.2 5 1.5 5.6 4 3 5.6 2.5
802 6 2.84.2 5 1.5 5.6 4 3 5.6 2.5
803 6 3.85.2 5 1.5 5.6 4 3 5.6 2.5
X
H
D
E
A
F
B
C
13 20
3. How to Use a Gripper Nozzle
3.1 Load information on a gripper nozzle from a floppy disk on the Machine
Setup menu.
* Once you load information, it is stored on the machine, so you do not have
to perform this operation every time you use the machine.
Select the [Read nozzle data] command on the File menu invoked from
the Machine setup menu. The following Nzl. data file open dialog box
appears. Load the nozzle information file for a gripper nozzle from a
floppy disk. (See the chapter on the Machine Setup menu for details.)
Figure 13.11.3 Nzl. data file open dialog box
3.2 Creating Component data

See the chapter on Component data for details on the operation to be
performed.
Component data creating example
The following example shows how to create Component data that specifies
gripper nozzles to be used.
Setting the nozzle number
The gripper nozzle

number is from 800
to 899.
Figure 13.11.4 Setting the nozzle number
13 21
Entering information for controlling a component position picked up by a
gripper nozzle
Distance between the fixed arm

and the center of a component
Enter half of the width of the
component-molded part.
(Enter a negative value.)
Clearance between the fixed

arm and the component
molded part
(Enter a negative value.)
Specify the angle of a nozzle

(normally set to 0 degrees.)
A griper nozzle has a dumper. To
hold a component horizontally, enter
about 0.5 mm as a push-in stroke.
Figure 13.11.5 Setting the gripper control information
13 22
Laser pos. (position)
Be careful to enter this setting item when you use a gripper nozzle.
Normally, enter the distance from the top of a component to the surface on
which laser beam impinges in the Laser pos. field of a nozzle. However,
when you use a gripper nozzle, enter the distance laser is beamed by
regarding the tip of the nozzle that is located at the fixed arm as a reference
position.
Specify the distance from the tip of a nozzle to the

surface on which laser beam impinges.
Setting guide: - (component height 3.5 mm) / 2

Make trivial adjustments of this
value according to a lead position.
Example shown on this screen: - (5.19 3.5) / 2
= - 0.84
Figure 13.11.6 Setting the laser height
13 23
Notes on component dimension check
When you specify the Dimension check items, be careful to enter the Std.
Size (reference size).
The Std. Size means the size of the molded part on which laser beam is
to impinge, and it is different from the dimensions of a component
including a lead.
Length of the molded

part on which laser
beam impinges.
Length of a component
including a lead
Figure 13.11.7 Setting the Dimension check items
13 24
3.3 Pick Data
Pick data to be created when you use a gripper nozzle is the same as that for
a standard nozzle. Therefore, you do not have to perform teaching
operation for the gripper arm position and the height of the nozzle section
against which the component topside should be pushed.
X and Y coordinates: the center of a component is used as the reference

position.
Z coordinate: the tip of the nozzle (Height of an edge of the fixed arm =
Height of the normal nozzle) is used as a reference position.
Caution
Note that how to set data with a KE-750/760 is different from that with the
KE-2000 series of products when you use a gripper nozzle. To use a gripper
nozzle with a KE-750/760, you have to teach a component pick-up position.
Teaching operation is required for making fine adjustments of a component
pick-up position; set the Y coordinate far from the fixed arm by about 1 mm
by checking it with your eyes, and set the Z coordinate so that the middle
section of a gripper nozzle against which the top of a component is to be
pushed can be just in contact with the top of a component located on the
feeder. However, the KE-2000 series of products allow you to use a gripper
nozzle without teaching a component pick-up position. The system makes
fine adjustments of a component pick-up position according to the nozzle
information (loaded from a floppy disk) or allow you to set the position in
Component data if a component is very unique.
XY: Center of a
component
Z: set based on the tip of

a nozzle as the
reference position.
Figure 13.11.8 Setting Pick data
13 25
3.4 Differences between a KE-2000 series of product and a KE-750/760
The differences on operations are shown below when you use a gripper
nozzle:
Data type Setting item KE-750/760 KE-2000 series
Setup data Gripper nozzle Select the [g/Gripper nozzle] Select the [Read Nzl. data]
setting command on the Setup menu, and command on the File menu to
specify a number from 130 to 149 load information on a gripper
on the opened dialog box. nozzle from a floppy disk. Then
operate the system in the same
manner as you do for a normal
nozzle.
Component Nozzle number 130 149 800 899
data
Centering method Laser only Both laser and vision
Component height Height of a portion that is Height of a component itself
protruded from the tip of a nozzle
Laser height - 0.3mm - 0.5mm Basically set laser height in the
same manner as you enter it
with a KE-750/760.
Enter the distance between the
edge of the fixed arm and the
molded part on which laser
beam impinges.
Nozzle data in the No setting item in Component Specify the setting items, Grip
Additional data. Position, Horizontal
information (You have to perform teaching Clearance, Nozzle Direction at
operation if there is no Pick data Picking and Height
on a KE-2000 series of product.) Adjustment, which are designed
to require no entry for teaching a
component pick-up position.
Pick data Y coordinate Teaching is necessary for the Center of a component
fixed side arm to be located far
from a component by about 1 mm.
Z coordinate The center of a gripper nozzle is The tip of a nozzle is regarded
regarded as a reference position as the reference position.
of the top of a component. (The tip of a gripper nozzle is
Teaching is necessary for this side located at the height of the tip of
to be the top of a component. a standard nozzle.)
The system can pick up a
component relatively stably
without teaching its pick-up
position.
3.5 Direction a Gripper Nozzle Is Attached onto an ATC

View the ATC unit from its front, and
install a gripper nozzle onto the ATC
so that the fixed arm of the gripper
nozzle (1 in the figure below) can be
located on the rear, and the swing
Length of a lug
arm (2 in the figure below) can be

located on the front.
13 26
13.12 Handling the Coplanarity Check Device
13.12.1 Overview of the coplanarity check device

This device performs coplanarity check for electronic components with its scanning
type laser displacement gauge.
A scanning type laser displacement gauge emits a laser beam to a certain spot of an
object, and use the light receptive lens to gather lights reflected or scattered from the
spot. Next, it generates an image of the spot over the position sensor to measure a
displacement without touching the object.
This device measures a 3-D shape of a component by moving the component at the
certain speed in the direction (Y direction) perpendicular to the laser scanning
direction (X direction) to obtain the metric image whose each picture element (pixel)
consists of height information.
This device judges if a component is acceptable or not (with checking a bend of

leads) based on the component information sent from a mounter in advance and
the obtained metric image.
Polygon mirror
Laser mirror
Figure 13.12.1 Overview of the coplanarity check device
ATC unit
Coplanarity
sensor
Figure 13.12.2 Appearance of the device
13 27
13.12.2 What to check with this device
13.12.2.1 Colinearity check

The colinearity check inspects how much a side on which leads are located is bent in
the up/down directions.
L Colinearity means parallelness.
This check is performed with scanning a component with laser only once.
For example, for a component having four sides such as a QFP, the device scans
each of four sides with single scanning, and for a component having two sides
such as an SOP, the device scans each of two sides with single scanning.
Component to be checked
Line for measurement
Lead bent downward
Figure 13.12.2.1 Explanation of component check
13.12.2.2 Coplanarity check

Two methods are provided to obtain a coplanarity value:
Method regulated by EIAJ: appropriate for a QFP component.
Least squares method (by obtaining evenness of the terminal lowest side)
At the factory, this device is set to obtain a coplanarity value with the method
regulated by EIAJ.
This device checks a QFP component with EIAJED-7401-4, and an SOP
component with EIAJED-7304-1 or the least squared method.
The method regulated by EIAJ regards a distance from the virtual plane to the
lowest point of the farthest terminal in the vertical direction of all terminals as a
coplanarity value.
13 28

Method specified by EIAJ (default)
In the geometric plane passing the bottom points of optional three terminals,
all the bottom points of the other terminals exist on the package side and the
center of gravity of the package is included within or on the triangle
comprised of these three points. When the plane satisfies the above
condition and has no effect of the empty weight, it is defined as coplanarity.
In case there are multiple combinations that satisfy the above condition,
adopt a combination in which the coplanarity value becomes large.
Plane obtained by the lowest points
Fig. 13-12-2-2 Calculation of Coplanarity by EIAJ
Coplanarity in the method of least squares

In the method of least squares, when the plane obtained by the method of
least squares from the bottom points of all the terminals is in contact with the
bottom point of the most distant terminal from the package side, the distance
up to the most distant terminal is defined as coplanarity.
Plane obtained by the method

of least
Fig. 13squares
Fig. 13-12-2-3 Calculation of Coplanarity by the Method of Least Squares
13 29
13.12.2.3 Evaluation criteria
Colinearity check
The device checks how much leads on each side are bent in the up/down
direction based on the value that is entered to the menu item Tolerance
displayed on the COPLA CHECK DATA dialog box invoked from the Vision data
screen.
The position to be checked can be set with the menu item Scanning Offset on
the Vision data editing screen.
Scanning position offset
Figure 13.12.2.4 Explanation of the scanning position offset
Coplanarity check
The device checks how much a lead is bent in the up/down directions based on
the value that is entered to the menu item Tolerance displayed on the COPLA
CHECK DATA dialog box invoked from the Vision data screen.
13 30
13.12.3 Overview of the specifications
(1) Applicable components

QFP and SOP
Only if they are recognized by the VCS.
(2) Resolution and precision

Resolution: 1m
Precision: 20 m (when measured with a JUKI standard gauge)
L This device may not correctly judge a component whose terminal is

damaged due to contact with contact probe.
(3) Measurement mode and dimensions of a component

Two measurement modes are provided: Standard mode and High-Precision
mode.
In Standard mode, the device scans a component at 80 mm/s with the sensor,
while in High-Precision mode, it scans a component at 20 mm/s.
Specifications of a component that can be measured in each mode are
shown below:
Table 13.12.1 Dimensions of a component in each mode
Item Standard mode High-Precision mode
Lead Pitch 0.4 mm or more 0.3 mm or more
components Lead width 0.18 mm or more 0.12 mm or more
Lead length 0.3 mm or more 0.3 mm or more
Component Batch 26 mm x 100 mm or less 26 mm x 50 mm or less
size measurement
Division 50 mm x 100 mm or less 50 mm x 50 mm or less
measurement
L When you switch a measurement mode between Standard mode and

High-Precision mode, it takes three seconds to switch the rotating
speed of the polygon mirror. Therefore, if you are to produce both
components that should be measured in Standard mode and those
that should be in High-Precision mode, the production cycle time
becomes longer.
The length of a gull-wing lead indicates that of a lead located on the
foot section.
Component height
Model name KE-2020 KE-2040
Component height (Maximum) 12mm 20mm 25mm
Note that the value described above is applied to a component when its longer side is 50 mm or shorter, and
the shorter side is 45 mm or shorter.
* [If the dimensions of a component exceed those above, the

maximum component height should be 8 mm.]
13 31
(4) Measurable Range
The measurable range of a lead is 1 mm or less. If the area indicated below
exceeds this range, an error occurs.
1mm
Figure 13.12.3.1 Measurable range
(5) Parameters to be entered for measurement

Tolerance: Coplanarity judgment value to be used for measurement
Electrode size: width and length
Lead Gloss: information on how glossy a lead is, Normal, Shiny and Dull.
Lead Brightness Threshold
Laser Strength: 0 to 7
Measurement Height Offset
Scanning Offset (Measurement position viewed form a tip of a lead)
AGC Adjustment: 0 to 5
Measurement Mode
(6) Output of measurement result

Judgment: if the result is good or bad with comparing to the preset
judgment value.
Information on height of all terminals and judgment
(7) Laser strength

Laser: Class 1 (JISC6802, IEC60825-1)
850 mm infrared semiconductor laser (invisible light)
13 32
13.12.4 Operations
To perform coplanarity check, start up the Setup utility from the main screen, and
make settings on each screen invoked from the Setup utility.
Figure 13.12.4.1 Main screen
13.12.4.1 Machine setup

Select the [Setup] command from the menu bar, and the [Machine Setup], [Setup],
and [Device enable] commands in this order.
(For details, see Section 8.2.2.10.2 Option Device enable of Chapter 8 MACHINE
SETUP.)
Figure 13.12.4.2 Device enable dialog box
Check to see if the check box Coplanarity provided as the Others menu item is
checked. ;
When you make all of the necessary settings, click the <OK> button.
do not have to make/change any setting, click the <CANCEL> button.
If you
13 33
13.12.5 Operation options
Select the [Setup] command from the menu bar, then the [Options] and [Operation
option] commands in this order. Click the Production (Check) tab. (For details,
see Section 12.4.6 Setting the Production (Check) option of Chapter 12
OPTIONS.)
Figure 13.12.5.1 Production (Check) options settings
(1) How to set each menu item

Properties checked
Only Colinearity checked
Colinearity and Coplanarity checked
Click either of the corresponding radio buttons above.
When Copla check fails.

Pause.
Place without checking.
Put into trash box.
Click one of the corresponding radio buttons above.
L Only when you check the radio button Pause., it allows

you to set the menu item Information of Coplanarity.
No output
Only error electrode information
All electrode information
Click one of the corresponding radio buttons above.
When you make all of the necessary settings, click the <OK> button.
not have to make/change any setting, click the <CANCEL> button.
If you do
13 34
13.12.6 Editing data
To perform the coplanarity check, make the necessary settings on the screen shown
below.
Select the [Component data] command, then [Coplanarity (2000)] Command on

the Program Editor screen.
(See 19 Copla of Section 5.2.3 Detailed operations of Chapter 5 VCS.)
Check either the radio buttons Yes or No of the Coplanarity (2000) on

the dialog box below to select whether to perform a coplanarity check.
When you check the radio button Yes, the <Set> button is enabled.
(See Figure 13.12.6.1 Coplanarity selection screen.)
Click the <Set> button. The COPLA CHECK DATA screen appears. (see
Figure 13.12.6.2 Coplanarity check screen.)
Figure 13.12.6.1 Coplanarity selection screen
13 35
The electrode width and length are set to 0 by
default. By default, the lead width is 40 % of the
pitch specified as Vision data on the Vision data
screen, and the lead length is measured based on
50% of a value specified on the Vision data screen.
Coplanarity judgment value:

(unit mm)
Select Shiny for a lead whose
surface is extremely shiny, while
select Dull for a lead whose surface
is extremely dull.
The device emits a laser beam to a terminal to

calculate the height based on lights reflected from the
terminal.
Lead Brightness Threshold is a threshold for cutting
noise generated around the terminal so that the device
can obtain light reflected from the terminal.
Normally set 40.
When a terminal is dark, set 0 or 30. When it is
bright set 50 or 60
This indicates the

laser strength.
Normally set 7
here.
Enter the offset for the height of a position to be

measured. Normally set 0 here. (unit: mm)
Set the distance from the tip of a lead whose

coplanarity is to be measured. (unit: mm) Note 1
This value is used to

automatically control
gain when the device
receives a laser beam.
Figure 13.12.6 Normally, do not
COPLA Check data screen change the default
l 3
Set the measurement mode.

When you select Auto, the device
automatically sets its scanning mode
according to the table of (3)
Measurement mode and dimensions of a
component described under Section
When you make the necessary settings, click the <OK> button.
have to make/change any setting, click the <CANCEL> button.
If you do not
Note 1: If you use the initial value of the machine, do not change the default
value 0.00. If you set any other value here, the machine uses it.
The current initial value of the machine is 0.10 mm.
13 36
13.12.7 Production
The system performs a coplanarity check during production, trial run or blank-run.
L * The system does not perform a coplanarity check actually during blank-run.
13.12.7.1 Procedure for coplanarity check

Picking of a target component
Moving to the VCS position
Recognition of the target component vision by the VCS
Moving to the coplanarity sensor measurement start position
Checking if the device can perform a coplanarity check for the target component
Correction of the position based on the result of vision recognition
Performing coplanarity check for the component
Judging if the target component passes the check based on the result of
measurement by the coplanarity sensor
[Process after judgment]
8_1 Discarding the component
8_2 Placing the component
8_3 Pause
Picking of the target component
Moving to the VCS position
Vision recognition by the VCS
Moving to the coplanarity sensor position
Checking the
component

Correction of the component position
Coplanarity check
Judgment

End
Figure 13.12.7 Process flow chart
13 37
13.12.8 Error processing
When the device detects an error as the result of coplanarity check, the system
displays an error log when it does not place an error component on a board.
Figure 13.12.8.1 Error dialog box
Figure 13.12.8.2 Pause dialog box
13 38
13.12.9 Overview of the coplanarity check operation
Movements of a component over the axis sensor during coplanarity check are
described below.
13.12.9.1 Batch component check

The device scans a component whose size is specified for Batch measurement in
(3) Measurement mode and dimensions of a component of Section 13.12.3 in a single
direction to measure it.
13.12.9.1 Batch measurement operation
13.12.9.2 Division component check

The device scans a components whose size is specified for Division measurement
in (3) Measurement mode and dimensions of a component of Section 13.12.3 as
shown in Figure below to measure it.
Figure 13.12.9.2 Division measurement operation
13 39
CHAPTER 14 MAINTENANCE
14.1 Daily Routine Checks

14.1.1 List of daily routine checks
To prevent the body from injury which can be caused by accidental

WARNING activation of the machine, cut off the power to the machine before
starting to work.
Table 14.1.1
Items to be checked Check and lubrication frequency
Every Every
Maintenance Check point Check Daily Weekly Monthly Bimonthly
half year year
Air pressure Check 0.49 MPa (5kgf/cm2).

Piping and joint Air leakage
Unit air cylinder Check operation.
Air filter (Head) No dirt
Check Air filter (CAL block)
Power on lamp Check if it is lit.
Transfer belt Worn out, damage, or stretch
Transfer pulley If it functions properly.
Electric device Voltage, cables, and connectors Whenever necessary
X- and Y-axis direct drive units Remove dirt and oil.

Transfer belt Remove dirt and foreign substances
Transfer sensors Cleaning
Laser align sensor
Cleaning of the sensor window
Coplanarity sensor
Disassemble and cleaning inside the
Nozzle
Cleaning nozzle
ATC bracket Remove dirt and oil.

Feeder bank Remove foreign substances.
Ejector Remove dirt and foreign substances.
Z slide shaft Cleaning inside the shaft.
OCC (Polarizing filter) C Remove dirt and foreign substances.
Track ball C Remove dirt and foreign substances.
X- and Y-axis direct drive unit rails Grease (EP2)
Transfer screw shaft (Shaft) Grease (EP2)
Transfer guide shaft Grease (EP2)
PWB stopper part Grease (EP2)
Ball screw and LM guide rail (Head part) Grease (CGrease)
Spline shaft (head part) Smooth Grease (CGrease)
Lubrication
movement
Overall feeder exchange trolley Grease (EP2)
Support table Grease (EP2)
Movable transfer table section
Grease (CGrease)
(ball screw)
Movable transfer table section

Grease (CGrease)
(LM guide)
14 1
Notes: 1. Lubrication is to be performed using the supplied oil. Besides the supplied
grease (EP2), SHELL Albania Grease 1 can be used for the parts to be
greased only.
2. Never apply any grease other than grease (Grease C) to the parts to be
lubricated with "Grease (Grease C)". For other parts, do not use any
grease not specified by JUKI.
3. Machine oil (No. 1): Class four, third petroleum
Grease (EP2): Not dangerous product regulated with the Fire-Defense law
Grease (Grease C): Not dangerous product regulated with the
Fire-Defense law.
14 2
14.2 Check
14.2.1 Air pressure

Checking to see if the air pressure is 0.49 Mpa.
How to adjust the air pressure

1) Set the control to the Open position as shown in Figure below.
CLOSE OPEN
2) Pull the knob of the regulator downward, then rotate it so that the pressure of
the used air can become 0.49 MPa.
3) Peep into the small window located at the center of the pressure switch to
check to see if the pressure is 0.39 MPa (this value is set at the factory).
4) If there is any oil or water in the drain, push the control to drain it out.

Drains

WARNING activation of the machine, turn off the power of the machine before
following the operation above.
14 3
14.2.2 Piping and joint
Check that there is no air leakage.
Front side.
Check to see if there is no air leakage.
Finger valve

14.2.3 Unit air cylinder

Turn on the power of the machine, select the machine setup items, and check that
operation is possible.
14 4
Electromagnetic valve
PWB transport manifold
solenoid
4
ATC 4 A B
CVS Pressure
6 ST=30 Manifold Pressure switch
gauge
Mist separator
A B
6
(1) Piping diagram
(Option) P R 12
Cell block Filter Factory-

Regulator
(Ejector) piping
Refer to the following piping diagram.
6
Head unit
4 8
(Main body)
Stopper A B
Meter in 8
Drive cylinder 20L F
14 5
4 6
Drive cylinder 20R F
AE/E valve
Connector bracket F
(Option)
Pusher Y (x5) Drive cylinder 20L R
6
Drive cylinder 20R R
Connector bracket R
Overall feeder 6
exchange trolley F
Overall feeder 6
exchange trolley R
4
(Option)
(Option)
Pusher X (x5) AE/E valve
(2) Piping diagram (Head)
Ejector
8
Filter
Pressure sensor
Blow-Sw
Nozzle
(3) Piping diagram (Overall changer table, Common to all four tables)
Roller lever
6
Roller lever
6
Selector
6
6 6
Pilot check valve
14 6
14.2.4 Air filter (MNLA Head/FMLA Head)
14.2.4.1 MNLA Head
1) Loosen the screw fixing the Z slide shaft to pull out the nozzle outer shaft
.
2) Check to see if there is any contamination of the filter .
3) If any, remove the filter from the nozzle outer shaft, the replace it with a new
one.
4) Push the nozzle outer shaft into the Z slide shaft , then fix it with the screw
.
Filter : Part number E3052729000

14 7
14.2.4.2 FMLA Head
1) Loosen the screw fixing the Z slide shaft to pull out the nozzle outer shaft
.
2) Check to see if there is any contamination of the filter .
3) If any, remove the filter from the nozzle outer shaft, the replace it with a new
one.
4) Push the nozzle outer shaft into the Z slide shaft , then fix it with the screw
.
Filter : Part number E3052729000

14 8
14.2.5 Air filter (CAL block)
Check the element of the air filter (CAL block) for dirt. If the element is dirty, detach
the air tube and replace the filter with a new air filter (Part No. PF010001000).
Note: Install the air filter with its hole (part A) facing up.
Air tube
Part A

14 9
14.2.6 Transport belt
Check that the belt is severely worn-out, damaged, or stretched. If it is necessary to

replace the belt, follow the procedure below.
1) Loosen the screws used to fix the transport pulleys (one at the front and the other
at the rear) attached to the long hole at part A in Figure 14.2.6.1, to untension the
transfer belt.
Part A Part A Part A
Figure 14.2.6.1
2) Loosen the flat screw or hexagonal-hole-headed bolt of the transport rails to

remove the transport belt guide. Then remove, then attach the transport belt.
Flat screw or
hexagonal-hole-headed bolt
Figure 14.2.6.2

14 10
14.2.7 Transport pulley
Check that the pulley turns without resistance.

If it is necessary to replace the pulley, follow the procedure below.
(1) Transfer pulley replacement

1) As shown in Figures 14.2.7.1 to 14.2.7.3, the transport pulleys are fixed at the
front and rear rail plates. Loosen the screws used to fix the pulleys to
replace them.
2) The same as for the transport belt replacement, perform tension adjustment
of the transport belt.
Hexagonal nut
Flat washer
Rail plate
Spring washer Pulley spacer

Transfer pulley
Holding screw
Figure 14.2.7.1
Hexagonal nut
Flat washer
Rail plate
Spring washer Pulley spacer

Transfer pulley
Holding screw
Figure 14.2.7.2
Rail plate
Flat washer
Transfer pulley
Holding screw
Figure 14.2.7.3

14 11
14.2.8 Notice on Electricity
14.2.8.1 General notices
Cut off the power to the machine before starting to disconnect or

WARNING
connect the connectors.
Never use the machine with any voltage other than those specified.
Before switching on the machine, be sure that the machine is in a safe
conditions.
Before switching on the machine, be sure that there is no one who is
CAUTION
Before switching on the machine, be sure that there are no obstacles
(tools and jigs) left in the machine.
Turn off the machine to supply air.
14.2.8.2 Daily routine checks

1. Make sure that the supply voltage is the rated voltage 10%.
2. Make sure that the connectors (of devices such as a keyboard and HOD) are all
seated firmly.
To avoid a risk of serious injury or death caused by electric shock

hazard, turn off the main power switch of the house current which is
WARNING
installed in the building where the machine is used.
Note that it is not the main power switch of the machine.
14 12
14.3 Cleaning
14.3.1 XY axis direct drive unit
Remove dirt, oil, etc. on the XY axis direct drive unit.
ATC unit PWB transport unit

Head unit Feeder bank unit
X-Y unit VCS unit
Figure 14.3.1
14 13
(1) X axis
Check
Check that there is no dirt or dust on the rails of the X axis direct drive unit YR
and YL.
X-shaft direct-drive unit rail (x 2)

X-shaft direct-drive unit (x 4)
(2) Y axis
Check
Check to see if there is no dirt or dust on the rails of the Y axis direct drive unit.
Y-shaft frame (x 2)
Y-shaft direct-drive unit rail (x 2)
Y-shaft direct-drive unit (x 4)

starting to work.
14 14
14.3.2 Transport sensors
Remove dirt and dust on the sensors.
Wait sensor Stop sensor C-OUT sensor

Stopper
Transport
In sensor direction Out sensor
Input buffer Centering Output buffer

station station station

14 15
14.3.3 Laser align sensor (MNLA/FMLA head)
14.3.3.1 MNLA head

Check to see if there is any dirt on the sensor window.
If the sensor window is dirty or unclear, clean it with clean cloth or gauze lightly
moistened with alcohol.
Sensor window
Note: If you use not alcohol but any solution such as acetone and thinner, the resin
part around the sensor window may fuse. Never use any solvent other than
alcohol.

starting to work.
14 16
14.3.3.2 FMLA head
Check to see if there is any dirt on the sensor window.
If the sensor window is dirty or unclear, clean it with clean cloth or gauze lightly
moistened with alcohol.
Sensor window
Note: If you use not alcohol but any solution such as acetone and thinner, the resin
part around the sensor window may fuse. Never use any solvent other than
alcohol.

starting to work.
14 17
14.3.4 Nozzle
Clean a nozzle with putting it into a supersonic cleaning bath containing alcohol. After
cleaning, blow off alcohol inside the nozzle with an air gun or similar device, install the
nozzle on the ATC unit again, and perform the "ATC nozzle setup" menu item on the
Machine Setup menu.
Clean a nozzle with a supersonic cleaning bath for five minutes. Dampen soft cloth
with alcohol and use it to clean the urethane part and any part of the nozzle diffuser
on which stains remain stuck to even after you use a supersonic cleaning bath to
clean it.
After cleaning a nozzle, apply New Deflex Oil No. 1 to a nozzle slider to protect the
inside of the nozzle from rust.
Notes: 1. Do not install the nozzle to the head, but install it in the ATC unit.
2. Since the urethane part of nozzles 505, 506, 507 and 508 may be degraded
or flake off when they are damped into alcohol for a long time, turn the
nozzle upside down and insert it to the bath as shown in the figure below so
that any urethane part cannot be dampened into alcohol.
3. Never use any solvent (such as acetone) other than alcohol.
4. Never disassemble a nozzle.
5. After cleaning the nozzle, do no apply any grease other than New Deflex oil
No.1 to it.
6. Be careful not to apply any New Deflex Oil No. 1 to the nozzle diffuser and
rubber section.
Rubber
Beaker
Alcohol
Recommended alcohol
We recommend IPA or ethanol due to its cleaning effectiveness, cost and availability.
Recommended solvent : IPA (isopropyl alcohol) or ethanol
14 18
Applying Machine Oil to a Nozzle After Cleaning It
Moisture contained in ethanol or IPA (isopropyl alcohol) may rust the inner pats of a
nozzle if you leave the nozzle without drying it after cleaning it in a supersonic cleaning
bath. Therefore, be sure to apply New Deflex Oil No. 1 (JUKI part number is
MDFRX1001L0) to the nozzle slider.
Use a cotton swab lightly dampened with New Deflex Oil No. 1 to apply this oil to the
part of the nozzle shown below (the part popped up from the nozzle inner section when
you push the nozzle slider). After that, move the nozzle slider up and down 20 to 30
times to apply oil to the nozzle slider thoroughly. Next, remove oil stuck to the exterior
of the nozzle inner section and excessive oil with a clean wiping rag.
Note that nay oil should not be stuck to the nozzle diffuser and rubber section
(shaded section in the figure below).
Be sure to apply only New Deflex Oil No. 1 to the nozzle. If you apply any high
viscosity of oil such as grease to the nozzle, the nozzle slider cannot move back to the
original position easily.
Cotton swab
Part to which oil
should be applied
Clean wiping
Nozzle inner section
Diffuser
Cotton swab
Nozzle slider
Rubber section
Small tray
20 to 30 times
Solvent may be flamed. Be careful to handle it. Never use acetone.

Or the diffuser may be discolored. Be sure to wear a mask for organic
WARNING
gas before cleaning a device. Some ingredient of IPA is hazardous to
humans.

starting to work.
14 19
14.3.5 ATC bracket

1
2
16 3
17 4
18 5
19 6
20 7
21 8
22 9
23 10
24 11
25 12
26
13
27 14
28 15
29
30
ATC bracket ATC OFF sensor

Slide plate ATC ON sensor
Nozzle outer support ATC no. (1 to 30, A, B)
Air cylinder Nozzle
Speed controller
If chips or dirt remains on the ATC bracket , nozzle mounting may fail.
Clean the ATC bracket with gauze or similar material lightly damped with alcohol.

starting to work.
14 20
14.3.6 Feeder bank
Clean the surface of the feeder bank with dry cloth before mounting feeders such a
tape feeder there.
Clean the feeder bank with dry cloth so that the fixing plate B is free from
obstacles.
Using a vacuum cleaner, clean the feeder bank if there are chips or some foreign
matters remained on it.
6 2 3 5
7
1
4
Feeder bank Drive cylinder

Fixing plate Position label
Fixing plate B Bank mark
Lock shaft

starting to work.
14 21
14.3.7 Z slider shaft
Clean the inside of the Z slider shaft with a cotton swab moistened with alcohol from
the botton.
Cotton swab

starting to work.
14.3.8 CVS (Component Verification System) (Option)
If there is any smudges such as dust on the A-side of a contact when starting the unit,
clean if with cloth damped with alcohol. Such smudges on the A-side might interfere
with the inspection of component.
Figure of CVS viewed from upper side
A side
Contact Contact
14 22
14.3.9 Overall feeder exchange trolley (optional)
Clean any dust and/or foreign substance from the table before attaching a tape
feeder or any other feeder on the feeder bank.
Check to see if there is no foreign substance under the fixing plate B .

Check to see if there is no foreign substance such as a chip component around the
bank locating pins (on both sides).
If there is any foreign substance such as a chip component, remove it with a vacuum
cleaner.
Feeder bank
Fixing plate B
Bank locating pin
14 23
14.3.10 OCC (Polarizing filter)
Check to see if there is no dust and/or foreign substance on the polarizing filter of the
OCC.
If there is any, remove it with an air gun or like.
Polarizing filter

starting to work.
14 24
14.3.11 Trackball
Remove dust and/or foreign substance stuck to the inside of a trackball.
Turn the ring anti-clockwise (in the arrow

direction).
Ring
Ball
Remove the ring and ball.

Place the ball on soft material such as
soft cloth so that it cannot rotate.
Ring
Use soft cloth to clean the section

which is in contact with the ball as
45-degree axis shown in the left figure.
X detecting axis Clean the ball also (No moisture).
Ball holder
Y detecting axis
14 25
14.4 Lubrication
14.4.1 XY-shaft direct drive unit

(1) X-shaft direct-drive unit
X-shaft direct-drive unit rail (x 2)

X-shaft direct-drive unit (x 4)
Use a grease gun to insert grease from the grease nipple of the X-shaft
direct-drive unit.
(2) Y-shaft direct-drive unit
Y-shaft frame (x 2)
Y-shaft direct-drive unit rail (x 2)
Y-shaft direct-drive unit (x 4)

Use a grease gun to insert grease from the grease nipple of the Y-shaft
direct-drive unit.
Note: Never lubricate the bearing of the X- and Y-shaft driving belt or motor (with
machine oil or grease).

starting to work.
14 26
14.4.2 Transport screw shaft (Shaft)
Screw shaft (one for left and the other for right)
Apply grease to the entire surface of the part marked with *.
Screw shaft

starting to work.
14.4.3 Transport guide shaft
Guide shaft (one for left and the other for right)
Apply grease to the entire surface of guide shaft.
Guide shaft
Screw

starting to work.
14.4.4 PWB stopper part
Apply grease to the holes marked with *.

starting to work.
14 27
14.4.5 Ball screws and Linear way (Head part)
Apply a light coating of grease (C grease) to the ball screws and the linear way rails.
Apply a light coating of grease (C grease) to the spline shaft axis.
After applied the grease, move the Z axis by hand for the grease to be fit.
After fitting grease to the spline shaft axis sufficiently, remove extra grease with cloth
or similar matter so that it cannot be splattered.
Ball screws
Linear way
Spline shaft
Notes: Never apply any grease other than C grease to the parts above.
When C grease is mixed with another type of grease, it may be separated from
the screw, rails or shaft and run down.

starting to work.
14 28
14.4.6 Backup table
Apply grease to the entire surface of each shaft of there ball screws marked with *.

starting to work.
14.4.7 Movable board transport table ball screw and LM guide
Grease (C grease) Grease (C grease) Grease (C grease)
Note: Never apply any grease other than C grease to the parts above.

starting to work.
14 29
14.4.8 Overall feeder exchange trolley (optional)
Apply grease to the bank locating pin and guide shaft .
Bank locating pin

Guide shaft
14 30
14.5 Replacing the UPS Battery with a New One
14.5.1 Removing the UPS
To avoid a risk of serious injury caused by electric shock hazard, turn

off the main power switch of the house current. Be sure to turn off the
main breaker and main power switch of the main unit also.
WARNING
The main power switch of the house current is installed in the building
where the main unit is used. Note that it is not the main power switch
of the machine.
1. Figure 14.5.1.1 shows where the UPS is attached. Remove the cover FB so that
you can see the USP with your eyes.
2. As shown in Figure 14.5.1.2, disconnect the UPS communication connector and

the relay connector of the cable that extends from the UPS.
3. As shown in Figure 14.5.1.3, remove the screws from the terminal plate located
on the front of the UPS and the screw from the metal plate fixing the UPS onto
the main unit. Pull out the UPS from the main unit.
4. As shown in Figure 14.5.1.4, remove four screws to remove the metal plate that
fixes the UPS onto the main unit. Push down the power switch of the UPS to set
the UPS to OFF.
5. After replacing the battery, follow the Steps 1 to 4 above in the reverse order.
Before fixing the USP onto the main unit, make sure that the power switch of the
UPS is turned on.
14 31
FB cover
UPS attaching position
Figure 14.5.1.1
Disconnect the
Disconnect the relay connector.
communication
connector.
Disconnect the Disconnect the power

relay connector. plug from the AC
Figure 14.5.1.2
14 32
Control unit
Terminal plate
UPS
Main breaker
Remove screws.
Figure 14.5.1.3
Power switch
Remove screws.
Figure 14.5.1.4
14 33
14.5.2 Replacing Batteries
The following steps explain how to replace the batteries. Consider all warnings,
cautions, and notes before replacing batteries.
Batteries can present a risk of electrical shock or burn from high short
circuit current.
The following precautions should be observed :
WARNING
1) Remove watches, rings or other metal objects.
2) Use tools with insulated handles.
3) Do not lay tools or metal parts on tip of batteries.
1. Place the UPS on its side, and remove the screw that fixes the lid of the battery
located on the bottom of the UPS. Slide the lid to remove it (see Figure
14.5.2.1).
2. Hold the disconnect tabs to pull down the battery slowly.
3. Disconnect two lead lines connecting the battery to the UPS.
4. Connect the lead lines to a new battery: connect the red line to the (+) side
and the black line to the (-) side. Put a new battery into the case gently.
5. Slide the battery lid to fit it to the case, and fix it with the screws that were
removed at Step 3.
Black (-)
Red (+)
Figure 14.5.2.1
14 34
14.5.3 Recycling the Used Battery
Contact your recycling or hazardous waste center for information on proper disposal
of the used battery. We accept your battery for return at cost to you.
Do not dispose of battery or batteries in a fire. Batteries may

explode. Proper disposal of batteries is required. Refer to your local
WARNING codes for disposal requirements.
Do not open or mutilate the battery or batteries. Released electrolyte

is harmful to the skin and eyes. It may be toxic.
Do not discard the UPS or the UPS batteries in the trash. This
CAUTION
product contains sealed, local recycling or hazardous waste center.
14 35
14.6 Coplanarity Sensor (Optional)
14.6.1 Name of each part

Coplanarity check controller
Coplanarity check
controller
Coplanarity check
sensor cable
Monitor screen switch Coplanarity check sensor cable
Explanation of the monitor screen

switch
Side A: Main unit (standard) screen
Side B Side B: Coplanarity check screen
(for maintenance)
Side A
Figure 14.6.1 Explanation of the device
L Setting the monitor screen switch

When you turn on the system or operate it normally, set this switch to A.
The menu screen does not appear on the monitor.
14.6.2 Daily maintenance

Check to see if the filter unit (photo-transmitting window/photoreceptive window) gets
soiled. (Check that everyday.)
Clean the filter unit with dry cloth or gauze.

Photoreceptive Photo-transmitting
window window
Where
to
clean
Figure 14.6.2 Coplanarity unit
Carefully check to see if the filter unit is not soiled. When necessary,
CAUTION be sure to clean it. It may cause the system to malfunction.
Do not use any alcohol to clean the filter unit.
14 36
14.6.3 Parts list
Table 14.6.1 Parts list (for the coplanarity unit)
No. Part number Part name Remarks

1 E9675729000 Coplanarity check sensor cable
2 E9674729A00 Filter unit (for the photoreceptive side)
3 E9674729B00 Filter unit (for the photo-transmitting side)
14 37

201084175844580

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

201084175844580

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

201084175844580

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main components of the coplanarity sensor?

What are the main components of the coplanarity sensor?

What are the daily maintenance tasks for the coplanarity sensor?

What are the daily maintenance tasks for the coplanarity sensor?

High-speed flexible mounter

Thank you very much for purchasing a product of our company.

Specifications are subject to be changed without notice.

Parts of machinery the negligence or mishandling of which

Parts of machinery the negligence or mishandling of which

Parts of machinery the negligence or mishandling of which

2) Warning, prohibition and directive marks

High voltage!! Beware of hot parts.

Beware of movable parts. If any load is imposed or you

Basic Matters of Precaution

Safety Equipment, Alarm Label

To turn off power supply means to turn off

Situations in Which It Is Necessary to Turn Off Power Supply

Matters of Caution at Each of Its Use Stages

Ambient temperature during operation + 10C - +35C

5. To prevent accidents due to breakdown of electric/electronic parts, turn on power

[Front] Moving parts

"Take care not to be

1. To prevent accidents due to electric shock, do not open the

1. To prevent damage to human bodies, do not operate the

1.1 Highlights and Specifications

Laser align sensor

Any operation of controls and adjustments which is not described in

Rotate in (+) direction along

, offset angle d can also be known.

MELF Laser align

(Center of the component)

(0.25 mm above the top of the component)

(Center between the bottom surface

SOJ Laser align

(Center between the bottom surface

(Between the bottom surface of the

(Between the bottom surface of the

Laser measurement height (in laser centering method)

Figure 1.1.2.5 Definition of Laser Height

Default Laser height

Table 1.1.2.5 Component Types and Default Laser Heights

Aluminum Component height

Molding Component height

Same as that of the

Unidirectional Component height

Socket with Measurement

Power unit Emergency stop button

CPU board Color liquid-crystal display (LCD)

Placing head Rear side operation unit *1

Bad mark reader *1

Height Measurement System (HMS) *1 Laser/Vision recognition heads (FMLA)

Offset correction camera (R)

Function designed for a component whose height is 20 mm *1

PWB conveyor unit Placement station L Pin reference

Feeder bank driver *1

Feeder float detecting function Feeder table

Pneumatic piping system

Vision Centering System (VCS) Vision monitor

Verification function *1 Component recognition camera Standard camera

Feeder position indicator function 1 Optional camera 1 1